83G9260_IBM_PC_DOS_7.0_Users_Guide_Jan95 83G9260 IBM PC DOS 7.0 Users Guide Jan95
User Manual: 83G9260_IBM_PC_DOS_7.0_Users_Guide_Jan95
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 625
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
-- -- ------- - -.--_
---
User's Guide
1111 tc.II ..........
II IIIcIIMIIII II1II ......
- . . c...hIIIJ'.... ...
..
......... IIICIII" .....
.....................
........l1IIiID...
,
~
/
Note
------------------------------------------------------------~
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general
information under Appendix C, "Notices" on page 561.
First Edition (January 1995)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM
may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time.
It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines
and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or
information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products,
programming, or services in your country.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or
IBM marketing representative.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1981, 1995. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights - Use, duplication or
disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Foreword
PC DOS 7 is a new release in a long line of DOS releases from IBM. We have
added new functions, extended familiar utilities, and maintained the compatibility
you depend upon. Why? Because IBM wants to continue to provide the operating
systems that meet your needs.
Over time, some of you will move to a 32-bit operating system like OS/2. Many will
continue with PC DOS. Others will run both. Today, PC DOS 7 provides
comfortable reliability while adding features that help you get the most from your
PC. I hope you'll enjoy the new capabilities and enhancements in PC DOS 7.
Sheryl Winton
PC DOS Product Manager
Personal Systems Products
iii
iv
PC DOS User's Guide
Contributors
Author
Margaret Averett
Contributing Author
Dana Liburdi
Managing Editor
Larry Thorn
Publications Manager
M. B.' (Peg) Ryan
Information Development Planner
R. J. (Bob) Lotito
Production Coordinator
Eugene Ignatowski
Editor
Elizabeth Jean
National Language Support
Marion Bucko
Oystein Kleven
v
The PC DOS Team
Linda M. Boyer
Vernon C. Brooks
AI Cantu
Christopher Chapman
Fetchi Chen
Cono M. Cioffi
E. P. (Gene) Cook
Jeff Cope
Carla Bruner-Diaz
Bryan D. Dobbs
Mark R. Gehring
C. M (Matt) Hamilton
Susie E. Hunt
A. V. (Tony) Ingenoso
Nitin Jain
Doug D. Jones
Jane E. Jones
Jeff Kelley
Karl E. Lawall
Kay E. Lee
Sue Lichtenstein
Doug Love
R. F. (Bob) Maddaloni
Carline. Marcelin
Jim C. McDonald
Paige Menke
J. R. (Joe) Montero
R. A. (Tony) Muradaz
Eric D. Nill
Mark E. Nosewicz
Chris Ogozaly
Brett Oxen handler
Kamal C. Patel
Ben Rafanello
Robert A. Rapuano
Michael A. (Mike) Rothman
Michael E. Ryan
Doray Schillings
E. A. (Beth) Schreiber
Moshe Shmia
D. B. (Dave) Smith
Ryan Smith
Sandy C. Stewart
Sandra C. Sykes
Takahiro Tanaka
Sam Twining
Carter Wells
Sheryl M. Winton
Marie E. Wolfe
Laura E. Zalph
To the members of the PC DOS technical team and to the numerous others who
helped ensure the technical accuracy of the PC DOS documentation-a very
special Itthank you" for your support and continual dedication to quality.
vi .
PC DOS User's Guide
IBM Program License Agreement
IF YOU USE THIS PROGRAM, YOU AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR
THE PROGRAM INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE OR PRE·LOADED ON A SYSTEM.
The Program is licensed not sold. International Business Machines Corporation, or the applicable IBM
country organization, (IBM) grants you a license for the Program only in the country where you acquired
the Program. You obtain no rights other than those granted you under this license.
The term "Program" means the original and all whole or partial copies of it, including modified copies
or portions merged into other programs. IBM retains title to the Program. IBM owns, or has licensed
from the owner, copyrights in the Program.
You are responsible for the selection of the Program and for the installation of, use of, and results
obtained from, the Program.
The section, on the following pages, entitled "License Information" contains additional information on
the Program.
1. License
Under this license, you may:
1) use the Program on only one machine at anyone time, unless the License
Information specifies otherwise;
2) copy the Program for backup or in order to modify it;
3) modify the Program and/or merge it into another program as an essential utilization of the
Program in conjunction with your machine; and
4) transfer the possession of the Program to another party.
If you transfer the Program, you must transfer a copy of this license, the License Information, all
other documentation and at least one complete, unaltered copy of the Program to the other party.
You must, at the same time, either transfer all your other copies of the Program to the other party or
destroy them. Your license is then terminated. The other party agrees to these terms and
conditions by its first use of the Program.
You must reproduce the copyright notice(s) on each copy, or partial copy, of the Program.
You may not:
1) use, copy, modify, merge, or transfer copies of the Program except as
provided in this license;
2) reverse assemble or reverse compile the Program; or
3) sublicense, rent, lease, or assign the Program.
2. Limited Warranty
Some Programs have limited warranties. The warranty details and limitations are described in
their Statement of Limited Warranty. Some Programs are not warranted and IBM will specify that
they are provided "AS IS."
All Programs have a three-month limited warranty on their media.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (OR CONDITIONS),
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not
apply to you.
vii
3. Limitation of Remedies
IBM's entire liability under this license is the following.
IBM will provide any warranty described in IBM's Statement of Limited Warranty. IBM will
a) replace defective media, or b) make a warranted Program operate or replace the Program with a
functionally equivalent Program, as warranted. Otherwise, you may terminate your license, return all
your copies of the Program, and IBM will refund the amount you paid for the license.
For any claim (including fundamental breach), in any form, related in any way to this license, IBM's
liability will be for actual damages only and will be limited to the greater of:
1) the equivalent of U.S. $25,000 in your local currency; or
2) IBM's then generally available license fee for the Program.
This limitation will not apply to claims for bodily injury or damages to real or tangible personal
property for which IBM is legally liable.
IBM will not be liable for any lost profits, lost savings, or any incidental damages or other
economic consequential damages, even if IBM, or its authorized supplier, has.been advised of the
possibility of such damages. IBM will not be liable for any damages claimed by you based on any
third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to any developer of a Program supplied to IBM. IBM's and,
the developer's limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such developer is an intended
beneficiary of this Section.
Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions, so they may not apply to you.
4. General
You may terminate your license at any time. IBM may terminate your license if you fail to comply
with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event; you must destroy all your copies of the
Program.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from
this license.
Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the
action arose.
If you acquired your Program in the United States, this license is governed by the laws of the
State of New York. If you acquired the Program in Canada, this license is governed by the laws of
the Province of Ontario. Otherwise, this license is governed by the laws of the country in which you
acquired the Program.
viii
PC DOS User's Guide
License Information
International Business Machines Corporation
Armonk, New York 10504
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY
(MEDIA AND PROGRAM)
International Business Machines Corporation (IBM*) grants the following limited warranty for this IBM
Licensed Program (Program) if this copy of the Program is delivered by IBM, an IBM Authorized Dealer
for this Program, or any other IBM approved supplier for this Program to a user. (Such a user is referred
to herein as "original user.") A "user" shall mean a Customer who acquired possession of and is
licensed to use this copy of the Program for its own use or for use within its own business enterprise and
not for remarketing. Any unused portion of the Warranty Period may be conveyed to another user.
1. MEDIA
The Warranty Period for the media on which the Program is recorded is for three months from the
date of its delivery to the original user as evidenced by a receipt.
IBM warrants that this media will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal
use during the Warranty Period. If notified during the Warranty Period that the media contains such
defects, IBM will replace such media. If IBM is unable to deliver replacement media, you may
terminate your license and your money will be refunded upon return of all your copies of the
Program.
2. PROGRAM
The Warranty Period for this Program is for three months from the date of its delivery to the original
user as evidenced by a receipt.
IBM warrants that this Program, if unaltered, will conform to its Program Specifications during the
Warranty Period when such Program is properly used on a machine for which it was designed. If
notified during the Warranty Period that the Program contains defects such that it does not conform
to its Program Specifications, IBM will 1) attempt to make the Program operate as warranted a) if
prior to the Service Expiration Date, by providing a correction, or b) if after the Service Expiration
Date, by providing any existing corrections, or 2) replace the Program with a functionally equivalent
Program, as determined by IBM. In the event that IBM does not provide such a remedy, you may
terminate your license and your money will be refunded upon return of all your copies of the
Program.
IBM does not warrant that any other defects in the Program will be corrected or that the operation of
the Program will be uninterrupted.
This limited warranty will apply only if the Program is licensed and located in the United States or
Puerto Rico.
THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to
you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary
from state to state.
* IBM is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.
ix
• PC DOS 7 provides user commands to perform the following functions:
-
Manage information by creating, assigning attributes to, copying,
comparing, renaming, listing, printing, erasing, replacing, moving, backing
up, restoring, recovering files, and rewriting fragmented files contiguously.
- Manage directories by creating, removing, modifying, copying, and
displaying the structure of directories.
- Format, unformat, copy, and compare diskettes.
- Format, partition, and check status of a disk.
- Perform system tasks, including:
- Assign drives
- Change the system code page and keyboard layout
- Clear the screen
- Set the system time and date
- Create a PC DOS 7 batch file to perform special or repetitive tasks.
- Configure your system for multiple configurations.
• Memory Support:
- Memory optimization of available upper memory.
- Expanded Memory Support (EMS) and Extended Memory Support (XMS).
This support conforms to the Lotus**/Intel**/Microsoft** (LIM) 4.0 definition.
• Disk Cache
PC DOS 7 provides an improved hard-disk caching program.
• Hard-Disk Support:
PC DOS 7 allows greater than 32MB fixed disk partition support.
• Advanced Power Management (APM)
PC DOS 7 supports the latest standard of APM 1.1 and continues to
support systems with APM 1.0 bios.
• Virus Detection and Antivirus Support
- Full-screen utility
- Terminate-and-stay-resident
- Updated signature files to detect over 2100 viruses
• Full-Featured Backup Utility
-
Provides a full-screen utility
Backs up to diskette, tape, or network drive
** See Special Notices section of this book for trademark information.
x
PC DOS User's Guide
• REstructured eXtended eXecutor language (REXX)
PC DOS 7 provides this easy-to-use structured programming language that:
- Offers powerful functions
- Provides extended mathematical capabilities
- Works across multiple platforms (WARP, AIX, VM, and PC DOS)
• Text Editor
PC DOS 7 provides a full-screen text editor that allows the end user to
create, edit, save, browse, and print ASCII files.
• Full-Screen DOS Interface (PC DOS Shell)
-
Provides a limited application switching mechanism which suspends
execution of one application while executing another.
Enables the creation of a user-defined menu system for the execution
of applications.
- Provides a full-screen user interface to facilitate DOS file and directory
maintenance.
• Full-Screen Interactive Installation Program
- Installs all PC DOS 7 utilities and optional tools.
- Creates user configuration files.
Instal,ls to a new system or replaces an existing system.
• Scheduler Utility
- Allows execution of DOS programs at specific times.
- Provides a full-screen, easy-to-use interface.
• Data Compression Utility
- Automatic, transparent data compression that frees up storage space.
- A Stacker Anywhere program, allowing you to use compressed data on
a system without compression.
- A conversion function for DBLSPACE compressed files.
- DOS and Windows toolbox interfaces.
Automated uncompress to convert compressed data to its original form.
• Docking Support
PC DOS 7 provides the ability to dynamically load certain device drivers
and to execute specified commands when docking events occur.
• File Sychronization Utility
PC DOS 7 provides a file monitoring utility that synchronizes files whenever
files are moved from one computer to another.
xi
• PCMCIA Support
PC DOS 7 includes PCM 3.01 support for PCMCIA card services.
• Documentation Viewing Facility
PC DOS 7 provides a text-based, full-screen, online documentation and
help facility. This viewer can be used to read the following books
online: PC DOS 7 Command Reference, PC DOS 7 Error Messages, and
PC DOS 7 REXX for DOS.
• National Language Support
-
Code pages 865, 912, and 915
Keyboards 452 and 453 (German keyboard layout DIN 2137)
Deleted Files
The following files were deleted from this version of PC DOS 7:
4201.CPI
4208.CPI
COMP.COM
EDLlN.EXE
EPS.CPI
EXE2BIN.EXE
FASTOPEN.EXE
GRAPHICS.COM
GRAPHICS.PRO
PPDS.CPI
PRINTER.SYS
If you have a licensed copy of PC DOS 6.3, you are authorized to copy these
commands to any system with a licensed copy of PC DOS 7.
System Requirements
. PC DOS 7 will operate on all models of Personal System/2*, Personal System/1,
IBM Personal System/55*, IBM Personal Computer*, IBM Personal Computer XI,
Personal Computer XT-286, Personal Computer AI, Portable Personal Computer,
PC Convertible, and IBM compatibles with a minimum system memory of 512K.
The system should also have a 1.44MB or 2.88MB 3.5-inch, or a 1.2MB 5.25-inch
floppy diskette drive. The PC DOS 7 Upgrade requires a system with a prior
version oi PC DOS or MS-DOS" (3.3 or higher) installed on the haid disk.
Program Requirements
There are no program requirements.
Licensed Program Materials Availability
This licensed program is available in object code only.
* Trademarks of the IBM Corporation.
xii
PC DOS User's Guide
Contents
About This Book
xix
xix
xx
Other PC DOS Documentation
PC DOS 7 Coupon Booklet . . . .
What's New for PC DOS 7
xxi
Part 1. Using the DOS Operating System
Chapter 1. Installing
.............. .
What's New about Setup for PC DOS 7
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP Command and Its Options ..
Other Installation Options . . . . . . .
Optional Tools Selection . . . . . . . .
Installation Guidelines . . . . .
PC DOS Standard Installation
. .
\
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
19
19
Understanding Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding and Working with Directories ..
Viewing Directory Contents . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Groups of File Names in a Directory
Making Directories
. . . . .
Deleting Directories
. . . . .
Copying Directories
. . . . .
23
32
34
35
35
36
38
Chapter 3. Using the Online Book Viewer . .
41
41
Starting the PC DOS Viewer . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Initial PC DOS Viewer Screen .. .
Moving Around in the PC DOS Viewer
Exiting from the PC DOS Viewer ...
Getting Other Types of Online Help
Linking to More Topics . . . . . . . . .
Printing from the PC DOS Viewer
Copying Topic Information into a File
Chapter 4. Configuring Your System
43
44
45
45
49
51
51
...... .
Bypassing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Commands
Specifying Startup Commands in Your CONFIG.SYS File . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
3
3
5
8
9
10
12
14
53
54
56
xiii
Using Multiple Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Startup Commands in Your AUTOEXEC.BAT File
60
66
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
Types of Disks . . . . . . . .
Types of Diskette Drives
Considerations for Formatting Disks
Considerations for Labeling a Disk .
73
73
74
75
79
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
Understanding Hard-Disk Partitions
Using FDISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Your Hard Disk after Using FDISK
81
81
83
94
...
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
Understanding Batch Program Commands
Making a Small Batch Program . . . . . . .
Testing a Batch Program . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Messages with a Batch Program
Using the PAUSE Command . . . . . . . .
Including Remarks in a Batch Program
Running One Batch Program from Another .
Using Replaceable Parameters
Controlling Program Flow . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8. Redirecting Input and Output
Redirecting Command Input and Output
Passing Information through Filter Commands
Controlling the Screen Display by Using the MORE Command
Searching for Text by Using the FIND Command
Sorting Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combining Commands with Redirection Characters
109
109
111
111
112
112
113
Chapter 9. Using DOSKey and Editing Keys
Using DOS Key to Work with Commands
Using DOS Key to Work with Macros
........ .
Using DOS Editing. Keys
115
115
120
127
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
What's New about the E Editor for PC DOS 7
Choosing a Text Editor
....... .
Starting the E Editor . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Modifying a File . . . . . .
xiv
97
98
100
101
101
102
103
104
105
106
PC DOS User's Guide
..
131
131
132
133
137
Using Cursor Movement Keys to Move Around in the Text File
Performing Basic Editing Tasks
",','"
Selecting Text , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
Using Key Combinations to Manipulate Text
Using E Editor Commands , , " ' , ' , ' "
Customizing the E Editor , " , " , " , "
Comparing a Text Editor and a Word Processing Program
· ......
•
I
I
• • • • • •
• • • • •
......
141
143
148
151
156
169
172
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers " ' "
Establishing the Connection between Computers
Understanding What the InterLnk Program Does
Including INTERLNK in Your CONFIG,SYS File
Running the InterLnk Program
Redirecting Drives " ' , , " ' , ' , " ' , '
Excluding Drives from Redirection , , " ' , '
Breaking the Connection between Computers
Remote Copying of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE Files
Reviewing Cable Specifications
,.,"
175
176
177
180
181
182
183
183
183
184
Chapter 12. Using File Update " , ' ,
Installing File Update at the Base Location ,
,,""
Using File Update Menu Choices
Transferring Updated Files to the Remote Location
Troubleshooting , " ' , ' , " , " , " , ' "
189
190
194
196
203
· .......
· .......
,
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
Determining Your System's Memory Type
Understanding How RAM Boost Works
Using Advanced Features , " , " , " , '
Using RAM Boost Tips and Techniques
205
205
206
214
218
Chapter 14. Speeding Up Your System
Improving the Efficiency of Your Hard Disk
Using DOS Defragmenter , " ' , ' , "
Using the BUFFERS Command
"'"
Using SMARTDrive ,
, , , , ,
Using RAMDrive " , " , ' /, , , , , , ,
231
231
233
235
236
238
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
Installing Central Point Undelete for Windows
, , , , , , ,
Starting Undelete " ' "
Deleted File Condition "
, , , , , ,
Delete Protection Methods
241
241
243
245
247
Contents
XV
Getting More File Information.
. ......... .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting the File List . . . . . . .
Selecting Files
.........
. . . . . . . . . . .
Undeleting Files on a Network . . . . . . . . . .
Undeleting Directories and Their Files' . . . . . .
Scanning the Disk for Lost Files and Deleted Data
Showing Existing Files ....
Advanced Undelete Methods . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purging Deleted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How the Delete Protection Method Affects File Recovery
Central Point Data Monitor . '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
248
249
251
252
258
Chapter 16. Using Central Point Scheduler .
Scheduling a Program . . . . . . . . .
Editing Existing Scheduled Events
Deleting Scheduled Events
Removing Scheduler from Memory
275
275
278
279
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
PC DOS Installation
Memory Problems
DOS Command Problems
PC DOS Shell . . . . .
AntiVirus . . . . . . . .
Stacker Compression
Central Point Backup
File Update Utility . . .
Other Common Problems ...
281
281
287
292
295
297
299
312
313
313
Part 2. Using the DOS Optional Tools
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Sheil . . . . . . . .
Installing the PC DOS Shell after Installing PC DOS
Starting the PC DOS Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information About Your Files and Programs
Introducing PC DOS Shell Basics
..... .
Using PC DOS Shell Commands
Getting Help . . . . . . .
Starting a Program .... .
Using the Task Swapper
Leaving the PC DOS Shell
Customizing the PC DOS Shell
Organizing Programs
.....
xvi
PC DOS User's Guide
260
261
266
267
270
280
317
3i9
319
320
323
324
333
334
338
341
342
343
348
Working with Properties
353
......... .
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
Installing IBM AntiVirus/DOS after Installing PC DOS .
Starting IBM AntiVirus/DOS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting Your Computer Data against Viruses
Checking for Viruses . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing AntiVirus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Up When a Virus Is Detected . . . . .
Running the AntiVirus Stand-Alone Program ..
Systems that Use Resident Data Compression
Systems that Use Security Software
Troubleshooting IBM AntiVirus/DOS . . . .
363
363
365
367
369
372
376
379
381
382
382
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
Installing Central Point Backup after Installing PC DOS
Configuring Central Point Backup . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Main Central Point Backup Window .
Changing the User Level
Making a Backup . . . . . .
Selecting Files
...... .
Selecting Drives to Back Up
Viewing Files . . . . . . .
Working with Setup Files
Comparing Data
.... .
Restoring Data . . . . . .
Performing Network Backups
Configuring Tape Drives .. .
Backup Strategies .... .
Using the CPBDIR Program
383
383
384
388
389
391
394
400
402
403
407
409
411
415
421
425
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
Installing Stacker after Installing PC DOS
Before Using Stacker
........... .
What's New about PC DOS's Stacker Compression
Settill9 Up Stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Your Drives from DOS . . . . . .
Using the Stacker Tools (DOS and Windows)
Compressing Additional Drives . . . . . . . .
Compressing Diskettes (or Other Removables)
Working with Advanced Stacker
Using Stacker Commands . . . . . . .
Monitoring Your Drives from Windows
427
427
428
429
430
438
440
440
442
455
467
469
Contents
xvii
Troubleshooting Stacker ...
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
Installing PenDOS afterlnstalling PC DOS
Starting PenDOS . . . . .
Using the Pen . . . . . . .
Using the Mouse as a Pen
Using the PenDOS Menu
Entering Characters
Editing Characters
Working with Applications
Aligning the Tablet .
, Recognition Tips
Character Variations
xviii
479
481
481
483
484
484
485
486
490
493
497
498
499
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
Installing Phoenix PCMCIA Support after Installing PC DOS
Starting PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up PCMCIA (PCMDINST) . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Your PCMCIA System (PCMSETUP)
Configuring PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PC Cards after the Original Installation
501
502
503
505
505
512
517
524
Appendix A. More About Installing . . . . . . . .
Choosing the Correct Installation Procedure
Performing the LAN Server Administrator Installation of PC DOS
........ .
Installing PC DOS from a CD-ROM Drive
Rerunning Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling and Restoring Your Previous Version of DOS
Viewing and Editing the System Files during Install
Viewing the README.TXT File ....... .
Working with XDF-Formatted Diskettes
Working with Setup Bundle Files ...
Using the Emergency Startup Diskette
Troubleshooting PC DOS Setup ...
533
533
540
544
544
547
548
550
550
554
555
556
Appendix B. Accessibility for Individuals with Disabilities
557
Appendix C. Notices . . . . .
Trademarks and Service Marks
561
561
Index . . . . . . . .
565
PC DOS User's Guide
About This Book
This book is written for novice users or users who are already familiar with
PC DOS and who have experience using computers.
This book is organized into two parts. Part 1 contains instructions for use with the
fundamental PC DOS features. Part 2 contains information on the Optional Tools
available with PC DOS.
If PC DOS is not yet installed on your computer system, you will need to run the
Setup program. For information about how to set up PC DOS, see Chapter 1,
"Installing" on page 3.
Other PC DOS Documentation
The PC DOS library includes the following documentation:
• .PC DOS 7 Command Reference and Error Messages
Part 1 of this book contains the commands, listed in alphabetical order, that can
be typed from the DOS command prompt. It also includes information on DOS
device drivers, CONFIG.SYS commands, menu configuration commands, REXX
commands for DOS, and .INI file information. Part 2 includes error messages
in a cause-and-action format.
• Online books are provided with PC DOS containing the same information as is
available in the PC DOS 7 Command Reference and Error Messages
hardcopy manual. The three online books provided with PC DOS include:
- PC DOS 7 Command Reference
- PC DOS 7 Error Messages
- PC DOS 7 REXX Reference
• PC DOS 7 Keyboards and Code Pages
This book, available for optional purchase, contains examples of keyboard
layouts and code page tables that can be used with PC DOS~
• PC DOS 7 Technical Update
This book, available for optional purchase, is written for programmers who'
develop applications for DOS.
Included with the hardcopy version of this book is a diskette, containing the
online version, which is viewable using the PC DOS Viewer.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
xix
• PC DOS 7 REXX User's Guide and Reference
This book, available for optional purchase, describes' how to write programs
with REXX and is for both beginners and experienced programmers.
PC DOS 7 Coupon Booklet
This booklet contains coupons provided by major hardware and software computer
companies. These coupons offer discounts or information about their products.
xx
PC DOS User's Guide
What's New for PC DOS 7
PC DOS 7 includes the following new features as well as enhancements to
features in prior versions of PC DOS:
• The PC DOS Setup program includes enhancements that allow you to:
- Use a mouse device during installation.
-
Use the DOSKey program immediately after installing DOS, because the.
DOSKEY command-line statement is now automatically added to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
- View or edit the changes Setup made to your CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files prior to system restart. For example, if you use
another command retrieval program than DOSKEY, you can edit the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file and delete this command-line statement before the
Setup changes become effective.
- Understand what changes were made to these system files by reviewing
comment lines added by Setup. Comment lines describe what was added
in these files or what was replaced, updated, or deleted if upgrading your
version of DOS.
See the installation information for
a complete list of Setup enhancements.
• RAM Boost more effectively handles multiple configurations now. The most
common questions asked about RAM Boost and RAM Boost Setup are now
included in a tips and techniques section.
• The E Editor has the following enhancements for PC DOS 7: menu selection,
mouse awareness, expanded sort capabilities, deleted record recovery, ability
to change E Editor default settings for color, tab and margin settings, window
mode, and new browse mode for the online F1 help.
a
• A new program, File Update, compares files on two different computers to help
keep files sychronized (for example, when you work on one computer at home
and one at work).
• A new documentation viewer, PC DOS Viewer, is used to read or search online
books for PC DOS information. Three online books are included with
PC DOS: a Command Reference, a REXX Reference, and an Error
Messages book, which includes the more common error messages.
This viewer also allows quick access to help for DOS commands, DOS device
drivers, and DOS .INI files information. In addition you can get quick help for
REXX commands or DOS error message~.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
xxi
• The enhanced Advanced Power Management driver (POWER.EXE) has added
power management events.
.• PC DOS now provides support for a docking event. Docking is the process of
connecting a mobile computer to a docking station and subsequently accessing
the additional docking station system resources (for example, CD-ROM or
DASD). Your docking station and mobile computer must be plug-and-play
enabled to perform the docking and undocking events.
• The new PC DOS command, DYNALOAD, can be used to change the current
system device configuration without requiring you to modify the CONFIG.SYS
file and restart the system, such as for docking support.
• The amount of conventional memory required by PC DOS has been reduced,
allowing more memory for your applications.
• The QCONFIG command now identifies and displays additional machines,
adapters, and planars.
• The BACKUP command (not included in PC DOS versions 6.1 or 6.3) is
provided as a command with PC DOS 7 ..
New, Changed, or ~emoved PC DOS Commands and Device Drivers
The following commands and device drivers are new for PC DOS 7:
ACALC
BROWSE
CHECK
CNFIGNAM.EXE
CONFIG
CRC
CREATE
DCONVERT
DDPOPUP
DOSDATA
DOS DOCK
DPMS.EXE
DYNALOAD
FILEUP
HCONVERT
PASSWD·
PCM
PCMDINST
PCMFDISK
PCMRMAN
PCMSETUP
PCMWIN
REMOVDRV
REPORT
RESIZE
REXX
SCREATE.SYS
SDEFRAG
SDIR
SETUP (Stacker)
SGROUP
SSETUP
STAC
STACHIGH.SYS
STACKER
STACWIN
SYSINFO
TUNER
UNCOMP
UNPACK2
VIEW
XDF
XDFCOPY
The following commands and device drivers are enhanced for PC DOS 7:
ANSI.SYS
BUFFERS
DEFRAG
DISKCOPY
DISPLAY.SYS
DOSKEY
E (E Editor)
EMM386.EXE
FIND
HELP
HIMEM.SYS
INTERLNK
MSCDEX
POWER
QCONFIG
RAM BOOST
RAMBOOST.EXE
RAMDRIVE.SYS
RAMSETUP
SETUP
SMARTDRV.EXE
. For further information about new or enhanced DOS commands and device drivers,
type hel p followed by the name of the command or device driver.
xxii
PC DOS User's Guide
You must add the extension of the device driver file. For example, you would type
hel p ansi. sys to get online help about the ANSI.SYS device driver.
The following commands and device drivers are no longer provided with
PC DOS 7:
• SuperStor/OS compression commands.
DBLSPACE.SYS
MOUNT
RTOOL
SSTOR
SSUNCOMP
SSUTIL
UDEOFF
UDEON
UNMOUNT
• PCMCIA Support commands replaced because of the new DOS and Windows
full-screen installation interfaces.
PCMFDD.EXE
PCMINFO.EXE
PCMMTD.EXE
WPCMINFO.CPL
If you have a previous version of DOS installed and are upgrading your system,
these commands will not be removed during PC DOS installation.
• Infrequently used files or commands that are not being provided as part of
PC OOS~.
4201.CPI
4208.CPI
COMP.COM
EDLlN.EXE
EPS.CPI
EXE2BIN.EXE
FASTOPEN.EXE
GRAPHICS.COM
GRAPHICS.PRO
PPDS.CPI
PRINTER.SYS
-
If you have a previous version of DOS installed and are upgrading your
system, these commands will not be removed during PC DOS installation.
-
If you still want to use these commands and have no diskettes from
previous versions of DOS, these commands will be available through
electronic delivery, such as bulletin board services.
-
If you have a licensed copy of PC DOS 6.3, you are authorized to copy
these files that are not provided to any system with a licensed copy of
PC DOS 7.
-
If you use these commands with PC DOS 7, first you must use the
SETVERcommand to change the version.
What's New for PC DOS 7
xxiii
• Commands no longer provided by PC DOS.
EXPAND
MEUTOINI
RECOVER
If you have a previous version of DOS installed and are upgrading your system,
these commands will not be removed during PC DOS installation.
New, Changed, or Removed Optional Tools
,
The new features of, and enhancements to, the optional tools provided with
PC DOS include:
• REXX Language Support has been added as the PC DOS programming
language tool of choice. REXX for DOS includes utilities and REXX commands
that have been designed to work specifically with PC DOS.
• Stacker Compression is now the optional tool that provides data compression
for your system. If you are upgrading from PC DOS 6.1 or 6.3, SuperStor/DS
will not be removed from your system during installation.
Stacker Compression allows you to: .
-
Convert any existing SuperStor/DS, DoubleSpace, or DriveSpace
compression during Stacker Setup.
- Convert most stand-alone versions of Stacker Compression you might
already have installed.
-
Make menu selections using either the Stacker DOS Toolbox or the Stacker
Windows Toolbox.
-
Use data on compressed diskettes even on a computer that does not have
Stacker installed.
-
Guard your data because, every time you start up your system, Stacker
runs AutoProtect to make sure vour data is in aood condition.
.
J
~
• PCMCIA Support now provides easier Setup procedures through new DOS and
Windows full-screen interfaces included with PC DOS 7. The PCM.INI file is
updated for you as you use the PCMCIA installation program to make
selections for the type of PCMCIA support you want.
• Antivirus protection provided with PC DOS (AntiVirus or IaM AntiVirus for
Windows), has been updated to recognize and fix more viruses.
xxiv
PC DOS User's Guide
If you are using IBM AntiVirus Services, a full-service, antivirus protection
offering provided separately by IBM or if you have previously purchased the
IBM AntiVirus/DOS product separately, you do not need to install the IBM
AntiVirus/DOS optional tool provided with PC DOS. For more information
about IBM AntiVirus Services, refer to the coupon provided in the PC DOS 7
coupon booklet.
• IBM DOS Shell is now named the PC DOS Shell.
New, Changed, or Removed .INI Files
The following .INI files have been added, changed, or are no longer required for
PC DOS 7:
New
Changed
Removed
E.INI
PCM.INI
RAMSETUP.INI
STACKER.INI
RAMBOOST.INI
ADDSTOR.INI
DBLSPACE.INI
New, Changed, or Removed Keyboard Layouts and Code Pages
The following keyboards and code pages have been added or changed for
PC DOS 7:
452
453
865
912
915
keyboard
keyboard (provides the DIN 2137 German keyboard layout)
code page
code page
code page
The United Kingdom keyboard 168 has been removed.
Type help keyb to see a table that summarizes all the keyboard-layout and country
code-page information.
What's New for PC DOS 7
XXV
xxvi
PC DOS User's Guide
Part 1. Using the DOS Operating System
Chapter 1. Installing
............ .
. 3
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
19
Chapter 3. Using the Online Book Viewer
41
Chapter 4. Configuring Your System ...
53
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
73
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
81
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
97
Chapter 8. Redirecting Input and Output
109
Chapter 9. USing DOSKey and Editing Keys
115
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
131
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
175
Chapter 12. Using File Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
205
Chapter 14. Speeding Up Your System
· ........
•
••
I
• • • • •
231
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
· ........
241
Chapter 16. Using Central Point Scheduler
· ........
275
· ........
281
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
.........
1
2
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 1. Installing
This chapter provides what you need to know to perform a standard installation of
PC DOS 7 (PC DOS) on your computer system. A standard installation means
you are:
• Installing PC DOS on your existing hard disk over another version of DOS
(such as MS-DOS** or earlier versions of PC DOS).
• Installing PC DOS on a newly formatted and partitioned hard disk (also see
page 83 for partitioning information).
• Installing PC DOS on a new computer system that does not have any type of
operating system installed.
Special installation procedures might be required because of the software or
hardware you are using with your computer system. These procedures can be
found in the appendix 'of this guide. Or, you can review the installation guidelines
(Table 2 on page 13). This table helps you choose the installation information that
pertains to your system. Read the specific information that applies to your system
before beginning the install process to ensure a successful installation.
What's New about Setup for PC DOS 7
The PC DOS Setup program (Setup) includes unique features not found in previous
versions of DOS. Review this abbreviated description of enhancements before
beginning the installation. Complete information regarding these enhancements is
described elsewhere in this chapter or in the installation information in the appendix.
• Diskettes used for PC DOS installation (other than the Setup diskette) have
been specially formatted using a format process known as eXtended Density
Format** (XDF**). XDF extends the capacity of the diskettes.
This special format does not affect running Setup. The Setup program is
specifically designed to use XDF-formatted diskettes.
• The Setup Diskette runs the Setup program file (SETUP) and also serves as an
emergency startup diskette to start your computer system. This diskette is not
XDF-formatted; its format is a standard DOS format.
• There is a new command, the XDFCOPY command. The purpose of this new
command is to allow you to make backup, copies of all your PC DOS
**
**
MS-DOS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
XDF and eXtended Density Format are trademarks of Ametron, Inc.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
3
XDF-formatted installation diskettes. If you need to copy your Setup Diskette or
any standard-formatted diskette, continue to use the DISKCOPY command as
you always have.
• PC DOS Setup files are now packed together in what is known as a bundle file.
If you need a copy of a file from the PC DOS installation diskettes, the
recommended method is to rerun Setup because Setup unpacks and copies
files in one step. The EXPAND command is no longer needed or supported.
• Because XDF-formatted diskettes are different than standard DOS-formatted
diskettes, some DOS commands are affected by this format:
-
Certain DOS commands only work with XDF-formatted diskettes (XDF and
XDFCOPY).
-
Some DOS commands can be used on the XDF-formatted diskettes but
only under specific circumstances (DIR and FORMAT).
-
Certain DOS commands cannot be used with XDF-formatted diskettes
(DISKCOPY and DISKCOMP).
Refer to "Working with XDF-Formatted Diskettes" on page 550 or the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference for specifics about using these commands
with XDF-formatted diskettes.
• If you already have a mouse device attached and loaded, PC DOS Setup will
provide mouse support during installation for making selections.
• Comment lines are added to your system files (AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS) to identify the changes PC DOS Setup made. Set~p identifies
the lines in the files that were added, deleted, replaced, and updated. If
deleting, replacing, or updating a line, it includes the original statement on the
comment line for reference.
I
• New switches have been added to the SETUP command:
- The
Ie switch allows you, after installation has completed, to remove the
- The Iq switch provides the easiest method for making keyboard layout and
country code changes.
• Setup renumbers the backup versions for each of the two system files
(AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS) wheneveryou run or rerun SETUP. Both
files are renur;nbered to the identical file extension number, but the highest
number might not be the latest backup version.
4
PC DOS User's Guide
Before You Begin
Before installing, take a few minutes to review the questions that follow before you
actually begin the installation.
•
•
•
•
•
Do you have enough conventional memory to install DOS?
Do you have enough free space to install DOS?
Do you have the correct required hardware?
Which installation procedure should you use?
Should you be using a SETUP command parameter to install?
To find out the answers to these questions, you should read the information in the
following sections before proceeding to "PC DOS Standard Installation" on
page 14.
Hardware and Software Prerequisites
PC DOS operates on all IBM or IBM-compatible computers with at least 512K of
conventional memory. As a minimum, you must have a computer that has a
1.44MB-capacity, 3.5-inch diskette drive or a 1.2MB-capacity, 5.25-inch diskette
drive specified as .drive A. Your hard drive should have a minimum of 6.0MB of
free space to install only the DOS files and Central Point Backup** for DOS.
18.5MB of free space is needed if you want to install PC DOS plus all the optional
tools.
If upgrading from a previous version of DOS, keep the following things in mind:
• You can upgrade only DOS Version 3.3 or higher.
• You can upgrade only a FAT-formatted hard disk.
• You might want to back up and save your previous version of DOS (see
"Uninstalling and Restoring Your Previous Version of DOS" on page 547).
Mouse Support during Setup
PC DOS allows you the option of using a mouse during installation if you have a
mouse program loaded.
Click mouse button 1 (normally the left mouse button) once to make an option
selection, choose a function key, or toggle choices from NO to YES in the optional
tools list.
Note: The only time mouse support would not be available during Setup is if you
need to boot the system using the Setup Diskette (also known as the
emergency startup diskette) from the PC DOS installation diskettes.
** Central Point and Central Point Backup are trademarks of Central Point Software, Inc.
Chapter 1. Installing
5
If all the selections you can make are not visible at one time in a window, you will
see the word "More" and an arrow in brackets (for example, [More t]) at the top or
bottom of the window to indicate there is additional information that cannot be seen
in the window. Click on the arrow to see more choices.
Changes Made by Setup to the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
Files
Setup modifies your AUTOEXEC.BAT file and your CONFIG.SYS file. Optionally,
you can make additional changes to the system files yourself during installation.
What modifications Setup makes to your system files depend on whether or not you
already have a version of DOS or PC DOS installed on your system.
If you have a previous version (rerunning Setup or upgrading) of DOS:
The following are the changes that PC DOS Setup makes to these files.
• Backing up your current system files as AUTOEXEC.nnn or as CONFIG.nnn,
where nnn is the next highest incremental number between 000 and 999. Even
if only one of the system files is changed, both the AUTOEXEQ.BAT and the
CONFIG.SYS files are given the same incremental number so they can be
easily identified as corresponding pairs.
For example, if you have both a CONFIG.003 file and a CONFIG.005, file (and
because CONFIG.005 is currently the highest incremental number), the next file
extension number would be CONFIG.006 instead of CONFIG.004.
• Verifying that all the required lines are included in the system files and, if not,
adding them.
For example, if you selected an optional tool requiring a command-line
statement, the appropriate statement will be added.
• Updating DOS programs with new programs that perform the same function
(see "What's New for PC DOS 7" on page xxi).
• Removing obsolete DOS programs, if necessary.
• Preserving existing DEVICE and INSTALL command-line statements in the
CONFIG.SYS file, even if you have multiple configurations for system startup.
• Detecting if Microsoft** Windows** is installed, and making appropriate changes
to the Windows .INI files, such as SYSTEM.INI, PROGMAN.INI, and WIN.INI
files. Also, saving a backup version of these files with a file name extension of
.BAK.
**
6
Windows and Microsoft are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
PC DOS User's Guide
• Adding one of the following four types of comment lines for each command-line
statement changed. The type of comment line added depends on how Setup
modified the comment-line statement:
REM
REM
REM
REM
=====
=====
=====
=====
PC
PC
PC
PC
DOS
DOS
DOS
DOS
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
-
Add
Delete
original_statement
Replace ===== original_statement
Update ===== original_statement
When Setup updates, deletes, or replaces a command-line statement, the
original statement is placed on the comment line for reference. Edit these files
if you want to return the command-line statement to how it was originally.
To view or edit changes made to your system files, answer YES when queried
, during Setup. Refer to "Viewing and Editing the System Files during Install" on
page 548.
After completing Setup, you can remove all the comments added by Setup at
the same time. Any command-line statements where you added the REM
statement will not be removed.
To remove the PC DOS 7.0 REM comments (after the installation has
completed), insert the Setup Diskette into drive A and type the following at the
DOS command prompt:
a:setup Ic
If you do not have a previous version of DOS:
Setup will create system files if they do not already exist.
A minimum CONFIG.SYS configuration is created that includes:
•
•
•
•
Adding
Adding
Adding
Adding
a
a
a
a
HIMEM.SYS statement
FILES statement with at least 30 files.
BUFFERS statement with at least 10 buffers.
SETVER statement.
A minimum AUTOEXEC.BAT file configuration is created that includes:
• Creating a path statement for the DOS directory.
• Adding the DOSKey program, which allows you to view, edit and carry out DOS
commands you used previously.
Chapter 1. Installing
7
SETUP Command and Its Options
The SETUP command is used when you are installing the latest version of
PC DOS. Insert the Setup Diskette into your drive. Then, to see the syntax and a
brief explanation of this command online, type a: setup /? (if drive A is your
diskette drive) at the DOS command prompt.
After installing PC DOS,' if you still need further details about the SETUP command,
type he~ p setup at the DOS command prompt.
Command Syntax
The following syntax shows the options that can be used with the SETUP
command:
drive: setup[!a][!b][!e][!e][/p][/q][!t:filepath][/u][/w]
or
drive: setup [I?]
Note: Setup does not copy the SETUP progra.m file to your hard drive. To use
this command or any of the SETUP command parameters, you must first
. insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into the
diskette drive you install from.
Command Parameters
The following list provides a brief explanation of how each switch can be used with
the SETUP command.
drive:
Specifies the drive where you insert the Setup Diskette that contains
the SETUP program. If you change to the diskette drive, this
parameter is not needed.
la
Allows you to specify which type of LAN Server Administrator directory
files and tools. See "Performing the LAN Server Administrator
Installation of PC DOS" on page 540 for detailed information.
8
Ib
Specifies to use black and white instead of color screen display.
Ie
Removes comment lines from your'AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS system files placed there by Setup. This switch is used
after installation has been completed.
PC DOS User's Guide
/e
Installs only the files needed for the PC DOS optional tools you
select. DOS files are not recopied when you use this switch.
Modifications are made to your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
files, based on the tools you select.
/p
Installs PC DOS on a disk that might be incompatible with DOS.
/q
Allows you to change your keyboard and country selections without a
complete re-installation of PC DOS. Your AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files are modified using this switch.
/t:filepath
Specifies the target path to copy DOS files to.
/U for Setup
Use to uninstall the current version of DOS. You must have backed
up your previous version to uninstall.
/w
Allows Windows tools to be installed even though a valid Windows
directory was not found.
/?
Displays the abbreviated online help. Insert the Setup Diskette into
your diskette drive and type a: setup /? (if, for example, your diskette
is inserted into drive A).
You can use more than one switch at one time. For example, you could type
a: setup / a /b to use a black and white display for a LAN administrator installation.
However, if you use the /t switch combined with SETUP fA (for example, if you
typed setup /a /t:c:\pcdos7), Setup will default to creating an administrator
directory.
Other Installation Options
The PC DOS Setup program provides your system with the information it needs to
operate effectively. During the installation, PC DOS will prompt you to verify and
change information and then acts on your choices; you might be prompted to make
certain decisions, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do you want to change the current time and date?
Do you want to partition and format your hard disk?
What keyboard and country code page do you want to use?
Do you want ISO fonts?
Which optional tools do you want installed?
Where do you want to install DOS to?
Do you want to back up your previous version of DOS?
Chapter 1. Installing
9
• Where are your current DOS files located now (applies only when you are
upgrading your system)?
• Do you need to edit or view the changes made to your system files by Setup or
make your own additional changes to the system files (CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT)?
If you do not know the answers, just accept the choices that PC DOS installation
makes for you (called defaults)-except for optional tools.
Most of the optional tools are defaulted to NO, which means the tools will not be
installed; be sure to select the optional tools you want so the program files get
copied. To see all the tools, scroll to the top of the optional tools window.
Note: The selection of the PC DOS Central Point Backup for DOS optional tool
has already been defaulted to YES.
You can always rerun Setup later to add any optional tools you did not want to
install initially using the Ie switch (for example, typing a: setup Ie if installing from
drive A).
Optional Tools Selection
PC DOS includes the optional tools listed in Table 1 on page 11. During
installation, you are prompted to choose which ones you want on your system.
After you select the tools you want, Setup copies the required program files for the
selected tools to your DOS directory.
Certain optional tools must run their own installation program before they can be
used (for example; Stacker** Compression and PCMCIA** Support) because they
require certain user-specified information, which is obtained during program
installation. Before running the optional tool installation program, you should review
the installation information about each tool.
If you are upgrading your current version of DOS to PC DOS 7 and currently have
Windows installed on your computer, you will see additional optional tools just for
Windows.
If you do not currently have Windows installed, the Windows tools will not be
included in the list of optional tools. If you want to add the optional tools for
**
**
Stacker is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association.
10
PC DOS User's Guide
Windows at a later time, install Windows first and then rerun Setup using the Ie
switch (see "Installing Additional DOS and Windows Optional Tools" on page 545).
Note: Installing Windows first ensures that the Windows .INI files are updated
properly.
Table 1 (Page 1 of 2). Optional Tools for DOS and Windows
Optional Tool:
What It Does:
Refer to:
PenDOS**
PenDOS allows the use of pen-based
applications and allows you to use the
mouse as the pen for applications (for
software and hardware prerequisites, see
"Installing PenDOS" on page 539).
Page 481
PC DOS Shell
Uses color and graphics to provide a
visual way of working with DOS.
Information is set up in different areas on
your screen, making it easy to find.
Page 319
Phoenix** PCMCIA
Support
Phoenix Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association (PCMCIA)
support provides support for PCMCIA
devices if your computer is equipped with
PCMCIA sockets. A credit card-sized
device is inserted into these sockets
extending the capability of the computer.
Page 501
Central Point
Undelete for
Windows
Central Point's Undelete for Windows is a
support utility for Windows if it is installed
on your computer.
Page 241
IBM AntiVirus/DOS
for Windows
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows provides
support for Windows when using this tool
to protect your computer from viruses.
See page 367
IBM AntiVirus/DOS
IBM AntiVirus/DOS checks for computer
viruses on either your hard drives or
diskettes to prevent loss of data.
Page 363
REXX Language
Support
REXX is a simple yet powerful
programming language that can be used
by both beginners and experienced users
to write programs.
The online
PC DOS 7
Command
Reference
** PenDOS is a trademark of the Communication Intelligence Corporation.
** Phoenix is a trademark of Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
Chapter 1. Installing
11
Table 1 (Page 2 of 2). Optional Tools for DOS and Windows
Optional Tool:
What It Does:
Refer to:
Stacker
Compression
Provides data compression utilities for
effectively and safely increasing the
amount of data you can store on your
hard drives and diskettes.
Page 427
Central Point
Backup for
Windows
Central Point Backup for Windows
provides support for Windows when using
this full-screen program to backup the
information on your computer.
See page 385
Central Point
Backup for DOS
Full-screen program for backing up the
information on your computer. Installed
as a default. If you do not want to install
or use Central Point Backup, be sure to
select NO on the optional tools screen.
. Page 383
Installation Guidelines
Before beginning the install:
• Check the installation guidelines that apply to your·system. See the Installation
Guidelines table, Table 2 on page 13.
• Make sure that your system has 512K of available memory. This is the
minimum amount of memory needed for PC DOS.
For additional information about the hard disk-space requirements, see
"Hardware and Software Prerequisites" on page 5.
• Read the introductory ·information earlier in this chapter, if you have not already
.done so.
• Be aware that this install is designed to replace all the existing DOS files
currently in the directory you install to. A file will be replaced if it has the same
file name as that being installed and if it already exists in the directory you
install to.
12
PC DOS User's Guide
The following table helps you choose the correct procedure for the type of
installation you want to do:
Table 2. Installation Guideline Choices
See page ...
Installation Guidelines
If you are installing PC DOS for the first time and you have. no other
systems on your computer
If you are installing PC DOS on a new hard disk, a newly formatted hard
disk, or a partitioned hard disk
*
14
14 and 83
If you are upgrading PC DOS on your hard disk
14
If you are installing PC DOS and you have Windows on your computer
14
If you are installing PC DOS files on a drive other than drive C
533
If you are installing PC DOS and you have OS/2* installed
534
If you want to use OS/2 Dual Boot (after installation)
535
If you are installing PC DOS on a PS/1 *
536
If you are installing PC DOS on a compressed drive
537
If you want to review prerequisites for PenDOS before installing
539
If you are a LAN Administrator responsible for installing PC DOS
202
If you are a LAN user and need to upgrade to PC DOS
543
If you want to install PC DOS from a CD-ROM
544
If you want to rerun Setup to add optional tools
545
If you need to uninstall PC DOS
547
If you want to view or edit the changes Setup made to your system files
548
If you need to view the PC DOS README. TXT file
550
If you need to work with XDF-formatted installation diskettes
550
If you are not installing on a hard disk but want to use some of the DOS
commands
555
If you have an installation problem
281
PS/1 and OS/2 are trademarks of the IBM Corporation.
Chapter 1. Installing
13
PC DOS Standard Installation
Setup installs PC DOS on drive C on the hard disk in your computer and makes
choices (installation defaults) for you. Most people wanting to install PC DOS will
want to use this standard installation procedure.
To install PC DOS:
1. If you do not currently have DOS installed on your system (booting from
diskettes) :
a. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
b. Turn the power on (cold boot) for your computer or, if it is already powered
on, press CTRL+ALT +DEL (warm boot) to restart your computer.
c. Type Y to answer YES when queried whether you want to install
PC DOS 7.
If you currently have DOS installed on your system:
a. Turn on your computer and start your current system.
b. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A or B.
Note: See the PC DOS README.TXT file for special instructions if you
have DR DOS currently installed on your system. The
README.TXT file can be found on the Setup Diskette.
c. Type either a: setup or b: setup, respectively, at the DOS command prompt.
2. After the PC DOS Welcome screen is displayed, press ENTER or click on
Cont i nue to continue following instructions on the screens.
A selection window is displayed that allows you to change the current time and
date, character set for the country, keyboard layout for the country, or the ISO
font (if you have a VGA or above display).
3. If you want to change these options:
a. Either use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list, and
press ENTER for the list item you want to change while it is highlighted, or
use the mouse to make your change. (Each list item is highlighted as you
come to it.)
After making your selection, you are returned to the selection window.
b. Continue to scroll the screen making the changes you want.
c. After changing options, either use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
and press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse.
14
PC DOS User's Guide
A selection window is displayed that lets you specify the optional tools you want
to install. (You will only see Windows optional tools, listed if Windows is
installed on your system before running Setup.)
Use the UP ARROW
or click here to see
additional tools.
Always select the same path
when rerunning Setup.
C DOS 7.0 Setup
PC DOS 1.0 offers NEW optional tools. Press Enter toal ernate
bet... ee YES and NO to select tools •. Arter selecting. Iii hlight
. . ' opt i 11S correct. Cont i llue Setup.' And press Enter to· c nt i nue.
139397 KB
[More fl
IBM AntiVirus/DOS
HE X Language Support
St cker Co~pression
C~ tral Point Backup for Windows
Ctntral Point Backup for DOS
1100
100
5500
3200
1300
D
Install to Path
I
](B
](B
](B
](B
](B
~~Q.
NO
NO
YES
C:'DOS
Press or click on these function keys.
Highlight and press ENTER
or click on this line after you
select tools.
Highlight and press
ENTER to change.
In order to have the files necessary for each optional tool copied to your hard
disk, you must change the selection choice from NO to YES for the selected
tool.
Note: Central Point Backup for DOS is defaulted to YES for you.
4. If you want to select any optional tools:
a. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of optional
tools. Each list item is highlighted as you come to it.
Note that other tools, such as PenDOS, might not be visible. If you see the
word "More" appearing at the top of the optional tools selection window,
either use the mouse and click on the rectangular bar or use the UP
ARROW to scroll to the top of the list.
Chapter 1. Installing
15
b. Either press ENTER, or click on the item using the mouse to select an
optional tool for your system. Note that pressing ENTER or, clicking on the
optional tool, toggles (changes back and forth) your choices from NO to
YES or YES to NO. The amount of available disk space is updated and
displayed on the screen as you select optional tools.
c. Co'ntinue to scroll the screen making the choices you want. When you
have finished, scroll to the
Options correct. Continue Setup.
line and press ENTER, or click on this line using your mouse.
A selection window is displayed that lets you change the path for your previous
DOS and Windows (if Windows is detected during installation) directories, if
necessary. Changing the path is only necessary if you are upgrading from a
previous version of DOS or Windows. Also, you can specify whether or not to
back up your previous version of DOS files.
5. Select one of the following:
• If you do not want to back up your previous version of DOS:
Make sure the option specifies NO, which is the default.
• If you want to back up your previous version of DOS:
Highlight the Back up previ ous DOS fi 1es line and press ENTER, or click on
the line if using a mouse, to change the option to specify YES. You will
need to have enough blank diskettes available to save your previous DOS
files.
6. When you have finished, either use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to the
Options correct. Continue Setup.
line and press ENTER, or click on this line using your mouse.
Follow the instructions on your screen until you have backed up all the files.
The actual number of diskettes depends on what version you are backing up
and the diskette density you elect to use.
7. Continue to follow the instructions on your screen and insert the remaining
installation diskettes in the order prompted. If you did not select all the optional
tools, you might not need to insert every diskette during installation.
Notice that, as Setup unpacks and copies files to the DOS directory, the file's
name is displayed at the bottom of your installation screen.
16
PC DOS User's Guide
Immediately before the PC DOS installation is finished, you are prompted
whether you want to view or edit the changes made by Setup and saved in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. Optionally, you can edit these
files yourself and modify the changes that Setup made.
8. When prompted whether to edit the changes in the system files, do one of the
following:
• If you do not want to view or edit the changes:
Make sure the Opti on correct. Conti nue Setup. line is highlighted and
press ENTER. Or, click on this line if using a mouse.
• If you want to view or edit the changes:
a. Use the UP ARROW to scroll to:
Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS changes?
and press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse, to change the
option to specify YES.
b. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to the line:
Option correct. Continue Setup.
and press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse. You can refer
to "Viewing and Editing the System Files during Install" on page 548 for
more complete instructions.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen until you are informed that the installation
has been completed and that your system will be rebooted.
System file changes only take effect following a system reboot. Be sure to
remove any diskettes from the diskette drive before pressing any key to reboot.
Notes for Installing:
• If you are making backup diskettes of your installation diskett~s:
Use the DISKCOPY command for the Setup Diskette and the XDFCOPY
command for all other diskettes.
• If you choose not to install every optional tool:
You may not be required to insert every diskette.
• If you have an error message occur during the installation process:
See "PC DOS Installation" on page 281. This section contains actions you can
take to resolve problems you might have while running Setup.
Chapter 1. Installing
17
• If you want to add any optional tools not installed initially at a later time:
You can use the Ie switch (see "Installing Additional DOS and Windows
Optional Tools" on page 545).
• If you have questions about any of the procedures or options:
Help is available by pressing the F1 key.
• If you install PC DOS over an existing version of DOS:
Setup updates your existing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files and
saves the original files as CONFIG.nnn and AUTOEXEC.nnn.
18
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
The information that your computer uses is stored in files. To help you keep track
of your files, you can group your files into directories and subdirectories. To access
the data stored in your files, you must identify the drive and directory where DOS is
to search.
This chapter discusses a few of the basic concepts and terminology you need to
know to use DOS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Files, file names, and extensions
Drives and current drives
Directories, current directories, subdirectories, and directory trees
Paths, full and relative
Wildcards
DOS command prompt
Understanding Files
The information your computer uses is stored in files. The instructions used to run
an application are stored in program files, and the information you create by using
an application is stored in data files.
As you work with an application, DOS processes the information stored in program
files and passes it along to your system when it is needed. When you are finished
using the application, you can save your data files on a hard disk (also referred to
as fixed disk) or on a diskette.
Every file has a name. Most files also have an extension. The file's name always
appears first, and the extension is separated from the name by period as in the
following example:
a
readme. txt
In this guide, a file's name and extension are jointly referred to as the file name.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
19
File Names
The name you assign to a file must meet the following criteria:
• It can contain no more than eight characters.
• It can consist of the letters A through Z, the numbers 0 through 9, and the
following special characters:
$
%
@
underscore
dollar sign,
exclamation point
percent sign
hyphen
at sign
apostrophe
A
#
&
{}
()
caret
tilde
number sign
ampersand
braces
single quote
parentheses
Note: No other special characters are acceptable.
• The name cannot contain spaces, commas, backslashes, or periods (except the
period that separates the name from the extension).
• The name cannot be one of the following reserved file names: CLOCK$, CON,
AUX, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, NUL, and PRN.
• It cannot be the same name as another file within the directory.
File names are not case sensitive, so you can type the file name in either
uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case characters.
Extensions
Extensions can help you identify the type of information in a file. For example, if
you have a file called MINUTES.TXT, the extension .TXT usually identifies that it is
a text file; The extension must contain no more than three characters. File-name
restrictions regarding characters and spacing also apply to extensions.
The following are some of the extensions used by DOS:
• .EXE (executable) or .. COM (command) for files that contain programs.
• .BAT (batch or REXX) for files containing lists of commands that DOS carries
out consecutively.
• .INI (initialization) for files containing startup commands for an application.
20
PC DOS User's Guide
Current Drive
If you type a command at the DOS command prompt, commands will be carried out
on the drive you are currently working in unless you specify a different drive.
The drive you are currently working in is called the current drive. The letter of the
current drive is usually shown as part of the DOS command prompt (such as C: \> if
the current drive is C).
For example, suppose the current drive is drive A. To view a list of files on a
diskette in drive A, you would type the following:
dir
You do not need to type the drive letter to see the current drive.
To change the current drive, type the letter of the drive you want to change to,
followed by a colon. For example, suppose the current drive is C. To change the
current drive to drive A, type the following:
a:
Directories
To help you keep track of your files, you can group your files into directories. Just
as file folders in a file cabinet contain groups of related documents, directories can
contain groups of related files. Each directory can be assigned a unique name so
that you can identify it. For more information, see "Making. Directories" on page 35.
Sometimes you might want to further divide a directory to be more specific, or else
your directory might contain so many files that it is too confusing to find the one you
want. When this happens, you can use DOS to create additional directories. The
directory contained within another directory is called a subdirectory. This is similar
to placing a file folder within a larger file folder. A directory that contains another
directory is called the parent directory.
For more information about directory trees and how to view items in your directory,
see "Viewing Directory Contents" on page 34.
Paths
When you give the full path name for a file, you are stating a series of directory
. names that DOS follows before any actions are performed on that file. Each
directory name is separated by a backslash (\).
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
21
Every file has its· own separate path. If you have two files with the same file name
but in different directories, DOS considers these to be two completely different files
because it considers the path and the file name to be the full file specification.
For example, C:\NOTES\AGENDA.DOC and C:\MEETING\AGENDA.DOC can have
files with the same file name, but the file contents can be different because their file
specification is different.
The following illustration shows the components that make up a path statement.
The path statement is limited to 127 characters.
L~rive [Di~,ectOry [S,~bdirectOry [ File
C: \OFFICE\MEETI NG\AGEN DA. DOC
~
y
J'
Root
Directory
~ Separators
You can specify a PATH command-line statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
The PATH command indicates which directories DOS is to search for executable
files. whenever you start your computer. When you designate more than one
directories, you must separate them with a semi-colon (;) 'such as in the following
example:
path c:\dos\system;c:\utils;
Wildcards
If you want to perform a task for a group of files whose names have something in
common, you do not have to use the same command repeatedly for each file name
in the group. A substitute for a name or extension is known as a wildcard. You
can use wildcards to specify groups of files.
There are two DOS wildcards:
• The asterisk (*) represents a whole word or a group of characters.
• The question mark (?) represents a single character.
22
PC DOS User's Guide
The following table shows various wildcard combinations.
Wildcard
What it represents
Examples
*.TXT
All files with a .TXT extension
JULY93.TXT, RECIPE.TXT
REPORT.*
All files named REPORT with any
extension
REPORT.TXT, REPORT.WRI
M*.*
All files beginning with the letter M,
regardless of extension
MEMO.TXT, MARCH.XLS
???*
All files having names containing three
letters or less, with any or no extension
SUN.BMP, WIN.INI, AUG
Note: When you use an asterisk in the file name or the extension, DOS ignores
the letters that come after the asterisk. For example, if you use the wildcard
*M.EXE
it is the same as if you typed
*.EXE
DOS Command Prompt
When you see this prompt (C:\», this means DOS is ready to receive a command.
The C:\> prompt is set by typing:
prompt $p$g
where $p stands for the path, and $g provides the greater than (» sign. If you
want to change ,this prompt, you can view the options available by typing help
prompt or prompt /?
The PROMPT command allows you to keep track of where you are in your tree
structure visually. For example, the prompt C:\OFFICE\LETTERS> shows you the
root, OFFICE, and LETTERS directories in the tree structure.
Add the PROMPT command to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that the prompt you
specify is available every time you start your computer. '
Working with Files
Certain DOS commands allow you to do tasks such as: finding, copying, renaming,
deleting, moving, comparing, modifying, creating, and viewing the contents of files
and directories.
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
23
Finding Files
To find a file, use the DIR /S command. This command directs the system to list
every occurrence, in the specified directory and all subdirectories, of a specified file
name. For example, to find all occurrences of "MYFILE.DAT" on drive C, type the
following at the DOS command prompt:
dir c:\myfile.dat /s
Copying Files
You can use the COPY command to copy:
• A file from one directory or diskette to another
• A group of files by using DOS wildcards
Note: If you want to copy files from the PC DOS 7 installation diskettes, refer to
"Working with Setup Bundle Files" on page 554 first.
If your copy request involves a file that has the same name as a file or files in the
directory to which you are copying, DOS displays a message indicating that you are
about to overwrite an existing file. You are prompted to provide direction to the
system as the following example indicates:
c:\dos>copy *.dat \
Overwrite c:\scores.dat (yes/no/all)?
Your choice affects the COPY command as follows:
Yes (Y)
Overwrite the file and continue copying, or return to the DOS
command prompt if only one file is involved.
No (N)
Do not overwrite the file. Continue copying and receiving the
system prompt for overwriting if other duplicate file names are
found. Or, return to the DOS command prompt if only one file is
involved.
All (A)
Overwrite the indicated file and all subsequent files and suppress
the system prompt for overwriting while copying.
For detailed information on copying a directory tree with files, type help xcopy at
the DOS command prompt. For detailed information on duplicating a diskette, type
hel p di skcopy at the DOS command prompt. In both cases the online PC DOS 7
Command Reference is opened to the discussion about the specified command.
If you ·only want to review the abbreviated online help about a command, type the
command name followed by a /? switch (for example, di skcopy /? displays the
abbreviated online help for the DISKCOPY command).
24
PC DOS User's Guide
Copying a Single File
To copy a file to another diskette or directory, use the COpy command. To use the
COpy command, type the location and file name of the file you want to copy from
, (source file). Then type the location and file name of the file you want to copy to
(target file).
Suppose drive C is the current drive. If you want to copy the AGENDA.DOC file
from the \MEETING directory on a hard disk in drive C to the root directory on a
diskette in drive A, you would type the following command:
copy \meeting\agenda.doc a:\agenda.doc
DOS takes a copy of the AGENDA.DOC file in the \MEETING directory on drive C
and places the copy in a file having the same file name in the root directory of drive
A. If you want the source and target files to have the same file name, omit the
target file name. For example, you could use the following command to produce
the same result achieved by using the previous command:
copy \meeting\agenda.doc a:\
After you use the COpy command, DOS indicates how many files were copied:
1 file(s) copied
If DOS cannot find the file you want to copy, it displays the Fi 1e not found
message. Check to see that you typed the file name correctly and that the file is in
the directory you specified.
Using Wildcards to Specify a Group of Files to Copy
Suppose you have a number of files on a diskette in drive A that you designated as
temporary by giving them the same extension (such as .TMP). If you want to copy
these files to a diskette in drive S; you can use the asterisk wildcard:
copy a:\*.tmp b:\
Renaming a File as It Is Copied
If you want to give a new name to a file you are copying, specify the new file name
as the destination file. For example, to copy the OUTGO.XLS file from a diskette in
drive A to a diskette in drive S and rename it EXPAND.XLS, type the following at
the DOS command prompt:
copy a:\outgo.xls b:expand.xls
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
25
You can copy a file to the same directory if you rename the file. If you do not
rename the file when copying it to the same directory, DOS displays the following
message:
File cannot be copied onto itself
o file(s) copied
Renaming a File
To change the name of a file without changing its location, use the REN command.
The REN command stands for rename.
For example, suppose you have two versions of a file named SALES.LST. The
version on the diskette in drive A contains last year's sales projections, whereas the
version in drive C is up-to-date. Assume drive C is the current drive. To avoid
confusion between the two files, you can use the following command to rename the
file that contains outdated prices:
For example, the following command changes a file named SALES.LST to
SALES. OLD:
ren a:\sales.lst sales.old
You can use DOS wildcards to rename a group of files. For example, if you want
all .TMP files to be renamed to .TXT files in a directory, use the following
command:
ren *.tmp *.txt
Deleting Files
You will eventually want to clean up your hard disk by removing files that are no
longer useful. You can delete a single file, a group of files, or all files in a directory
on a hard disk or diskette. When you delete files, you might not be able to recover
them. Ensure that the files you specify for deletion are the ones you want to
remove.
If you accidentally delete files you want to keep, use the UNDELETE command as
soon as possible to recover them. Refer to "Recovering Deleted Files" on page 28
for more information.
26
PC DOS User's Guide
Deleting a Single File
You delete a single file by typing the DEL command, followed by the location and
name of the file you want to delete. For example~ to delete a file named
SALES.LST from a directory on drive C, you would type the following command:
del c:sales.lst
Deleting a Group of Files
You can use DOS wildcards (an * is a wildcard) to delete a group of files. For
example, the following command deletes all files with the .TMP extension on a
diskette in drive A.
del a:\*.tmp
,
Before using the wildcard, it is a good idea to use the DIR command to view the
files in a directory. If the display scrolls off the screen too quickly, use the DIR
command with the /p switch. This switch pauses the display of information at the
end of each full screen of text and gives you a Press any key to continue .••
message that allows you to continue on to the next screen display until completed.
For example, you could type the following command to view all the files with .TMP
extension on a diskette in drive A and pause the information between screens:
dir a:\*.tmp
Ip
Deleting All Files in a Directory
To clear a directory of all files, you can use the DEL command and DOS wildcards.
For example, to delete all the files in the \OFFICE directory on drive C, type the
following:
del c:\office\*.*
If you do not specify a directory, all files in the current directory are deleted.
Whenever you specify *.* with the DEL command, the following prompt is displayed.
All files in directory will be deleted!
Are you sure (YIN)?
If you typ'e the directory without specifying any files, it is assumed you want to
delete all the files in that directory. For example, to delete all files in the \MYDOCS
directory on drive C, you could type the following command:
del c:\mydocs
If you want to delete the directory itself, use the RD (remove directory) command.
Or, you can use the DELTREE command to delete both the directory and all the
files at one time. The RD command and the DELTREE command are discussed in
more detail in "Deleting Directories" on page 36.
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
27
Recovering Deleted Files
When you delete a file, DOS does not delete the data in the file. Instead, it marks
the file as deleted so DOS can reuse the area of the hard disk or diskette occupied
by the deleted file. The data remains on the hard disk or diskette until DOS records
the data of another file in the same region of the disk.
Because the data in a deleted file can remain intact for a while, it is possible to
recover a file that was accidentally deleted. As soon as you discover that the file
has been deleted, use the UNDELETE command to restore the file. If you have
created or changed other files after issuing the DELETE command, the UNDELETE
command might not be able to recover the deleted files. For more information
about undeleting files and directories, see Chapter 15, "Using Central Point
Undelete" on page 241.
The UNDELETE command works best if you set up your system to keep track of
files you delete by.using the DATAMON command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as
described in "Choosing a Delete Protection Method" on page 271.
Moving Files
To move files; use the MOVE command. For example, the following command
moves the file AGENDA.DOC from the current drive to a diskette in drive A.
move agenda.doc a:
If the destination you specify already has a file or files with the same name, you are
prompted to give direction to the system. You can choose the following:
YesM
28
Overwrite the file and continue moving, or return to the DOS
command prompt if only one file is involved.
. No (N)
Do not overwrite the file. Continue moving and receiving the
system prompt for overwriting if other duplicate file names are
found. Or, return to the DOS command prompt if only one file is
involved.
All (A)
Overwrite the indicated file and all subsequent files and suppress
the system prompt for overwriting while moving files.
PC DOS User's Guide
You can also move groups of files using wildcards. For example, to move all the
files on drive A with an extension of .TXT to drive C in the directory \TEXT, you
would type:
move a:*.txt c:\text
You can rename a directory when you move files. For example, to move all the
files in the \NOTES directory to a new directory with the name \LETTERS, type:
move c:\notes\*.* c:\letters
You are prompted whether you want the directory treated if it does not already
exist:
Make directory "c:\letters"?
(Y/N)
The MOVE command allows you to rename a file when you move only one file. To
move the file LETTER1.TXT from the root directory of drive C, rename it to
NEWLTR.TXT, and place it in the \LETTERS directory on drive 0, type:
move c:\letterl.txt d:\letters\newltr.txt
If the directory does not already exist, you will receive the [Unable to create
desti nati on] message. Use the MD command to create the directory, and then
retry the MOVE command.
Comparing Files
To get an approximate comparison of two files, you can look at file size and time of
creation. To get a precise comparison of two files, use the FC command. For
example, you have two text files that have the same file name; they exist on two
different diskettes. To see if they are the same and where they differ, you can use
the FC command.
To use the
Fe command to compare two files:
1. Insert one diskette in drive A and one in drive B.
2. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
fc /a a: (jiZename).txt b:(jiZename).txt
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
29
The fa switch in this example abbreviates the output for the comparison of the two
text files. DOS starts at th~ beginning of the two files and compares each byte.
When DOS finds a difference, it displays the file name, the line of text that begins a
set of differences, and the line that ends the set of differences, as in the following
example:
*****a:(filename).txt
Our expected revenues for the month of January are expected to rise
\ ...
when the results are not yet certain.
*****b:(filename).txt
Our expected revenues for January are less than projected
\ ...
when the results are not yet certain.
*****
For more information about the FC command, type hel p fc at the DOS command
prompt.
Viewing and Changing File Attributes
Every file can have the following attributes associated with it. These attributes are
used as switches with the ATTRIB command.
a
Specifies the archive attribute which is used with the RESTORE,
XCOPY, and other commands to control which files are backed up.
r
Specifies the read-only attribute which prevents a file from being
changed or deleted. When a file has this attribute, you can look at the
file but you cannot delete it or change its contents.
h
Specifies the hidden attribute which prevents DOS from displaying a file
in a directory list. The file remains in a directory, but you cannot use the
file unless you know its file name. This attribute is useful if you are
working on confidential files.
s
Specifies the system attribute which designates a file as a system file.
Files with the system attribute are not shown in directory listings.
Type he 1p attri b for more information about these attributes and how they are
used with the ATTRIB command.
Viewing File Attributes
To see a file's attributes, type the ATTRIB command followed by the file name. For
example, you would type the following to see the attributes associated with the
CONFIG.SYS file on a disk in drive A:
attrib a:\config.sys
30
PC DOS User's Guide
DOS displays up to four attributes in front of the file name. For example, if the
CONFIG.SYS file has the archive and read-only attributes, DOS displays the
following:
A R C:\CONFIG.SYS
You can see the attributes for a group of files by using wildcards with the AnRIS
command. For example, you would type the following to see the attributes of all
files in the root directory of drive C:
attrib c:\*.*
Changing a File Attribute
You can add to or take away file attributes by using the AnRIS command along
with the attribute letter. To assign an attribute, precede the attribute letter with a +.
To remove an attribute, precede the attribute letter with a -. For example, use the
following command to make the OUTGO.XLS read only:
attrib +r outgo.xls
If you decide at a 'Iater time to remove the read-only attribute from this file, you
would type:
attrib -r outgo.xls
Finding Text Within a File
If you want to search one or more files for specified text, you can use the FIND
command. For example, if your personal phone book is in the PHONE.TXT file,
you can use the following command to view all lines of the file that contain the text
"Area Code: 206":
find IIArea Code: 206
11
phone.txt
DOS searches the PHONE.TXT file and displays each line that includes the text
"Area Code: 206". You must enclose the search text in quotation marks. DOS finds
only text that exactly matches the characters you specify, including capitalization
and spacing. If the text in the file has formatting codes (for example, if the words
"Area Code" are underlined), DOS cannot find the specified text.
You can use wildcards to search all subdirectories for a set of files. Add the /s
switch to specify this type of search. The following example searches all .TXT files
and the ADDR.LST file in all subdirectories:
find IIArea Code: 206 *.txt addr.lst /s
11
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
31
Understanding and Working with Directories
When you type a command at the DOS command prompt, it is carried out on the
directory you are currently using unless you specify a different directory.
Directory Tree
The organization of directories and files is called the directory tree. When you
format a hard disk, DOS creates one directory called the root directory. The root
directory is the very top-most directory. All other directories you create on the hard
disk branch out from the root directory. This is illustrated by the following:
Current Directory
Destination Directory
You can view a list of files and directories ina directory by using the DIR command
(see "Viewing Directory Contents" on page 34).
Naming Directories
Except for the root directory, which is always represented by the first backslash ( \ )
following the drive letter, each directory- has a name. A directory can also have an
extension.
The rules for directory names and extensions are the same as for naming files.
Typically, however, directory names do not use extensions. For more information,
see "File Names" on page 20.
Sometimes, you see" . " and" .. " entries in a directory (especially when you use
the DIR command to view the files and directories in a directory). These are
normal entries that are present in every directory. The single period ( . ) represents
the current directory and the double period represents the parent directory. If you
delete these entries, you can lose files.
32
PC DOS User's Guide
Working in the Current Directory
The directory you are currently working in is called the current directory for that
drive. The name of the current directory is usually shown as part of the DOS
command prompt. You might see c: \NOTES> if your current directory is \NOTES in
drive C.
For example, if drive C is the current drive and \OFFICE\NOTES is the current
directory, you can delete the REPORT1.TXT file in the C:\OFFICE\NOTES directory
by typing this command:
de 1 reportl. txt
Because drive C is the current drive and \OFFICE\NOTES is both the current
directory and where the file is located, you do not need to specify the path in the
command. DOS searches for the file in the current directory. When the file is not
located in the current directory, you can do one of the following:
• Specify where the file is located by including its path in the command.
• Change to the directory containing the file by using the CD command. The CD
command is described in "Changing Directories."
If you are working with more than one drive, each of them has a current directory.
If you do not specify a different path for the files, DOS will complete the operation in
the current drive and directory.
When you start your system, all current directories are the root directories of the
drives in your system. The current directory on a diskette drive changes to the root
directory when you change diskettes.
Changing Directories
To change to a different directory on the current drive, use the CD command. The
CD command stands for change directory.
To use the CD command, type:
cd
followed by the directory to which you want to change.
If you want to change from the current directory to a subdirectory, a directory
contained within the current directory, type the name of the subdirectory. For
example, the following command changes the current directory to.the MYDOCS
directory within the current directory:
cd mydocs
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
33
If you want to change to a directory that is not a subdirectory of the current
directory, type the path for thenew directory. For example, to change from the
directory C:\MEETING\STATUS to the directory C:\ART, type the following:
cd \art
You can use double periods as a shortcut to typing the name of the parent
directory. To change to the parent of the current directory (the directory one level
closer to the root), you can also use two periods (.. ) in the command.
cd ..
Regardless of which directory is current, you can change to the root directory of the
current drive by typing:
cd \
Viewing Directory Contents .
To view the contents of a directory, use the DIR command. The DIR command
stands for directory and lists the contents of the directory you specify.
For example, if C:\ is your current directory, type the following command to view its
contents:
dir
DOS displays a listing similar to the following:
CON FIG
AUTO EXEC
DOS
MYFMT
MOVEDIR
NETWORK
SYS
BAT
525 03-30-94 6:47p
495 03-30-94 7:04p
01-14-93 9:38a
TXT
4735 02-16-93 10:43p
BAT
7046 03-08-93 8:58a
03-29-93 6:47p
Note: The file names shown here are separated from the extensions, not by a
period but by several spaces. When you refer to these files, however, you
must separate the file names from the extensions with a period.
If there is more information than can fit on one screen, use the DIR command
followed by the /p switch to view files and subdirectories one screen at a time. For
example, to view the contents of the current directory one screen at a time, type:
dir /p
34
PC DOS User's Guide
You see one screen of the directory contents. At the bottom of the screen,' you see
this prompt:
Press any key to continue . . .
If you add the path of a directory to the command, DOS displays the contents of the
specified directory rather than the current directory. Regardless of which drive and
directory are current, you would use the following command to view a list of files in
the MEETING directory on drive C:
dir c:\meeting
Viewing Groups of File Names in a Directory
Unless you specify otherwise, DOS displays all file names and directory names
contained in a directory. To view only certain file names in a directory, you can use
wildcards. For example, to see a list of all files that have a .DOC extension in the
root directory of a diskette in drive 8, type:
dir b:\*.doc
Making Directories
When you have a. group of related files (such as specialized files that you use with
one program or files from a specific project), you might want to store them in their
own directory. To create a new directory, you can use the MD command, which
stands for make directory. The new directory. cannot have the same name as any
other file or directory contained in that directory.
For example, suppose the current directory is the root (\). To create a directory
called OFFICE, you would type the following command:
md office
The MD command makes a directory within the current directory, unless you.specify
a different directory. For example, suppose the current directory is \OFFICE. While
you are within the OFFICE directory, the DOS command prompt looks like this:
C:\OFFICE>
To make a directory called NOTES, you can type:
md· notes
In this example, DOS makes a directory called NOTES in the \OFFICE directory.
To see this change, type:
cd notes
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
35
at the C:\OFFICE> command,prompt. The command prompt then changes to
display:
C:\OFFICE\NOTES>
If you are not making a directory within the current directory, you must type the
entire path of the new directory or specify the path relative to the current directory.
If you include a drive letter with the MD command, you can create a directory on a
hard disk or diskette that is not current.
Deleting Directories
There are two ways to delete directories:
• You can use the DELTREE command, which allows you to remove the
directory at the same time you delete all the files and subdirectories within the
directory.
• You can use the RD command, which allows you to remove the directory or
subdirectory after you have deleted all the files within the directory.
Deleting All Files and the Directory Simultaneously
To delete a directory and all the subdirectories and files in it, you can use the
.DELTREE command. For example, to delete the \WORK directory and all the fi.les
in the directory on drive C, type the following:
del tree c:\work
You also can use the DELTREE command to delete one or more files and
directories. For example, to delete all the subdirectories and files in the \WORK
directory on drive C and to delete the \OFFICE directory and all the files within this
directory on drive A, type the following:
del tree c:\work a:\office
Use caution when you use the DELTREE command, because every file and
subdirectory within the directory you specify will be deleted. You are prompted
before the deletion of each top-level directory or file, similar to the following:
Delete directory "c:\work" and all its subdirectories? (YIN)
Deleting Only the Directory
The directory you delete cannot contain any files or other directories. If the
directory you want to delete contains files or other directories, you must delete them
first.
36
PC DOS User's Guide
To delete only the directory, use the RD command, which stands for remove
directory. For example, to delete the \MEETING\NOTES directory, type the
following command:
rd \meeting\notes
DOS removes the NOTES subdirectory from the \MEETING directory on the current
drive.
If DOS does not delete a directory after you have deleted all files and subdirectories
in it, there might be hidden or read-only. files in the directory. For information about
viewing or changing the attributes of hidden or read-only files, type hel p attri b at
the DOS command prompt.
CAUTION:
Do not use the ERASE command to delete the" . " or " .. " entries in a
directory. These are normal entries that are present in every directory. If you
erase these entries, you can lose files. (The DELETE command cannot delete
these entries.)
To delete a directory:
1. Delete all files and directories within the directory you want to delete.
For example, suppose the current directory is \ART, and \ART contains a
directory called WORK. Before you can remove the WORK directory, which
does not contain any other directories, you must delete its contents by typing:
del work\*.*
You can also type the following command with the same results:
del work
2. The following message appears:
All files in directory will be deleted!
Are you sure? (YIN)
Type Yfor Yes to delete the files. Or, type N to cancel the command.
3. Make sure the directory you are trying to del.ete is not the current directory. If it
is; change to the directory one level higher by typing the following command:
cd ..
You cannot remove a directory while it is the current directory.
4. Use the RD command to remove the directory.
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
37
For example, when the WORK directory is empty, you can type the following
command to remove the directory from the \ART directory:
rd work
DOS removes a subdirectory of the current directory, unless you specify otherwise
by typing the full path of another directory. If you' include a drive letter with the RD
command, you can remove a directory from a drive that is not current.
If you delete a directory accidentally, you can use the UNDELETE command to
recover the directory and its files. For more information about undeleting a
directory, refer to "Undeleting a Directory" on page 253.
Copying Directories
To copy a directory and its subdirectories, you can use the XCOPY command. The
XCOPY command works with a single directory or a group of directories. You can
create new files in the destination directory as well as new subdirectories with this
command.
If the destination you specify already has a file or files with the same name, you are
prompted to give direction to the system. You can choose the following:
YesM
Overwrite the file and continue xcopying, or return to the DOS
command prompt if only one file is involved.
No (N)
Do not overwrite the file. Continue xcopying and receiving the
system prompt for overwriting if other duplicate file names are
found. Or, return to the DOS command prompt if only one file is
involved.
All (A)
Overwrite the indicated file and all subsequent files and suppress
the system prompt for overwriting while xcopying.
Copying All Files in a Directory
To copy a single directory (without subdirectories), use the XCOPY command
without switches. For example, the following command copies all files in the
C:\NEW\REPORTS\FINANCE directory to the \FINANCE directory on a diskette in
drive A:
xcopy c:\new\reports\finance a:\finance
If you do not make a directory before you use the XCOPY command, one will be
created for you by the XCOPY command.
38
PC DOS User's Guide
Because the XCOPY command copies all files in a directory, you do not need to
use wildcards. For example, the following XCOPY command copies all files in the
current directory from drive A to drive B:
xcopy a: b:
While DOS prepares to copy the files, it displays a Read; ng source fil e(s)
message. A message is also displayed showing the names of the files it copies
and indicating how many files were copied when the operation has completed.
Creating Directories as You Copy Files
If the destination path in an XCOPY command does not exist, DOS creates it. For
example, the following command copies all files from the root directory of a diskette
in drive A to the C:\TMP directory:
xcopy a:\ c:\tmp
If the directory does not exist, you are prompted whether the name specified is a
file or directory. To prevent DOS from prompting you, add a backslash at the end
of the directory name.
If you do not type a path, DOS copies the files to the current directory.
Copying Subdirectories
To copy files in a directory along with any subdirectories that contain files, add the
/s switch to the XCOPY command. For example, you have a diskette in drive A
that contains the following subdirectories: SCHOOL, WORK, and HOME in the
\SCHEDULE directory. The following command copies the files in the \SCHEDULE
directory of drive A, including the three subdirectories and all their files, to the
\MEMOS directory on drive C:
xcopy a:\schedule\ c:\memos /s
The backslash (\) after a: indicates that DOS should start at the root directory.
When the /s switch is added, every file in every subdirectory that contains files is
copied. DOS copies files from A:\SCHEDULE to C:\MEMOS from
A:\SCHEDULE\SCHOOL to C:\MEMOS\SCHOOL, from A:\SCHEDULE\WORK to
C:\MEMOS\WORK, and from A:\SCHEDULE\HOME to C:\MEMOS\HOME. If any of
the directories do not exist on drive C, DOS creates them. In this example, empty
subdirectories on drive A are not copied.
Chapter 2. Learning Basic DOS Concepts
39
To copy an empty directory, use the /e switch with the /s switch. For example,
suppose the diskette in drive A has an empty subdirectory called MiSe, in addition
to the three subdirectories just mentioned. You could type the following command
to copy all subdirectories, including the empty subdirectory:
xcopy a:\ c:\memos Is Ie
You can use the /s switch without the /e switch, but you cannot use the /e switch
without the /s switch.
Renaming Directories
To rename a directory, use the MOVE command. The following command renames
the \OPS\STATS directory to \OPS\FIGURES:
move \ops\stats \ops\figures
The REN command, which you use to rename files, cannot be used to rename
directories.
40
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 3. Using the Online Book Viewer
The PC DOS Viewer is the documentation viewer for PC DOS 7 that allows you to
read online books. PC DOS 7 comes with three books online:
Name of
Online Book
CMDREF
DOSREXX
Windows
Icon
Command
Reference
REX><
Contains ...
The online PC DOS Command Reference, which
provides information about command syntax,
PC DOS commands, device drivers, and .lNI files.
A description of the DOS REXX commands.
Information
DOSERROR
Error
Messages
An explanation of the more common error
messages for DOS and the optional tools provided
with PC DOS.
Note: You must have selected at least one optional tool for Windows in order to
have the PC DOS 7.0 Tools group and the online book icons available
when you start Windows.
Starting the PC DOS Viewer
The PC DOS Viewer can be started from:
•
•
•
•
The DOS command prompt
PC DOS Shell
IBM's OS/2
Microsoft Windows
Starting the PC DOS Viewer from the DOS Command Prompt: All online books
for PC DOS 7 have a file extension of .INF and are in the same directory as your
other PC DOS 7 files. To start the PC DOS Viewer and view any online DOS
book with an extension of .INF, at the DOS command prompt type:
view bookname
where bookname is the name of the online book-either CMDREF, DOSREXX, or
DOSERROR. For example, you would type vi ew cmdref to view the online
Command Reference. The online book also opens when you include the .lNF
extension (for example, vi ew cmdref. i nf).
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
41
Starting the PC DOS Viewer from PC DOS Shell: Before you can start the PC
DOS Viewer from the PC DOS Shell, first you must:
• Add the program item to the Main group.
• Give the program a title, such as "Command Reference," "Error Messages", or
"REXX Information."
• Specify the command that starts the program, such as vi ew cmdref. i nf to start
the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
For complete instructions for adding a program, refer to "Adding a Program Item" on
page 350.
Starting the PC DOS Viewer from OS/2: OS/2 allows you to start DOS programs
from the OS/2 desktop from either a DOS full screen or from a DOS window. The
online documentation viewer, PC DOS Viewer, is just another program that can be
started from the OS/2 desktop.
To start a DOS program from the OS/2 desktop:
1. From your OS/2 desktop, double-click on the OS/2 System icon.
2. Double-click on the Command Prompts icon.
3. Double-click on either the DOS Full Screen or the DOS Window icon.
4. To start the PC DOS Viewer, type the command used by the program
(VIEW.EXE), followed by the file name of the online book.
For example, you would type the following:
c:\DOS\view.exe cmdref.inf
if your DOS files were on drive C in the \DOS directory, to start the VIEW
command and open the CMDREF.INFfile to view the online PC DOS 7
Command Reference.
Be sure to include the letter of the drive and path containing the PC DOS
Viewer program.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Type exi t and then press ENTER to close the DOS window and return to OS/2
when you are finished.
7. Point to the title bar icon of the Command Prompts window and double-click.
8. Point to the title bar icon of the OS/2 System window and double-click.
42
PC DOS User's Guide
Starting the PC DOS Viewer from Windows: To start the PC DOS Viewer while
using Windows, use mouse button 1 and double-click on the icon for the book you
want to view. The PC DOS Viewer starts, and the online book you selected is
opened.
The icons for the PC DOS online books are located in the PC DOS Tools group.
Viewing the Initial PC DOS Viewer Screen
Whenever you type the VI EW command followed by the name of an online book,
you will see a screen similar to this:
Menu Bar
Click on to expand the Table of Contents
/
/
II
Help
Click on to close expansion
/
[., U In. the DnlIl'eL prompt and blinking cursor. To
return to your original C:\> prompt, add a PROMPT command similar to the one in
the next example (prompt $p$g).,
AUTOEXEC.BAT File Examples
The following example of a AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the most commonly used
AUTOEXEC.BAT commands:
path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\utility;c:\batch
prompt $p$g
set temp=c:\temp
doskey
c:\smartdrv.exe
In this example:
• The PATH command directs DOS to search for program files in the current
directory and then in the following directories: the root directory of drive C,
C:\DOS, C:\UTILlTY, and C:\BATCH. A semicolon (;) separates each directory.
• The PROMPT command sets the command prompt so that it shows the current
drive and directory, followed by a greater-than sign (», ,which is the default
prompt.
'
• The SET command creates an environment variable named TEMP and sets it
equal to the directory C:\TEMP.
The name you specify must be the name of an existing directory. Many
programs, including DOS itself, use this variable when storing temporary files.
• The DOSKEY command loads the DOSKey program into memory. This
program provides keyboard shortcuts at the DOS command prompt.
DOSKEY.COM is normally installed by the PC DOS Setup program in the
directory containing your DOS files.
• The SMARTDRV command loads the SMARTDrive program into memory.
70
PC DOS User's Guide
Suppose your system has one diskette drive, one hard disk drive, a laser printer
connected to port COM1, and PC DOS Shell. You might want to put the following
commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
@echo off
path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\utility;c:\lotus;c:\norton
prompt $p$g
mode lptl=coml
set temp=c:\temp
doskey
dosshell.exe
In this example:
• The ECHO OFF command prevents the AUTOEXEC.BAT commands from
being displayed as they are carried out. The @ sign at the beginning of the
line prevents the ECHO OFF command from being displayed.
• The MODE command redirects printer output from LPT1 (its default port) to the
serial port COM1.
• The DOSSHELL command starts the PC DOS Shell program, which provides a
graphical interface that performs many of the same file-management and
disk-maintenance tasks that you perform from the command line.
Chapter 4. Configuring Your System
71
72
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
Disks provide long-term information storage. The information you save on disks
remains intact until you delete it. This chapter discusses:
•
•
•
•
Types of disks and how they are used
How to format and unformat a disk
How to create a system diskette
How to label disks
Types of Disks
There are generally two classifications of disks:
• Hard disks (also referred to as fixed disks)
• Diskettes that come in two basic sizes: 5.25 and 3.5 inches
Disks store information on magnetic surfaces. In a diskette, the magnetic surface is
a thin, flexible disk inside a protective plastic cover. A hard disk has two or more
rigid disks stacked on top of each other in a sealed case. It remains .in your
computer until you upgrade to a larger hard disk or it somehow becomes damaged.
Information on disks is divided into tracks and sectors. The more tracks a disk has,
the more information it can store. The information is divided by DOS into sectors.
A sector is the basic unit of storage on a disk.
All disks need to be formatted so that they can receive and store information.
Formatting writes track and sector marks on the disk defining the areas that DOS
can use. When you format, the disk is checked for defects.
Diskettes vary in physical size and the amount of information they can hold. The
storage size of a diskette is measured in bytes for files, and kilobytes and
megabytes for disks. These terms are defined as follows:
byte
The amount of space it takes to store a character.
kilobyte
A kilobyte is approximately 1000 bytes, represented by a K in this
guide (1024 bytes for CPU memory).
megabyte
A megabyte is approximately 1000000 bytes, represented by MB in
this guide (1048576 bytes for CPU memory).
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
73
The most common types of diskettes that PC DOS can work with, and the capacity
for the diskettes drives include:
Diskette
Diskette-Drive Capacity
5.25-inch, double-sided/double-density
360K
5.25-inch, double-sided/high-density
1200K or 1.2MB
3.5-inch, 1MB capacity
720K
3.5-inch, 1MB/2MB capacity
1440K or 1.44MB
3.5-inch, 1MB/2MB/4MB capacity
2880K or 2.88MB
The 1MB diskettes can be used in 720K, 1.44MB, and 2.88MB diskette drives; they
must be formatted to 720K, which you do with either a 720K or a 1.44MB diskette
drive. When you use a 1.44MB diskette drive, be sure to specify a format of 720K.
The 2MB diskettes can be used in 1.44MB diskette drives or 2.88MB diskette drives
only and must be formatted to 1.44MB. You must use a 1.44MB or 2.88MB
diskette drive to format.
If you intend to transfer diskettes between computers that have diskette drives with
different capacities, use only 1MB diskettes formatted to 720K.
Note: A 1.44MB diskette drive might have "1.44" printed on the diskette eject
button. A 720K diskette drive usually has no identification mark.
Most diskettes have labels indicating their type. You can also use the DIR or
CHKDSK command to view information about the storage capacity of a formatted
diskette. Type hel p di r or hel p chkdskfor detailed information about these
commands. The online PC DOS 7 Command Reference is opened to the
command you specified.
Types of Diskette Drives
Not all types of diskettes are compatible with all types of diskette drives. In
general, the diskette must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the
capacity of the drive in order for the diskette and diskette drive to be compatible.
For example, if you have a high-density 5.25-inch diskette drive designed to work
with 1.2MB diskettes, you can use diskettes formatted as 360K disks. However, if
you have a 360K drive, you usually cannot use disks formatted as 1.2MB disks.
74
PC DOS User's Guide
If you are unsure whether a diskette works with a certain drive, you can try using
the diskette by inserting it into the diskette drive and using the DIR command. If
the diskette and drive are incompatible or if the diskette is unformatted, DOS
displays a General fa; lure error message.
DOS adjusts its operations to work with the type of diskette drive you are using.
When using some commands, you must add a switch if your diskette drive and
diskette do not have the same capacity.
Considerations for Formatting Disks
Before you can use a disk or diskette you must prepare it by using the FORMAT
command. The disks might or might not have been previously formatted.
When you format a disk or diskette, DOS performs a safe format by default.
Because of the safe format, you can restore the disk to the way it was before the
format by using the UNFORMAT command, provided you have not stored files on
the newly formatted disk .
. When you format a diskette or hard disk, DOS reserves a small part of the disk for
its tracking system. The tracking system consists of two parts: a file allocation
table, which tracks the location of each file on the disk, and the root directory, which
stores the name, size, creation date and time, and file attributes for the files on the
disk.
If you are using a new hard disk, you must partition it before you can format it.
While you are running the DOS Setup program, if the hard disk is un partitioned or
unformatted, you can partition and format it. For information about setting up
PC DOS on a hard disk, refer to Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3. You can also
partition a new hard disk by using the Fixed Disk Setup Program (FDISK). For
information about FDISK and partitioning, see Chapter 6, "Partitioning Your Hard
Disk" on page 81.
CAUTION:
Because the FORMAT command destroys all information on a disk, it is a
good idea to develop the habit of using the DIR command before formatting a
disk so that you do not destroy important files. DOS displays a warning
message if you attempt to format your hard disk. If you accidentally format
your hard disk and you have not written new information to it, you might be
able to use the UNFORMAT command to recover its contents. For more
information, see "Unformatting a Disk" on page 78.
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
75
Formatting a Disk
To format a diskette or hard disk, use the FORMAT command. For example, type
the following command to format a diskette in drive A:
format a:
You must specify the drive that contains the diskette you want to format.
To format a hard disk after it has been partitioned, type:
format drive:
at the DOS command prompt. If the hard disk has already been formatted, this
message prompt is displayed:
Warning, all data on non-removable disk drive C: will be lost!
Proceed with format (YIN)?
Type y to proceed or n to cancel the command.
There are several switches that can be used with the FORMAT command. Some
.of the more common ones that you will use are:
Iq
Use this switch on a previously formatted disk to speed up formatting.
lu
Use this switch on new disks to speed upjormatting or on a disk where you
have received read and write errors during the use of the disk.
Use this switch to specify unconditional formatting. Using this switch destroys
all existing data on a disk and prevents you from using the UNFORMAT
command after formatting has taken place.
If
Use this switch to specify the size of the diskette to format. For example, if
drive A is a 1.2MB, 5.25-inch drive, and you want to format a 360K diskette in
it, you would type:
.
format a: If:360
For more information about the switches that can be used with the FORMAT
command, type hel p format to open the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference to
the detailed discussion about FORMAT.
As it formats the disk, DOS displays the percentage of the disk that has been
formatted.- After the disk is formatted, you are prompted to give the disk a volume
la~el. Type the name you want to give the disk, or press ENTER if you do not want
a label.
76
PC DOS User's Guide
DOS then displays information about how the disk has formatted:
1,213,952 bytes total disk space
1,213,952 bytes available on disk
512 bytes in each allocation unit
2,371 allocation units available on disk
Volume Serial Number is 382C-17F4
Bytes total disk space
Indicates the storage capacity of the disk.
Bytes used by system
Displayed if you have transferred the DOS system
files to the disk. This line shows how much disk
space is used by the three system files.
Bytes in bad sectors
Indicates how much of the disk is unusable
because of bad sectors. If there are no bad
sectors, this line is omitted. If a diskette has any
bad sectors, do not store important files or backup
files on it. Most hard disks have a small number of
bad sectors. In general, the portion of a hard disk
taken up by bad sectors should be a small fraction
of the total space available.
Bytes available on disk
Indicates the total disk space minus the space
taken up by the system files and any bad sectors. If
the disk does not contain system files and there are
no bad sectors, this number should be the same as
the "bytes total disk space" number.
Bytes in each allocation
unit and allocation units
available on disk
Indicates how DOS has divided the available disk
for file storage. If you multiply the two numbers on
these lines, the result is the same as the "bytes
available on disk" number.
Volume serial number
Indicates the serial number assigned to the disk.
This number does not change unless the disk is
formatted again.
Following this information, you are prompted to format another disk. Type y to
format another disk in the same drive with the same switches, or type n to return to
the DOS command prompt.
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
77
Unformatting a Disk
You can restore a disk that has been reformatted by using the UNFORMAT
command. The 9isk should be safe-formatted (that is, if you used the FORMAT
command without the /u switch). The UNFORMAT command is most effective if
used immediately after a disk has been reformatted.
If the disk was safe-formatted, UNFORMAT restores the disk to the way it was at
the time of the format. To restore a disk that has been safe-formatted, use the
UNFORMAT command. For example, to restore a hard disk (drive C), type:
unformat c:
You cannot restore a formatted disk if you use the /u switch with the FORMAT
command. The /u switch performs an unconditional format (removes the
safe-formatting). You also cannot restore a diskette if you changed its storage
capacity when you reformatted it. You need to use the UNFORMAT command
immediately after you have formatted a disk. If you have saved anything on the
disk between formatting and unformatting, you will probably lose some of the
information.
Type hel p unformat for more information about the UNFORMAT command.
Creating a System Diskette
It is recommended that you make a system diskette (sometimes called startup
diskette) to handle emergencies such as your computer system not starting. The
Setup Diskette of the PC DOS installation diskettes can be used as a startup
diskette. It has all the files you will need to restart your system. When the system
files are on a diskette, you can use the diskette to start your system from your
diskette drive.
System diskettes must contain the three DOS system files-IBMBIO.COM,
IBMDOS.COM, and COMMAND.COM. When you start your system, these three
files are copied from the system diskette to your system's random-access memory
(RAM). The IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM files are hidden files; you do not see
them in directory listings on the diskette unless you use the /a switch with the DIR
command. The COMMAND.COM file is usually in the root directory of every
system diskette.
In addition to th~se three DOS system files, you want to include the file
FDISK.COM and an editor. You must copy these files to the system diskette.
78
PC DOS User's Guide
To create a system diskette during formatting, use the FORMAT command with the
/s switch. For example, the following command formats the diskette in drive Band
makes it a system diskette:
format b: /s
You can also use the following to ensure the use of a system diskette:
• Make a formatted diskette a system diskette by using the SYS command. For
example, to copy the system files COMMAND.COM, IBMBIO.COM, and
IBMDOS.COM to a formatted diskette in drive A, type:
sys a:
• Keep the Setup Diskette from your installation diskettes handy. This diskette
also can be used as a startup diskette to start your system.
You cannot make a system diskette by using the COpy command. This command
does not copy the hidden system files. You must use the FORMAT or SYS
command. For more information about these commands, type he 1p format or help
sys at the DOS command prompt.
For information as to what files you should have if you are creating your own
system diskette or if you are creating a bootable Stacker diskette for your
compressed drives, refer to "Bootable Stacker Diskette" on page 309.
Consi~erations
for Labeling a Disk
Each disk .can have a name, called the volume label, and a number, called the
volume serial number. DOS uses the volume serial number to keep track of which
disk is in a drive. DOS assigns a serial number to a disk when you format it. The
serial number does not change unless the disk is formatted again. Only disks
formatted by DOS Version 4.0 and later have a serial number. DOS displays the
disk's volume label and serial number above the list of files in every directory.
You can change a disk's volume label by using the LABEL command. The volume
label you choose can contain no more than 11 characters, and it cannot include the
following characters: asterisk (*), question mark (?), slash (f), backslash (\), pipe ( I
), period (.), comma (,), colon (:), semicolon (;), plus sign (+), equal sign (=),
less-than sign «), greater-than sign (», caret (A), quotation mark (II), brackets ([]),
ampersand (&), parentheses ( ), or any key combinations. Volume labels can
include spaces but not tabs.
Note: You can use extended characters in a label; if you do, it is recommended
that you use code page 850. If you use code page 437, support for
extended characters is limited.
Chapter 5. Managing Disks
79
If you need more information about extended characters, this can be found in the
PC DOS 7. Keyboards and Code Pages book. This book can be optionally
purchased. See the coupon booklet included with PC DOS 7.
Assigning Labels
If you work with a large number of disks, it might be convenient to create a label for
each disk. You can view the label when you use the DIR or VOL command.
To assign a volume label, use the LABEL command. For example, to assign the
label "disk 2" to a diskette in drive A, type:
label a:disk 2
If you type a drive letter, but no label, DOS prompts you for a label. For example,
to label the diskette in drive B, type:
label b:
DOS displays the current label and serial number of the diskette in drive B and then
prompts you to type a new volume label.
Deleting Labels
To delete a volume label, use the LABEL command without a name. When DOS
prompts you to type a new volume label, press ENTER. A message appears,
asking you to confirm deletion of the volume label. Type y to delete the label.
Viewing Labels
To view a disk's volume label and serial number, use the DIR or VOL command.
When you use the DIR command, the volume label and serial number for the disk
that you specify are displayed above the list of files.
The VOL command displays the volume label and serial number of the diskette in
the drive you specify (if the disk has no serial number, only the volume label is
displayed). For example, to view the volume label and serial number of the diskette
in drive A, type:
vol a:
80
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
Each operating system has conventions for storing files on a hard disk. If you use
only DOS, your entire hard disk can be set up to use DOS conventions. However,
if you want to use another operating system in addition to DOS, you must partition
your hard disk into DOS sections and non-DOS sections.
If you use only DOS, you can create a single DOS partition that occupies your
entire disk. If you use only DOS and want to separate groups of directories, you
can create a second DOS partition. When you use multiple partitions, DOS still has
access to the entire hard disk. However, the files in the second partition appear to
be on a different drive.
If you are going to use your hard disk with another operating system (for example,
OS/2, which might be HPFS-formatted), you must create a partition for DOS and a
partition for the other operating system. You use an operating system by making its
partition active.
Partitioning your disk is different from formatting it. When you partition a disk, you
specify which sections of the disk DOS or another operating system can use.
When you format a disk, DOS prepares an existing partition to receive files. After
partitioning your disk, you must still format each partition before it can be used.
See "Formatting Your Hard Disk after Using FDISK" on page 94.
To create one or more DOS partitions on a hard disk, use the Fixed Disk Setup
Program (FDISK) described in "Using FDISK" on page 83.
Understanding Hard-Disk Partitions
You can create two types of DOS partitions on a hard disk:
• The primary DOS partition is the area that stores the IBMBIO.COM,
ISMDOS.COM, and COMMAND.COM hidden files necessary to run DOS. The
primary partition can contain other files as well. If you want to start DOS from a
hard disk, that disk must have a primary DOS partition that is active.
• An extended DOS partition is an area where other non-system files can be
stored on a disk. An extended partition is optional.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
81
You can have up to a maximum of four partitions on a hard disk: one primary DOS
partition, one extended partition, and some non-DOS partitions, such as Boot
Manager or Novell. The extended partition can contain up to 23/ogica/ drives. A
logical drive is a section of a hard disk that serves as a separate disk drive. If you
create a primary partition that does not occupy the entire hard disk, you can create
an extended partition in the remaining space. In the extended partition, you can
create logical drives.
The Primary DOS Partition
If you start DOS from a hard disk, the disk must have a primary DOS partition that
contains the three DOS system files (IBMBIO.COM, IBMDOS.COM, and
COMMAND.COM). This partition must be the active partition. In general, the
primary DOS partition on the first hard disk is assigned the drive letter C.
You can reserve a portion of the disk space for the primary DOS partition. The rest
of the disk space can be used for other partitions.
The Extended DOS Partition
When you create an extended DOS partition, you divide it into one or more logical
drives. There are 26 letters available for logical drives (A through Z). Drives A and
Bare reserved for diskette drives. Drive C is reserved for the first primary DOS
partition. Thus, there is a maximum of 23 logical drives that you can create in an
extended DOS partition.
You can use logical drives to group your directories and files. Logical drives do not
create more disk space, however.
For information about creating an extended DOS partition, see "Creating an
Extended DOS Partition" on page 88.
Non-DOS Partitions
Non-DOS partitions are partitions for other operating systems (such as OS/2
HPFS). You cannot use the DOS version of the Fixed Disk Setup Program to
create a non-DOS partition. For information about creating non-DOS partitions, see,
the documentation provided for your non-DOS operating system.
82
PC DOS User's Guide
The Active Partition
To start your operating system from a hard disk, you must make the primary
partition (in which the operating system is stored) the active partition. For example,
to use DOS, make your primary DOS partition active. You can use a partition that
is not designated as active, but you cannot start an operating system from that
partition. The only way you can start an operating system from a partition not
designated as active is if you run a multi-boot manager program, such as IBM OS/2
Boot Manager, which must be active.
A hard disk can have only one active partition at a time.
When you have only a primary DOS partition, it is the active partition. For more
information about the active partition, see "Setting the Active Partition" on page 91.
Using FDISK
The FDISK program displays information about partitions, creates partitions and
logical drives, sets the active partition, and deletes partitions and logical drives.
If your computer has never had an operating system installed on it, you can choose
to have your disk partitioned during installation. Or, you can run FDISK at any time
to partition a disk.
CAUTION:
FDISK destroys all existing files in partitions you modify. If you are using
FDISK to change the partitions on a disk with files on it, be 'sure to back up
the files you want to keep before you begin. If you want to create smaller
partitions on a hard disk that has only a large DOS partition, you must first
back up all files you want to save.
Running FDISK during DOS Installation
If DOS is the first operating system to be set up on your computer, you can choose
to partition your disk when you run the Setup program. By default, the Setup
program creates one primary DOS partition that occupies the entire disk. If you
want to create more than one partition, select A11 ocate some free hard di sk
space for PC DOS during Setup. To partition the disk, follow the steps described in
the subsequent sections of this chapter. When you finish creating partitions, DOS
continues the Setup program. For more information about setting up DOS, refer to
Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
83
Running FDISK after DOS Has Been Installed
If you want to repartition your disk (at any other time than during PC DOS
installation), type the following at the DOS command prompt:
fdisk
When the Fixed Disk Setup Program starts, the main FDISK options menu appears,
as follows:
PC DOS Version 7.0
Fixed Disk Setup Program
Copyright (c) IBM Corporation 1983 - 1995 '
FDISK Options
Current fixed disk drive: 1
Choose one of the following:
1. Create DOS partition or Logical DOS Drive
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set active partition
Delete partition or Logical DOS Drive
Display partition information
Change current fixed d~sk drive
Enter choice: [1]
Press Esc to exit FDISK
CAUTION:
If you useFDISK to delete existing partitions on a hard disk, you lose the
information contained in those partitions. Be sure you have copies of all files
!
in a partition before using FDISK to delete the partition.
To choose a menu option, type the option number and then press ENTER. To
return to a previous menu, press ESC. To quit FDISK, return to the options menu,
and then press ESC.
Each menu displays a Current fi xed di sk dri ve message, followed by a number.
If you have only one hard (fixed) disk drive, the number is always 1. If you have
more than one hard disk drive, the number shows which drive FDISK is currently
working with. The first hard disk drive in your system is 1, the second is 2, and so
on. Changing the current drive when you are using FDISK does not change the
current drive when you return to the DOS command prompt. The current drive
refers only to physical disk drives, not logical drives, when you are using FDISK.
84
PC DOS User's Guide
Viewing Partition Data
You can view information about the status, type, and size of the partitions on a hard
disk by selecting Display partition information (option 4) from the FDISK options
menu.
The Display Partition Information screen looks similar to this:
Display Partition Information
Current fixed disk drive: 1
Partition Status Type
C:l
A
PRI DOS
2
EXT DOS
Total disk space is
Volume Label
PCDOS_7
Mbytes System
21
FAT16
21
42 Mbytes (1 Mbyte
=
Usage
50%
50%
1048576 bytes)
The Extended DOS partition contains Logical DOS Drives.
Do you want to display logical drive information (yiN) ...... ? [YJ
Press Esc to return to FDISK options
The information displayed varies, depending on the number, size, and type of
partitions on your hard disk.
Column
Description
Partition
Shows the drive letter associated with each partition and the disk
number of each partition.
Status
Displays the letter A next to the active partition.
Type
Shows whether a partition is a primary DOS partition (PRI DOS), an
extended DOS partition (EXT DOS), or a non-DOS partition (Non-DOS).
Volume Label
Shows the volume label of the primary partition, if one exists.
Mbytes
Shows the size of each partition, in megabytes.
System
Shows the type of file system being used on the partition.
Usage
Shows the percentage of the current disk that each partition occupies.
If there is an extended DOS partition that contains logical drives, a prompt appears,
asking whether you want to see information about that partition's logical drives.
Type Y if you wantto view this information.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
85
The screen displaying information about logical drives resembles this:
Display Logical DOS Drive Information
Drv Volume Label
D: BACKUPA
E: BACKUPB
Mbytes System Usage
18
FAT16
90%
2
FAT12
10%
Total Extended DOS Partition size is 29 Mbytes (1 Mbyte
1048576 bytes)
Press Esc to continue
The information varies, depending on the number and size of the logical drives.
Column
Description
Drv
Displays the drive letter of each logical drive.
Volume Label
Shows the label assigned to each drive.
Mbytes
Shows the size of each logical drive, in megabytes.
System
Shows the type of file system being used on that partition.
Usage
Shows the percentage of available space in the extended DOS partition
that each logical drive occupies.
Creating a Primary DOS Partition
The hard disk you use to start DOS must have a primary DOS partition. You can
create a primary DOS partition that occupies the entire hard disk or only part of it.
If you want to create an extende9 DOS partition yvith logical drives or if you want to
have space for a non-DOS partition, you must create a primary DOS partition that
does not occupy your entire disk.
You cannot change the size of an existing primary DOS partition. If you want a
primary DOS partition of a different size, you must delete the existing partition and
create a new one. When you delete the existing partition, you lose any information
stored there, so back up files you want to save. For information about deleting a
partition, see "Deleting a Partition or Logical Drive" on page 92.
If your hard disk does not already have a partition, you can use the following
procedure to create a primary DOS partition that occupies the entire disk.
86
PC DOS User's Guide
To create a primary DOS partition that occupies the entire hard disk:
1. From the FDISKoptionsmenu, select Create DOS partition or Logical DOS
Dri ve (option 1) and press ENTER.
Another menu is displayed.
2. Select Create Primary DOS Partition (option 1) and press ENTER.
Another prompt appears, displaying this message:
Do you wish to use the maximum size for a Primary DOS
Partition and make the partition active (yiN) ......... ? [YJ
3. Type Y
If you type N, FDISK prompts you to create a smaller primary partition. See the
next procedure for more information.
FDISK creates a primary partition that takes up all the available space on the
hard disk. If you have only one hard disk, DOS displays the following
message:
System will now restart
Insert DOS system diskette into drive A:
Press any key when ready
4. Insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation diskettes into drive A,
and then press any key.
After partitioning the hard disk, you need to format it by using the FORMAT
command with the./s switch. For more information, see "Formatting Your Hard Disk
after Using FDISK" on page 94.
To create a primary DOS partition that occupies part of the hard disk:
1. From the FDISK options menu, select Create DOS part it i on or Logi ca 1 DOS
Dri ve (option 1) and press ENTER.
Another menu is displayed.
2. Select Create Primary DOS Partition (option 1) qnd press ENTER.
Another prompt appears, displaying this message:
Do you wish to use the maximum available size for a Primary DOS
Partition and make the partition active (yiN) ......... ? [YJ
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
87
3. Type N and another menu is displayed.
4. If you want the default size (100 percent), press ENTER.
The following
m~ssage
is displayed:
Primary DOS Partition created, drive letters changed or added.
Otherwise, type the number of megabytes or the percentage of the disk to use.
If you type a percentage, follow the number with a percent (%) sign.
Note: When you create a primary DOS partition that does not occupy your
entire hard disk, you must make the partition active before you can use
the hard disk with DOS. For more information about making a partition
active, see "Setting the Active Partition" on page 91.
5. To return to the FDISK options menu, press ESC.
When you quit FDISK, you need to format the new partition on your hard disk by
using the FORMAT command with the /s switch. For more information, see
"Formatting Your Hard Disk after Using FDISK" on page 94.
Creating an Extended DOS Partition
If you want to divide your hard disk into more than one DOS partition, you can
create an extended DOS partition in addition to the primary DOS partition,. Within
the extended DOS partition, you typically can assign up to 23 logical drives. Logical
drives are areas of your hard disk that DOS treats as separate disk drives. You
must assign at least one logical drive to an extended DOS partition.
• If you have one hard disk:
Before you can create an extended DOS partition, there must already be a
primary DOS partition that uses only part of the disk.
• If you have more than one hard disk:
Only the disk you use to start your system must have a primary DOS partition.
Your other hard disk can contain only extended DOS partitions.
• If you have more than one hard disk but are using only one partition per disk:
Set the one single partition as the primary partition.
88
PC DOS User's Guide
To create an extend(;!d DOS partition:
1. From the FDISK options menu, select Create DOS part it i on or Logi ca 1 DOS
Drive (option 1).
The Create DOS Partition or Logical DOS Drive menu appears.
2. From this menu, select Create Extended DOS Partition (option 2) and press
ENTER.
A menu is displayed showing the total number of megabytes available for an
extended partition. The default for the partition size is the maximum available
space on the hard disk drive, minus the size of the primary partition. If there is
no space available, you must delete and re-create the primary DOS partition so
it is smaller or reduce the size of any non-DOS partitions that exist.
3. If you want the default size, press ENTER. Otherwise, type the number of
megabytes or the percentage of the unused disk space to be used for the
extended DOS partition. If you type a percentage, follow the number with a
percent (%) sign.
The Create Logical Drive(s) screen in the Extended DOS Partition menu is
displayed.
When you create an extended DOS partition, you can set up one or more logical
drives. See the following section for more information.
Note: If FDISK finds defective tracks at the beginning of an extended DOS
partition, it adjusts the partition boundaries to avoid those tracks.
Creating Logical Drives in an Extended DOS Partition
To store information in an extended DOS partition, you must create one or more
logical drives. Each logical drive is assigned a drive letter. You can store to and
retrieve information from a logical drive as though it were a physical disk drive. For
example, you can use logical drive 0 to store files for a particular program, and you
can work with those files by specifying drive D.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
89
To
create or modify a logical drive:
1. Create an. extended DOS partition.
See page 89 for information about how to create an extended DOS partition.
2. Using the Create Logical DOS Drive(s) menu, type the number of megabytes or
the percentage of the partition space you want to use for the first logical drive.
If you type a percentage, follow the number with a percent (%) sign. If you
want one logical drive to occupy the whole extended DOS partition, press
ENTER.
3. Continue specifying the sizes of partitions until you have used up the entire
partition or until you have created all the logical drives you want.
If the entire partition is assigned to logical drives, the FDISK options menu
reappears. To quit the menu before all the space has been allocated, press
ESC.
After you create a logical drive, you must format it. For more information about
formatting a logical drive, see "Formatting Your Hard Disk after Using FDISK" on
page 94.
How Drive Letters Are Assigned
The primary DOS partition on your startup hard disk is drive C. The drive letters of
additional hard disks and logical drives depend on the number of disks you are
using and how they are partitioned.
If you have only one hard disk, logical drives you create in the extended DOS
partition are given letters beginning with D. For example, if you create five logical
drives in the extended DOS partition, they are named 0, E, F, G, and H.
If your system has more than one hard disk and you have only one primary DOS
partition, all logical drives you create in the extende"d DOS partitions are assigned
drive letters consecutively.
Suppose your system has two hard disks. "The first has a primary DOS partition
and an extended DOS partition with two logical drives, and the second hard disk
has an extended partition with two logical drives. The primary DOS partition on the
first disk is drive C; the two logical drives on the disk are drives 0 and E. The-two
logical drives on the second disk are drives F and G.
You might have primary DOS partitions on more than one hard disk. If so, DOS
assigns drive letters consecutively to all the primary DOS partitions first and then
assigns drive letters consecutively to the logical drives in the extended DOS
partitions.
90
PC DOS User's Guide
Substituting Drive Letters
Some programs accept only drive letters A and B. In these cases, you can use the
SUBST (substitute) command, which temporarily substitutes a drive letter with
another drive letter and path. While a substitution is in effect, DOS regards any
reference to drive A or B as a reference to a directory on your hard disk.
For example, suppose you are using a communications program that accepts only
files from drive A. To substitute the drive letter A for the \COMM directory on
drive C, you would type the following command before starting the program:
subst a: c:\comm
Then, when the program requests files from drive A; DOS looks in C:\COMM
instead.
The drive letter you specify in the SUBST command must not be greater (in
alphabetic order) than the last drive being used on your computer or the letter
specified in the LASTDRIVE command in your CONFIG.SYS file.
Type help 1astdri ve for more information about the LASTDRIVE command. The
online PC DOS 7 Command Reference is opened to the LASTDRIVE command.
When you finish using the program, remove the association between the drive and
the directory by using the /d switch:
subst a: /d
The following commands ignore any substitutions you make when using the SUBST
command: FORMAT, CHKDSK, DISKCOMP, DISKCOPY, FDISK, LABEL,
RESTORE, and SYS.
Setting the Active Partition
The active partition contains the operating system that is loaded when you start or
reset your system. Unless you create a primary DOS partition that occupies your
entire hard disk, you must set the active partition by using FDISK. If you are using
a non-DOS partition, you must reset the active partition when you want to switch
between DOS and the non-DOS operating system. Only one partition can be active
at a time.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
91
To set the active partition:
1. From the FDISK options menu, select Set Active Partition (option 2).
A menu is displayed that indicates the status of each partition. The active
partition is designated by the letter A in the Status column.
2. Type the number of the partition you want to make active. The default setting
is the current active partition number.
3. To return to the FDISK options menu, press ESC.
You can make only primary partitions active. If you try to make an extended DOS
partition active, FDISK displays a message similar to the following:
Partition selected (3) is not startable, active partition not changed.
,Deleting a Partition or Logical Drive
You might need to change the size of your partitions. You cannot reduce or
enlarge an existing partition. If you want to change a partition's size, you must
delete the partition and re-create it.
When you delete a partition, all information in the partition is deleted and cannot be
recovered. Therefore, be sure you have backup copies of the information you want
to save. When you delete a partition, you do not lose information stored in other
partitions on your disk. For example, if you delete the extended DOS partition but
not the primary DOS partition, files in the primary DOS partition are not deleted.
If you want to delete the primary DOS partition on a disk, first delete each logical
drive in the extended partition, and then delete the extended partition itself.
You can delete one or more logical drives in the extended DOS partition of a hard
disk. All information on a logical drive is lost when you delete it. Deleting one
logical drive does not affect the information on other logical drives.
i
If there are logical drives that have drive letters greater (in alphabetic order) than
the drive you delete, these letters will change. Suppose, for example, that you'
have logical drives 0, E, and F on a disk. If you delete drive 0, drive E becomes
drive 0, and d~ive F becomes drive E.
Note: To continue using DOS after you delete the primary DOS partition, you must
restart your system, using the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation
diskettes into drive A.
92
PC DOS User's Guide
To delete a partition or logical DOS drive:
1. From the FDISKoptions menu, select Delete partition or Logical DOS Drive
(option 3).
Another menu is displayed.
2. Type the number of the option you want.
FDISK displays the status of the partition or logical drives, along with a
message warning that the data in the partition or logical drive will be lost.
3. Type the number that corresponds with the drive letter and then type the
volume label of the logical drive you want to delete.
FDISK displays a message confirming the information you typed.
4. Type Y to delete the partition or drive.
If you deleted your primary DOS partition, you need to create a new one before you
can use DOS from your hard disk.
To create a new primary DOS partition before you quit the Fixed Disk Setup
Program:
1. From the FDISK options menu, select Create DOS part; t; on or Log; ca 1 DOS
Drive (option 1).
Another menu appears.
2. Follow the instructions in the preceding sections to create a DOS partition that
occupies either your entire hard disk or only part of it.
When FDISK is finished, a prompt appears.
3. Insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation diskettes into drive A
and press any key to restart your system.
4. Format the new partition by using the FORMAT command with the /s switch.
5. Remove the Setup Diskette from drive A and restart your system.
At this point, your hard disk contains the DOS files IBMBIO.COM, IBMDOS.COM,
and COMMAND.COM.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
93
Working with More Than One Hard Disk
If your system has more than one hard disk drive, you. can use FDISK to create and
modify partitions on any drive. The first physical disk must have a primary DOS
partition. Your other disks can have primary DOS partitions or extended DOS
partitions, or both. On most computers with multiple hard disks, only drive C can
be used to start the operating system.
When you start FDISK, you work with the first hard disk on your system. To work
with a different disk drive, you must select Change current fixed disk drive
(option 5) from the FDISK options menu and specify the number of the drive you
want to work with. If you have only one hard disk drive, the Change Current Fi xed
Di sk Dri ve option is not displayed on the FDISK options menu.
Formatting Your Hard Disk after Using FDISK
When you quit FDISK after you change the size of any of the DOS partitions on
your hard disk, this message is displayed:
System will now restart
If you changed the size of your primary DOS partition, FDISK prompts you to insert
the DOS system diskette (the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation
diskettes) into drive A and press any key. You then return to the DOS command
prompt.
After using FDISK, you must use the FORMAT command to prepare any partition
that you create or change. If you do not format the disk, DOS gives you the
following error message when you try to use the hard disk:
Invalid media type
If you are formatting the primary DOS partition of the hard disk from which you will
start your system, be sure to transfer the DOS system files from a diskette by using
the FORMAT command with the /s switch or by using the SYS command after you
format.
When you format your hard disk, you must format each new partition separately.
For example, if you made your primary DOS partition (drive C) smaller and created
two logical drives in an extended DOS partition (drives 0 and E), you must use the
FORMAT command three times:
format c: /s
format d:
format e:
94
PC DOS User's Guide
The first command formats the primary partition and transfers the DOS system files
from the startup disk to that partition. The second and third commands format the
logical drives.
CAUTION:
If you made changes to some but not all of the partitions or logical drives on
your system, be careful when you format the partitions or drives you
changed. Because FDISK can assign different letters to drives after you
change partitions or logical drives, you might inadvertently format a drive that
has information stored on it.
Before you format a drive, you can use the CHKDSK command to check the
contents of the drive. If you see the message Probable non-DOS disk or Inval id
med i a type before the disk information is displayed, the drive is not formatted. If
the disk information is displayed without this message, the drive is formatted.
You might want to give a descriptive label to each logical drive you create so that
you know what information is on it when you make changes to your system. You
can do this by using the Iv switch when you use the FORMAT command.
For more information, see "Considerations for Formatting Disks" on page 75.
Chapter 6. Partitioning Your Hard Disk
95
96
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
As you work with DOS, you might find yourself repeatedly typing identical
sequences of commands. For example, you might often type the same three
commands to change the current drive, change the current directory, and then start
a program. By using DOS, you can store commands in a batch program or batch
file. Instead of typing commands individually, you need only type the name of the
batch program. DOS carries out this "batch" of commands as if you had typed the
commands individually from the keyboard.
A batch program is an unformatted text file that contains one or more DOS
commands. For example, a batch program might contain the commands you use to
change your directory and start a text editor, such as the E Editor.
Suppo'se you are copying files to a diskette by using the following commands:
cd\work\docfiles
copy *.txt a:
cd\reports\xfiles
copy *.txt a:
To put these four commands into a batch program, store them in an unformatted
text file and assign the file a .BAT extension. Each time you want to copy these
files, type the name of the batch program at the DOS command prompt.
Using batch programs gives you the following advantages:
• Batch programs speed up your work .. When you run a batch program, you only
have to remember one command, instead of several. You do not have to
retype multiple commands or look up commands you cannot remember.
• Batch programs customize DOS. Using batch programs, you can create
personalized commands that perform the exact task you need. You can also
design your own prompts and messages.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
97
Understanding Batch Program Commands
Any DOS command you use at the DOS command prompt or run from the PC DOS
Shell can also be put in a batch program. In addition, there are DOS commands
that are specially designed for batch programs. The commands and their functions
are as follows:
Command
Action
CALL
Runs a second batch program and then returns to the first one.
CHOICE
Prompts you to choose from a set of choices, waits until you choose by
pressing a key, and beeps if you select a key that is not among the
available choices.
ECHO
Displays messages on your screen or turns the ECHO feature on or off.
FOR
Carries out a command for a group of files or directories.
GOTO
Switches to commands in another part of your batch program and
continues processing the commands from that point.
IF
Carries out a command, based on the result of a condition.
PAUSE
Temporarily stops your batch program from running; your program starts
running again when you press any key.
REM
Annotates your batch program so that you can remember what each
'
part of the program does.
SHIFT
Changes the position of replaceable parameters.
@
Is placed in front of a command in your batch program and prevents the
single command from being displayed.
The CALL, ECHO, GOTO, IF, PAUSE, and REM commands are explained further
in this chapter.
For information about the remaining commands (FOR, CHOICE, and SHIFT), refer
to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference, or type the command name
followed by /? for the abbreviated online help.
98
PC DOS User's Guide
Creating a Batch Program
You can create a batch program by using the E Editor or the COPY command.
When you use a text editor other than the E Editor to create a batch program, save
your files as unformatted (ASCII) text. Most text editors have an option for saving
files this way. For information about the E Editor, see Chapter 10, "Working with
the Text Editor" on page 131.
When you are creating a small batch program, it might be more convenient to use
the COPY command, which is described on page 102.
Naming a Batch Program
A batch program must have a .BAT file-name extension. It is generally not a good
idea to give a batch program the same name as an existing DOS command.
Suppose, for example, that you create a batch program for a customized formatting
command and name it FORMAT.BAT. The program does not run if DOS finds the
FORMAT.COM file before it finds FORMAT. BAT, because DOS gives precedence
to files with .COM and .EXE extensions.
You can avoid this problem by using a name that is not already assigned to a DOS
command. For example, you might name the program MYFMT.BAT.
Running a Batch Program
To run a batch program, you type its name without the extension. For example, if
you had a file named FILES.BAT in your current directory, type the following
command to run the batch program:
fil es
When the batch program has parameters, add a space after the file name. For
example, when the FILES.BAT program requires a file specification as a parameter,
type a command like this:
files c:\reports\data
By default, DOS displays each command in a batch program as the command is
carried out. After the batch program runs, DOS might display twb DOS command
prompts because it treats the end-of-file character in a batch program as a new
line.
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
99
Stopping a Batch Program
When you want to stop a batch program before all of its commands have run, press
CTRL+C or CTRL+BREAK (more than once, if necessary). You get a message
asking to confirm that you want to stop the batch program.
Type y to stop the program or n to continue with the next command. You can
temporarily stop a batch program by pressing CTRL+S or the PAUSE key. This
"freezes" the screen until you press another key.
When your batch program is on a diskette and you remove the diskette while theprogram is running, DOS displays the following message:
Not ready reading drive A
Abort, Retry, Fail?
Re-insert the diskette, and type the letter r to continue running the batch program.
Making a Small Batch Program
You can use the E Editor provided with DOS to create a batch program. When
there are more than a few lines in your batch program, it is a good idea to use a
text editor to create the file.
Suppose, for example, you want to create a batch program that formats a 360K
diskette in your high-density diskette drive. To create the program and name it
MYFMT.BAT, use the following E command:
e c: \myfmt. ba t
At this point, the file is empty and the cursqr is placed where you can add the
FORMAT command to the file. Type the following:
format a: If:360
Now you are ready to close the file and return to the DOS command prompt. You
do so by pressing F4.
After you have created the batch program, you need only type the name of the
batch program to format a 360K diskette in your high-density diskette drive, as
follows:
myfmt
DOS displays the FORMAT command on the screen, and then prompts you to
insert a diskette into drive A. Make sure the directory that contains this batch·
program is either current or in the directory search path.
100
PC DOS User's Guide
Testing a Batch Program
It is generally best to a create a large batch program in stages. This ensures that
one part of the batch program works before you create another part.
When you run a batch program that contains a command that is not valid, DOS
cancels that command and proceeds to the next. If the batch program is set up to
display commands as they are carried out, you will see an error message when a
command is not valid. If commands are not displayed, the batch program will
contain an ECHO OFF command. Remove any ECHO OFF commands if you want
commands to be displayed along with the error messages.
Displaying Messages with a Batch Program
You can include messages in a batch program to prompt you for additional
information or to remind you of a particular task that the batch program does.
When you want DOS to display a message on your screen, use the ECHO
command. For example, to display the message Put a di skette into dri ve A,
you would use the following command:
echo Put a diskette into drive A
Tip: On networks; your message is displayed quicker when you put it in a .TXT file
and then use the TYPE command in your batch program to display the message.
DOS displays this message on the screen. When you want the ~essage shifted to
the right a certain number of spaces, you must include the spaces as part of the
message. For example, to center the message on your screen, add the necessary
spaces in the command, as follows:
echo
Put a diskette into drive A
When you want to skip a line, type ECHO followed by a period:
echo.
When ECHO is on, DOS displays batch commands at the command prompt as it
carries them out. Therefore, the message in the preceding example (Put a
di skette into dri ve A) is displayed twice: first at the command prompt as part of
the batch command and then as a prompt to carry out the command itself. To.
suppress commands that appear at the command prompt and display a message
only once, use the following command:
echo off
Make this command the first line of your program.
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
101
To prevent a single command in your batch program from being displayed, put an
at sign (@) in front of it. For example, to prevent the display of the ECHO OFF
command, type:
@echo off
When you want commands to be displayed, use this command at the beginning of
the program:
echo on
Using the PAUSE Command
To momentarily stop a batch program at a predetermined command or print task,
use the PAUSE command in the batch program, as follows:
pause
When DOS finds a PAUSE command in a batch program, it displays the following
message:
Press any key to continue ...
DOS stops running the program until you press any key (except the PAUSE key).
For example, adding a PAUSE command to the following COPYIT.BAT program
stops the program from running while you put a diskette into drive A.
echo off
echo Put a diskette into drive A then
pause
copy c:\work\may\*.txt a:
copy c:\reports\may\*.doc a:
cls
echo Here are the files you copied:
echo.
dir a: /p
When this batch program pauses, DOS displays the following:
Put a diskette into drive A then
Press any key to continue ...
102
PC DOS User's Guide
Including Remarks in a Batch Program
When your batch program is longer than a few lines, it is helpful to include remarks.
You can use remarks to comment on the commands in a batch program and to
make the program easier to read by separating it into sections.
You add a remark by typing rem followed by a space and the comment you want to
include, as in this example:
rem'This part of the batch program copies files to a diskette.
Note: Ensure that the ECHO command is turned off before using the REM
command.
After you type rem and a space, DOS ignores any other text on the line. Therefore,
you can type any character you want on the remark line or leave it blank with the
exception of the following character symbols that have special meanings for
COMMAND.COM:
• less-than «)
• greater-than (»
• pipe ( I )
For example, the following remarks divide and explain sections of COPYIT.BAT:
rem *****Copy of the MAY subdirectories*****
rem
echo off
echo Put a diskette into drive A then
pause
copy c:\work\may\*.txt a:
copy c:\reports\may\*.doc a:
rem
rem Clear the screen and display the files that were copied
rem
cls
echo Here are the files you copied:
echo.
dir a: /p
Remarks do not affect the way a batch program runs; they simply annotate the
'
commands for anyone who reads the file.
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
103
Running One Batch Program from Another
You can run a batch program from another batch program by including just the
name of the program you want to start or by including the CALL command with the
name of the program. If you type only the name, the original batch program quits
running, and the new batch program runs.
For example, the following batch program runs four commands and then starts a
batch program named NEXTONE:
a:
cd\tmp
copy c:\*.sys a:
cd\perm
nextone
When NEXTONE finishes running, DOS displays the command prompt.
If you want to return to the original batch program after running the other batch
program, use a CALL command with the name of the program you want to start.
When the second batch program finishes running, DOS returns to the original batch
program and carries out the next command.
For example, the following batch program carries out two commands, starts
NEXTONE, and then carries out ,two more commands when NEXTONE finishes
running:
a:
cd\tmp
call nextone
copy c:\*.sys a:
cd\perm
104
PC DOS User's Guide
Using Replaceable Parameters
DOS includes symbols called replaceable parameters, numbered %0 through %9.
You can include replaceable parameters in a batch program. When you run the
batch program, DOS replaces the symbol with the parameter you include when you
type the batch command.
The %0 replaceable parameter substitutes for the name of the batch command as it
is typed at the DOS command prompt.
Replaceable parameters %1 through %9 substitute for command-line parameters
typed after the batch-command name. The first parameter on the command line is
%1, the second is %2, and so on. If you want to specify more than nine
parameters, use the SHIFT command.
Type hel p shi ft for information about the SHIFT command.
Suppose you created a batch program (COPYIT.BAT) that moved data from one
subdirectory to another. After the creation of the batch program, you could use the
replaceable parameter feature to accomplish this task. The following example
illustrates this:
copyit %1 %2
This batch program in COPYIT.BAT is set up to move all information from the first
parameter %1 to the second parameter %2. If you wanted to move all information
from subdirectory c: \apr; 1\ *. * to drive A using the replaceable parameters,type
the following at the DOS command prompt:
copyit c:\april\*.* a:
DOS replaces %1 with c: \april \ *. * and %2 with a:
Note: If you use the percent ,sign (%) as part of a file name or string within a batch
program, you must type it twice. The first occurrence indicates that the
second % is part of a name, rather than a replaceable parameter.
In addition to replaceable parameters, you can use environment variables in a batch
program. Type help set for information about environment variables and an
example of how to use one in a batch program.
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
105
Controlling Program Flow
To increase the flexibility of a .batch program, you can use the IF command to carry
out different commands under different conditions and use the GOTO command to
switch to different parts of the program. By using replaceable parameters with IF
and GOTO commands in a batch program, you can perform complex tasks.
Using the IF Command
You can use the IF command to specify a condition that must be true for a
command to be carried out. For example, suppose you want to create a batch
program named RUNIT.BAT that starts your chess program, CMATE, when you
type the following command:
runit A
To perform this task, include the following IF command in RUNIT.BAT: '
if l%tn==IA" cmate
The double equal sign (==) means the parameter must equal the value. When DOS
carries out this command, it checks to see whether or not %1 is an A. If %1 is an
A, DOS carries out the command that follows (in this case, it starts the CMATE
program). When you quit CMATE, DOS carries out the command on the next line
of RUNIT.BAT.
If % 1 is not an A, DOS skips the command that runs CMATE and moves to the
next line of the batch program. Both the parameter and the letter with which it is
compared should be enclosed in quotation marks to avoid syntax errors when no
parameter is present.
USing the GOTO Command
The GOTO command directs your program to switch to another part of the program
and continue processing the commands at that point. The line that the program is
to switch to is marked with a label preceded by a colon (:). The same label
appears in the GOTO command, as in the following example:
goto ski, pdown
echo both of these echo commands
echo will be skipped
:skipdown
cls
106
PC DOS User's Guide
Using the IF and GOTO Commands Together
If you use the GOTO command with an IF command, you can run different sections
of a batch program under different conditions. For example, when you are at the
command line about to run the batch file, the following command directs DOS to
switch to the line labeled chess if you type an uppercase A:
if lJ%l lJ == IJ AIJ goto chess
Using a series of IF commands, you can create a batch program that can run
several programs. For example, the following batch program changes to the
C:\GAMES\CHESS directory and runs the CMATE program if you type an
uppercase A; it also changes to the C:\GAMES\CHECK directory and runs the
CHECKERS program if you type anything but an uppercase A.
if 1J%1"==IJAIJ goto chess
rem
rem****************************************************
rem If the user doesn't type A, run Checkers.
rem
cd\games\check
checkers
rem Checkers game has finished running to the end of this batch file
rem Skip over Chess by jumping to the line labeled :end.
goto end
rem
rem
rem *******************************************************
rem If DOS jumps to this label, the user wants Chess.
rem
:chess
cd\games\chess
cmate
rem The following line marks the end of the batch program.
:end
Chapter 7. Working with Batch Programs
107
108
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 8. Redirecting Input and Output
Redirection characters let you perform many useful tasks. A redirection character
changes the place that a command gets information from or sends information to.
Redirection characters are useful when you want DOS to save information in a file
rather than display it on your screen. You can also use a filter command to redirect
information that a command typically would send to the screen. Filter commands
help you sort, view, and select parts of the output of a command.
Redirecting Command Input and Output
Unless you specify otherwise, DOS receives input from your keyboard and sends
output to your screen. Sometimes it is useful to redirect the input or output to a file
or a printer. For example, you might want to redirect a directory listing from the
screen to a file.
To redirect the input or output of a command, use one of the following redirection
characters:
• The greater-than sign (» sends the output of a command to a file or a device,
such as a printer.
• The less-than sign «) takes the input needed for a command from a file rather
than from the keyboard.
• The double greater-than sign (») adds output from a command to the end of a
file without deleting the information already in the file.
Redirecting the Output of a Command
Almost all commands send output to your screen. Even commands that send
output to a drive or printer also display messages and prompts on your screen.
To redirect the output from the screen to a file or printer, use the greater-than sign
(». You can use the greater-than sign with most DOS commands. For example,
in the following command, the directory listing produced by the DIR command is
redirected to the DIRLlST.TXT file:
dir> dirlist.txt
If the DIRLlST.TXT file does not exist, DOS creates it. If DIRLlST.TXT exists, DOS
replaces the information in the file with the output from the DIR command.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
109
The following command creates a file named CHECKDSKTXT, which contains the
output of the CHKDSK command:
chkdsk a:
>
checkdsk.txt
If CHECKDSKTXT already exists, DOS replaces its contents with the output that
the CHKDSK command usually sends to your screen.
To add the output from a command to the end of a file without losing any of the
information already in the file, use a double greater-than sign (»). For example, in
the following command, the directory listing produced by the DIR command is
appended to the DIRLlST.TXT file:
dir » dirlist.txt
To send the output of a command to a printer, use the greater-than sign with the
name of the port to which the printer is connected. For example, the following
command redirects the output of the DIR command from the screen to the printer
attached to the LPT1 port:
dir
lptl
>
Note: Some command output, such as error messages, cannot be redirected
when using the greater-than sign (».
Redirecting the Input to a Command
Just as you can send the output of a command to a file or printer rather than to
your screen, you can take the input for a command from a file rather than from the
keyboard. To take input from a file, use the less-than sign «). For example, the
following command takes the input for the SORT command from the LlST.TXT file:
sort
<
1i st. txt
DOS alphabetizes the lines of the LlST.TXT file and displays the result on your
screen.
For more information about the SORT command, see "Sorting Text Files" on
page 112.
11 0
PC DOS User's Guide
Passing Information through Filter Commands
Filter commands divide, rearrange, or extract portions of the information that passes
through them. DOS has three filter commands:
• The MORE command displays the contents of a file or the output of a
command one screen at a time.
• The FIND command searches through files and command output for the
characters you specify.
• The SORT command alphabetizes files and command output.
To send input from a file to a filter command, use the less-than sign «). If you
want the filter command to get its input from another command, use the pipe (I).
Before using the pipe, you should set a TEMP environ~ent variable. For
information about setting environment variables using the SET command, type
hel p set at the DOS command prompt.
I
Controlling the Screen Display by USing the MORE Command
The MORE command displays the contents of a file or the output of a command
one screen at a time. For example, the following M9RE command displays the
contents of the LlST.TXT file one screen at a time:
more < list. txt
After a screen of information is displayed, you see the word More appear. To
continue to the next screen, press any key. To stop the command without viewing
more information, press CTRL+C.
The MORE command is helpful if you are working with a command that produces
more than one screen of output. For example, suppose you want to view a
directory tree for your hard disk. If you have more directories than DOS can display
on the screen, you can use the TREE command with a pipe (I) and a MORE
command as in the following example:
tree c:\
I more
The first screen of output from the TREE command is displayed, followed by the
word More. DOS pauses until you press any key (except the PAUSE key).
Chapter 8. Redirecting Input and Output
111
Searching for Text by Using the FIND Command
The FIND command searches one or more files for the text you specify. DOS
displays every line containing that text. The FIND command can be used as a filter
command or as a standard DOS command.
For information about the FIND command as a standard DOS command, type
he 1p fi nd at the DOS command prompt.
To use FIND as a filter command, include a less-than sign «) and a file name to
search through. The search is case-sensitive. For example, the following
command finds occurrences of the'string Paci fi c Rim in the file TRADE.TXT:
find "Pacific Rim"
<
trade.txt
To save the output of the FIND command rather than display it, use a greater-than
sign (» and the name of the file that is to store the output. For example, the
following command finds occurrences of Paci fi c Rim in the TRADE.TXT file and
saves them in the NWTRADE.TXT file:
find "Pacific Rim"
<
trade. txt
>
nwtrade.txt
To print the output rather than display it, use a greater-than sign and the name of
the port your printer is attached to, as in the following command:
find "Pacific Rim"
<
trade. txt
>
LPTI
Sorting Text Files
The SORT command alphabetizes a text file or the output of a command. For
example, you would use the following command to sort the contents of a file named
LlST.TXT and display the results on your screen:
sort
<
1i st. txt
In this example, the SORT command sorts the lines of the LlST.TXT file and
displays the results without changing the file. To save the output of the SORT
command rather than display it, include a greater-than sign (» and a file name in
the command. For example, you would use the following command to alphabetize
the lines of the LlST.TXT file and store the results in the ALPHLlST.TXT file:
sort
112
<
list.txt
PC DOS User's Guide
>
alphlist.txt
To sort the output of a command, type the command followed by a pipe (/) and the
SORT command. For example, the following command sorts the output of the
FIND command:
find "Jones" maillst.txt
I
sort
When you type this command, DOS lists in alphabetical order the lines in which the
,string Jones appears.
You can use the SORT command on files that are 64K or less in size. Type
hel p sort for more information about the SORT command.
Combining Commands with Redirection Characters
You can combine filter commands, other commands, and file names to make
custom commands. For example, you might use the following command to store
the names of files that contain the LOG string:
dir
/b I find "LOG"
>
loglist.txt
DOS sends the output of the DIR command through the FIND filter command and
stores the file names that contain the LOG string in the LOGLlST.TXT file. The
results are stored as a list of file names (for example, A.LOG, LOGDAT.SVD, and
MYLOG.BAT).
To use more than one filter in the same command, separate the filters with a pipe
(I). The following command would search every directory on drive C, find the file
names that include the string LOG and display them one screen at a time:
dir c:\ /s /b
I
find "LOG"
I more
Because you use a pipe (I), DOS sends the output of the DIR command through
the FIND command. The FIND command selects only file names that contain the
LOG string. The MORE command displays the file names that are selected by the
FIND command-one screen at a time.
Chapter 8. Redirecting Input and Output
113
114
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 9. Using COSKey and Editing Keys
You can use editing keys to quickly view and edit your last command rather than
retype it. In addition, you can use the DOSKey program to do your editing. The
DOSKEY command-line statement has been added automatically by the PC DOS
Setup program to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This program is loaded and ready to
use every time you start your computer. The DOSKey program includes the DOS
editing keys plus a number of other keys that are useful for editing commands.
Using the DOSKey program, you can also:
• Store the commands you use over and over again so that you do not have to
retype them to use them.
• Create macros that contain a series of commands. A macro runs much like a
batch program.
Using DOSKey to Work with Commands
You can use the DOSKey program to view, edit, and carry out DOS commands that
you have used previously. DOSKey includes the DOS editing keys and other keys
that make it easy for you to use previous commands. When using DOSKey, you
can type several commands on one line.
In addition, you can create, run, and save command macros A macro is one or
more DOS commands that are stored in random-access memory (RAM). It runs
much like a batch program. The first time you use DOSKey, it is loaded into RAM.
Thereafter, DOS saves your previous commands and any macros you create.
Although you have more editing power with DOSKey than you do with DOS editing
keys, DOSKey takes up a small amount of your computer's memory. If you need
the maximum amount of memory for other purposes, you might want to use DOS
editing keys instead of DOSKey.
Loading DOSKey Into Memory
To load the DOSKey program into memory, type the following at the DOS
command prompt:
doskey
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
115
Unless you indicate otherwise, DOS reserves 512 bytes of memory for the
commands and macros you record. If your average command contains 15
characters, you can store or have the ability to recall about 35 commands with the
amount of memory reserved. The resident portion· of the DOSKey program itself
occupies about 4K of memory.
Note: If your are running HIMEM.SYS, DOSkey occupies about 1K of memory.
If you want to reserve more or less memory, you can include the /bufsize= switch .
in the command. For example, to reserve 300 bytes of memory for recorded
commands, type:
doskey /bufsize=300
As the memory you reserved for DOS Key is used up, the oldest commands are
removed so that the new ones can be stored in the buffer. You can clear the buffer
by pressing ALT+F7.
Typing More Than One Command on a Line
Typically, you type one command per line. After you install DOSKey, you can type
several commands on a line. You separate each command by pressing CTRL+ T. A
paragraph mark (~) appears on your screen each time you press CTRL+T. You can
type as many commands as you like on one line as long as the total line length
does not exceed 127 characters.
For example, to delete all the files in the \TMP directory and then remove the
directory, type the following two commands on the same line:
del \tmp\*.* ~ rd \tmp
The DEL command is initiated and you are prompted to confirm the deletion. Then
the second commarid is initiated.
Viewing Previous Commands
When DOSKey is loaded, it keeps a list of your commands as you type them. You
can use the following keys to view previous commands. To carry out a command
again after it is displayed, press ENTER.
116
PC DOS User's Guide
Editing Key
Command Carried Out
UPARROW
Displays the previous command in the list.
DOWN ARROW
Displays the next command in the list.
F7
Displays the list of commands DOSKey has stored.
Fa
Cycles through the stored commands that start with the characters you
specify. (You type the search text and then press Fa).
F9
Prompts you to type the number of the stored command you want. To
see the numbered list of commands, press F7.
PAGE UP
Displays the oldest command in the list.
PAGE DOWN
Displays the newest command in the list.
ESC
Clears the command from the screen.
Viewing the List of Stored Commands
DOS Key displays a numbered list of the commands it saves. For example,
suppose you type the following three commands after you load DOS Key:
copy c:\work\*.txt c:\revised
dir c:\revised\*.txt
dir c:\work\*.txt
DOSKey saves the three commands. To view the full list of commands, press F7.
A numbered list of the commands appears:
1: copy c:\work\*.txt c:\revised
2: dir c:\revised\*.txt
3: dir c:\work\*.txt
If there are more commands in the list than can fit on one screen, DOS Key pauses
after each screen of commands. To see the next screen of commands in the list,
press any key except PAUSE.
Viewing the Previous or Next Command
The first time you press the UP ARROW key, DOSKey displays the most recent
command. You can reuse the command by pressing ENTER.
If you press the UP ARROW key more than once, DOSKey displays commands
further back in the list. To move backward in the list and view the next most recent
command, press the UP ARROW key again. Continue this process to move
backward in the list of commands.
To move forward in the list, press the DOWN ARROW key.
Chapter 9. Using DOS Key and Editing Keys
117
Viewing the First or Last Command
To view the most recent command, press PAGE DOWN. To view the oldest
command, press PAGE UP.
Viewing Other Commands in the List
You can use F9 or Fa to view a specific command in the list. Suppose DOSKey
has saved the following list of commands:
1: a:
2: di r
3: c:\myuts\figdsk a: time=30 space=35.B
4: di r
5: del *.tmp
If you want to view command number 3, you can use the arrow keys or press F9.
When you press F9, the following appears:
Line number:
To view line 3, type 3 and then press ENTER.
You can also use Fa to view a command that begins with letters you specify. For
example, to view a command that begins with C:\, type c: \ at the DOS command
prompt and then press Fa.
When you press Fa, DOS Key displays the most recent command that begins with
the characters you typed. You can press Fa again to view the next command in the
listthat begins with the characters you typed. Keep pressing Fa to cycle through all
the matching commands. If DOS Key does not find a matching command in the list,
nothing happens.
Editing and Using Previous Commands
As you type a new command or after you view a previous command, you can use
editing keys to change it. You can use the same editing keys with DOSKey that
you use with the command template. When you use some of these keys with
DOSKey, however, you see slightly different results. DOSKey provides a number of
additional editing keys that make it easy to change a previously typed command.
The editing keys affect only the displayed command; they do not change any
commands that DOS Key has already stored.
118
PC DOS User's Guide
You can use the following editing movement keys with DOSKey:
Editing Key
Movement Carried Out
HOME
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the displayed command.
END
Moves the cursor to the end of the displayed command.
LEFT ARROW
Moves the cursor back one character in the displayed command.
RIGHT ARROW
Moves the cursor forward one character in the displayed command.
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Moves the cursor back one word in the displayed command.
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Moves the cursor forward one word in the displayed command.
BACKSPACE
Deletes the character before the cursor on the current command
line, without affecting the template.
DEL
Deletes the character at the cursor.
CTRL+END
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.
CTRL+HOME
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
INSERT
Toggles between insert mode and replace mode.
ESC
Clears the displayed command from the screen.
If you hold down CTRL while you press the RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW key, the
cursor moves to the beginning of the next or previous word. A word in this case is
a group of characters separated from other characters by a space. For example,
the following command has three words:
copy c:\games\suzz.exe a:_
If the cursor is at the end of the line, as in this example, you can move it to the "C"
in C:\GAMES\SUZZ.EXE by pressing CTRL+LEFT ARROW twice.
With the cursor anywhere in the word C:\GAMES\SUZZ.EXE, you can move the
cursor to the beginning of the next word by pressing CTRL+RIGHT ARROW. If you
press CTRL+RIGHT ARROW again, the cursor moves to the end of the line.
By pressing the INSERT key, you can add characters at the position of the cursor.
The INSERT key toggles between insert and replace mode. In replace mode, new
characters you type replace any characters that follow the cursor. After you press
the INSERT key, you switch to insert mode; the character at the cursor position and
the characters following the cursor move right as you type. For example, suppose
the following line is displayed, and the cursor is under the S in SUZZ.EXE:
copy c:\games\suzz.exe a:
Chapter 9. Using DOS Key and Editing Keys
119
To change the line so that C:\GAMES\SUZZ.EXE becomes
C:\GAMES\NEW\SUZZ.EXE, you press the INSERT key and type new\. The line
now appears like this:
copy c:\games\new\suzz.exe a:
To turn off insert mode, press the INSERT key again. The characters you now type
replace any characters following the cursor. Insert mode is turned off when you
press ENTER to carry out a command. You can start DOSKey and specify insert
mode as the default by using the /insert switch.
Type hel p doskey for more information about the DOSKEY command.
Deleting the List of Stored Commands
To delete the list of stored commands and begin a new list, press ALT +F7. The list
is also deleted when you reload DOSKey or reset your system.
Saving the List of Stored Commands in a Batch Program
To save the list of stored commands, you can type the DOSKEY command with the
/history switch, the output redirection character (», and the name of the file in
which you want the list stored. For example, to store your list of commands in the
SAVCOMMS.TXTfile, type:
doskey /history
>
savcomms.txt
To create a batch program by using DOSKey, first press ALT +F7 to delete the list of
commands from DOSKey. Then, type the commands you want to save. Use the
/history switch to save the commarids in a file with a .BAT extension.
Using DOSKey to Work with Macros
A macro is a set of commands that you can carry out by typing the name of the
macro. A macro is very much like a batch program. Both contain sets of
commands that you carry out by typing a name.
120
PC DOS User's Guide
A macro has the following characteristics:
• It is stored in RAM and, as a result, processes much faster than a batch
program.
• It can be run from any directory.
• The macro is created as one command or a series of commands separated by
a special character all on one line. The total length of the macro cannot
exceed 127 characters.
• You can use replaceable parameters. These are represented by the characters
$1 through $9.
• Macros are lost each time you turn your system off or reset it. This can be
avoided by putting the definition commands for the macros you commonly use
into one batch program. To make the macros available, you run the batch
program.
Creating a Macro
To create a macro, type dos key followed by the macro name, an equal sign, and
the commands in the macro. For example, to create a macro called DDIR that·
displays a directory in wide format, type:
doskey ddir=dir /w
If you type ddi r at the DOS command prompt, DOS processes the macro,
displaying a five-column list of the files in the current directory. Because the macro
is stored in memory, it does not matter which directory is current when you run it.
To include more than one command in a macro, separate the commands with a
dollar sign ($) and the letter T. For example, the following command creates a
macro called CMP that alphabetizes and lists the .DOC files and then the .BAK files
in the current directory:
doskey cmp=dir *.doc /o:n $t dir *.bak /o:n
While you are creating and testing a macro, it is easiest to type the command that
defines the macro at the DOS command prompt. Then, you can use the DOSKey
editing keys to change and redefine the macro quickly.
Because macros are stored in memory, they are lost when you turn your system off
or reset it. therefore, if you create a macro that you use often, put the command
that defines the macro in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file so the macro is available each
time DOS starts.
Chapter 9. Using ObSKey and Editing Keys
121
Running a Macro
To run a macro, type its name at the DOS command prompt. For example, to run
the DDIR macro, type:
ddir
There cannot be any space between the DOS command prompt and the macro
name. If there is, DOS does not recognize the name and displays the following
message:
Bad command or file name
Suppose you want to create a macro that has the same name as a command. You
could use the following command to create a macro called DIR so that typing di r
would replace the DOS DIR command:
doskey dir=dir /w
When you have a macro with the same name as a command, DOS runs the macro
rather than the command. Thus, when you are at the DOS command prompt, DOS
runs the DIR macro rather than the DIR command.
Whenever you want to use the DIR command instead of the DIR macro, you can
type a space between di r and the DOS command prompt. Now, DOS does not
recognize DIR as a macro name, but it does recognize it ~s a command.
You cannot run a macro from within a batch program, but you can define it in a
batch program. For more information about batch programs, see Chapter 7,
"Workin"g with Batch Programs" on page 97.
When you want to stop a currently running macro, you must press CTRL+C for
every command in the macro. Each time you press CTRL+C in a macro, DOS stops
the command it is currently processing.
122
PC DOS User's Guide'
Editing a Macro
You can change a macro by editing the command that created it. If the macro is
defined in a batch program, you can edit the batch program and then run it again.
If the macro is one of the commands that DOSKey has stored, you can redisplay
the macro command, edit it by using DOSKey editing keys, and complete the edit
by pressing ENTER. For information about DOSKey editing keys, see "Editing and
Using Previous Commands" on page 118.
Saving a Macro
To save macros stored in memory, use the DOSKEY command with the /macros
switch, a greater-than sign (», and a file name. In the following example, the
names and contents of the macros currently in memory are stored in the
MACS. BAT file:
doskey Imacros
>
macs.bat
If you add the DOSKEY command to the beginning of each macro that you saved
in the MACS.BAT file, you can load the macros into memory by running the batch
program. For example, suppose you created the following three macros and saved
them in the MACS.BAT file:
ddir=dir loe Ip
mv=copy $1 $2 $t del $1
where=dir Is Ip $1:\*.$2
If you want these macros to be available each time you start your system, first add
the DOSKEY command to them, as follows:
doskey ddir=dir loe Ip
doskey mv=copy $1 $2 $t del $1
doskey where=dir Is Ip $1:\*.$2
Each time you run the batch program, DOSKey loads the three macros into
memory. You might want to run the batch program from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file
by using the CALL command. Put the name of the batch file after the CALL
command. When you start your system, the macros are re-created. For more
information about the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, see Chapter 4, "Configuring Your
System" on page 53.
Chapter 9. Using DOS Key and Editing Keys
123
Deleting a Macro
To delete a macro, type doskey, followed by the name of the macro you want to
delete plus an equal sign. For example, to delete the DDIR macro, type:
doskey ddir=
DOS Key removes the macro from memory., To delete all macros, press ALT +F1 o.
Deleting macros makes the memory available for other macros, but it does not
return the memory to the command-history buffer.
Using Replaceable Parameters
You can use replaceable parameters in a macro in much the same way you use
them in a batch program. In a macro, the replaceable parameters are $1 through
$9 rather than %1 through %9.
For example, the following command creates a macro named FINDIT that searches
through the directories on drive C for file names that match the one you specify:
doskey findit=dir c:\$1 /s
The /s switch is used to display file names from all directories on drive C (including
the current directory) that match the file name you specify.
To run this macro, type fi ndi t followed by a file name at the DOS command
prompt. For example, to locate all files on drive C that have the extension .OLD,
type:
findit *.old
DOSKey substitutes the file name you type for the $1 parameter in the macro. The
resulting command looks like this:
dir c:\*.old /s
You can use the same parameter more than once in a macro. For example, the
following command creates a macro called DDEL. This macro moves a file to a
directory named DELETED on drive C.
doskey ddel=copy $1 c:\deleted $t del $1
124
PC DOS User's Guide
When you run the DDEL macro, you type the name of the file that is to go into the
C:\DELETED directory. DOSKey replaces the $1 in the macro with the file name.
It copies the file to DELETED and then deletes it from its original directory.
To delete the files in the C:\DELETED directory, you can use this macro named
CLEANUP:
doskey cleanup=dir c:\deleted $t del c:\deleted\*.*
The macro displays a list of files in the C:\DELETED directory and then starts the
DEL command. Because the DEL command prompts you to confirm deletion of all
the files, you have a chance to review the file names before deleting any files.
Using the $* Replaceable Parameter
You can use the $* replaceable parameter to assign to a single parameter all of the
text following the command that starts a macro. Typically, DOS distinguishes
parameters by looking for a space. The text between the first two spaces is the
first parameter, the text between the second and third spaces is the second
parameter, and so on. If you use the $* parameter, DOSKey ignores spaces and
assigns all text to the $* parameter.
The $* parameter is most useful when the macro you create uses a variable
number of parameters. For example, you can use the following command to create
a macro named D that allows you to abbreviate the DIR command:
doskey d=dir $*
This macro works exactly like the DIR command, regardless of the number of
parameters you specify. For example, all of the following commands are carried
out in the same way with the D macro as they are with the DIR command:
d *.txt
d *.txt /5
d *.txt /5 /b
If you use the $1 parameter instead of the $* parameter with the macro, DOS
substitutes the first parameter and ignores the rest of the command line.
Chapter 9. Using DOS Key and Editing Keys
125
Redirecting Input and Output
You redirect input and output in macros the same way you do using DOS
commands. The only difference is that macros require different characters:
Character
Redirection
$L (or $1)
Equivalent to the less-than sign
command.
$G (or $9)
Equivalent to the greater-than sign (». It redirects the output
from a command.
$G$G (or $9$9)
Equivalent to the double greater-than sign (»). It appends output
onto the end of a file.
$8 (or $b)
Equivalent to the pipe (
to another.
I ).
«).
It redirects the input to a
It redirects output from one command
For example, the following command creates a macro named PDIR that prints
directory listings:
doskey pdir=dir $g lpt1:
The following command creates a macro named MTYPE that displays the contents
of the file you specify and pauses between each screen of information:
doskey mtype=type $1 $b more
The following command creates a macro named ASORT that alphabetizes the file
and stores the information in a different file:
doskey asort=sort $L $1 $g $2
To run this macro, you type the file name you want to sort. DOSKey replaces the
$1 replaceable parameter with the first file name you specify. The $L parameter
redirects the file to the SORT command. The $9 and $2 paramE11ers redirect the
output of the SORT command to the second file you specify.
For example, after you create the ASORT macro, type the following:
asort input.txt output.txt
This is the same as typing:
sort
126
<
input.txt
PC DOS User's Guide
>
output. txt
When defining a DOSKey macro, you must mark the dollar sign ($) when it occurs
anywhere other than in parameters, command separators, and redirection
characters. You mark it by typing two dollar signs rather than one.
For example, suppose your macro copies a file to the $&CENTS directory. When
you type the name of the directory, you must use "$$¢s" in your macro
definition. As the command is carried out, the dollar sign is assumed to be a
standard character rather than a marker or parameter.
Using DOS Editing Keys
This section describes the editing keys you can use if you do not have the DOS Key
program loaded in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Because the PC DOS 7 Setup
program installs the DOSKEY command for you, you will need to remove or
comment out (REM) the DOSKEY command-line statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file before you can use the DOS editing keys or any other
third-party command retrieval program.
DOS provides several editing keys that you can use to edit the last command you
typed at the command line. For example, suppose you misspell the name of a file
in a COPY command. Rather than retype the entire command, you can use editing
keys to view the command and change the part that is misspelled.
When you type a command, DOS carries out the command and saves it in a
temporary location called the template. For example, suppose you type:
type ada. txt
When you press ENTER, DOS displays the contents of ADA.TXT and copies the
command type ada. txt to the template. The template can contain only the
previously typed command. For information about saving and reusing more than
one command, see "Using DOSKey to Work with Commands" on page 115.
Chapter 9. Using DOSKey and Editing Keys
127
You can use the command stored in the template as a starting point for typing your
next command. The following editing keys display and edit the previous command
stored in the template:
Editing Key
Command Carried Out
F1 (or RIGHT
ARROW)
Copies the previous command to your screen, one character at a time.
One character is displayed each time you press F1. For example, if
your last command was dir c:\work\finals\*.bak, by pressing F1
three times, di r is displayed at the DOS command prompt.
To add a character, press,the INSERT key, type the character, and
press F1 to display the rest of your command one character at a time.
F2
Copies the 'previous command to your screen, up to but not including
the character you specify. For example, dir c:\worknew\final was
your last command. If you press F2 and type \, di r c: is displayed at
the DOS command prompt.
F3
Copies the remainder of the previous command to your screen.
F4
Deletes the previous command from the template, starting from the
beginning of the command, up to but not including the letter you specify.
For example, if type ada. txt was the previous command, press F4 and
type d before pressing F3 to copy the template to your screen. DOS
displays da. txt at the DOS command prompt.
F5
Copies the current command line to the template but does not carry out
the command.
F6
Places a CTRL+Z character ("Z) in the current command line.
LEFT ARROW or
BACKSPACE
Deletes the character before the cursor on the current command line,
without affecting the template.
DEL
Deletes the character on the template corresponding to the current
cursor position.
INSERT
Starts insert mode so that characters you type do not replace
characters in the same position in the template. Press the INSERT key
again to stop insert mode.
ESC
Cancels the current command line without carrying it out, leaving the
template unchanged.
Note: Some of these keys function differently when DOSKey is loaded.
128
PC DOS User's Guide
Copying a Previously Typed Command
When you type a command, DOS carries it out, copies the command to the
template, and displays the DOS command prompt. For example, suppose you
type:
copy c:\work\*.txt a:
The files are copied to a diskette in drive A, the command is copied to the template,
and the DOS command prompt appears. At this point, you can view the entire
previous command by pressing F3. The command from the template is displayed:
copy c:\work\*.txt a:_
The cursor appears at the end of the command. To copy your files to another disk,
insert a different disk in drive A and then press ENTER. DOS carries out the COPY
command again.
Editing a Previously Typed Command
Using F3 and the LEFT ARROW key, you can quickly fix a command that you
mistyped. For example, suppose you typed *. dpc and pressed ENTER when you
meant to type *. doc, as in the following command:
copy c:\work\*.dpc a:
Rather than retype the command, you can edit the incorrect one. To edit the
command, first press F3. The command from the template is displayed:
copy c:\work\*.dpc a:_
The cursor appears at the end of the command. To change dpc to doc, press the
LEFT ARROW key five times to move the cursor back five spaces:
copy c:\work\*.d_
To correct the command, type
0,
press F3, and then press ENTER.
Chapter 9. Using DOS Key and Editing Keys
129
130
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
The E Editor is the text editor provided with PC DOS. A text editor allows you to
create, edit, and print memos, letters, and special files (such as AUTO EXEC. BAT or
CONFIG.SYS) that customize DOS. For prior users of the E Editor, you will find
the E Editor provided with PC DOS 7 has many new enhancements.
The E Editor that comes with PC DOS, is not intended to take the place of a word
processing program. While some word processing function may be noticed, the
E Editor is not intended to be a substitute for your word processing program. For
readers who are interested in comparing the differences of a text editor to a word
processing program, see "Comparing a Text Editor and a Word Processing
Program" on page 172.
What's New about the E Editor for PC DOS 7
PC DOS 7 introduces many new features and enhancements to the E Editor.
Some that will prove beneficial are:
• Menu selections for most of the tasks you perform with a text editor.
• The ability to use a mouse to make selections and mark text.
• Improved use for the F11 and F12 keys on an enhanced keyboard to switch
between loaded files. If you do not have an enhanced keyboard, you can use
the key combinations of CTRL+P or CTRL+N.
• The ability to browse a file in read-only mode so that you do not inadvertently
change or delete it.
• An editable E.INI file that allows you to customize most functions of the
E Editor There is no need to reboot after making changes to the E.INI file; exit
the E Editor for changes to take effect.
• Syntax-directed editing for REXX and C files.
• Expanded math capabilities so that you can work with larger numbers, including
- binary numbers.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
131
Choosing a Text Editor
The E Editor:
Using the E Editor, you can type commands from the E Editor command line or
use the menus to do selected editing tasks. Some of the things you can do are as
follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select text and move, copy, overlay, or delete it.
Copy and move text from one file into another file.
Access multiple files.
Locate and make a change globally in a file.
Size and drag an editing window.
Draw boxes around text.
Add and multiply numbers in a marked area.
Change characters in a marked area to all uppercase or all lowercase letters.
Edit large text files.
Use online help for information about the E Editor function keys and
commands.
This chapter only discusses how to use the E Editor. It does not give instructions
on using the EDLIN text editor or the DOS 5.0 text editor.
The EDLIN editor:
EDLIN is a line editor included in previous versions of DOS. If you are upgrading
your version of DOS, the EDLIN editor is not removed from your system so it is
also available to use as a text editor.
The DOS 5.0 Editor:
When you install this version of DOS, it analyzes your system and determines if you
have a previous version of DOS on your system. If you are a previous user of
DOS 5.0, the DOS editor provided with DOS 5.0 will still be available for your use.
If you prefer to use this editor, you can type edi t at the DOS command prompt
(C:>\) followed by the path and name of the file you want, to load the DOS 5.0
Editor.
132
PC DOS User's Guide
Starting the E Editor
You can start the E Editor by typing e (or e followed by the path and name of the
file) at the DOS command prompt.
When you load the E Editor, you have the option of using the E Editor command
line for all your editing tasks or using the menus to perform selected editing tasks.
If you use the E Editor command line, you need to press ESC to switch between
the command line and the editing window.
Viewing the E Editor Screen
After you start the E Editor and begin typing, the version number displayed is
replaced by the function keys at the bottom of the screen and you see a screen
similar to the following:
Text Input Area
(expands as you enter text)
====== Top of
file~
====== Bottom of file ======
Command Line
F1=Hel
2=Save
3=Close
4=File
Line
5=Print
Z Col
7=Hename
1 Insert
8=0 en 9=Undo
E 3.13
10=He
Reminder Line
Function Keys
(switches to
Information line)
Reminder Line
The bottom line of the E Editor screen displays a brief reminder of each action
associated with the function key (or F keys, such as F1 =Help and F2=Save). You
can perform the most common editing tasks with one keystroke.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
133
Function Key
What It Does
F1=Help
Accesses help information about function keys and editing
commands. You can page through this help Information using the
PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
F2=Save
Saves the file you are editing but does not exit the file.
F3=Close
Removes your file's text from memory without saving it. If your file
has been modified, you will be asked whether you really want to
close the file without saving. When there are no remaining files in
memory, you exit to DOS.
F4=File
Saves your file and quits the E Editor after saving. When there are
no remaining files in memory, you exit to DOS.
F5=Print
Lets you print a file.
F6=Draw
Starts the drawing text graphics feature. Then you type a number (1
through 6), B for blank, or / followed by any character. You can
create or erase text graphic drawings by moving around with the
cursor keys. See "Drawing Lines" on page 163 for more information.
This function key and associated action is not displayed on the
reminder line. However, it is active.
F7=Rename
Lets you change the name of the file you are editing. Type the new
name and press ENTER. Afterwards, press ESC to return the cursor
to the text area; this does not change the name of the previous copy
on disk. It changes the name of the file to be saved. Renaming is a
good way to begin a revised copy without losing the original file.
F8=Open
Lets you open another file or more than one file at a time. Type a
filename, cursor to the text area so you can begin editing this second
file. You can enter more than one file name separated by a space
and can specify wild cards in file names (for example, *.doc or *.c.).
Press F11 or F12 on an enhanced keyboard to switch between the
multiple files you are editing. If you do not have an enhanced
keyboard, you can use the selections on the menu for options (for
example, Next file or Previous file). or press CTRL+P (Previous file)
and CTRL+N (Next file).
Do not select F8=OPEN to edit your current file.
F9=Undo
Restores the original contents of a line you typed incorrectly. Undo
does not restore deleted lines or changes to multiple lines. Only the
current line you are editing can be restored.
F1o=Menu
Jumps to the menu. Then the arrow keys can be used to move from
selection-to-selection and to access the associated menus.
From a menu, you can use mnemonics to make selections.
134
PC DOS User's Guide
Function Key
What It Does
F11 =Previous
Accesses the previous file you have worked on when you have
loaded multiple files in the E Editor. This key is available only on an
enhanced keyboard.
This function key and the associated action is not displayed on the
reminder line. However, it is active.
F12=Next
Accesses the next file in the ring when you have loaded multiple files
into the E Editor. This key is available on an enhanced keyboard.
This function key and the associated action is not displayed on the
reminder line. However, it is active.
The reminder line, called the function key text area, changes when you hold down a
SHIFT, CTRL, or an ALT key to show you the function key text appropriate to that
shifted state.
Information Line
You also can see the name of the file you are editing, location of the cursor (line
number and column number), working mode (insert, replace, or browse), and the
version number of the E Editor.
Command Line
The command, line can be found near the bottom of the E Editor screen. To jump
the cursor from the typing area to the command line, press ESC. Press ESC again
to return to the typing area.
Window Style
You can change the location of the reminder line, the information line, and the
command line by selecting a different window style. See "Customizing the
E Editor" on page 169 to learn how to alter the appearance of the editing screen
and to use other customization techniques.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
135
Getting Help
To get information about the E Editor after the editing window appears, press F1 to
display help information.
,
;
- - Top of f i l e - II
II L LUltor Help
,
"
.
,,
.,
ctory of Help Panels
Page
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-13
14
15
16
17-18
Cursor Movement and Mouse Actions
Function Key Summary
Alt+Key Summary
Ctrl+Key Summary
Command Summary
Edit Commands
Termination Commands
Copying. Moving. and Deleting text
ASCII conversion table
C:\DOS\EHELP.HLP
F3=Close F5=Print
Keys: 1. l.
... -',
Line
1 Col
1 Browse
Ilome. End, PayeUu, PaueDown
E 3.131.
F10=l1enu
When you access the E Editor online help, you are automatically put into browse
mode. It is not possible to edit the help file in browse mode. You can use the
arrow keys to scroll right, left, up, or down. In addition, you can use HOME to move
your cursor to the top line of the file or END to move the cursor to the bottom line of
the file.
You can use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to move forward and backward
through the help screens.
To exit the online Help file, press F3.
136
PC DOS User's Guide
Leaving the E Editor
You can stop editing and exit from the E Editor three ways: close (without saving
changes), file (saving changes), and exit.
F3=Close
Removes your file's text from memory without saving it. If your file
has been modified, you will be asked whether you really want to
close the file without saving.' When there are no remaining files in
memory, exit to DOS.
F4=File
Saves your file and removes it from memory. When all files are
removed from memory, you exit to DOS.
ALT +F4=Exit
Exits the E Editor after closing all files. You are given the option of
saving your changes if necessary. You are returned to the DOS
prompt.
Creating or Modifying a File
You can use the E Editor to create a new text file or modify an existing file. For
example, try entering some lines of text in a file named REPORTS.TXT in your root
directory. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
e c:\reports.txt
and press ENTER
You must always type the full path of the file unless you started the E Editor from
the directory where you eventually want the file to be placed.
You see the editing window. Your directory path and file name are displayed at the
bottom of the screen. For descriptions of the parts of an E Editor screen, see
"Viewing the E Editor Screen" on page 133.
1. Begin typing your text from where the cursor is positioned. Try typing the text
in the following example:
The following reports are required for the staff meeting on Friday:
1. Weekly Status Report
2. Funding Report
The default margins are set at 1 and 254. When you reach 254, the text
automatically wraps to the next line.
As you enter the text, note that the Line and Col numbers change near the
bottom of the screen.
2. Save and file the information as C:\REPORTS.TXT by pressing F4.
You see Savi ng
c: \REPORTS. TXT flash at the bottom of your screen.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
137
If you do not specify the full path and file name when you load the E Editor,
your file will be saved to the same drive and directory you were at when you
created the file.
You can change it by typing save followed by a new drive, directory, or file
name. If you were in the C:\OFFICE\NOTES subdirectory when you typed
e reports. txt, your file is saved as C:\OFFICE\NOTES\REPORTS.TXT instead
of C:\. If you want to save the file to this directory, you would type the following
at the E Editor command line:
save c:\reports.txt
3. Press ENTER.
After leaving the E Editor, you are returned to a command line.
Naming an Unnamed File
If you type only e at the DOS command prompt without specifying a file name, you
see . Unnamed fi 1e near the bottom on the left side of the screen.
To name the unnamed file:
1. Press F7=Rename if you loaded an unnamed file by typing e without a file name.
You are prompted to enter a name for the file on the E Editor command line.
Enter a file name after Rename on the E Editor command line.
Remember: Be sure to include a full path name (drive, directory, and
subdirectory, if applicable) where you want to find this file when you exit the
E Editor. Unlike word processing programs that always place-files in a specific
directory, you must specify the exact location where you want to place this file.
Otherwise, the file is put in the same drive and directory as you were in when
you loaded the E Editor.
2. Save and file under the new name by pressing F4.
In addition to creating a new file and editing an existing file, you can also save and
print files using the E Editor.
Saving and Exiting a File
After you create a file or make changes to an existing file, you can save it using a
new name or you can save it using the name you specified when you opened the
file. You also can save it with the same file name or new file name in a different
drive or directory.
138
PC DOS User's Guide
It is a good idea to save your work in case there is a power loss or equipment
failure by pressing F2 often during the editing session. Also, the E Editor has an
"autosave" feature. You can activate this feature using the Options menu or you
can type autos ave followed by a number at the E Editor command line. Your file is
temporarily saved to a file after you press ENTER the number of times equal to the
number you typed after the word "autosave".
CAUTION:
Some files that you open might include special formatting characters. If you
save such a file when using the E Editor, special characters lose their
formatting function.
To save the file
and exit using the
same file name:
• Press F4 to save the file and exit.
To save the file
and exit using a
different file
name:
1. Press ESC to get.to the E Editor command line.
The file is saved in the same drive and directory you were in
when you started the E Editor or where you specified the path.
2. Type:
file newname.ext
where newname.ext is the new file name and extension for the
file you are saving.
Remember: If you attempt to save a file using the name of a file
that already exists, the E Editor will not display a message
asking whether you want to replace the existing file.
To save the file in
a different drive
or directory and
exit:
1. Press ESC to get to the E Editor command line.
2. Type:
file drive:\dir\filename.ext
where drive:\dir is the new drive and directory where you want to
store the file, and filename. ext is the name you want to give the
file. The name can be the same name or a new name.
Remember: If you attempt to save a file in a directory that
contains a file with the same name, you are not prompted and
asked whether you want to replace the existing file.
Tip: You can save a modified version of a file without losing the original version.
For example, if you have a file named MEMO.TXT, you can keep the original file
and save a modified version as MEMO_2.TXT.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
139
Editing Multiple Files
One advantage you have with the E Editor over other text editors is the ability to
open and edit more"than one file at a time. This ability to edit multiple files means,
for example, that you can create a new file and copy (or move) information from an
existing file into the new file. Or, you can edit multiple new files, multiple' existing
files, or any combination of new and existing files. The files are placed into
memory in a type of invisible ring, and you can switch between all files in the ring
by pressing F11 or,F12 on an enhanced keyboard. If you do not have an enhanced
keyboard, you can select Previ ous fi 1e or Next fi 1e from the Options menu. Or"
you can press CTRL+N to see the next file or press CTRL+P for the previous file.
To edit more than one file at a time:
Open a file from the DOS command prompt by typing the E command from the
DOS command prompt.
Here are some sample commands you might type:
C:\>e report. txt
In this first example, the E Editor loads the file
REPORT.TXT you created earlier in the chapter into the
E Editor.
C:\>e report. txt data.dat
In this second example, two files are loaded into the
E Editor. Use F11 or F12 on an enhanced keyboard to
switch between files that are loaded for editing.
C:\>e *.c
In this third example, all the files with the C extension are
loaded into the E Editor.
While one file is opened, you can open another file by pressing FB, and then typing
either a new file name and path if creating a file, or typing the file name and path if
modifying an existing file.
From the E Editor command line, the equal sign (=) substitutes the current file's
directory and saves keystrokes if you are editing several files in another directory.
File names must be separated by spaces. For example:
Your current directory is C:\EDIT
The current file is C:\MYDOC\PROG\DOUG.DOC
You issue the command: EDIT = TODD.TXT
The E Editor loads C:\MYDOC\PROG\TODD.TXT
140
PC DOS User's Guide
Printing a File
You can use the E Editor PRINT command or press F5 to print an open file or just
the marked text within the file. In either case, the printer must be connected to or
redirected through your printer port. You can specify which printer port you want to
use by editing the E.INI file. Refer to information about the E.INI file in the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
To print a file:
1. Edit the file you want to print. You can use REPORTS.TXT as a file you want
to print.
2. At the E Editor command line, type:
print
or press F5.
3. Press ENTER.
If your file has marked text, the following message is displayed:
, Print marked area or entire file (M/F)?
Type the applicable letter designator and press ENTER.
The readiness of the printer is tested first to avoid having to wait for a device
time-out in case the printer is offline. You might see the message:
Printer not ready
which means the printer is turned off, offline, or perhaps out of paper. Make
sure the printer is ready and then repeat the PRINT command.
Using Cursor Movement Keys to Move Around in the Text File
When you load an existing file into the E Editor, your file appears on the screen
and the cursor is placed in the top, far-left position in the text. To view a different
part of the file, you have to move the cursor.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
141
Summary of Cursor Movement Keys
Cursor Movement
Key
Action
UPARROW
Moves cursor one line up.
DOWN ARROW
Moves cursor one line down.
LEFT ARROW
Moves cursor one character to the left.
RIGHT ARROW
Moves cursor one character to the right.
HOME
Moves cursor to column 1 of the current line.
END
Moves cursor to end of the current line.
PAGE UP
Shifts view to page above current page. The cursor stays at same position
on screen.
PAGE DOWN
Shifts view to page below current page. The cursor stays at same position
on screen.
CTRL+HOME
Moves cursor to top line of file.
CTRL+END
Moves cursor to bottom line of file.
TAB
Moves cursor to next tab stop.
SHIFT+TAB
Moves cursor to previous tab stop.
CTRL+PAGE UP
Moves cursor to top of screen.
CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Moves cursor to bottom of screen.
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Moves cursor to beginning of word left of cursor.
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Moves cursor to beginning of word to right of cursor.
ENTER
Defined by the user in the E.INI file.
CTRL+ENTER
Defined by the user iri the E.INI file.
ESC
Moves cursor back and forth between text and E Editor command line.
ALT+E
Moves cursor to end of marked block.
ALT+Y
Moves cursor to beginning of marked block.
CTRL+F5
Moves cursor to beginning of a word.
CTRL+F6
Moves cursor to end of a word.
CTRL+F
Moves cursor to next found text.
(repeat FIND)
CTRL+N
Moves cursor to the next active file in the ring.
CTRL+P
Moves cursor to the previous active file in the ring.
CTRL+Q
When in .ALL file, positions cursor on corresponding line in original file. If
not in .ALL file, you are placed there and the cursor is moved down one
line.
You can also scroll by holding down an arrow key. For additional information about
the .ALL file and the ALL command, see "Searching for Text Using the ALL
Command" on page 159.
142
PC DOS User's Guide
Performing Basic Editing Tasks
In addition to entering text, there are basic features that most text editors perform,
such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserting or replacing text.
Connecting or breaking a line of text.
Adding a blank line.
Deleting all or only part of a line.
Deleting characters, words, or lines of text without marking them first.
Restoring a deleted line.
Setting tabs.
Setting margins.
Saving keystrokes in a macro.
Inserting or Replacing Text
The E Editor ~as two modes for entering text: insert mode and replace mode.
Press the INSERT key to alternate between modes.
To insert text:
Position the cursor at the point where the next text is to start and
type it in. Existing text moves to the right to make room for what you
type.
When you start the E Editor, it is automatically in insert mode. At
the bottom right-hand corner of the E Editor screen, you see the
word "Insert." Press the INSERT key if you want to change to replace
mode.
In insert mode, the cursor is a box shape.
To replace text:
Press the INSERT key to replace characters instead of inserting them.
At the bottom right-hand corner of the E Editor screen, you now see
the word "Replace."
Position the cursor at the point where the next text is to start and
type it in. Existing text is overwritten when you type. Press the
INSERT key again to resume inserting.
In replace mode, the cursor is an underscore.
Connecting or Breaking a Line of Text
The way to break lines at a certain point in the text is to split (breaking) t~em.
Other times you might want to join (connecting) two or more shorter lines into one
line of text. The E Editor allows you to split or join a line by selecting Sp 1it 1i ne
or Joi n 1i nes from the Edit menu, or using the E Editor command line as follows:
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
143
To break lines:
Position the cursor at the point where you want to split the line and
press ALT+S. The text after the point where you put the cursor is
now on the next line.
To connect lines:
Position the cursor anywhere on the line where you want the text to
continue or be connected and press ALT+J. The line of text just
below the cursor is now brought up to join the line the cursor is on.
You can also split a line by pressing ENTER at any spot within the text line if you
are in STREAM mode. Refer to STREAM mode under E.INI in the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference. All the words following the cursor are moved to
the next line. If you are at the end of a line or on the first character of a line and
press ENTER, a blank line is inserted.
Adding or Deleting Lines of Text
Basic tasks you can perform using a text editor are to add a line or to delete all or
part of a line of text.
Most functions of the E Editor are controlled by the specifications designated in the
E.INI file. Two such functions, STREAM and ADDLlNE, affect the way lines are
added when using the E Editor. The E Editor is installed with STREAM mode
being the default. You can change the mode to ADDLINE by editing the E.INI file.
For more information, refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference under
the discussion for the E.INI file.
To add a blank
line in STREAM
mode:
Move the cursor to the end of the line and press ENTER. This is the
default.
To add a blank
line in ADDLINE
mode:
Position the cursor anywhere in the line just above the row where
you want to add the line and press ENTER.
To erase to the
end of the line:
Position the cursor anywhere on the line to the left of what you want
to erase and press CTRL+E. The text to the end of the line is now
erased.
To delete a line:
Place the cursor in any column on the line to be deleted and press
CTRL+BACKSPACE simultaneously.
The line is deleted from the screen and the lines below it move up to
fill the gap. Continuing to press CTRL+BACKSPACE deletes multiple
lines. '
144
PC DOS User's Guide
Restoring a Deletion
Press F9 if you incorrectly type a change to a line and you want to restore its
original contents.
The contents are restored only for the current line you are editing and only if you
have not:
• Moved the cursor from the current line.
• Pressed ENTER.
The UNDO command does not restore deleted lines or changes to multiple lines.
Recovering Deleted Lines or Line Blocks
If you delete a line or block of lines (using CTRL+BACKSPACE or ALT +0), you can
recover the deletion by pressing CTRL+U. The default for the number of lines that
can be restored is set at 50. This number can be changed by editing the E.INI file.
For more information about the E.INI file, see the online PC DOS 7 Command
Reference.
Deleting Unmarked Characters or Words
You can delete text one character at a time, one word at a time, one line at a time,
or several lines at a time in blocks at one time.
To delete a
character:
Place the cursor on the character you want to delete and press
DELETE.
The character is deleted from the screen and the text to the right of
the cursor shifts to the left to fill the gap.
To delete multiple characters, repeat the steps for each character
you want to delete.
To backspace
over a character:
Press BACKSPACE.
The character to the left of the cursor is deleted from the screen and
the text to the right of the cursor shifts to the left to fill the gap.
By pressing the BACKSPACE repeatedly, characters continue to be
deleted.
To delete a word:
Position the cursor at the beginning of the word to be deleted and
press CTRL+D.
The word is deleted from the screen and the text'to the right of the
cursor shifts to the left to fill the gap. Repeat the steps to delete
multiple words.
A text editor assumes a "word" to be a string of characters from the
point where your cursor is positioned up to and including the first
following space.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
145
If you have multiple characters, words or lines to delete, you might find it easier to
mark words, lines, or blocks for deletion instead (see "Marking Text Using Key
Combinations" on page 149).
Setting Tabs
The changes to Tabs and Margin settings described in this section apply only to the
current session. The Tab and Margin settings revert to the default values when you
leave the session.
Use the TAB key to move the cursor across the screen and insert text at set points.
To change the tab settings:
1. Press ESC to move your cursor to the command line.
2. Type the TABS command on the E Editor command line.
If you only type tabs, the current tab settings are displayed. The tabs are
preset to every eighth column across the screen. For example:
tabs 1 9 17 25 33
3. Change the tab setting with the TABS command using the following format:
tabs
[t1 [t2 [t3 ... t32] ] ]
For example, you can reset tabs for specific tab stops by typing the following at
the E Editor command line:
tabs 4 17 39 47 ... 55
and then pressing ENTER.
or
You can type the TABS command followed by a number to set the tabs to
every fourth column across the screen:
tabs 4
In this example, the tabs are set at 1 5 9 13 ... 125.
Setting Margins
To set new margins:
1. Press ESC to move your cursor to the command line.
2. Type the MARGINS command on the E Editor command line.
If you only type margi ns, the current margin settings are displayed. For
example:
margins 1 254 1
146
PC DOS User's Guide
3. Change the margin setting with the MARGINS command using the following
format:
margins
[left margin [right margin [new paragraph margin]]]
For example, you could type margins similar to:
margins 1 78 5
Then press ENTER.
To put the cursor back in the text area, press ESC. As you continue typing, the
E Editor keeps your text within the new margin settings. Notice that your
previously entered text is not automatically reflowed to the new margin settings.
4. Press ESC to move your cursor to the command line.
Saving Keystrokes in a Macro
You can record and play back any sequence of keystrokes. Such a recorded
sequence constitutes a temporary macro that can be repeated numerous times. If
you find yourself entering the same key sequence more than twice, record them
instead.
To record a sequence of keys:
1. Press CTRL+R.
2. Type your sequence of keys.
Virtually any key can be recorded, including ESC, to switch to the E Editor
command line. As you are recording the keys, the key operations are also
taking place in addition to being recorded and saved.
3. Do one of the following when prompted:
CTRL+R
Finishes the recording of keystrokes.
CTRL+T
Completes the recording and immediately runs the saved sequence.
This shortcut eliminates having to press CTRL+R a second time
before pressing CTRL+ T.
CTRL+C
Cancels saving the keystroke sequence.
To replay the sequence at any other time:
Press CTRL+T.
Unless you have changed keystroke recordings, made a new recording, or left the
E Editor, the keystroke recording is retained.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
147
You can save your macro when you exit the E Editor and have it loaded the next
time you start the E Editor by setting the MACROPATH option in the E.INI file.
Refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more information about the
E.INI file.
Selecting Text
You begin most editing operations by selecting a block of text. In a single line, you
can select any amount of text, from a single character to the entire line. You can
also select several lines or the entire file at once.
In the E Editor, selecting a section of the text is called marking the text. When this
is done correctly, you see the area you have marked highlighted on your screen.
To copy, move, or delete a section of text, first mark the text before you can
perform functions on it.
Unmarking the text removes the highlighting and the text is no longer selected.
There are two ways to mark text. You can use the mouse or you can use key
combinations
Marking Text Using the Mouse'
The following type of marking is possible when using the mouse:
Word Mark
Use the right mouse button and click on the word you want marked.
Line Mark
Hold down the right mouse button and drag the mouse pointer
across the lines of text you want to mark. An entire line, from
column 1 to column 255, is marked.
Text Mark
Ensure that the SCROLL LOCK key is off. Hold down the left mouse'
button and drag the mouse pointer across the lines of text you want
to mark. The mark proceeds only to the en'd of the line. It does not
go all the way across the screen unless your line of text projects out
that far.
Rectangular
Block Mark
Press the SCROLL LOCK key so that it is on. Hold down the left '
mouse button and drag it across the area you want to mark. Only a
rectangular area of text is blocked.
Double clicking on a marked area with the left mouse button unmarks the marked
area.
148
PC DOS User's Guide
Marking Text Using Key Combinations
Four types of marks are recognized in the E Editor:
Word Mark
Marks the entire word regardless of where you place your cursor on
the word.
Line Mark
An entire line from column 1 up to and including column 255 is
marked.
Use line mark if you are going to copy or move text and then insert
the text elsewhere in the file. Only the line mark moves the existing
text down to let you insert the text. With line mark, no text shifts to
the right. You are not required to add blank lines before you insert
the moved or copied block of text.
This is the recommended method for marking paragraphs if you are
not using the mouse.
Text Mark
Marks a single space or multiple spaces that include text, numbers,
or symbols. The marked area proceeds from where you set your
cursor to begin the mark to where you set your cursor to end the
mark. If you cross multiple lines, the marked area follows the path of
the line and goes only as far-right as the text on that line.
Rectangular
Block Mark
A strictly rectangular area of text.
To mark a line of text:
1. Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys to move the cursor
anywhere on the line you want to select or line mark.
2. Press the line combination keys ALT +L.
To mark multiple lines of text:
After you mark a line, move the cursor to another line and press the line
combination keys (ALT+L) again. All lines between the first mark and the second
mark are then marked.
To mark a rectangular block of text:
1. Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys to move the cursor to the
upper-left character of the text you want to select or block mark.
2. Press ALT +B.
3. Move the cursor to the lower-right character of the text you want to block mark.
4. Press ALT+B again to complete the block mark. The text you have marked is
now highlighted.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
149
To mark a word:
1. Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys to move the cursor
anywhere on the word you want to select or word mark.
You can mark only one word when you use the following key combination. You
must unmark the word or use the delete edit process to mark another word.
2. Press the word combination keys ALT+W.
To mark text:
1. Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys to move the cursor to the
item (character, number, or symbol) you want to select or text mark.
2. Press the text combination keys ALT+Z. The text is highlighted.
To-mark multiple items:
1. Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys to move the cursor to the
first character of the string (characters, numbers, or symbols) you want to
select.
A multiple text mark can span lines. Unlike the block mark, this type of a mark
is not a strictly rectangular shape. This type of mark wraps around lines.
Note: Blank lines between text lines are not marked.
2. Press the text combination keys ALT+Z.
3. After you mark one item (a character, number, or symbol), place the cursor on
the last item you want to mark and press the mark text keys ALT+Z. All text
from the beginning to the end is marked.
After you have marked text, you can revise the range of the mark by placing the
cursor at a different position and again pressing the combination key you last used.
If the cursor is outside the range of the marked area, the marked area will be
expanded to include the new position. If the cursor is within the marked area, it will
be conslrued as a new end of the area mark.
Unmarking Text
You can clear marked text from the E Editor window by pressing ALT+U. Any
marked text is no longer highlighted.
150
PC DOS User's Guide
Summary of Key Combinations for Marking and Unmarking Text
Following is a table which summarizes the key combinations you would use to mark
and unmark text.
ALT+B
Block mark for rectangles or lines.
ALT+L
Line mark for one or more lines.
ALT+W
Word mark.
ALT+Z
Text mark for sentences, phrases, or characters.
ALT+U
Unmark.
Using Key Combinations to Manipulate Text
You can perform any type of operation on the marked text that you want (such as
copy, move, delete, or reflow).
To manipulate an area of text:
1. Mark the text you wish to copy, move, delete, or reflow by pressing the key
combinations in the previous summary. The E Editor highlights the area to
show you what you have marked.
2. For copying or moving, select the destination for the highlighted text by moving
the cursor to the destination position.
3. Press a key combination, such as ALT+C (copy) to perform the operation.
Deleting Text
You use the DELETE command to delete a block of text and reposition the text
once the 'deletion is made.
To delete text:
1. Mark the text you want to delete.
Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations" on page 149 for instructions
on how to select text if you do not know how to mark it.
2. Press ALT +D.
The text is deleted and the text to the right of the cursor shifts to the left to fill
the gap.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
151
Copying Text
You use the E Editor copy command to copy and reposition a block of text.
To copy a block of text:
1. Mark the block of text you want to copy.
Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations" on page 149 for instructions
on how tb select text if you do not know how to mark it.
2. Select the destination for the highlighted text by moving the cursor to the
destination position.
3. Press ALT +C.
The block of text is copied to the new location, and it is not removed from its
original location.
To copy a block of text into another file:
1. Load the two files you are going to copy text between (target and
s~urce
files).
For information on how to edit more than one file at a time, see page 140.
2. In the file that has the text you want to copy, mark the block of text.
Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations" on page 149 for instructions
on how to select text if you do not know how to mark it.
3. Select the destination for the highlighted text by switching to the second file
(F12 or CTRL+N). Then, move moving the cursor to the destination position.
4. Press ALT+C.
The block of text is copied to the new location, and it is not removed from its
original location.
You can copy the marked text into a file as many times as you want by repeating
the COpy command (ALT +C). The text remains marked until you change what is
marked.
152
PC DOS User's Guide
Moving Text
You can move a block of text. This procedure is useful if you want to rearrange the
order of text in a file.
To move a block of text within the same file:
1. Mark the block of text you want to move.
Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations" on page 149 for instructions
on how to select text if you do not know how to mark it.
2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to move the text using the
arrow keys.
3. Press ALT+M.
The block of text is deleted from the original location and moved to the new
destination.
To move a block of text into another file:
1. Load the two files you are going to transfer text between (target and source
files).
For information on how to edit more than one file at a time, see page 140.
2. In the file that has the text you want to move, mark the block of text.
Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations" on page 149 for instructions
on how to select text if you do not know how to mark it.
3. Select the destination for the highlighted text by switching to the second file
(CTRL+N or F12 on an enhanced keyboard) and moving the cursor to the
destination position.
.
4. Press ALT+M.
The block of text is moved to the new location, and it is removed from its
original location.
When you move a block of text, the text remains marked until you change what is
marked.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
153
Reflowing Text
The E Editor allows you to reflow text to fit with a new area between margin
settings or in an area you define.
Adjusting a Paragraph to the New Margins
The E Editor recognizes a blank line as the end of a paragraph. Therefore, you
can reflow text in a paragraph to adjust to new margin settings. Before you can
adjust a paragraph to new margins, you must first set the margins. See "Setting
Margins" on page 146 for more information.
If a paragraph is not followed by a blank line or an end-of-file indicator, you must
mark the paragraph before you can reflow text.
To reflow text to revised margin settings:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
2. If the paragraph is not terminated with a blank line or end-of-file indicator, mark
the area using combination keys.
The E Editor highlights the text you have marked.
3. Press ALT +P to adjust the marked paragraph to the current margin settings.
Reflowing Marked Text
Pressing the ALT +R combination keys lets you reflow a section of text to a defined
space. It is typically used to reformat a special paragraph (such as an indented
paragraph) without changing the margins.
To reflow marked text:
1. First mark the text to be reformatted (with any type of mark).
2. Press ALT +R.
You are prompted to mark the new block-the space into which you want the
block reflowed.
3. Move the cursor to the upper-left character of the block of text you want to
reflow and press ALT+B.
4. Move the cursor to the lower-right character of the block of text you want to
reflow and press ALT+B.
5. Press ALT+R and the text is reflowed. The space where the text came from is
filled with blank spaces.
ALT+P reflovis a marked paragraph to the new margin settings.
154
PC DOS User's Guide
In other words, with a block mark, ALT+P behaves as if you marked a block,
pressed ALT +R, and remarked the same block.
Summary of Text Operation Keys
After you have marked text, you can manipulate it by pressing the following key
combinations:
ALT+A
Copies text to a new location and fills the old position with blanks.
ALT+C
Copies the text to the new location by inserting it and pushing aside
existing text.
ALT+D
Deletes marked text. The space formerly occupied is discarded.
ALT+O
Copies text to a new location; overlays the existing text rather than
pushes it aside.
ALT+M
Moves marked text from one location to another location and discards
the space previously occupied by the text.
ALT+F
Fills an entire marked area with a character you specify. The
character can be a graphic; see "Entering Control and Graphic
Characters" on page 170 for information on how to enter a graphic
character. To end this operation, press ESC.
ALT+P
Reflows a marked paragraph to the new margin settings. If a block of
text is marked, reflows only the marked text to the new margin
settings. See "Adjusting a Paragraph to the New Margins" on
page 154 for details.
If the text is not marked, the paragraph following the cursor is
reformatted.
ALT+R
Reflows the marked text into a new defined area. See "Reflowing
Marked Text" on page 154 for details.
ALT+F7
Shifts marked text to the left. If you have text next to the left column
of the marked area, it will overlay any text in the far-left column of the
marked area.
ALT+FB
Shifts marked text to the right. All text to the right of the left edge
boundary is shifted right. The far-left marked column is filled with
blank spaces.
ALT+E
Moves the cursor to the end of the marked text. Except for
line-marked text, this is the far-right character of the last line. For
line-marked text, the curSor column is unchanged.
ALT+Y
Moves the cursor to the start of the marked text. Except for
line-marked text, this is the far-left character of the first line. For
line-marked text, the cursor column is unchanged.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
155
Some operation keys do not work with all combination keys, as shown in the
following table.
The top heading gives the marking keys. The left column shows the operation
keys. At the intersection of any row and column is a description of where the
cursor should be placed to define the destination. If no such description is given
(as at the intersection of ALT+L and ALT+A), the operation is not allowed.
Operation
ALT+L
ALT+B or ALT+W
ALT+Z
Top-Left Corner
Adjust (ALT+A)
Copy (ALT +C)
Line Above
Top-Left Corner
At Line
Delete (ALT+D)
Any Position
Any Position
Any Position
Top-Left Corner
Overlay (ALT+0)
Move (ALT+M)
Line Above
Top-Left Corner
Reflow. (ALT+P)
Any Position
Any Position
SHIFT (ALT+F7/F8)
Any Position
Any Position
Top-Left Corner
- Any Position
Using E Editor Commands
In addition to pressing keys or combinations of keys, you can use the E Editor
command line to perform many functions of the E Editor.
Enclosing an E Editor command in quotes when you invoke the E Editor lets you
specify a command that takes effect immediately upon loading the E Editor. You
can specify file names before the quoted command. For example, to start the
E Editor, open a file named REPORT.DOC, and move the cursor to the bottom of
the file, type the following at the DOS command prompt:
e report.doc 'bot'
Remember to press ESC to move from the window area of the E Editor to the
command line. Press ESC again to return to the window area of the E Editor.
156
PC DOS User's Guide
Finding Text
To find a word, a phrase, or a combination of characters in a file, use the / (search)
or L (locate) command. The text can be a word, a phrase, or any combination of
characters and spaces.
Note: To make sure the entire file is searched, go to the top of the file before you
begin your search.
You need to be specific about limiting your searches so you find only separate
occurrences, such as searching for "let" and finding these letters in the word
"letters." If you searched for "lett", you are limiting the search to a more specific
search pattern.
To find a word or phrase, use the following format:
/findword/ [options]
or
L/findword/ [options]
If you do not specify any options, the / (search) or L (locate) command will do the
following:
• Search the entire file (not only the marked area) in the forward direction.
\
For example, the search starts at the current line and proceeds toward the end
of the file.
• Search but ignore case.
For example, the E Editor finds both Brown and brown.
• Search left-to-right through lines.
Change the search options if you need to. When the E Editor searches for text, it
starts at the current cursor position and selects the first occurrence of the text. You
can specify the following search options:
+
m
a
c
e
r
f
Search from current line backwards to top of file (or if the m option is
chosen, to top of marked area). Search is left-to-right.
Search forward from current line to bottom of file.
Search within the marked text area only.
Search the current file, including the marked area.
Search but ignore case.
Search but match the search pattern's case exactly.
Search from right to left through lines.
Search from left-to-right through lines.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
157
To find text:
1. Return to the top of the file and type a / (search) or L (locate) command.
For example, if you want to find "help" as a separate word, you would type:
/help /
or
L/help /
Make sure you include the space after the word "help" because the E Editor
finds all occurrences, such as the help in helpless if you do not add the space
in your search pattern. The second / is normally not required if you do not
have options listed. Because you are limiting your search to help followed by a
space, the second / is required to add the space.
2. Press ENTER.
If no occurrences of the text are found, you see the Stri ng not found
message.
3. To search for the next occurrence of the specified text, press CTRL+F. Only the
file in the active editor window is searched.
or
4. To make a global search, press CTRL+G. All the files in the editor's ring are
searched.
The / (search) or L (locate) command leaves the cursor in the text area, not on the
E Editor command line.
The / (search) or L (locate) command continues to search through the file each time
you press CTRL+F until it reaches the end of the file.
Here is an example of the / (search) or L (locate) command:
/finalize/e
The E option means to search but match the case exactly. After you press ENTER,
the E Editor searches for the word "finalize", ignoring any words it might find that
have uppercase letters in it, such as "Finalize".
158
PC DOS User's Guide
Any search string delimiter (not only the slash I) can be used after the LOCATE
command. You need this if the search string itself contains a slash. When used
with the slash delimiters (I), the command does not require a blank between the C
and the /. However, if you are using a different delimiter, a blank space is required
between the L and the delimiter. The same is true of the C (change) command.
L
$/$
In the last example, '$' is the delimiter and 'I' is the string for which to search.
Multiple options can be given at one time.
/helper/-re
If contradictory options are given (such as
remembered.
Irf),
only the last option is the one
In this example, the E Editor searches for the word "helper" from the current line
backwards in the file, searches from right to left in the lines, and finds only the word
"helper" and matching capitalization exactly while it is searching.
Searching for Text Using the ALL Command
The ALL command creates a file called .ALL that shows all occurrences of a search
pattern you designated for the file you are in. The occurrences matching the
pattern are listed by line number. You can move from occurrence to occurrence by
pressing CTRL+Q combination.
To find a word or phrase, use the following format:
all /findword [lEe]]
The I can be any delimiter and e indicates to match case exactly.
To use the ALL command to search in a file:
1. Open up the file you want to search.
2. Type the following command if you want to find the word "expert" in the opened
files:
all /expert
3. Press ENTER.
If no occurrences of the word are found, you see the message:
String not found
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
159
If the word is found:
• The .ALL file is created, showing the line number and contents of the line
where the word is found.
• You are placed in the .ALL file with the cursor blinking on the first
occurrence of the word.
4. Press CTRL+Q and you are switched from the .ALL file to the original file. The
cursor is placed on the first occurrence of the word in the original file.
Each time you press CTRL+Q, you are switched between the two files.
5. Save and quit out of your original file as usual. The .ALL file still appears on
your screen. You cannot save the .ALL file; however, you can rename it first
and then save it. When you quit a file, it disappears as though it never existed.
Searching for and Replacing Text
To find a word or phrase, use the following format: you can search for and replace
a set of characters in a file at the same time using the C (change) command. The
C (change) command begins at the cursor location and continues to the end of the
file. To make sure that you search for and replace the entire file, move the cursor
to the top of the file before you begin to search and replace text.
To find a word or phrase and replace it with other text, use the following format:
1. Type a C (change) command using the following format:
c/oldtext/newtext/ [options]
For example, if you are trying to find "mail" and replace it with "letters", you
would type:
c/mail /letters /
The "C" is the shortened form of the C (change) command.
Make sure you specify the spaces where necessary because the C (change)
command changes all occurrences. If the spaces were not specified in the
preceding example, the mail in mailbox would then become lettersbox if you do
not add the space in your search pattern.
One option is available with the C (change) command that is not available with
the L (locate) command. If you want to make all the changes, without being
prompted, add an asterisk (*) similar to the example that follows:
c/mispeled/misspelled/*
160
PC DOS User's Guide
If you do not specify options, the C (change) command will do the following:
• Change the entire file (not only the marked area) in the forward direction.
For example, the change starts at the current line and proceeds toward the
end of the file.
• Search but ignore case.
For example, the E Editor finds both Brown and brown.
• Search left-to-right through lines.
Change the options if you need to. The E Editor starts at the current cursor
position and changes the first occurrence of the text. You can specify the
following change options:
*
+
m
a
c
e
Makes all the changes, without being prompted.
Changes from current line backwards, to top of file (or if the m option is
chosen, to top of marked area). Search is from left-to-right.
Changes forward from current line to bottom of file.
Changes within the marked text area only.
Changes the current file, including the marked area.
Changes but ignores case. (This is the default for the CHANGE
command).
Changes but matches the search pattern's case exactly.
Searches from right to left through lines.
Searches from left-to-right through lines.
2. Press ENTER.
If the text is not found, the message Stri ng not found is displayed. If the text
is found, you see the message Yes/No/Last/Go/Qui t? near the bottom of the
screen.
3. Answer the question when the text is found by typing one of the following:
y
n
I
g
q
Makes the change for this one item and searches for the next
occurrence.
Skips the change and searches for the next occurrence.
Replaces this last one and then stop.
Goes ahead and replaces the remaining occurrences without prompting
for each occurrence.
Stops making any further changes and discontinues the search. You
can also press ESC.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
161
Then, from the E Editor command line, either:
Press CTRL+F
To find the next occurrence of the specified text.
or
Type C
To repeat the same C (change) command without having
to retype the C (change) command. You are immediately
asked Yes/No/Last/Go/Quit?
or
Press ESC
To put the cursor back in the text area.
The C (change) command leaves the cursor in the text area, not on the E Editor
command line.
The C (change) command continues to search through the file each time you press
CTRL+F until it reaches the end of the file.
Here are some examples of C (change) commands:
• In the following example, you are prompted to answer each time the word '''bills''
is found whether you want to make the change, not change this instance but
search for the next occurrence, replace this one and stop, or replace this one
and all the rest without prompting.
c /bills/invoices/
• Any search string delimiter (not only the slash!) can be used after the C
(change) command. You need this if the search string itself contains a slash.
When used with the slash delimiters (/), the C (change) command does not
require a blank between the C and the I. However, if you are using a different
delimiter, a blank space is required between the "C" and the delimiter. The
same is true of the L (locate) command.
For example, typing:
c $/$\$
changes the I to a \
• Multiple options can be given at one time, such as:
/helper/-re
If contradictory options are given (such as Irf), only the last option is the one
remembered.
In this example, the E Editor searches for the word "helper" from the current
line backwards in the file, searches from right to left in the lines, and finds only
the word "helper" and matching capitalization exactly while it is searching.
162
PC DOS User's Guide
Drawing Lines
You can use graphics characters to draw boxes and diagrams. The DRAW
command can be typed at the E Editor command line:
draw
You can also press F6.
To select drawing mode, you must issue the DRAW command with one of these
arguments:
Draw Option
Result
Draws a thin, single line
2
Draws a thin, double line
3
Draws a dotted line
4
Draws a thick line
5
Draws a double, thin line horizontally; single, thin line vertically
6
Draws a double, thin line vertically; draws a single, thin line
horizontally.
/character
Uses any character that follows the slash (I) to form a box.
Note: Draw options 5 and 6 apply only if you are using code page 437.
If you type the DRAW command without any arguments, the visual
representations: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, or / any char appear at the bottom of the
screen as a reminder. For example:
draw 2
You are now in draw mode, which means that the cursor acts like a paint brush:
everywhere you move the cursor, a double line (because you typed 2) is drawn.
Draw any shape with the cursor using the arrow keys (LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and
DOWN). While in the drawing mode, you can stop drawing the double line and type
in text or move the cursor to another location without drawing anything (in other
words, lift the paint brush) by pressing the INSERTkey. This key suspends the
drawing without exiting from draw mode.
To begin drawing again, simply press the INSERT key again. Pressing any key
besides those on the numeric key pad ends draw mode.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
163
You can draw figures with characters other than the line graphics characters
provided. For example, if you want to draw figures composed of the left
parentheses, you would type at the E Editor command line:
\
draw I(
This process works with any character on the keyboard, as long as you precede the
character with a slash (I).
Creating Boxes Around Text
You can use graphics characters to draw boxes. The BOX command can be typed
at the E Editor command line:
box
To create a box, you must issue the BOX command at the E Editor command line
with one of these arguments:
Box Option
Result
A
Creates a box comment using Assembler syntax.
.8
Places spaces on all sides of the marked area, creating a box of
blank spaces.
C
Creates a box comment using C language syntax.
E
Erases the box around the marked area.
P
Creates a box comment using Pascal language syntax.
R
Reflows text in the marked area.
S
Places a SCRIPT comment box around the marked area.
If you type the BOX command without any arguments, the visual representations
for: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, lx, P, C, A, E, R, and S appear at the bottom of the
screen as a reminder.
For example, for a double line, you could type:
box 2
Combining Files
Three E Editor commands can be used to pull text from one file and place it into a
different file: GET, PUT, and APPEND.
The E Editor allows you to have multiple files open at one time. You can mark text
in one file and insert that text into another file you have open.
164
PC DOS User's Guide
For example, you just finished a note summarizing your monthly activities in which
you listed some statistics you want to put in a second file. You do not want to
insert the entire note; you want only the statistical information pulled into a second
file.
To use the GET command to insert another file into an opened file:
1. Open the file you want to pull information into.
For example, open a file named NEWFILE.TXT by typing the following:
e c:\newfile.txt
2. Place the cursor at the top of the file because this is a new file without any
current information in it.
Normally you would place the cursor on an existing line, just above where you
want to insert the file. Then use the GET command and the information from
the other file will be pulled in following the line where the cursor is.
3. Press ESC to get to the E Editor command line.
4. Type the GET command using the following format:
get fi lespec
Substitute the full path and file name of the file you want to insert. For
example, to pull the entire C:\REPORTS.TXT file into the C:\NEWFILE.TXT file,
type the following at the E Editor command line:
get c:\reports.txt
5. Press ENTER.
The entire file is pulled into the NEWFILE.TXT file, following the line where the
cursor is placed.
To use the PUT command to insert a file or part of the file into another file:
1. Open a file that contains information you want to put into another file.
For example, open a file named NEWFILE.TXT by typing the following:
e c:\newfile.txt
2. Mark the text you want to put into another file by using the line-mark keys
combination ALT +L. If you do not mark any text, the entire file will be inserted.
3. Press ESC to get to the E Editor command line.
4. Type the PUT command using the following format:
put filespec
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
165
SUbstitute the full path and file name of the file you want to insert the marked
text into. The file can be a file that already exists or a new file.
For example, to pull the marked text from the file C:\NEWFILE.TXT into the
C:\REPORTS.TXT file, type the following at the E Editor command line:
put c:\reports.txt
and press· ENTER.
The marked text or the complete opened file (NEWFILE.TXT) is always written
to the file specified in the PUT command (REPORTS.TXT).
Only the marked text is inserted into the REPORTS.TXT file. If the file already
exists, the information can be placed only at the bottom of the file; the file is not
overwritten.
If you use the PUT command to insert an entire file, you do not have to open or
mark the text first.
For convenience, filespec can be omitted if you want to repeat a PUT to the same
file. PUT commands without a filespec reuse the last-specified name.
If you do not move the cursor and do another PUT command, the text from the
second PUT command is inserted immediately following the text inserted from the
first PUT command.
To print using the PUT command:
You can print a marked block of text by issuing PUT prn at the E Editor command
line. The readiness of the printer is tested first to avoid having to wait for a device
time-out in case the printer is offline. The PRINT command allows you to print only
marked text.
If no text is marked, the entire current file will be printed.
To append text to the bottom of a file:
The APPEND command works the same way the PUT command works, appending
the text to the bottom of a file.
To use the equal sign to repeat the file name:
You can use the equal sign (=) as a shorthand for either the current file's directory
or file name. Remember that the equal sign is shorthand for "same path as last
specified" at the DOS command prompt, or "same path as current file's" at the
E Editor command line.
166
PC DOS User's Guide
For example, you are currently editing a file named REPORT1.TXT located in the
C:\REPORTS subdirectory. You want to edit REPORT2 in the same subdirectory.
At the E Editor command line, type:
e =report2.txt
The file's path and file name can be seen as
bottom left-hand part of the screen.
c: REPORTS\REPORT2. TXT near the
Adding and Multiplying Numbers
If you need to add columns or rows of numbers, the E Editor provides both an ADD
and a MULTIPLY command. See "Calculating Mathematical Expressions" for the
proper format.
To add or multiply a column or row of numbers:
1. Mark the text you wish to add or multiply.
You can do this by pressing ALT +B once at the top left-hand corner of the
column and again at the bottom right-hand corner of the column of numbers.
When you finish marking the end of the text, the text is highlighted to show you
the column of text you have marked.
2. Press ESC to get to the E command line at the bottom of your screen.
3. Type add or type mul t depending on the type of operation you want to perform.
4. Press ENTER.
To return the cursor to the text area, press ESC.
Calculating Mathematical Expressions
If you need to add, subtract, multiply, or divide hex, octeil, binary, or decimal
numbers, the E Editor provides a set of MATH commands that compute an
arithmetic expression of the following format:
arithmetic expression: arith term arith operator arith term
arith term: decimal number
I binary number
I hex number
I octal number
I 1(1
arithmetic expression
arith operator:
I
I
I
1)1
1+1
1- 1
1*1
1/1
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
167
Binary (base 2) numbers must be preceded by the letter "b". Hexadecimal (base
16) numbers must be preceded by the letter "x", (for example, x10 = 16). Octal
(base 8) numbers must be preceded by the letter "0" (for example, 012 = 10).
Math Command
What It Does
math arithmetic expression
The MATH command computes the expression and
appends the result as a decimal number.
mathx arithmetic expression
The MATHX command computes the expression and
appends the result as a hexadecimal number.
matho arithmetic expression
The MATHO command computes the expression and
appends the result as an octal number.
mathb arithmetic expression
The MATHB command computes the expression and
appends the result as a binary number.
Try some of the following MATH commands. If your cursor is not on the highlighted
E Editor command line, press ESC.
math
mathx
mathb
matho
math
-10 + 40
-xff + 10
b10 + b01
011 * (xff ,- 10)
32000 + 32000
The above examples would yield 30, xFFOB, b11, 04235, and 64000, respectively.
All numbers, answers, and intermediate results are limited to the range
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 for octal, hexadecimal, and binary.
Notes:
1. For decimal numbers the range is 19 significant digits. For example, you could
have the number 1 (and eighteen zeros). Of course, the zeros would not be
displayed in an actual calculation.
2. Use the PC DOS ACALC command from the E Editor command line for many
more functions. Type help aca 1c for more information about the ACALC
command.
Summary of E Editor Commands
A summary of the E Editor commands and the tasks that can be performed by
them from the E Editor command line is provided in the online PC DOS 7
Command Reference. This summary can be found in the information about the
E Editor by typing help e at the DOS command prompt.
168
PC DOS User's Guide
Customizing the E Editor
Ways you can customize the E Editor include:
• Changing the way the window appears, such as to a non-overlapping (tiled)
window or an overlapping (messy) window.
• Entering control and graphic characters
• Using syntax-directed editing features
Changing to a Non-Overlapping (Tiled) Window
The E Editor provides two styles of windowing. In the tiled (non-overlapping)
window style, which is how the E Editor window normally appears, the windows do
not overlap. This allows changes to your file to be shown immediately in
neighboring views of the same file.
You can see this with a quick experiment: Press CTRL+H to split the screen into
two horizontal views of the same file and type.
Tiled windows cannot be resized or moved around the screen because this might
cause one window to overlap another. Tiled windowing also has the interesting
. characteristic that each window or tile contains the same ring of files as the other
tiles or windows. Simply press CTRL+W when you are in the text area to alternate
between the tiles. Each tile keeps track of its own cursor position so that you can
edit two places in the same file without having to page up or page down.
Changing to an Overlapping (Messy) Window
In messy (overlapping) desktop, the windows can overlap. You use the SIZE and
DRAG commands to select the window's size and position.
To acquire a messy window mode, edit the E.INI file. Refer to information about
the E.INI file in th~ online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more information.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
169
Keys or Command
How it customizes the window
CTRL+A
Selects next tiled window configuration. There are four
different window arrangements you can use if you have
specified tiled windows. You can view all four window
configurations by continuing to press CTRL+A to view each
window configuration.
Note: CTRL+A can be used only in tiled windows.
One window zoomed to fill the screen.
Two equal windows positioned vertically.
Four windows divided into four equally sized windows.
Two equal windows positioned horizontally.
CTRL+H
Selects two horizontal, window-tile configuration.
CTRL+N
Switches to next file when you have multiple files open.
CTRL+P
Switches to previous file when you have multiple files open.
CTRL+V
Selects two vertical, window-tile configuration.
CTRL+W
Switches to next window.
CTRL+Z
Switches to one fully-zoomed, window-tile configuration. In
the messy desktop configuration, this expands the current
window to full screen.
F10
Jumps to the E Editor menu. Then the arrow keys can be
used to highlight menu selections and access the menu for
each choice.
F11
Switches to previous file when you have multiple files open.
F12
Switches to next file when you have multiple files open.
SIZE command
Resizes a window. It is used only for the messy desktop
window configuration.
DRAG command
Moves a window. It is used only for the messy desktop
window configuration.
Entering Control and Graphic Characters
You can enter PC graphic characters (those with extended ASCII codes greater
than 127) with ALT+keypad numbers.
For example, to enter the symbol for the Greek character pi (represented by the
code 227):
1. Press ALT and continue holding the key down.
2. Type 227 on the numeric keypad.
3. Release ALT.
170
PC DOS User's Guide
Graphic symbols with codes less than 32 might be harder to enter because they
conflict with control characters recognized by the E Editor. You might want to enter
the character with code 12 because you like the looks of the graphic symbol or
because you wish to send that control code to a printer. Code 12 is the same as
CTRL+L, which is recognized as formfeeding by printers. You cannot type it simply
by pressing CTRL+L because a CTRL+L is recognized by the E Editor as a special
action (copy the current line of text to the command line).
In such a case, you can force the E Editor to accept the code without evaluation by
prefacing it with ALT+X. Press ALT+X first, followed by CTRL+L and then press
ENTER.
Note: ALT+X is only necessary if the key has already been defined. But pressing
ALT+X is always safe. If you are unsure whether the key is predefined,
press ALT+X first.
You can also follow ALT+X with an extended key such as F1, but this is seldom
useful. Extended keys are represented on the computer by two characters, a null
(ASCII zero, which looks like a blank) with another character. For instance, F1
gives you a null with a semicolon .
. The E Editor cannot handle the following graphic characters, as they have special
control meanings:
Tab
Li ne Feed
Carriage Return
End of Fil e
x ' 09 1
x ' 0A '
x ' 0D '
x 'IA I (only foll owi ng a CR/LF)
Using Syntax-Directed Editing Features
The E Editor has an optional syntax-directed editing feature for REXX and C
language files. The feature is defaulted to ON. You can modify the option from the
E Editor command line or by editing the E.INI file.
If you modify the feature by editing the E.INI file, you can specify a new default
value. Modifying the feature from the E Editor command line only provides a
temporary override of the default values .
.You can also modify the syntax-directed editing indentation. The indentation
feature allows you to customize both REXX and C language file indentation,
independently. These features may be modified only by editing the E.INI file.
Syntax-directed editing is provided when a language-specific keyword is combined
with a special key. For example, in REXX the language keyword IF is followed by
the special key, SPACEBAR.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
171
A REXX language file is identified when" /*" are the first two characters of a file
having the extension .BAT or .CMD. A C-Ianguage file is identified by a .C, .CPP,
;H, or .HPP extension.
Typical syntax-directed editing features can be demonstrated by the following
sequence.
To try an example of syntax-directory editing:
1. Type e newfile.c
This example uses the file name of NEWFILE.C. Remember that the file's
extension must be .C or .BAT for· syntax-directed editing to work.
Note: For REXX expansion to work when you have a .BAT file, the first line
must have a comment that begins with /*.
2. Type rna in and press the SPACEBAR.
3. Enter the main statement.
4. Type if and press the SPACEBAR.
This sequence edits a new file called NEWFILE.C. Pressing the SPACEBAR in both
instances above inserts the remainder of the MAIN and IF structures.
When automatic syntax expansion is OFF, you can force expansion to occur by
pressing CTRL+X.
Box comments can also be created easily, according to the syntax particular to the
language.
More information about using the syntax-directed editing features is provided in the
online PC DOS 7 Command Reference. This information can be found by typing
he 1peat the DOS command prompt.
Comparing a Text Editor and a Word Processing Program
A text editor, sometimes referred to as an editing tool, differs from a word
processing program in the following ways:
• Files you create by using the text editor are unformatted text files, such as
ASCII text files, which means they do not contain any special formatting
characters. If you save such a file when using a text editor, the special
characters of the word processing program may lose their formatting function.
Because DOS batch programs and files, such as AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS, must be unformatted text files, text editors are a useful tool for
customizing your system ..
172
PC DOS User's Guide
• When you reach the end of a line using a text editor, you must press ENTER to
move the cursor to the next line because there is no "word wrap" feature
associated with a text editor. A line of text can be up to 255 characters long.
Note: There are things you can do to overcome this problem and others
associated with most text editors by using the flexibility built into the
E Editor. For instance, you can set margins or you can use the default
margins of the E Editor which are 1 and 254. When your line of text
reaches 254 it automatically wraps to the next line. This chapter helps
you take advantage of this type of E Editor flexibility.
• Unlike word processing programs that always place files in a specific directory,
you must specify the exact location (full path) where you want to place the file
when using a text editor.
• A text editor can have its own command line within the program. This
command line is not the same command line as the DOS command prompt.
Other editors' command lines allow you to type editor commands used only for
performing tasks within the text editor. However, the E Editor also allows you
to type DOS commands at the E Editor command line.
Although not designed to be a word processor, the flexibility of the E Editor allows
it to be modified to make it "act" more like a word processing program, such as:
• Set the margins before you start typing (for example, type margi ns 10 70). The
text then "word wraps" when it reaches the right margin you have set. Setting
margins eliminates your having to press ENTER at the end of each line of text;
press ENTER only to start a new paragraph.
• Use the Autosave feature to automatically get temporary backup versions of
your files.
• Make menu selection~ using a mouse for performing editing tasks. You can
select items from the menu by doing one of the following:
- Using the mouse to click on a selection
- Pressing F10
- Pressing ALT
• You can load up to 35 files into the E Editor and toggle back and forth to work
on them as though these files were in a ring.
Chapter 10. Working with the Text Editor
173
174
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
Using the InterLnk utility programs (INTERLNK.EXE and INTERSVR.EXE) and a
cable, you can easily connect one computer to another computer to:
• Transfer files between computers.
• Use one computer to run programs located on another computer.
• Access information without having to copy files from one computer to another
using diskettes.
Assume you regularly gather information in the field using your laptop computer to
record the information. When you return to the home office, you need to transfer
the information to a database on your desktop computer. Using the InterLnk
program, you can directly add the information you have gathered to the database
on your desktop computer and print out the new information without copying files to
and from diskettes.
Laptop
(Client)
Laptop
Drives
Desktop
Drives
A
C
D
E equals A
F equals B
G equals C
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
175
Establishing the Connection between Computers
The following hardware, software, and available memory requirements must be met
before you can use INTERLNK:
• Two computers running DOS Version 5.02 or higher. Running this version of
DOS ensures that both the INTERLNK.EXE and INTERSVR.EXE files are
available.
If you do not have DOS Version 5.02 or higher on one of the computers, refer
to "Remote Copying of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE Files" on
page 183.
You can also have a configuration that consists of a computer running OS/2 2.1
or greater and a computer running· DOS Version 5.02 or greater. The computer
running OS/2 must be designated as the client and can only run INTERLNK.
The computer running DOS must be designated as the server and can only run
INTERSVR. See "Using INTERLNK on OS/2" on page 185 for more
information.
• An available serial or parallel port on each computer. Your cable connection
must be serial-to-serial,or parallel-to-parallel; if you have an available serial
port, the second computer must also have an available serial port.
CAUTION:
Plugging a parallel cable into a serial connector or vice versa will damage
your'computer system.
• A type of connecting serial or parallel cable, such as:
- A 3-wire, serial cable
- A bidirectional parallel cable
- .A 7-wire, null-modem, serial cable (only used for the remote installation)
Refer to "Reviewing Cable Specifications" on page 184 for specific details
on how to wire the pin connections for serial and parallel cables. The
file-transfer utility programs support serial links using a null-modem cable,
and serial and parallel links that use cables provided with FastLynx**,
LapLink**, .and Brooklyn Bridge** products.
** FastLynx is a trademark of the Rupp Corporation.
** LapLink is a trademark of Traveling Software, Inc.
** Brooklyn Bridge is a trademark of Fifth Generation Systems, Inc.
176
PC DOS User's Guide
• 16K of free memory on the client computer and 130K of free memory on the
server computer.
• The INTERLNK.EXE device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file on the
designated client computer. Instructions on how to add this statement are
given later in this chapter.
Understanding What the InterLnk Program Does
InterLnk is specifically designed to let you exchange files between any two types of
computers (for example, laptop to desktop or desktop to desktop) that can be
connected by cables. InterLnk consists of two, separate file-transfer utility
programs:
• INTERLNK.EXE
• INTERSVR.EXE
Client and Server Relationship
Before you begin using these two programs, INTERLNK and INTERSVR, you need
.to understand the client and server relationship.
Client
The computer you use to enter commands is called the client.
After a connection is made to the server computer, the client
computer presumes that the server computer's drives and printers
are its own, giving it accessibility to additional information, files,
and printers.
The client runs the INTERLNK.EXE program.
Server
The computer connected to the client is the server, which is
dedicated to serving the client. The server computer runs the
file-transfer program.
The server runs the INTERSVR.EXE program. '
Using the InterLnk program, you can create a client/server relationship between two
computers.
Once a connection is made to the server computer, you can do the same things
with the server computer's drives and printers that you can do with your own
computer, the client. If you connect a laptop to a desktop computer, the laptop is
generally the client.
After you connect your computers and start the InterLnk program, you can use a
laptop or other computer (as the client) to access data on both it and your desktop
computer. The screen of the desktop computer (the server) displays the status of
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
177
the connection. You use the desktop computer keyboard only to break the
connection between the two computers.
Suppose the laptop computer has three drives: a diskette drive (A) and two hard
disk drives (C and D). The desktop computer also has three drives: two diskette
drives (A and 8) and a hard disk drive (C), similar to the following:
Laptop Drives
Desktop Drives
A
C
D
A
B
C
With the InterLnk program connecting the two computers, drives on the desktop
computer (the server) appear as additional drives on the laptop computer (the
client). In addition to drives A, C, and D, the laptop computer now includes drives
E, F, and G. which have been redirected from the desktop computer.
For example, if you typed the following command on the laptop computer, you see
displayed a list of files located in the root directory of a diskette inserted into drive A
of the desktop computer:
dir e:\
A list similar to the illustration is displayed on your computer's screen:
This Computer
(Client)
E:
equals
F:
equals
G:
equals
Other Computer
(Server)
A:
B:
C:
This list displays how the drives were redirected. You see E equals Adisplayed.
liE equals A" means that drive E of the client (laptop) is redirected to drive A of the
server (desktop).
The server's drives A, 8, and C are now presumed to be the client's drives E, F,
and G. If you make drive E your current drive on the laptop computer, any
commands you type on the laptop are carried out on the drive A of the desktop
computer.
Note that the InterLnk program assigns the drive letters, starting after the last drive
letter, and does not fill in any missing drive letters such as the missing drive 8, as·
is the case with most laptop computers.
178
PC DOS User's Guide
Client Device Driver (INTERLNK.EXE)
INTERLNK is a single device driver performing either serial or parallel
communication. This program redirects server drives and printers, meaning that the
drives and printers from both computers can be controlled from one computer
keyboard.
When you connect your computers and start INTERLNK and INTERSVR on the
server, the server displays the way your drives are mapped. You can change
which drives and printers have access by redirecting or remapping the server drives
to the client drives. You can access only six drives at one time. If the drive or
printer you need to access is not one of the six currently listed, you will need to
redirect the drives or printers so the drive or printer is one of the six.
INTERLNK does not require any special switches or parameters for most
configurations. Serial and parallel communications support and printer support are
installed by default. Hardware ports and interrupt levels are set up automatically.
INTERLNK loads itself into upper memory when upper memory blocks are available
from DOS, unless you have set up the RAM Boost program to optimize your upper
memory blocks.
For more information about INTERLNK or INTERLNK.EXE, see your online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference. Or, type either hel p interl nk or hel p
interlnk.exe at the DOS command pro,mpt.
INTERLNK Server Program (INTERSVR.EXE)
INTERSVR is a dedicated, full-screen program, used for communicating with the
client computer through serial and parallel lines. The server allows use of local
drives and attached printers by the client computer.
The server program provides an interactive user interface and a command line
option to do the following:
• Exclude certain drives from the server.
Refer to "Excluding Drives from Redirection" on page 183.
• Sequence the offering of drives.
For example, if you have five drives (A through E, of which A and B are empty
diskette drives on the server computer) and the client has only three drives
available, the normal sequencing would map or·assign the letters A, B, and C.
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
179
To ignore drives A and B, you can type the following on the server to sequence
t.he drives:
.
intersvr c: d: e:
While the server does not require any interaction after it is started, it provides the
following types of feedback:
•
•
•
•
•
Current state of drive mappings and printer redirection
Drives that are offered
Current baud rate (speed of data transmission)
Drive activity
Port you are connected to (a COM port means DOS searches only for serial
ports; an LPT port means DOS searches only for parallel ports)
Note: Network drives cannot be redirected by this program.
For a list of the options available with INTERSVR, type hel p i ntersvr at the DOS
command prompt.
Including INTERLNK in Your CONFIG.SYS File
On the client computer, use a text editor, such as the E Editor provided with DOS,
and add the following device driver statement to your CONFIG.SYS file:
device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe
By default, you are allowed to redirect three drives from the server. To redirect
more than three, you must add the /drive switch to specify a number other than
three or to specify no drives at all if you want to redirect only printers. For example,
if you wanted to redirect four drives, type:
device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe /drives:4
If you are using a RAM drive, place the DEVICE=INTERLNK.EXE statement after
the DEVICE=RAMDRIVE.SYS line to prevent INTERLNK from redirecting these
drives first.
After you have added the device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, restart
the client computer by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL. Restarting the client computer
loads INTERLNK.
180
PC DOS User's Guide
Running the InterLnk Program
Before you start the InterLnk program, make sure you have physically connected
your computers by attaching the appropriate cables to the ports, either
serial-to-serial or parallel-to-parallel.
To start the InterLnk program:
1. On the server computer, type the following at the DOS command prompt for a
serial connection:
intersvr
Or, type the following on the server computer at the DOS command prompt for
a parallel connection:
intersvr /lptl:
You see a screen displaying the server drives similar to the following:
This Computer
(Server)
A:
B:
C:
D:
LPTl:
Other Computer.
(Client)
equals
equals
equals
equals
equals
D:
E:
F:
G:
LPT2:
If you are running Windows, you will see a task-swapping message; if you are
running DOS, you will not see this message. Press ENTER to continue or press
F3 to quit.
2. On the client computer, make sure you have added the device driver statement
in your CONFIG.SYSfile (see "Including INTERLNK in Your CONFIG.SYS File"
on page 180).
INTERLNK attempts to load this program into upper memory blocks if they are
available; if they are not available, it loads into conventional memory. By
default, INTERLNK remains in memory whether it finds another computer to
connect with unless you specify the /noscan switch.
3. Verify that the InterLnk program is loaded and view the status of the
connections by typing the following at the DOS command prompt of the client
computer:
interlnk
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
181
You see a screen displaying the drives that are connected similar to the following:
This Computer
(Client)
Other Computer
(Server)
======================================
D:
E:
F:
G:
LPT2:
equals
equals
equals
equals
equals
A:
B:
C:
D:
LPT1:
You are now able to access the drives of the server computer as though they were
located on your client computer. If you need different drives than the ones currently
accessed, redirect the drives.
When you are finished, press ALT+F4 on the server. The server returns to the DOS
command prompt and the client no longer has access to the server's drives.
Redirecting Drives
If a device was assigned when you started INTERLNK, you can redirect the device
on the client by using the INTERLNK command and specifying the server drive you
want to redirect it to. Suppose that client drive 0 is redirected to server drive A,
and the other drives are redirected as in the ,following example:
This Computer
(Client)
D:
E:
F:
LPT2:
equals
equals
equal s
equals
Other Computer
(Server)
A:
B:
C:
LPT1:
To redirect client drive 0 to server drive C, type the following at the client
workstation:
interlnk d=c
To cancel the redirection of client drive 0, do not specify a server drive, as follows:
interlnk d=
182
PC DOS User's Guide
Excluding Drives from Redirection
On the server computer, if you want to exclude a drive from redirection and make it
unavailable to the client system, add the Ix switch followed by the letter of the drive
you want to exclude, such as:
intersvr /x:d
Breaking the Connection between Computers
To break the INTERLNK connection between computers and stop the server, press
ALT+F4 on the keyboard of the server computer.
To restart the server, type:
intersvr
Remote Copying of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE Files
If, for some reason, you do not have DOS Version 5.02 or later installed on one of
your computers, you will need to copy the INTERLNK.EXE and INTERSVR.EXE
program files to the computer that does not have these files before you can run the
InterLnk program. Although you need only the INTERLNK.EXE file for the client
computer and the INTERSVR.EXE for the server computer, both files can reside on
each computer.
To copy files remotely:
1. If the server computer is connected to the client computer by a 7-wire
null-modem serial cable, type the following at the server computer command
prompt:
intersvr /rcopy
The INTERLNK Remote Installation screen is displayed.
2. Specify the serial port of the other computer by using the direction arrows until
you highlight the COM (serial) port you will use and press ENTER.
3. Type on the client computer the MODE command you see displayed on the
server computer. For example, you might type something similar to:
mode coml:2400,n,8,1,p
which specifies a configuration for the serial port you have selected of 2400
baud, no parity, 8 bits, and 1 stop bit. The p parameter tells the program to
keep trying to configure the port until a confirmation message is received that it
has been reconfigured.
4. Press ENTER.
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
183
5. Instruct DOS to accept the input from the COM1 port by typing:
ctty coml
The program is uploaded and sends a program which then receives the
INTERSVR.EXE and the INTERLNKEXE files automatically.
Also, you can copy the INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNKEXE files to a diskette and
then copy the files to the other computer, placing the files in the \OOS directory.
Reviewing Cable Specifications
a
The file-transfer utility programs support serial links using null-modem cable, such
as LapLink or FastLynx cable. These programs interact directly with the serial port
hardware instead of the computer's BIOS to make the connection. In most cases,
for these programs the connecting cable is a serial cable. However, if the parallel
ports on both systems are bidirectional, you will be able to use a parallel cable.
You can create your own serial or parallel cable using the wiring tables below.
If you want to use a serial port to transfer your data, then you must use the
null-modem cable. Connect the null-modem cable to the serial port on your
computer.
To use the file-transfer utility programs, you need the following:
• Two computers with DOS 5.02 or higher installed on each computer.
If you do not have DOS Version 5.02 or higher on one of the computers, refer
to "Remote Copying of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNKEXE Files" on
page 183.
• A null-modem cable to connect to the serial ports of your computers or a
parallel cable to connect to the parallel ports of your computers.
Serial Cable
There are two kinds of physical RS-232 ports used by 00S-9 pin (OB9) and
25-pin(OB25). Use the following table to wire the pin connections for a serial cable.
9 Pin
pin 5
pin 3
pin 7
pin 6
pin 2
pin 8
pin 4
184
25 Pin
pin 7
pin 2
pin 4
pin 6
pin 3
pin 5
pin 20
PC DOS User's Guide
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
25 Pin
pin 7
pin 3
pin 5
pin 20
pin 2
pin 4
pin 6
9 Pin
pin 5
pin 2
pin 8
pin 4
pin 3
pin 7
pin 6
Ground-Ground
Transmit-Receive
RTS-CTS
DSR-DTR
Receive-Transmit
CTS-RTS
DTR-DSR
Note: The ground wire is connected to the same pin on both ends. The last three
wires are the reverse of the prior three.
Parallel Cable
Use the following table to wire the pin connections for a parallel cable.
25 Pin
pin 2
pin 3
pin 4
pin 5
pin 6
pin 15
pin 13
pin 12
pin 10
pin 11
pin 25
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<_____ l. __ >
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
<-------->
25 Pin
pin 15
pin 13
pin 12
pin 10
pin 11
pin 2
pin 3
pin 4
pin 5
pin 6
pin 25
Note: Pin 25 to pin 25 is the ground-to-ground connection for this cable-wiring
table.
Using INTERLNK on OS/2
INTERLNK can be run only on OS/2 2.1 or OS/2 WARP V3.0 as a client.
To set up the Interlnk environment on OS/2:
1. Insert a blank diskette into drive A of the computer running DOS.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type the following command to format the
diskette:
format
a: /s
3. Use a text editor to create a CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette in drive A. The
CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette should contain the following lines:
DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
DEVICE=INTERLNK.EXE
You might need to include additional parameters with INTERLNK.EXE. Type
hel p i nterl nk. exe for more information.
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
185
4. Copy the INTERLNK.EXE file from your DOS subdirectory to the same diskette
already inserted into drive A.
5. Take the diskette from the computer running D9S, and insert it into drive A of
the computer running OS/2.
6. Copy the FSFILTER.SYS file from the \OS2\MDOS subdirectory of your boot
drive (generally drive C:) to the diskette in drive A.
7. At the OS/2 command prompt, type the following command to create a DOS
image file:
vmdi sk a: c: \pcdos. img
The name of the file must have the extension IMG (such as the example
PCDOS.IMG). The PCDOS.IMG file can be located on any drive.
The following scenario is a representation only. Your desktop may not be set up
exactly as is described here. However, you can use the steps presented as a
guide to what needs to be done to create a PC DOS icon by copying another icon
and linking it to a DOS sessions program.
To create a PC DOS image file:
1. From your OS/2 desktop, double-click on the OS/2 System icon.
2. Double-click on the Command Prompts icon.
3. Use mouse button 2 (right mouse button) and click on the DOS Window icon.
4. Click on Copy.
5. On the notebook page, enter the name you want for the icon's new name (for
example, PC DOS).
6. Click on Copy.
7. Click on OK to create the icon.
8. On the OS/2 desktop, click on the new PC DOS icon. you just created.
9. Click on the arrow to the right of Open.
10. Click on Settings.
11. While on the notebook page, click on the Session tab.
12. Click on the DOS Settings push button.
186
PC DOS User's Guide
13. While in the notebook page for Settings: click on COM_DIRECT_ACCESS and then
select On for the value.
14. Then click on DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE, enter an image name and path in the Value
field. and then click on the Save button.
Note: Enter the same path where you placed the PCDOS.IMG file earlier in
this procedure.
15. Close the Settings notebook page by double-clicking on the title bar icon in the
top-left corner.
16. Close all windows that are still open on the OS/2 desktop.
17. Go to the computer running PC DOS and start the server by typing the
following at the DOS command prompt:
intersvr
18. Double-click on the PC DOS icon to get your DOS session.
The server and the client are now connected.
Chapter 11. Connecting Computers
187
188
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 12. Using File Update
Use the File Update Utility to maintain files on two different systems and keep them
synchronized. The two systems can be two separate PCs, a PC and a local area
network (LAN), or two different locations on the same PC. This is useful if you
work with the same files on separate systems (for example, when you use a laptop
on the road or take work home from the office). You can also use File Update to
keep backup files of your work on another drive or partition.
This chapter describes how to install File Update on two systems (referred to as
base and remote locations). It shows you how to set up your system and explains
how to keep files in "sync" when you transfer them from one location to another.
Before you install File Update, however, it is a good idea to make sure the time and
date at both locations are the same. You must also know how files and directories
are organized on both your systems. File Update tracks any changes that are
made to the files and directories you specify.
Ask yourself:
• What are the names and extensions of the files you want tracked?
For example, all files with a .TXT extension, such as REPORT.TXT.
• In what directories are these files located?
For example, C:\COMPUTER\SALES at the base location and D:\SALES at the
remote location.
You can use the TREE command to answer these questions. TREE displays the
directory paths and files on your drives so that you know where things are. For
example, if you want to list all directories and files on drive C and save the list in a
file named TREE.OUT, type the following at the DOS command prompt:
tree c:/f >tree.out
You could also redirect the output to your printer by typing:
tree c:/f >prn
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
189
Installing File Update at the Base Location
To get started, you need to install File Update at the base location - the first
system or location you want to install on. This procedure creates an installation
diskette, which is used to install File Update at a remote location.
Notes:
• A blank, formatted diskette is required.
• The base system must have PC DOS 7 installed.
• The base location is the client machine for a system connected by Local Area
Network (LAN) or the InterLnk program-a program that establishes a
communications link between two types of computers connected with a cable.
• Use the TAB key to move from one input field to another. You can also use the
mouse to click on an entry field or button.
• Windows Users: To access the DOS command prompt, select the PC DOS
Prompt icon in the PC DOS 7 Tools group.
To install File Update at the base location:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
fileup
2. Press ENTER. The Welcome screen is displayed.
If you receive a Bad command or fi 1e name message, make sure the program
files (FILEUP.EXE and FILEUP.HLP) exist on your system. These files are
installed with PC DOS and are usually found in the DOS subdirectory.
190
PC DOS User's Guide
If File Update appears without a Welcome screen, the program has been
installed. To reinstall, select Delete Installation from the Setup menu, and
begin again with step 1.
3. Select Cant i nue. The Location Names screen is displayed.
Work
.
Home
to save names and proceed to
4. Create names to identify your base and remote locations (for example,
WORK and HOME). Enter these names in the input fields.
5. Select Conti nue. The Program Path screen is displayed.
6. Make sure that the path listed is correct for the remote location program files
(FILEUP.EXE and FILEUP.HLP).
File Update assumes the remote location path is the same as the base location
path. If the program files are not in the remote location path, you will not be
able to install File Update at the remote location.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
191
7. Select Conti nue. The Add/Delete Directory Pairs screen is displayed.
8. Enter the drive and directory path, including all subdirectories, where you want
File Update to track files (see "Notes" on page 193). Select Add after you enter
a directory pair-the names of the directories you want to synchronize on the
base and remote locations.
For example, if you type C:\COMPUTER\SALES at the base location and
D:\SALES at the remote location, files in the C:\COMPUTER\SALES
subdirectory are updated in D:\SALES at the remote location when you transfer
the files.
192
PC DOS User's Guide
Notes:
• The path you specify for the base location must currently exist. However,
when a path does not exist at the remote location, it can be created for you
when you transfer your updated files.
• You can come back after installation to add or delete directory pairs.
Directory pairs can be the same drive and directories, different drives and
directories, or the same drive but different directories.
• InterLnk and LAN Users: Specify the actual drive and path (not the
remapped value). In other words, you know that drive G on your client
machine equals drive C on your server. Do not specify drive G directories.
File Update provides for drive remapping later in the process.
• If you make a mistake or want to delete a directory entry:
a. Choose the directory entry in the Directory List.
b. Select Delete to erase the directory information for both locations.
9. Select Conti nue. The Diskette Drive Selection screen is displayed.
10. Choose the diskette drive (drive A or 8) where you want to create the File
Update installation diskette.
11. Insert a blank, formatted diskette in the specified drive, and select Conti nue.
12. Select OK when installation is completed.
13. Label your diskette "File Update Installation", and set it aside. You will use it
later to install the File Update system files at the remote location.
If your remote location is connected through LAN or InterLnk, you do not need
to use the File Update Installation diskette again. You only need to remap the
drives.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
193
You have just completed File Update installation at the base location. Go to "Using
File Update Menu Choices" to review menu choices and set up your system.
Important:
The Fil es Bei ng Excl uded choice in the Setup menu contains a default list of file
extensions that are not being tracked. Be sure to review this list so that you do not
have files missing when you transfer file updates. You can add extensions to the
"excluded" list so that specific file types are not tracked. You can also delete any
file extensions that you want File Update to include in its tracking.
Using File Update Menu Choices
After you install File Update at the base location, use menu choices to set up your,
system. Keep in mind that the Files Being Excluded choice in the Setup menu
contains a default list of file extensions that are not being tracked. It is a good idea
to review this list and make any necessary changes.
CAUTION:
Use care when deleting extensions from the default list. These extensions are
excluded so that you do not replace files by mistake. For example, suppose you
have a program named "ChartMaker" at both locations. You have version 1.0 on
the base system and version 2.0 on the remote system. If you delete the "DLL"
extension from Files Being Excluded, you will replace files with an incorrect DLL
version, and ChartMaker will not run.
There are many useful choices from the Setup menu.
194
You Can:
Setup Menu Choice:
Add or delete directories you want tracked
(including all subdirectories).
Add Directory Pairs
Exclude specific file extensions from being tracked.
(Files without extensions are always tracked.)
Files Being Excluded
Monitor specific file names
(even if you excluded the file extension).
Override Excluded Files
Create an installation diskette
(if you need to create another installation diskette).
Create Installation Diskette
Delete installation
(to begin again and reinstall File Update).
Delete Installation
Display the path where the program files 'reside at the
base and remote locations.
Display Install Data
PC DOS User's Guide
You can also select choices from the File Update menu.
You Can:
File Update Menu Choice
Preview - Display the files you updated since the last
transfer and the number of diskettes you will need to
complete the transfer.
Update Files - Transfer updated files to diskette so you
can transfer files from one location to the other.
Custom File Selection - Control the type of update you
want. You can copy:
Update To Diskette
• Changed files for all directory pairs
• All files for all directory pairs
• Changed files for all "selected" directory pairs
(Use this choice after you complete your first update.)
Preview - Display the files on diskette that you are going
to transfer.
Update Files - Transfer updated files from the diskettes
created in Update to Diskette.
Update From Diskette
Preview - Display the files you updated since the last
transfer.
Update Files - Transfer updated files from your base
location.
Custom File Selection - Control the type of update you
want. You can copy:
Update Connected System.
• Changed files for all directory pairs
• All files for all directory pairs
• Changed files for all "selected" directory pairs
Re-Map Connected Drives - Remap drive letters.
(Connected drive letters can change if you connect to a
LAN or use a program such as InterLnk.)
Chapter 12. Using File Update
195
Transferring Updated Files to the Remote Location
Now that you have installed· File Update at the base location and set up your
system, resume work on your files. When you are ready to transfer updated files to
the remote location, follow the procedure for your particular remote location:
Remote System
Procedure
PC (not connected through
InterLnk or LAN)
"Installing on a PC."
PC (connected through InterLnk)
"Installing on an InterLnk-Connected
System" on page 200.
Local Area Network (LAN)
"Installing on a LAN-Connected System" on
page 202.
To find out more about the InterLnk program, refer to Chapter 11, "Connecting
Computers" on page 175.
Installing on a PC
Follow these procedures if the remote location is a PC, or another drive or partition
'
on the same PC.
1. "Transferring Updates from the Base Location to Diskette."
2. "Installing File Update at the Remote Location" on page 198.
3. "Transferring Updated Files to the Other Location" on page 199.
Transferring Updates from the Base Location to Diskette
To transfer updates to the remote location, you must first transfer updated files to
diskette. After you transfer files from the base location to the remote location the
first time, use this procedure to transfer files back and forth from one location to
another.
It is not necessary to manually copy and align files at both locations before using .
File Update.
196
PC DOS User's Guide
To transfer updates to diskette:
1. Select Fi 1e Update.
2. Select Update To Di skette.
You have the option to:
a. Select Previ ew to display the estimated number of diskettes (by media type)
it takes to copy the files that File Update is tracking.
b. Select OK. The Status screen is displayed with a list of the files to be
copied. It also indicates that you are connected to the appropriate drives (if
applicable).
If you want to remove the status screen, press F5.
3. Select Fi 1e Update.
4. Select Update To Di skette.
5. Select Update Fi 1es.
A message is displayed asking if you used your last update diskettes.
• If this is the first time you are doing a file update, select Yes.
• If you have done an Update to Diskette before but did not transfer the
updated files to the other location, select No to make sure all file changes
are transferred.
6. Insert a formatted diskette into the specified drive, and then select Conti nue.
,7. To overwrite any data on the diskette, select Yes; otherwise, select No.
8. Remove the diskette and label the first diskette "#1" and continue inserting
diskettes (as prompted) until all updated files are copied to diskette.
If you have multiple diskettes, label them with the correct sequential number so
that you can insert them when prompted at the remote location.
Important:
When you go to your other system to update your files, be sure to run Update From
Di skette before performing any other functions (for example, adding or deleting
directory pairs).
Go to "Installing File Update at the Remote Location" on page 198 if you are
installing File Update for the first time.
If you have already installed File Update at both your locations, go to "Transferring
Updated Files to the Other Location" on page 199.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
197
Instaliing File Update at the Remote Location
Follow these steps to install File Update if the remote location is a PC (not
conn,ected through a LAN or the InterLnk program).
Notes:
• Before you begin, you must have completed "Installing File Update at the Base
Location" on page 190 and "Using File Update Menu Choices" on page 194.
• The remote system must have PC DOS 7 installed.
• Make sure you have the File Update Installation diskette before you begin.
• This procedure has to be done only once (unless you select Delete
Installation from Setup and have to begin again).
• The following steps apply to "unconnected" PCs. If you are using InterLnk or a
LAN, se~ 'Transferring Updated Files to the Remote Location" on page 196 for
the correct procedure to follow.
To install the File Update Utility at
aremote location:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
fileup
2. Press ENTER.
If you receive a Bad command or fi 1e name message, make sure the program
files (FILEUP.EXE and FILEUP.HLP) exist on your system. These files are
installed with PC DOS and are usually found in the DOS subdirectory.
3. Select Remote Setup at the Welcome screen.
4. Insert the File Update Installation diskette you created on your base system in
diskette drive A or B.
5. Specify the drive where you inserted the diskette, and select Cont i nue.
6. Select OK when the installation is completed.
198
PC DOS User's Guide
Transferring Updated Files to the Other Location
Follow these steps to transfer updated files that you copied to diskette in
"Transferring Updates from the Base Location to Diskette" on page 196. Follow
this procedure before performing any setup activities at the remote location (such
as adding directory pairs or changing the excluded file list).
To transfer updated files that you copied to diskette:
1. Select Fi 1e Update.
2. Select Update From Di skette.
3. Select Update Fi 1es.
4. Insert the last diskette of the set that contains the updated files that you
transferred.
5. Select Yes to continue.
6. Continue to insert and remove the applicable diskettes. You are prompted with
a message indicating the number of the diskette to be inserted.
You might come across one or more of the following situations: '
Files Changed in Both Locations
If a file on your system is new or changed since your last update, a message
will be displayed with the name, the date stamp, and the time stamp of each
file. You are given the choice to keep a specific file or to replace all remaining
files. This lets you skip further messages and replace all conflicting files with
the updates from diskette. This message can occur when you work on the
same file at your base and remote locations and you do not update on a
regular basis. It can also occur if an update is not allowed to run to completion.
No Directory Path Exists for a File Listed on the Diskette
If a directory path does not exist for a file on the diskette, a message will be
displayed. You are given the choice of having the system create the directory
or of skipping the file and continuing the update process.
Drives Not Connected
If you are not connected to the drives you need, an error message will be
displayed. You cannot proceed with the update until you connect to these
drives.
File Update is now installed and can be run from both locations. Be sure to
perform a File Update at your base and remote locations on a regular basis.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
199
Installing on an InterLnk-Connected System
Follow these steps to use File Update on two systems connected by means of the
InterLnk program and a cable.
Notes:
• Before you begin, you must have completed "Installing File Update at the Base
Location" on page 190 and "Using File Update Menu Choices" on page 194.
• Make sure that you are connected to your server.
• You are not required to use the File Update Instal!ation diskette if you run File
Update from only one system. However, the installation directory for the
remote system that you specified in the initial installation must exist before you
can perform any update.
• For more information on the InterLnk program, refer to Chapter 11, "Connecting
Computers" on page 175.
To remap your drives:
1. Start the InterSvr program on your remote system and the InterLnk program on
your base system.
2. At the DOS command prompt on your base location, type:
fileup
3. Press ENTER.
4. Select Fi 1e Update.
5. Select Update Connected System.
6. Select Re-Map Connected Dri ves. The Connected Drive Remapping screen is
displayed.
200
PC DOS User's Guide
7. Specify the remapped drive letters used to access the remote drives. These
are listed under Other Computer (Cl i ent) on the InterSvr screen.
For example, on the system from which you ran the InterSvr program, you see
a listing of connected drives similar to the following:
This Computer
(Server)
Other Computer
(Client)
A:
equals
F:
C: (44MB)
equals
G:
D: (44MB)
equals
H:
LPT1:
equals
LPT2:
You specified the actual remote drive letters when you completed the
Add/Del ete Di rectory Pai rs screen. These drives are listed under Thi s
Computer (Server) on the InterSvr program screen.
8. Select OK. You are returned to the main screen;
9. Go through the selection process again of:
• Fi 1e Update
• Update Connected System
• Preview, Update Files, or Custom File Selection
You have completed File Update installation. You can choose to install File Update
on your server machine if you want to transfer files back and forth between
systems.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
201
Installing on a LAN-Connected System
Follow these steps to use File Update on a system connected to a Local Area
Network (LAN). You do not need to use the File Update Installation diskette
because you are only remapping drives (not installing File Update).
Notes:
• Before you begin, you must have completed "Installing File Update at the Base
Location" on page 190 and "Using File Update Menu Choices" on page 194.
• Make sure that you are connected to your network drives.
• File Update is always run from the client machine.
To remap your drives (you have to do only once):
1. At the DOS command prompt on your base location (client), type:
fileup
2. Press ENTER.
3. Select Fi 1e Update.
4. Select Update Connected System.
5. Select Re-Map Connected Dri yes. The Connected Drive Remapping screen is
displayed.
6. For drive letters currently specified in Di rectory Pai rs, specify the remapped
drive letters used to access the server drives.
Novell Network Users: The mapping for the base/remote location is the same
drive letter.
202
PC DOS User's Guide
7. Select OK. You are returned to the main screen.
8. Go through the selection process again of:
• Fi 1e Update
• Update Connected System
• Previ ew, Update Fil es, or Custom Fil e Sel ect ion
You have completed File Update installation on your LAN-based system.
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting tips for the most common questions about or problems with File
Update, refer to "File Update Utility" on page 313.
Chapter 12. Using File Update
203
204
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
RAM Boost is the memory management tool provided with PC DOS. It runs on a
80386SX**-based or higher processor that has enough extended memory available.
For more information about system requirements, see "RAMBoost System
Requirements" on page 207.
The purpose of RAM Boost is to determine the optimal memory location for every
device driver, terminate-and-stay resident (TSR) program, and other programs you
have designated for your system. It carries out this process by analyzing your
computer's existing configuration and automatically reconfiguring programs to load
above 640K after restarting your system. When RAM Boost is through processing,
you should have the maximum amount of available memory to use for your DOS
and Windows applications.
If you are having trouble running your programs because there is not enough
memory, you might need to run RAM Boost. For most systems, this simply means
typing ramsetup at the DOS command prompt and following the directions given
through the online RAM Boost program. When you have provided the information
RAMBoost needs to run, it takes care of everything else during its processing.
Of course, the more you understand about your system and memory, the more you
will appreciate all that RAM Boost can do for you. For a detailed discussion about
memory and additional RAMBoost tips and techniques, see "Using RAMBoost Tips
and Techniques" on page 218.
If you are a PCMCIA user, see "Running RAMBOOST with PCMCIA
(Non-Thinkpad)" on page 227 for information about running RAMBOOST with
PCMCIA.
Determining Your System's Memory Type
Before running RAM Boost, you should determine what type of memory your system
has and which programs are currently loaded into memory. Use the MEM
command with the Ie switch or use the QCONFIG command. For example, if you
used the MEM command, you might type the following at the DOS command
prompt:
mem /e /p
**
80386SX is a trademark of the Intel Corporation.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
205
The Ie switch provides you with a list of programs and classifies their memory into
types of memory, such as conventional or upper memory. It is the upper memory
blocks that are used by RAM Boost to free conventional DOS memory. The /p
switch pauses the information at the end of each screen of information.
If you want to use the QCONFIG command, a more complete description of the
QCONFIG command can be found in "Analysis of Your Computer's Memory" on
page 221.
Understanding How RAMBoost Works
RAMBoost manages the area of memory of your computer from 640K to 1024K,
called upper memory blocks (UMBs). RAMBoost runs invisibly on your computer,
optimizing available memory automatically each time your computer's system
configuration changes. If you add or remove programs from your CONFIG.SYS or
AUTOEXEC.BAT files, RAMBoost automatically detects the change. When the
system is rebooted, RAMBoost automatically re-optimizes and rearranges the
remaining drivers in upper memory.
RAMBoost works with a memory manager. A memory manager (such as EMM386,
Quarterdeck QEMM**, and Qualitas 386MAX**) makes the open areas in your upper
memory blocks available for loading memory-resident programs and device drivers
(referred to as "loading high"). Loading programs high makes more DOS
conventional memory available for your applications. The amount of upper memory
RAM Boost makes available is determined by the expanded memory specification
(EMS) manager used with it.
Because the open space in upper memory is usually in several pieces of different
sizes, programs can fit in some areas but not in others. RAMBoost arranges your
memory-resident programs, device drivers, and other DOS resources such as those
specified in the CONFIG.SYS file (for example, FILES and BUFFERS) into upper
memory. This increases the amount of memory available for DOS to run
applications. RAMBoost does this by creating an initialization profile (.INI file) of
your memory usage and by automatically arranging the programs in your upper
memory blocks. This provides the maximum compatible amount of free
conventional memory. See "Using RAM Boost Tips and Techniques" on page 218
for more information about memory types.
**
**
Quarterdeck QEMM is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems.
Qualitas 386MAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc.
206
PC DOS User's Guide
You configure RAM Boost once. Then, each time you start your computer,
RAM Boost analyzes your computer's resident programs and device drivers, selects
the optimal loading configuration, and loads them into upper memory blocks.
Important:
RAMSETUP must be run for each configuration that you want to optimize in a
multiple configuration setup. This way, an .INI profile file is generated for each
separate configuration. Your system needs to be rebooted twice for each
configuration. The first time RAMBoost locks in the configuration in the Learn
mode; and the second time, it makes it active. See page 210 for more information.
If you are familiar with memory-management techniques, you can customize
RAM Boost's performance by manually editing the settings in the profile .INI files.
The two primary .INI files are RAMSETUP.INI and RAMBOOST.INI. Additional .INI
files are generated when RAM Boost detects multiple configurations. For more
information about the .INI files associated with RAM Boost, see the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
RAMBoost System Requirements
The following items are required to use RAM Boost Setup (run RAMSETUP).
RAMBoost Setup is flexible in that it works with many memory managers.
• A minimum of 512K available extended memory.
• A 80386SX-based or higher processor.
• For upper memory block support, at least 640K and an EEMS/EMS 4.0 memory
manager are required. Use one of the following EEMS/EMS 4.0 memory
managers:
HIMEM.SYS and EMM386.EXE provided with DOS
Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager-386**
- Qualitas BlueMAX** and 386MAX
Helix** Netroom**
Most of these third-party memory managers requires an adjustment to your
CONFIG.SYS file before running RAMBOOST. If you are running RAMBOOST
and install a third-party memory manager on over it (without adjustments), your
system might not work correctly. If this happens, check the third-party
documentation for instructions, or contact the manufacturer of the third-party
product.
** Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager-386 is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems
**
**
BlueMAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc.
Helix and Netroom are trademarks of Helix Software Company
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
207
Refer to "Compatibility with Memory Managers and Other Programs" on
page 225 for compatibility information.
Configuration Requirements
You use the RAMSETUP.EXE program to configure RAMBoost. When loaded,
RAM Boost automatically checks for the existence of memory managers, such as
HIMEM.SYS and EMM386.EXE, on your system. Then, it scans upper memory to
configure itself with the optimal parameters for managing upper memory.
You need to take the following into consideration before you configure RAM Boost:
• Ensure that you load all the software you normally run in your daily routines
that start your adapter cards (for example, a sound blaster card). RAM Boost
Setup scans the upper memory area looking for unused adapter memory. If
you do not have your adapter activated, RAM Boost Setup might incorrectly use
the adapter memory space.
• If you are using QEMM386, 386MAX, or Netroom, you must install it according
to its installation instructions before you start RAMBoost. You must also make
sure it provides upper memory blocks (UMBs).
• When installing RAMBOOST in a multiple configuration environment, it is
necessary to configure each MENUITEM before allowing RAMBOOST to run an
optimization process.
1. Boot your system and load the first MENUITEM to be optimized.
2. Start the RAMSETUP program and configure the first MENUITEM. When
configured, allow RAMSETUP to reboot your system.
Do not load the same MENUITEM. Loading the same MENUITEM forces a
premature Learn process that would need to be re-optimized later.
3. Load the next MENUITEM to be configured for RAM BOOST optimization.
4. Start RAMSETUP, configure the MENUITEM, and then allow RAMSETUP
to reboot your system.
5. Continue this procedure with each MENUITEM of your multiple
configuration.
When you have configured each MENUITEM (as needed), reboot your system.
As each MENUITEM is loaded, RAMBOOST is ready to perform as intended. It
will learn and optimize each MENUITEM as it is loaded without the extra Learn
modes.
208
PC DOS User's Guide
To configure RAMBoost:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
ramsetup
2. Then press ENTER.
RAM Boost Setup reads the RAMSETUP.INI and RAMBOOST.INI profiles and
configuration files, and then displays a window. Which window is displayed
depends on whether EMM386 is installed in memory.
No EMM386 or equivalent statement installed
-
RAMBoost
'
RAMSETUP will now modify your CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files. Choose OK to continue or choose
Advanced to configure RAMBoost manually. To exit the
RAMBoost setup program, choose Exit.
_n_
_mw DUNnam'
. - - - - -...
i
--~
EMM386 statement or equivalent installed
jt;1;':lmg
RAMSETUP will now nodify your COHFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
HOTE: RAMSETUP can prouide the nost thorough upper
nenory analysis at this tine if EMM386 is not
installed. Choose OK to let RAMSETUP reinstall
EMM386 to configure naxinun DOS upper nenory. Choose
Keep to continue with the current EMM3B6. To exit
RAMSETUP. choose Exit. Choose Aduanced to configure
RAMBoost nanually. If you configure RAMBoost
nanually. choose Keep when you return to this
screen.
- - _ ..............._..
_ - _.._._.......
Any of the following scenarios are possible, depending on what programs exist
in your CONFIG.SYS file when RAM Boost Setup is run:
Scenario 1
• If RAM Boost Setup detects that you have no memory manager installed but
finds the DOS memory manager on your computer, select OK on the
window that is displayed. RAM Boost, EMM386, and HIMEM (if it was not
present) are installed into your CONFIG.SYS file. Go to step 3 on
page 211.
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
209
Scenario 2
• If RAM Boost Setup detects that you have installed a memory manager
other than the one in DOS, select OK on the window that is displayed.
RAM Boost is installed into your CONFIG.SYS file. Go to step 3 on
page 211.
Scenario 3
• If RAM Boost Setup detects that you have an EMM386 statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file, you have the option of letting RAMBoost comment out
(places the REM command before the statement) the statement and install
a new EMM386 statement that optimizes your system. Select OK. Your
system is rebooted and RAMSETUP is restarted automatically.
You can select and use the Advanced button to make changes to your
memory situation. After making your changes, you must select Keep and
then select Reboot.
Note: Use Advanced only if you are very familiar·with upper memory
concepts and management.
A second possibility exists for this scenario. You could get a message
screen that reads:
RAMSETUP will not install because there is only xxx amount
of memory available.
When this occurs, you have the following options:
- Select OK to let RAM Boost Setup uninstall your current EMM386 and
install an EMM386 statement that optimizes your system.
- Select Advanced so that you can manually allocate the stated xxx
amount of upper memory needed. After making the change, select
Keep and then select Reboot.
Scenario 4
• If RAMBoost Setup cannot find a memory manager on your computer, it
'
informs you that you must install one.
Scenario 5
• If you have multiple configurations and want to dictate how RAM Boost
Setup is to handle your configurations, RAM Boost Setup detects the
multiple configurations and displays a window. When you select
Reorgani ze, RAMBoost Setup rearranges the commands in your common
section and includes any statements it determines are needed for optimal
compatibility with each configuration.
210
PC DOS User's Guide
You can change or limit what RAM Boost will do to each configuration by
making changes in the appropriate .INI file. For more information, see the
online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
If you select Reorgani ze, the old CONFIG.SYS is saved as CONFIG.SAV.
After RAM Boost Setup installs RAM Boost in your CONFIG.SYS file, a window
is displayed that allows you to reboot (restart) your computer or exit.
RAM SETUP needs to reboot your computer to determine
the best fit for your resident programs and drivers
in upper memory blocks. Please be sure there are no
diskettes in your diskette drives and choose Reboot
to begin this process. Choose exit if you do not want
RAMSETUP to reboot your computer at this time.
If you select Exi t, RAMBoost will be activated the next time you start your
computer. Be careful not to change your CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT in
the meantime.
3. Select Reboot to start RAM Boost.
RAM Boost restarts your computer twice before RAM Boost is activated.
The first reboot:
RAM Boost Setup loads all your memory-resident programs as usual and keeps a
record of how much memory is used and how the programs are placed in memory.
After restarting your computer, you see the following:
RAMBOOST will automatically load in 3 seconds.
Choose:
Iyl to continue.
INI to prevent RAMBOOST from loading.
Load RAMBOOST
[YIN]?
RAMBOOST is loaded in LEARN mode.
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
211
The second reboot:
RAMBoost actually arranges the programs to fill your upper memory as much as
possible. You should then find a noticeable increase in conventional memory
available for running applications. You now see displayed on the last line:
RAMBOOST is loaded in ACTIVE mode.
This message is followed immediately· by the display of the DOS command prompt
signifying that RAM Boost is loaded.
After this, each time you start your computer, RAMBoost is loaded. Whenever you
restart your computer, if RAM Boost determines that one of the system files it tracks
has been altered (such as your AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS files) or some
other special condition has changed, RAMBoost automatically enters LEARN mode
to optimize your computer's new configuration.
Learn Mode
During Learn mode, RAM Boost is working to determine the optimal location for
every object loaded since (and including) the loading of RAM Boost. This can be a
long process. A feature of RAM Boost is a progress bar that shows the current
status of Learn.
The progress bar shows the actual percentage of the possible combinations that
have been looked at.
RAMBoost defaults to a default timer type of el apsed, meaning you get only the
progress bar and a message indicating how much time has elapsed. However, you
can change the timer type in the RAMSETUP.INI file to an eta timer type.
\
When the timer type is set to eta, the time display provides an estimate of how
much longer the processing will take. This estimate is based on how long it has
taken to process the current fraction of the job.
Analyzing Your Computer's Memory after Running RAMBoost
After RAM Boost is loaded, you might want to do the following to verify that you do
have more conventional memory available:
• View your CONFIG.SYS file. Lines similar to the following are placed in this file
if you successfully loaded RAM Boost:
device=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems ram x=a000-b0ff i=b100-b7ff x=b800-bfff
device=c:\dos\ramboost.exe load
212
PC DOS User's Guide
The i = and x= are INCLUDE and EXCLUDE statements. The ••. means that,
although more of these statements are normally included in this DEVICE
statement, they are all not listed for this example.
• Save the output by typing:
mem Ie
>
filename.ext
where filename.ext is the name of the output file (for example, SAVE2.0UT).
The MEM command is preferred in this case rather than QCONFIG, because it
gives more details about your programs' upper memory.
You should see information similar to the following:
Modules using memory below 1Mb:
Name
Total
-------- ---------------IBMDOS
11088 (11K)
SMARTDRV
31024 (30K)
HIMEM
768
(lK)
EMM386
3392
(3K)
RAMBOOST
10688 (l0K)
ANSI
(4K)
3648
DPMS
1552
(2K)
STACHIGH
16169 (l6K)
COMMAND
2656
(3K)
DOSKEY
1152
(lK)
IBMAVSH
5424
(5K)
MOUSE
17280 (l7K)
FREE
702816 (686K)
Conventional + Upper Memory
---------------- ---------------(0K)
11088 (11K)
0
2448
(2K)
28576 (28K)
768
(lK)
0
(0K)
(3K)
3392
0
(0K)
(OK)
320
10368 (l0K)
48
(0K)
(4K)
3600
1552
(2K)
0
(0K)
48
(0K)
16112 (l6K)
272
(0K)
2384
(2K)
(0K)
1152
0
(lK)
(0K)
5424
(5K)
0
(0K)
17280 (l7K)
0
635408 (621K)
67400 (66K)
• Print the output from the MEM command after you have run RAMSETUP.
• Compare the two printed outputs (before and after running) if you printed or
saved the output from the MEM command before running RAMSETUP.
. For most individuals, running RAMBoost should give you more conventional
memory than you had before running it. If it does not, you might have to manually
manipulate the upper memory blocks or run RAMBOOST OPTIMIZE 1. See the
online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for information about editing your
RAMBOOST.INI file.
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
213
Reviewing What RAM Boost Changes
RAMBoost Setup modifies your CONFIG.SYS file. Some of the following changes
might be noted:
• A RAMBOOST.EXE statement is placed in your CONFIG.SYS file.
• An EMM386 statement is created if you choose to have RAMBoost Setup
comment out (using the REM command) any previous EMM386 statement. Or,
a new EMM386 statement is created if one was not already present.
• The DEVICEHIGH statements have become DEVICE statements, because
RAM Boost now controls your upper memory blocks.
• ' For multiple configurations and single configurations, the following changes are
made:
- The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is backed up toa file named AUTOEXEC.CPS.
- The CONFIG.SYS file is backed up to a file named CONFIG.CPS.
-
For multiple configurations only, an .INI file is created for each possible
configuration in which RAMSETUP was run, matching the name of the
CONFIG variable currently active.
Using Advanced Features
,Use these advanced features only if you are very familiar with upper memory
concepts and manage,ment.
RAMBoost runs by itself with minimal user interaction. It is possible, however, to
customize the way RAM Boost uses the upper memory blocks of your computer.
There are two ways you can work with advanced RAMBoost features:
• Using the Upper Memory Usage Editor
• Editing the appropriate .INI file
The Upper
Me~ory
Usage Editor
The Upper Memory Usage Editor is an advanced feature of the RAM Boost memory
manager. The Upper Memory Usage Editor allows you to:
• View your current upper memory usage
• Make changes to your upper memory usage
You can use the Upper Memory Usage Editor to reserve upper memory blocks for
devices that might not identify their upper memory usage during RAM Boost's setup
and installation. These devices can be network or special video boards. You can
also use the editor to make more upper memory blocks available. For example, if
214
PC DOS User's Guide
you know of an available region of upper memory blocks that appears unavailable,
you can use the editor to change the status of the blocks from allocated to
available.
To start the Upper Memory Usage Editor:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
ramsetup
2. Then press ENTER.
If RAM Boost Setup detects that you have the DOS memory 'manager installed,
RAM Boost Setup provides you with an Advanced option button.
3. Select Advanced.
The following table shows status symbols for each block:
This Symbol
Indicates
An available memory block.
An occupied memory block.
RO
A block allocated for ROM.
VI
A block allocated for video RAM.
EM
A block allocated for the EMS frame.
AD
A block allocated for adapter RAM.
To change the current memory usage of a block:
1. Select the block you want to change, using the mouse or pressing the TAB key
to start the editor and then using the arrow keys.
2. Select the function key that corresponds to the type of memory specification
you want to apply.
Refer to "Function Keys" for more information.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have modified upper memory to your
satisfaction.
4. Select OK to save the changes.
Function Keys: The table on the following page shows the function keys you can
use in the Upper Memory Usage Editor.
Chapter'13. Making More Memory Available
215
Function Key
Description
F1 HELP
Provides online help.
F2 AVAIL
Makes the selected memory blocks available for another use.
F3 EXIT
Exits from the program.
F4ROM
Changes selected memory-block usage to ROM.
F5 VIDEO
Changes selected memory-block usage to video RAM.
F6 EMS
Changes selected memory-block usage to EMS frame.
F7 ADAPT
Changes selected memory-block usage to RAM adapters.
Fa DEC
Switches between the display of memory-block addresses in decimal
and hexadecimal characters.
Using the Options Editor
This' dialog box lets you set the number of XMS (extended memory specification)
. handles, DMA support and· the size of your DMA (direct memory access) buffer.
The default values are correct for most personal computers (pes). You can also
enable or disable EMS (expanded memory specification) memory and specify
whether your computer has a Weitek** coprocessor.
These options correspond to command-line options for the DOS memory manager,
EMM386.
Option
Description
XMS Handles
Specifies the number of extended memory handles EMM386 can use,
from 2 to 255. If you use many programs simultaneously that use
extended memory, you may need to increase this number.
DMA Buffer
Specifies how many kilobytes of memory to reserve for Direct Memory
Access (DMA). This should be the largest DMA transfer that occurs
while EMM386 is active, and it can be from 16 to 256. The default
value is optimized to work on most PCs.
Enable EMS
Enables
memory
memory
requires
memory
Weitek
Enables support for the Weitek coprocessor. If your computer uses this
coprocessor, enable this feature.
EMM386 to access expanded memory by designating a
area for page swapping, which is required for expanded
orientation. You can enable EMS if a program you use
it. If you do not need it, you will have more available upper
if you leave it disabled.
** Weitek is a trademark of the Weitek Corporation.
216
PC DOS User's Guide
To use the Options Editor:
1. Select Opt; ons from the Upper Memory Usage Editor menu.
Dspays Upper
MemoryBock stah.Js
110
m
EO 1lO
llO
nu
..... ...- -- - -- - - -- ".... -- - - -IIU III ru m RJ m rn:J 110 III lllJ m rn:J to
HJ 11) FO 1lO RO
Jl{I
III liO
m
llO
m
00
~O
- 1I.~llablc
.. OccupIed
m
in
Key to stiius syntcls
aspayed in fie Upper
'Memory USaJe EeJ"tor
pa7eI.
IIn~
Uj<
represents the reserved upper memory range.
2. Record the value indicated for the reserved memory. You will use t~is as a
guide when running RAMSETUP to allocate the available upper memory for
RAMBOOST.
3. Type ramsetup at the DOS command prompt.
4. Select Advance.
5. TAB or click on the Upper Memory Usage Editor.
6. Click on the desired location or use the Arrow Keys to move the highlight to the
desired location.
Chapter 13. Making More Memory Available
229
7. Press F2 to set the space to -- (Available) and make that space (memory
range) available to RAMBOOST.
8. Repeat until all desired ranges are edited.
For example, if you see the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:
device=c:\pcmcia\dicrmu01.sys /ma=c000-cfff
You would need to set an available range of DOOO-DFFF in RAMSETUP for
RAM BOOST to run without a memory conflict.
To adjust the PCMCIA Version 2.1 release for RAM BOOST
1. View your CONFIG.SYS file for the statement:
DEVICE=C:\PCMCIA\DICRMU01.SYS /MA=xxxx-xxxx
where >n about your system.
3. Look at the column labeled "buffering." If any line in the column reads "yes" or
contains a hyphen, do not remove the DEVICE command for SMARTDRV from
your CONFIG.SYS file.
Chapter 14. Speeding Up Your System
237
Using RAMDrive
RAMDrive is a memory-resident program, also known as a
terminate-arid-stay-resident (TSR) program, that lets you use part of your
computer's memory, called a RAM drive, as if it Were a hard disk drive. By using
RAMDrive, you can make programs run faster. RAM disks are temporary-any
da.ta you place on the RAM disk is lost when you turn off your computer. You can
set up as many RAM disks as you want, limited only by the amount of memory your
computer has and DOS drive letters available. You can run this feature on your
system in either extended or expanded memory.
You should specify the extended or expanded parameter. Otherwise,
RAMDRIVESYS uses your system's conventional memory.
For more information about RAMDRIVESYS, type help ramdri ve. sys or see the
online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
When you install DOS, the Setup program copies the RAMDRIVESYS file to your
DOS directory. To create a RAM drive, you add a DEVICE or DEVICEHIGH
command-line statement for RAMDRIVESYS drive to your CONFIG.SYS file. You
must add a command for each RAM disk you use with your system .
. To activate the RAMDrive feature of your system:
1. Make a copy of your CONFIG.SYS file as a backup file.
2. Open your CONFIG.SYS file by using a text editor, such as the E Editor.
3. Add a DEVICE or DEVICEHIGH command-line statement for the
RAMDRIVESYS device driver after the DEVICE command that installs the
expanded or extended memory manager. It should appear similar to the
following:
device=c:\dos\ramdrive.sys 512 Ie
This example creates a RAM drive that takes up S12K of extended memory.
You can specify how much and what type of memory your RAM drive uses by
customizing the command-line statement. The Ie switch specifies that extended
memory should be used.
4. Save the changes to your CONFIG.SYS file and exit the E Editor.
5. Open your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
238
PC DOS User's Guide
6. Set the TEMP environment variable to your RAM drive by adding a SET
command-line statement. The drive letter of your RAM drive should be the
letter after that of your last physical drive.
For example, if your last physical disk drive is C, your RAM drive would be D.
In this case, you would add the following command to your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file:
set temp=d:\
7. Save the changes to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
8. Restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
Important:
If RAMDrive is to use extended memory, your CONFIG.SYS file must contain a
DEVICE command for the HIMEM.SYS memory manager. If RAMDrive is to use
expanded memory, your CONFIG.SYS file must contain a DEVICE command for
the expanded-memory manager that came with your memory board. The DEVICE
command for RAMDrive must come after the one for the memory manager.
You can improve the performance of RAMDrive by doing the following:
• If you run programs from your RAM drive, list your RAM drive first in your
PATH command.
For example, if your RAM drive is drive 0, add d: \ to the beginning of the
PATH command. For information about the PATH command, type hel p path at
the DOS command prompt.
• If you use the EMM386 program as an expanded-memory emulator, do not put
the RAM drive in expanded memory.
Although RAMDrive can also use this emulated expanded memory, it is not as
efficient as it would be if it were using real physical memory.
Chapter 14. Speeding Up Your System
239
240
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
The Central Point Undelete program (Undelete) recovers files and directories
protected by these methods of delete protection:
• Delete Sentry**
• Delete Tracker
Undelete is most effective when you protect files using one of its own delete
protection methods, but it can also detect other methods of delete protection,
such as:
• Novell** NetWare** 386
• DR DOS** DelWatch
Also, DOS can usually undelete its own files, even if they are unprotected. For
information about configuring Delete Sentry and Delete Tracker, see "Central Point
Data Monitor" on page 270.
Undelete files as soon as possible for the best chance of recovering all your data.
If you have accidentally erased or formatted your entire disk or diskette, use
UNFORMAT to recover the disk.
Installing Central Point Undelete for Windows
Undelete for DOS is installed automatically during PC DOS Setup. However, if you
want to use Undelete while in a Windows session, and you did not select Undelete
for Windows at initial setup, you can still install this program.
During Setup, PC DOS checks whether your computer has Windows 3.1 installed.
If you do not have Windows 3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
provided with PC DOS, you should make sure you install in this order:
1. Install PC DOS as you normally would, selecting the optional tools you want
from the list provided. You will not see any of the optional tools for Windows
listed.
2. After you have installed PC DOS, install Windows 3.1 as you normally would.
**
**
**
Delete Sentry is a trademark of Central Point Software.
Novell and NetWare are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
DR DOS is a trademark of Digital Research, Inc.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
241
3. Install PC DOS again using the DOS Setup Ie switch to install optional tools
after PC DOS and Windows have been installed.
To install Central Point Undelete for Windows using the PC DOS Setup Ie
switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into drive A or
B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The Ie switch allows you to return to the optional-tools selection menu without
having to do a complete reinstallation. At this point, only the necessary files for
the optional tools for Windows will be installed.
3. After Setup for PC DOS begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Make sure you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the
initial PC DOS installation.
At the Optional Tools menu, you see a NO next to Central Point Undelete for
Windows.
4. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you highlight Central Point
Undelete for Windows. You can select other optional tools at this time by
highlighting and pressing ENTER for each item.
You now see YES next to Central Point Undelete for Windows and other optional
tools you selected.
5. After you select the optional tools you want to install, move the cursor to
highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
6. Press ENTER to accept the optional tool selections.
Continue to follow the instructions displayed on the screen until the optional
tools are installed.
242
PC DOS User's Guide
Starting Undelete
Undelete is a tool that recovers files and directories protected by specific methods
of delete protection. It can even undelete most files not protected by these
methods. Undelete works in conjunction with Data Monitor, a memory-resident
program that includes several options to guard against data loss and protect
confidential data.
To start Central Point Undelete:
1. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
undelete
2. Then press ENTER
If you prefer, you can use the DOS command prompt to undelete files rather than
use the full-screen version of Undelete.
To start the command-line version of Undelete:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
undelete drive:\directory
2. Then press ENTER.
For each occurrence of a deleted file, you are prompted:
Do you want to recover this file? (YIN)
3. Press Y to answer yes, or press N to answer no when queried about each file.
You can limit your search by specifying the full path for the file if you know it, by
specifying a specific directory that you know contained this file, or by using
wildcards just as you limit the search when using the DIR command. A better way
to find out what files have been deleted is to type the following:
,undelete Ilist
Typing this command provides a list of the files you have deleted and the method of
protection being used to protect them, such as Delete Sentry, Delete Tracker, or
DOS. You see a list of deleted files for the current directory.
To start' the Windows version of Undelete:
You can start Central Point Undelete for Windows by double-clicking on the Central
Point Undelete icon located in the PC DOS Tools program group. You then see
the main window for Central Point Undelete for Windows.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
243
Viewing the Undelete Y"indow
When the Undelete window appears, the directory tree on the left shows the
directory structure of the selected drive. The file list on the right shows
subdirectories and files that have been deleted from the highlighted directory.
When you delete a file, you no longer see it when you use the DOS DIR command,
but its data might still be on the disk.
DdveLine
rl~~"·~i:>~>
~n~F(:1>~q~~~L
EAS'J1l11t .DDF E>oo.,Uent
3611 b..ot;gz 2 :421'
~
[&J IIJ:STI!IIt .DDF
~ EIJ(IPttn' .1JK1
[&J IlMllCES.OCT
I:fI SALES .OCT
~ PA'xtIlIrnl.l4Jl:l
I:fI HIIR'IHEIII.DBF
~ PJnlEC'TS.HaD
~ READHE
.eAX
Directory
tree
~ ~IIK
_
Deleted Fife
Status panel
Delete Date:
flAXt;2
~IIK
.ero:
.00'
Delete Tire:
E>cellent
E>oo.,llent
E>cellent
Excel h::nt
E>cellent
Excell.,nt
E>cellent
!'oar
I'oor
S:1Ip
brOi;gZ
6/0V~Z
~5'l
111fJ:1...'Jtl
'17811
'l221fl
0000
11191/~e
2~S
6;ev~2
l'u listed as the file
size. As soon as you undelete a directory, any deleted files it contained appear in
Undelete's file lists. If you cannot find a deleted file, see if you can find its directory
using the directory tree and file list. When you undelete the directory, it appears in
the directory tree. Select that directory, and then select and undelete any of its
deleted files.
252
PC DOS User's Guide
If you cannot find a deleted file's directory, you can still find the file or its data by
using one of Undelete's disk scan methods discussed in "Scanning the Disk for Lost
Files and Deleted Data" on page 258.
Undeleting a Directory
As you add files to a directory, it grows in size. DOS splits large directories into
more than one group of file entries and does not keep track of the additional groups
if you delete the directory. You can undelete most directories automatically.
However, when Undelete cannot determine the location of all parts of a directory, it
displays the Directory Undelete window.
, Identifying Groups of File Entries Belonging to a Directory
In the Directory Undelete window, identify the groups of file entries that belong in
the directory you are undeleting.
~
Directory Undelete
=
-
--
- ,
,-
a
-6/83/91
1:18pM~~
Group to
Add or Skip
nos
splits large directories into Morn
than one group of files. 'tou Must identify
the groups that are part of. ill i~; rI ir8ctory.
no you want to add this group"!
In this window, you do not select individual files to undelete. Rather, you decide
whether the entire group of file entries displayed in the list box represents files that
belong in the directory you want to undelete.
If
Then
The group of file entries
displayed in the scrollable
file list was in the directory
Select Add.
Undelete adds this group and searches for the next
probable group of file entries.
The displayed group of file
entries was not in the
directory.
Select Ski p.
Undelete searches for the next probable group.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
253
To identify groups of file entries belonging to a directory:
1. Continue adding groups of file entries that belong in the directory. When you
have added the same number of groups as originally belonged in the directory,
Undelete recovers the directory automatically (you do not have to select
Unde 1ete) and rebuilds the directory tree to include it.
2. Select Undelete to recover ,the directory before all groups are added.
Finding Deleted Files
If you cannot find a deleted file easily by looking for it in the Undelete directory tree
and file list or when you want to display all deleted files on the disk in one listing,
you can search for files by entering a file specification.
To find deleted files:
1. On the drive line above the Undelete directory tree and file list, click the drive
from which the file was deleted, or press CTRL and the drive letter.
2. Select Fi nd Del eted Fi 1es from the File menu, or press F7.
1-
l"i k Spe.? if i~~:Uun:
~~>*
-
-
"
~lt';!];1tV;:'
'lancer',
t:TrriUps'"
GZl
Case
Word Search
o
3. Select an option:
File Specification text box: Lets you specify the name of .the file or files you
are searching for, using the DOS wildcard characters * and ?
Containing text box: Lets you narrow the search to deleted files that contain
a specific text string. The program finds only files that contain that string.
Groups: Finds files associated with a particular application.
4. In the File Specification text box, enter the file
file or files you want to find.
~pecification
that describes the
You can include more than one specification, separating each by one space.
I
For example, type
254
PC DOS User's Guide
*. EXE *. COM to
include all program files.
You can exclude files by prefacing a file specification with a minus sign.
For example, type *.BAT -\*.BAT to include all batch files except those in the
root directory.
• Use the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW to move the cursor one character
right or left, and use HOME and END to position the cursor at the beginning
or end of the entry.
• To insert characters, scroll to where you want to insert them, press the
INSERT key, and type the additional characters. To delete text, position the
cursor after the character to be deleted and press BACKSPACE.
You can use file specifications and file contents together to narrow your search.
For example, if you type the file specification *. DOC and you type budget in the
Containing text box, the program will find all IBM DisplayWrite* files and other
.DOC files that contain the word "budget."
5. Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing text box.
6. Select the text search options:
Ignore Case: Finds files containing the text whether it is uppercase or
lowercase. For example, if you type CHOCOLATE, Undelete will find files
containing "Chocolate," "chocolate," and "ChoColate."
Whole Word: Finds only the text you enter if it is one or more complete words.
For example, if you type tort, Undelete will not find "tortellini" or "retorted."
7. Select the delete protection methods to search for and then select OK.
If no files on the current drive are protected by Delete Sentry, Delete Tracker,
or DelWatch, those checkboxes are dimmed and you cannot select them.
Delete Sentry: Finds deleted files that match the file and content specifications
and were protected by Delete Sentry.
Delete Tracker: Finds deleted files that match the file and content
specifications and were protected by Delete Tracker.
DOS: Finds deleted files that match the file and content specifications and
were protected only by DOS.
DelWatch: Finds deleted files that match the file and content specifications
and were protected only by DR DOS's DelWatch.
!
*
DisplayWrite is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
255
All files that match the specifications appear in the Find Deleted Files window,
which contains an expanded file list that shows all files that match your Find
Deleted Files specifications, including their paths.
~
~
~
3/18/87
1/11/88 5 23pM C:'SALES'AHHUAL
5/28/88 11 53 aM C:'SALES'AHHUAL
PROJECT ;FIL Perfect
?EETIHGS.FIL Destroyed
?QUIPHHT.FIL
Poor
J~
Expanded
file list
1-
Delete Date: lInknoH"l
-
-.
Delete TiMe: Unknol-ID
All clusiers are available but
Help
~IndeK
~EKit
~UieH
§Select
SOMe
Protected by: nos
May have been overNritten.
~UnselctjTree
~Undel
~Sort
For more information, see "Deleted File Condition" on page 245 and "Delete
Prot~ction Methods" on page 247.
.
Most menu commands available in the Undelete directory tree and file list are
also available in the Find Deleted Files window. The following commands are
not available: Show Existing Files and its related commands, Rename Existing
File, and Append to Existing File.
8. To return to the directory tree and file list from the Find Deleted Files window,
select Tree & Fil e Li st from the File menu or press F7.
The function associated with F7 switches between Tree and Fi nd, depending
on which window you are in. The 'command on the File menu also switches
between the. Tree & Fil eLi stand Fi nd Deleted Fil es options.
256
PC DOS User's Guide
r,~enu
Searching for a Group of Files
Search groups make it easy to find deleted files associated with specific
applications.
To search for a group of files:
1. Select Fi nd Deleted Fi 1es from the File menu.
2. Select Groups in the Find Deleted Files window.
3. Select the group or groups from the Search Groups window and select OK.
The specification for the group or groups you selected appears in the File
Specification text box. If you selected more than one group, all of their
specifications appear in the text box, separated by spaces.
4. Select OK in the Find Deleted Files window.
The groups you selected remain in effect until you change the file specification
,or leave the program.
To add a search group:
1. Select Fi nd De 1eted Fi 1es from the File menu.
2. Select Groups in the Find Deleted Files window.
3. Select Edi t.
4. Select New, and enter a group name and file specification.
Enter a file specification that describes the names and location of the files. For
example, if all your IBM DisplayWrite files were located in C:\DW5 and had the
extension .DOC, enter the file specification C:\DW5\*.DOC to define a group
called "DW5 Files."
5. Select Save.
I
6. To use this group for the next search, select it and select OK in the Search
Groups window.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
257
To edit or delete a search group:
1. Select Fi nd Del eted Fil es from the File menu.
2. Select Groups in the Find Deleted Files window.
3. Select Ed; t.
4. Select the search group you want to edit or delete.
To edit a search group, change the group name, file specification, or both and
select Save.
Or, to delete a search group, select Delete.
5. Select OK.
6. To use this group for the next search, select it and select OK in the Search
Groups window.
Scanning the Disk for Lost Files and Deleted Data
You can scan the entire disk for lost files or for deleted data that is not associated
with any file or directory if you have not found a deleted file using any of the
following methods:
• Looking in the Undelete directory tree and file list
• Using the Find Deleted Files command
• Undeleting the file's deleted directory
Try the Scan for Lost Deleted Files option first. If you cannot find the files you are
looking for, you can scan the disk's free clusters for the deleted data.
Scanning for Lost or Deleted Files
You can scan the entire disk for lost files-files no longer associated with any
existing directory.
To scan for lost or deleted files:
1. Go to the directory where you want lost files to be recovered. Undelete
recovers lost files to the current directory.
2. Select Scan for Lost Del eted Fil es from the Disk menu.
3. Select the delete protection methods to scan for:
Delete Sentry: Finds deleted files that match the file and content specifications
and were protected by Delete Sentry.
Delete Tracker: Finds deleted files that match the file and content
specifications and were protected by Delete Tracker.
258
PC DOS User's Guide
DOS: Finds deleted files that match the file and content specifications and
were protected only by DOS.
If no files on the current drive are protected by Delete Sentry or Delete Tracker,
that checkbox is dimmed and you cannot select it.
4. Select OK.
Undelete scans the disk for files protected by the method or methods you selected.
If you selected more than one method, Undelete scans the Delete Sentry directory
first, then the Delete Tracker file, then the entire disk.
The Scan for Lost Deleted Files window shows the file or cluster number being
scanned and the number of scan items found. A progress bar shows you how
much of the disk has been scanned.
When the disk scan is complete, the list of files found appears in the Find Deleted
Files window, with Lost File as its condition. Lost files retain their original names
and other information, so you can easily select and undelete the files you are
looking for.
Scanning Free Clusters for Deleted Data
You can scan the disk's free clusters-disk space no longer associated with any
existing file or directory-for a specified type of data or a text string.
Note: When Undelete scans the diskette's free clusters, it does not look at files
protected by Delete Sentry or DelWatch.
To scan free clusters for deleted data:
1. Go to the directory where you want clusters containing the specified type of
data to be recovered. Undelete recovers clusters to the current directory.
2. Select one of the cluster scans from the Disk menu:
If you select Scan for Data Types, select the type of data to scan for (Lotus
1-2-3 and Symphony**, dBASE**, or normal text).
Or, if you select Scan for Contents, specify a word, phrase, or text string to
scan for. It does not matter whether you use uppercase or lowercase letters.
3. Select OK.
**
**
Symphony is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
dBASE is a trademark of Borland International, Inc.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
259
The window shows the cluster number being scanned and the number of scan
items found. A progress bar shows you how much of the disk has been
scanned.
When Undelete finds a contiguous group of free clusters that match the data
type, it counts the group as a file and gives it a unique name. Undelete tries to
match lost data with directory entries, making its best guess at the file's name.
When the disk scan is complete, the list of clusters found appears in the Find
Deleted Files window.
Two additional Disk menu commands act on disk scanning:
• Set Scan Range: Lets you limit the scans to a range of clusters, rather than
scanning the entire disk for clusters that cannot possibly contain the data you
are looking for. For example, if your hard disk has never been more than half
full, you can limit the upper end of the cluster range to half the total number of
clusters shown in the Cluster Range window. The scan range remains in effect
for all disk scans until you change it, leave the program, or change drives.
• Continue Scan: Lets you continue a scan you interrupted by selecting Cancel.
You can interrupt a scan at any time to look at the list of files found to that
point.
Showing Existing Files
You can add existing files to the list of deleted files to rename or add deleted
clusters to them. This option is available only when you are in the Undelete
directory tree and file list..
When you select Show Ex; st; ng Fil es from the Options menu, all existing files are
added to each directory's list of deleted files. After existing files appear, you can
select them.
To rename an existing file (to undelete a file whose name already exists), select it
and select Rename Exi sti ng Fi 1e from the File menu. For more information, see
"Automatic Undelete Methods" on page 249.
To add deleted clusters to an existing file, select it and select Advanced Undel ete ~
Append to Ex; st; ng Fil e from the File menu. See "Advanced Undelete Methods"
on page 261.
Selecting Show Ex; s t; ng Fil es turns the option on and off. To remove existing files
from the list, select the option again.
260
PC DOS User's Guide
Advanced Undelete Methods
If one of the automatic undelete methods will not work, Undelete tells you to use
one of its advanced file recovery methods.
Manual Undelete: Lets you undelete the highlighted file by selecting the clusters
you want in it. Use this method to undelete files listed in Poor condition, on
DOS-deleted Destroyed files, or on files listed in Good and Excellent condition that
contain some overwritten clusters. You can start with a list of available (free)
clusters that Undelete associates with the highlighted file, then add, delete, and
reorder free clusters until the file contains the data you want.
To manually undelete a file:
1. From the Undelete directory tree and file list or the Find Deleted Files window,
select a file to undelete manually.
2. Select Advanced Undel ete
~
Manual Undel ete from the File menu.
Rle information
List of A dded Clusters
File: INVOICE.ACe
List
Size: 28B{1 hytes
Date: 41"261'1]0
Tinc:: 10 :~i7i3n
or
Added Clusters
Starting cluster
Clusters needed
Hext Available Cluster
It:
o
Clusters added
91
,
,
,
,
91
3
,
,
,
3. If the file you selected is a DOS-deleted file whose first character has been
replaced by a question mark, enter a new first character when requested.
4. In the Manual Undelete window, you can add, view, move, and delete free
clusters from a list that you create. See "The Advanced Undelete Window" on
page 262.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
261
Create a File: Lets you construct a new file when Undelete cannot find the file, but
you are reasonably sure that it is still on the disk-which can happen, for example,
if the file's directory has been overwritten. You enter a new file name and build the
file by selecting available (free) clusters.
To create a new file from deleted clusters:
1. Select Advanced Undel ete
~
Create a Fi 1e from the File menu.
2. In the Create a File window, type a name for the new file and select OK.
3. In the Create a File window, you can add, view, move, and delete free clusters
from a list that you create. See "The Advanced Undelete Window."
Append to Existing File: Lets you add available (free) clusters to an existing file.
For example, if you realize that some data is missing after you undelete a file
manually or create a file from available clusters, use this method to add the
additional clusters. After you have appended avail?ble clusters to an existing file's
clusters, you can reorder all the clusters and delete any you do not want.
Note: When you add a free cluster to a file, it might prevent you from undeleting
other deleted files, so do this only after you have undeleted any other files
you want to recover and that can be automatically undeleted.
To add deleted clusters to an existing file:
1. If you are not already in the Undelete directory tree and file list, select Tree &
Fi 1eLi st from the File menu.
2. Select Show Exi st i ng Fil es from the Options menu.
All existing files are added to the list of deleted files and appear in the directory
tree and file list. The condition column identifies them as Existing.
3. Select the existing file you want to add clusters to.
4. Select Advanced Undelete
~
Append to Exi sti ng Fil e from the File menu.
5. ,In the Append to a File window, you can add, view, move, and delete free
clusters to the list of clusters occupied by the selected file.
The Advanced Undelete Window
In the Advanced Undelete window, you determine which clusters to include in the
file and in what order. By viewing clusters before you add them and by viewing the
assembled file, you can tell whether the clusters you are adding contain data you
want.
262
PC DOS User's Guide
The window title differs, depending on whether you chose Manual Undelete, Create
. a File, or Append to a File.
List of A dded Clusters
Rle information
I
.......
Fi Le :IINVUICE .ACe
Size: 2880 bytes
Date: 4/26/08
Tine: W:37an
Starting cluster
Clusters needed
91
3
Mext AyailabLe Cluster
II:
Clusters: added
91
II
,
,
c;kip' Cluster'
,
,
File Information: Includes the name and size of the file you selected to undelete,
along with the date and time it was last modified.
List of Added Clusters: Lets you assemble a list of clusters you want to include
in the undeleted file. You can add all free clusters on the current drive to this list.
Free clusters are those not currently associated with any file or directory. After you
add clusters to this list, you can view the assembled file to see if it contains the
correct data, organized the way you want it.
Item
What It Means
Next Available
Cluster
The next free cluster on the disk that you can add to the undeleted
file.
Starting cluster
The disk location of the file's original first cluster.
Clusters needed
The number of clusters the original file contained.
Clusters added
The total number of clusters you added. Added clusters are listed
in the scrollable panel on the right-hand side of the List of Added
Clusters. These clusters are not actually assigned to the file until
you select Update.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
263
Undel,eting Clusters
Use these buttons on the Advanced Undelete window to assemble the file you want
to undelete:
~
Manual Undelete
List of Added Clusters
File:
Size:
Date:
TiMe: m:37an,
Starting cluster
Clusters needed
Next Available Cluster
It
119
Clusters added
rOve,
r' "': :',':Cpda"t'e c"'"
'arleef':::
264
91
3
3
,
,
":,
Button
What It Does
Add Cluster
Lets you add all or specified free clusters, view the next available
cluster, or scan free clusters for specified data. See the following
procedure. Each cluster you add is listed in the scrollable List of
Added Clusters panel.
Skip Cluster
Skips to the next available free cluster.
View File
Lets you examine all the clusters you have already added. If the
first cluster is a recognizable file type, the clusters appear in native
format; otherwise, they appear in text or binary format.
Update
Undeletes the file. The File Allocation ,Table is updated so that the
clusters you added (shown in the List of Added Clusters panel) are
associated with the undeleted file name.
PC DOS User's Guide
To undelete clusters:
1. Select Add Cl uster.
2. Select a cluster option:
Add All Clusters: Available in Manual Undelete only; adds to the list the same
number of free clusters originally assigned to the file. For example, if the
selected file consisted of eight clusters, then the file's starting cluster and the
next seven available cluster numbers will be added to the list. If the deleted file
was fragmented, these might or might not contain the data that originally
belonged to the file. You can view each cluster to find out.
Add This Cluster: Adds the next available cluster (shown at the top of the
Cluster Options window) to the list.
View This Cluster: Displays the contents of the next available cluster so you
can decide whether to add it. When in the Cluster Viewer, you can view each
next available free cluster without leaving the viewer window.
Scan for Contents: Lets you scan the disk's free clusters for a text string you
enter in the window. The first cluster that matches your string appears in the
Cluster Viewer. You can either add this cluster or display the next one
containing the text string.
Enter Cluster #: Lets you specify a cluster number to add to the list. This can
be useful as a starting point if you know approximately where the file is on the
disk.
3. After cluster numbers are displayed in the List of Added Clusters, you can
modify the list.
4. Select an option:
Move: Lets you use UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, HOME, END, PAGE UP, and
PAGE DOWN to move the highlighted cluster to a new place in the list.
Delete: Removes the highlighted cluster from the list.
5. When the list includes the clusters you want in the file, in proper order, select
OK.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
265
Purging Deleted Files
You can specify how many days to save deleted files and a maximum percentage
of disk space to allow for Delete Sentry's hidden directory by editing the
DATAMON.INI file. Delete Sentry files are purged automatically when these limits
are reached or when DOS needs the disk space they occupy. When Delete Sentry
purges files, it removes the oldest deleted files first. See "Central Point Data
Monitor" on page 270 for more information about Delete Sentry and how to
configure it.
You can also use Undelete to purge all or selected deleted files that are protected
by Delete Sentry, Delete Tracker, NetWare, and DelWatch. This does not change
the free space actually available on your disk, because these methods allow DOS
to use its disk space when needed. However, purging files does create more room
for protected files, especially when disk space is at a premium.
If one of these methods is not currently protecting files on the current drive, the
Purge Deleted Files command will be dimmed in the File menu and you cannot
select it.
Warning: After you purge files, other files can overwrite their data, and you might
not be able to recover them.
To purge all deleted files:
1. Select Purge Del eted Fil es from the File menu.
2. In the submenu that appears, choose which type of protected files to purge.
3. In the Purge File window, select Purge All.
Undelete removes all files on the current drive protected by the selected
method .
. Note: Purging NetWare files on a large file server can be slow.
266
PC DOS User's Guide
To purge selected deleted files:
1. From the Undelete directory tree and file list, select the files you want to purge.
You can purge all files except those protected by DOS.
2. Select Purge Deleted Fi 1e from the File menu.
3. In the submenu that appears, choose the type of protected files to purge.
4. In the Purge File window, select Purge.
If any of the files y.ou select cannot be purged or do not match the protection
type you selected, that file selection will be ignored.
How the Delete Protection Method Affects File Recovery
Undelete can recover files by using information saved by Delete Tracker, Delete
Sentry, Mirror, Novell NetWare's method of delete protection, and DR DOS's
DelWatch. If none of these were used, Undelete uses information available through
DOS. The way a file was protected when it was deleted determines how
successfully you will be able to undelete it. Delete Sentry is the most reliable. To
configure delete protection, use Data Monitor. See "Central Point Data Monitor" on
page 270.
Undeleting Files without Delete Protection
When you delete a file without delete protection installed, DOS leaves the data on
the disk; but in the File Allocation Table (FAT), it marks all the clusters used by the
file as available. DOS replaces the first character of the deleted file's name with a
special character that tells DOS not to include the deleted file in the directory listing.
This means that you can no longer find that file using DOS.
The file's data remains on the disk and can be undeleted until DOS overwrites it.
Because the deleted file's clusters are no longer allocated in the FAT, DOS can use
those now-free clusters for expanding or creating a file. Fortunately, a deleted file's
clusters are likely to remain intact for a while, because DOS usually looks beyond
the last-saved data cluster for the next available disk space before it uses
deleted-file clusters.
DOS keeps a record of a deleted file's name (with ,ts first character replaced by the
special character), its starting cluster, and how many clusters belonged to the file.
This information alone might not be· enough to undelete the correct data, because.
the clusters belonging to a file can be scattered about the disk.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
267
Here is a guide to interpreting the status of a file that was deleted without delete
protection based on the condition assigned to it by Undelete:
Condition
Status of a file
Excellent:
There are enough contiguous (sequential) free clusters following the
starting cluster to rebuild the file. If the original file was unfragmented, this
group of contiguous clusters contains its data and you can Undelete it
automatically. If the file was fragmented, use Manual Undelete to look for
its data elsewhere on the disk. More information follows this list.
Good:
If the file's starting cluster is available but there are not enough contiguous
free clusters following the starting cluster to rebuild a multiple-cluster file,
Undelete assumes that one or more of the file's clusters are in use by
other files and reduces its condition to Good. You can use Vi ew Fi 1e to
see what would be undeleted automatically. If data is missing, look for it
elsewhere on the disk with Manual Undel ete.
Poor:
The file's starting cluster is in use by another file. Use Unde 1ete to, which
copies to another drive all the clusters that Undelete assumes belonged to
the original file, whether they are in use or not. Then, you can examine
the file to see if any of its original data was recovered. If more than the
beginning of the file is missing, use one of the Advanced Undelete
'methods to look for the file's data elsewhere on the disk.
Destroyed:
The file's first cluster and enough contiguous clusters to rebuild it are in
use by other files. However, because DOS does not keep track of all the
clusters of deleted files, some of the data might still be on the disk if the
file was fragmented. The missing data can be found by using one of the
Advanced Unde,Iete methods or by scanning the disk for deleted data.
If you do not know whether the original file was fragmented, you might want to use
Vi ew Fi 1e or Un de 1ete to to examine the file to see'if it contains the data you
expected. If not, use Manua 1 Undelete and look for the file's original clusters. If the
file was fragmented, you might be able to find the missing data elsewhere on the
disk.
It is possible that some of the data in the available clusters of a DOS-protected file
can be overwritten, even if the file's condition is Excellent or Good. See "When
Data Might Be Overwritten" on page 270.
268
PC DOS User's Guide
Undeleting Files Protected by Delete Tracker
The Delete Tracker method of delete protection creates a hidden file named
PCTRACKR.DEL in the root directory of the protected drive. It intercepts the DOS
DEL command. In the PCTRACKR.DEL hidden file, Delete Tracker stores the
name of the deleted file and the location of all the clusters it occupied. DOS then
completes the delete operation and changes the FAT to indicate that the file is
deleted and its clusters are available.
If Delete Tracker was active when the file was deleted, Undelete will use
information saved in the hidden file to find and evaluate all the deleted file's
clusters.
Here is a guide to interpreting the status of a deleted file protected by Delete
Tracker based on the condition assigned to it by Undelete:
Condition
Status of a file
Excellent:
All of the original clusters for this file are available. Recover
it automatically with Undel ete.
Good:
The file's starting cluster is available. However, one or
more of its remaining original clusters is currently in use by
another file.
Poor:
The file's starting cluster is currently in use by another file.
Destroyed:
All of the file's clusters are in use by other files. Most likely,
Undelete cannot recover any of it.
For Good, Poor, and Destroyed files protected by Delete Tracker, you might want to
use' Unde 1ete to, which copies to another drive all the clusters that belonged to the
original file, whether those clusters are currently in use by another file or not. You
can then examine the file to see how much of the original data was recovered.
Even if the file's condition is Excellent, Good, or Poor, some of the data in the
available clusters of a file protected by Delete Tracker might be overwritten, as
described next. Before recovering the file, you can use Manua 1 Undel ete to remove
any overwritten clusters.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
269
When Data Might Be Overwritten
Files protected by Delete Tracker or DOS that have a condition of Excellent, Good,
or Poor might contain some overwritten data in their available clusters.
Undelete can determine only if a file's clusters are currently in use by another file.
It has no way of determining if that file's data has been overwritten by another file
that has also been deleted, which makes those clusters available once again. For
example, many programs write to temporary files that are deleted when you exit
from the program. These temporary files can overwrite the same clusters that were
occupied by other deleted files. For this reason, undelete files protected by Delete
Tracker or DOS as soon as possible after deleting them.
Undeleting Files Protected by Delete Sentry
The Delete Sentry method of delete protection creates a hidden directory named
\SENTRY off the root directory of the protected drive. It intercepts the DOS DEL
command and moves the deleted file to this directory without changing the record of
the file's location stored in the FAT-effectively changing the path to the file but not
its physical location. As far as DOS is concerned, the file has been moved. The
file's clusters are still allocated in the FAT and are protected from being overwritten
by DOS. Undelete can find the file in Delete Sentry's hidden directory.
If Delete Sentry was active when the file was deleted, Undelete can recover the
complete file in Perfect condition. However, Delete Sentry files are purged
automatically when limits set in the DATAMON.INI file are reached or when DOS
needs the disk space occupied by Delete Sentry files. In that case, or if you purge
Delete Sentry files using Undelete, those files can be undeleted only through DOS
information.
Central Point Data Monitor
Central Point's Data Monitor (DATAMON) is a memory-resident program that
includes several options to guard against data loss.
Warning: Do not use Data Monitor with versions of Central Point programs, such
as Backup, earlier than Version 7. These versions are not compatible and can
cause data loss. Use Version 7 or 8 programs instead.
270
PC DOS User's Guide
Choosing a Delete Protection Method
Delete protection provides two different methods of security against accidentally
deleting an important file. By selecting either of the following methods, you greatly
improve your chances of being able to use the Undelete program to recover a
deleted file:
• Delete Tracker
• Delete Sentry
Delete Tracker
You can turn on (+) or off (-) the Delete Tracker method of protection after Data
Monitor is loaded. This method provides a somewhat lesser degree of protection
than Delete Sentry. However, when you use Undelete soon after a file is deleted,
you have a good chance of recovering it. This method is not available on network
drives.
Delete Sentry
You can turn on (+) or off (-) the Delete Sentry method of protection after Data
Monitor is loaded. If you turn off Delete Sentry, you will notice a decrease in the
number of free bytes reported by DIR. The value for bytes available reported by
the CHKDSK command does take into account the space occupied by the Delete
Sentry files. You can use this method on netw9rk and local drives.
Before you can use Delete Sentry on a network volume, the network supervisor
should use Data Monitor to configure Delete Sentry for that volume. The hidden
\SENTRY directory is created automatically. The supervisor should then assign, to
any users that require them, the following rights to the \SENTRY directory:
NetWare 286
NetWare 386
All rights except Parental
All rights except Access Control and Supervisory
Loading and Configuring Data Monitor
Data Monitor loads itself high automatically to conserve conventional memory if you
have:
• A memory manager such as QEMM, 386MAX, or EMM386
• Memory available between 640K and 1MB
However, when you have RAM Boost loaded into memory, the RAMBoost program
loads Data Monitor where optimally most efficient.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
271
To load Data Monitor:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
datamon /sentry+
or
datamon /tracker+
Choose either method of protection for your data based on your needs. You
can have only one method of protection running at one time; Delete Sentry and
Delete Tracker are mutually exclusive.
2. Configure Data Monitor options anytime after you load one of the methods of
protection. To see a list of the options available with Data Monitor, type the
following at the DOS command prompt:
help datamon
Because DATAMON is a memory.;.resident program, you can add this command to
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Loading Data Monitor for Network Drives
For a network drive, you must use Delete Sentry; you cannot use Delete Tracker for
network drives. To use Delete Sentry on a Novell network drive, you must load
Data Monitor into memory after the Novell network drivers.
If Data Monitor is already resident in memory, you can only turn on (+) an option
from the command line if one of the following is true:
• Data Monitor is originally loaded with that option turned on, and it has been
temporarily turned off.
• Data Monitor is the last program loaded into memory.
Loading Data Monitor into Low Memory
If you have a memory manager program installed and memory available between
640K and 1MB, Data Monitor normally loads itself high automatically unless a
memory optimization program, such as RAM Boost, is running.
If you know you are running a memo'ry optimizer, you can use the flow switch when
you configure Data Monitor to specify that you do not want to load it into Upper
Memory Blocks even if they are available.
272
PC DOS User's Guide
Unloading Data Monitor
Using the minus sign (-) turns off either the Delete Sentry or Delete Tracker method
of protection; however, to remove (unload) Data Monitor from memory, you must
type:
datamon /unload
Data Monitor configuration choices are saved in a file called DATAMON.INI in the
C:\DOS\DATA subdirectory. If an option is turned off and on, your original
configuration choices will still be in effect until you unload Data Monitor from
memory.
If you remove the DATAMON command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must
restart your computer before Data Monitor can be unloaded.
Chapter 15. Using Central Point Undelete
273
274
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 16. Using Central Point Scheduler
If you have a program that does not require anyone to monitor its process. then
Scheduler will let you schedule this program to run. This is especially useful for
lengthy procedures that do not require your presence, like a backup session. For
example, you might want to 'perform a backup to a tape drive every workday at
7:00pm. You can schedule any executable command accepted at the DOS
command prompt.
When a scheduled event occurs, Scheduler interrupts whatever program is running
and provides a 1S-second warning before it runs the scheduled event in case you
are in the middle of an application that you do not want interrupted. When the
event is completed (for example, making a backup), Scheduler returns to the
.
application you were running.
Scheduling a Program
The memory-resident portion of Scheduler (CPSCHED.EXE) must be loaded before
you can start a program at a scheduled time.
To schedule a program:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
cpsched
and press ENTER. This loads CPSCHED.EXE as a terminate-and-stay~resident
program. Or, you can add CPSCHED to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that this
TSR is loaded whenever you start your computer.
Note: Load this program after all other TSRs and before a task switcher or
shell program starts.
2. After the TSR is loaded, type the following at the DOS command prompt:
schedule cpbackup
if you want to run the Central Point Backup program (CPBACKUP), for
example.
3. Press ENTER.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
275
You see the DOS Program Scheduler main window:
~'~~~-~';;;~"l
i
1
S70ws current monftJ
Tooay's date is fligtiigflted ;-':"'k~=k;:::l!ll::--t:-!:-I
Slows details atout
--+-.-- scfled£ied events
Icon indicates scfleduled
event
1.< . << .•..•.
Adds .aneweventtOftJelist ~'~d"
ModftieSeNsongevents',;:"'Mit',
Leletes fle seiected event
IL!Ji
.
·:lIel.;t;;',
=_
':;::"";;;;~';' •. '
&:;;5'.,
It·.·. j
,.
~
Displays event list in
customized l1ews
4. Select the day on the calendar you want to schedule a program to run and
select Add. The Schedule or Edit an Event window is displayed.
Note: You can just select Add and then make applicable changes in the
Schedule or Edit an Event window.
5. If you want to change the date, then type the date, using the format mm/dd/yy in
the Date field.
6. Type the time you want to schedule your program, using the format hh :mma (you
can use either a or p and Scheduler will append an "m" for you) in the Ti me
field.
Do not put a space between the time and the am or pm.
7. If you want to customize a scheduled backup event, for example, select one of
the setup files. Use the TAB key to move to the Setup Fi 1es field and then
press ENTER.
You see a list of setup files for the CPBackup program.
8. Use the DOWN ARROW if you are using a keyboard or click on a setup file.
276
PC DOS User's Guide
9. Select a frequency:
Note: The Windows Scheduler only supports running the CPBackup program;
however, it does not support weekly, biweekly, or monthly scheduled
backups.
One Time Only: Schedules the event to occur one time.
Daily: Schedules the event to occur every day.
Workdays Only: Schedules the event on the days you identify as workdays.
You select the days of the week you want treated as workdays.
Weekly: Schedules the event on the same day every week.
Monthly-Fixed Day: Schedules the event on the same date each month.
Monthly-Fixed Weekly: Schedules the event on the same weekday each
month.
Biweekly: Schedules the event the same weekday every other week.
10. Type the program name in the Event field.
For example, type i bmavd and any options (up to 64 characters). The file's
extension is not necessary, arid you can use any DOS character.
or
Select Browse to navigate to the directory and file that you want to schedule.
Note: If you are scheduling a backup event, this Window shows an option for
setup files specifically for the CPBackup program. See "Using
Preconfigured Setup Files" on page 405 for descriptions of these
setup-file options. You can also schedule automatic virus scanning
when you use the CPBackup program to back up your files.
11. Select OK to save this information.
12. Continue in this manner until you have scheduled all the events you want.
13. Select Exi t .
. 14. Make sure the Save Changes in Schedul e option in the Close window is
checked to save your scheduling information.
When you want the program to run, be sure the computer is on and CPSCHED is
loaded by typing cpsched at the DOS command prompt. The scheduled event
occurs at the specified time and returns the machine to the state it was in prior to
the event.
Chapter 16. Using Central Point Scheduler
277
Editing Existing Scheduled Events
On the Scheduler window, you can see what events are scheduled, because icons
appear on each day there is a scheduled event. If you have scheduled events that
you want to change (for example from daily at 5:00pm to daily at 7:00pm), you can
change these scheduled events by editing them.
To edit a schedule event:
1. From the DOS command prompt, load the CPSCHED.EXE
terminate-and-stay-residen~ program by typing:
cpsched
and then press ENTER.
2. After the TSR is loaded, type:
schedule program
where program is the program you want the Scheduler to run (such as
cpbackup).
3. Press ENTER.
The Scheduler calendar appears with icons representing events scheduled for
the day.
4. Select the event you want to change in the Scheduled events list.
5. Select Ed; t.
6. Make your changes in the Schedule or Edit an Event window. The following
shows what this window would look like if you type s'chedul e cpbackup at the
DOS command prompt.
Schedl~le
or Edit an Event
Ilate:
setup Files:
Event:
For details, see steps 5 through 10 in "Scheduling a Program" on page 275.
7. Select OK to save this information.
278
PC DOS User's Guide
8. Select Ex; t.
9. Make sure the Save Changes ; n Schedul e option in the Close window is
checked to save your scheduling information.
Deleting Scheduled Events
If you decide you do not want a scheduled event to occur anymore, you can
delete it.
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
cpsched
and press ENTER.
2. Type:
schedule
and press ENTER.
The Scheduler window appears with events scheduled.
3. Select the event you want to delete in the Scheduled Events list.
4. Select Delete.
The event is removed from the list.
, Keystrokes for Navigating the Calendar
Use the following keys to navigate the Calendar window.
Use This Key
To Move To
LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW
Yesterday and tomorrow
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW
Last week and next week
TAB
Scheduled Events list and calendar
PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN
Last month and next month
CTRL+LEFT ARROW and CTRL+RIGHT .
ARROW
Last year and next year
Chapter 16. Using Central Point Scheduler
279
Scheduler Options
The Options button lets you define what days you want the Scheduler to recognize
as workdays and also lets you change what to display in the Event List.
When you select Opt; ans, the following window appears:
=:I
Scheduler Options
Choose the days you w.:mt
to define as t.Orkdays.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Sunday
Itmday
1\tesday
t.k:dnesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Select how YOll want
schedu led events to
appear in the Event List
@
!1aily
0
Vonthly
0
nIl
1. Select the days you want defined as workdays.
This specifies the days of the week that are treated as workdays and appear as
options under Frequency.
2. Select how you want scheduled events to appear in the Events list.
Daily: Displays only those events scheduled on the selected date.
Monthly: Displays those events scheduled on any day in the current month.
All: Displays all scheduled events.
Removing Scheduler from Memory
To remove CPSCHED from memory, type the following from the DOS command
prompt:
cpsched /u
You can enter additional command-line options from the DOS command prompt
that have the same effect as scheduling events from each of the specified
programs.
Type hel p schedul e for more information about the SCHEDULE command.
280
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems you might have after you install
PC DOS. It also answers some common questions about DOS.
If you are having problems, be sure to view the text file README.TXT that came
with PC DOS. You can find this file on the Setup Diskette of your PC DOS
installation diskettes or in your DOS directory.
PC DOS Installation
Following are some of the common questions you might have during Setup.
How much hard disk space do I need to install this version of PC DOS?
The answer to this question depends on the type of system and the optional tools
you choose to install as follows:
• PC DOS without Wil1dows
-
PC DOS with Central Point Backup requires 6.0MB of uncompressed
space.
-
PC DOS and all PC DOS optional tools (no Windows tools) requires
14.5MB of uncompressed space.
• PC DOS with Windows (Version 3.1 or higher)
- Windows requires 10MB of uncompressed space.
- PC DOS and Windows optional tools requires 10MB of uncompressed
space.
-
PC DOS plus all PC DOS and Windows optional tools requires 18.5MB of
uncompressed space.
What if the Setup program does not run?
Setup cannot successfully install PC DOS for one or more of the following reasons:
• There is insufficient space on your hard disk.
• Your primary DOS partition is too small or incompatible with Setup.
• You do not have a hard disk.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
281
My primary DOS partition is too small or incompatible. What can I do?
You must repartition your hard disk before installing PC DOS if your hard disk has
one of the following characteristics:
• You do not have enough space in your primary partition for the system files and
not enough space for a minimal install on any logical drives.
• The size of the cluster or sector is incompatible. Try running SETUP
IP.
• There are more than four primary partitions.
• The primary DOS partition is not active.
• A disk-partitioning program that is not compatible with the automatic Setup
program has been used to partition your hard disk.
When you repartition your disk, you have the option of creating one large partition
on your hard disk or multiple smaller partitions.
Warning: To change the size of a partition or reduce the number of partitions, you
must delete the existing partitions and create new ones. Therefore, you must back
up the files on every partition you plan to modify so that you do not lose the
information in those files.
To backup your files and repartition your hard disk:
1. Backup your hard disk. (Refer to the documentation that came with your
current version of DOS.)
2. Remove the partitions from your hard disk, using the same program you used
to create the partitions.
If you created the partition by using the FDISK program supplied with DOS
Version 3.3, use the same command to remove the partitions.
3. Use FDISK to create a partition at least large enough for the PC DOS install.
4. Use the FORMAT command to format any other partitions you created.
5. Restore your files to the primary DOS partition. (Refer to the documentation
that came with your current version of DOS.)
6. To complete the installation, follow the instructions found in "PC DOS Standard
Installation" on page 14.
282
PC DOS User's Guide
What should I do if my computer does not restart?
If this happens and if the problem might be related to the settings in your
CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT, you can temporarily bypass these files to restart
your computer.
1. Start your computer.
2. Press F5 immediately after your computer displays the message
Starting PC DOS...
.
Notes:
1. Any device that requires an installable device driver does not work because the
installable device drivers are not loaded. For example, programs that require
expanded or extended memory are not able to run because no expanded- or
extended-memory drivers are loaded.
2. PC DOS uses the default environment variables of PATH=C:\DOS,
PROMPT=$P$G, and COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM temporarily until you
correct the problem and restart your computer.
You can bypass selected CONFIG.SYS commands by having PC DOS prompt you
for each command in the CONFIG.SYS file.
To confirm each CONFIG.SYS command:
1. Start your computer. Just after your computer starts, DOS displays the text
Starting PC DOS ...
2. Immediately press and release the Fa key.
One at a time, PC DOS displays each command in your CONFIG.SYS file
followed by a prompt. For example, when PC DOS reaches the DOS=HIGH,
statement, it displays the following prompt:
UMB
DOS=HIGH, UMB [Y,N,ESC]?
Respond by typing either Y for YES or N for NO, for each command in your
CONFIG.SYS file, press ESC to cancel the CONFIG.SYS file processing.
When PC DOS finishes processing the CONFIG.SYS file, it displays the
following prompt:
Process AUTOEXEC.BAT [Y,N]?
3. Answer Y for Yes or N for No to confirm each statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
283
What is the maximum length of the PATH variable?
The PATH variable, like other environment variables, is limited to 127 characters.
Use the PATH command to set your path variable to one or more directories.
Whenever you type a command, PC DOS searches the directories in your path for
the command or program you are trying to run. The following is an example of the
PATH command:
'
path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\windows;d:\batfiles;d:\util'
The name of the variable (PATH) and the equal sign take up 5 of the 127
characters. This means you can use 122 characters to specify directory names.
To use those 122 characters most efficiently:
• Remove any spaces from the PATH command.
• Remove seldom-used directories from the PATH command.
• Use short directory names.
• Use batch programs to set and reset the path according to your current needs.
• Use the SUBST command to substitute a drive letter for a long directory path, if
necessary.
You can then use that drive letter instead of the full path in the PATH
command. You can use the SUBST command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. If
you do, it must precede the PATH command.
For example, to shorten a path named C:\USER\L1NDA\FORMS to Q:, you would
include the following command (before the PATH command) in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
subst q: c:\user\linda\forms
For more information about the PATH and SUBST commands, refer to the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference, or type hel p followed by the command name.
Which device drivers should I use?
PC DOS includes several device drivers that you load by using the DEVICE
command in your CONFIG.SYS file. Other products might also include some of
these device drivers. The following device drivers are examples of a few'
general-purpose device drivers supplied with PC DOS:
•
•
•
•
284
HIMEM
RAMDrive
SMARTDRV
EMM386
PC DOS User's Guide
Windows and PC DOS contain several programs that have the same name.
However, the PC DOS programs have been updated after the release of Windows
3.1. If you install Windows after installing PC ~OS, check your CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files to make sure that you are using the programs HIMEM.SYS,
EMM386.EXE, and SMARTORV.EXE from the DOS directory and not from the
Windows directory.
If you already have SMARTORV.SYS installed on your system, Setup comments
out (REMs) the statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. To use SMARTORV.EXE,
however, you need to add the SMARTORV command-line statement to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
'
For more information about these and other device drivers, refer to the device
drivers information in the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
If these device drivers are in your CONFIG.SYS file before you install PC ~OS,
Setup modifies the file so that you are using the versions supplied with PC ~OS.
How do I determine what stack size to use in my CONFIG.SYS?
You might need to experiment with the proper stack size for your system to avoid a
stack size overflow. Refer to the STACKS command information in the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference for special cases.
I have installed PC DOS and want to expand drive C: to be larger than 32MB.
What steps do I need to take?
This can be accomplished by backing up your system to diskettes, formatting the
hard disk, repartitioning it, and then reformatting it. Then, you can reinstall
PC DOS along with the other files. The following list outlines the steps to take:
1. Back up your entire system using Central Point Backup (CPBACKUP). To start
CPBACKUP, type:
cpbackup
at the DOS command prompt, and back up all the files on all your drives.
2. Insert the Setup Diskette into your diskette drive.
3. Start up from the diskette by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
4. Press F5 immediately after your computer displays the message Start; ng
PC DOS •••
5. Run FOISK, delete all partitions and remake the desired number of partitions.
6. FORMAT C: and any other hard disk partitions.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
285
7. Install PC DOS again.
8. Restore all files using the CPBackup program.
I have installed PC DOS and PC Tools** for Windows will not start from
Windows. What steps do I need to take:
1. Edit the C:\WINDOWS\WIN.INI file. Under the section (Extensions) - (IBM
DOS6 Setup Modification), change the file name in the following line:
set=c:\dos\winbackup.~xe
to
set=c:\dos\wnbackup.exe
2. Edit the C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM.INI file. Under the section (386ENH) - (IBM
DOS 6 Setup Modification), change the directory name in the following line:
device=c:\dos\system\cpbvxd.386
to
device=c:\cps\system\cpbvxd.386
3. Restart Windows.
What can I do to upgrade my system if I have the incorrect version of
INTERLNK running?
1. If you have INTERLNK.EXE dated 11/11/92 from MS-DOS, insert the Setup
Diskette into your diskette drive, (for example, drive A).
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup
3. When Setup finishes, answer YES when prompted if you want to edit the
AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS changes.
4. Press CTRL+N (or F12 if available on your keyboard) until you are viewing the
CONFIG.SYS file.
5. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and add rem to comment out the INTERLNK.EXE
driver:
rem device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe
6. After editing the CONFIG.SYS file, press F4 to save the changes and close this
file.
.
**
PC Tools is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
286
PC DOS User's Guide
7. Press F4 until you have closed the file and exited the E Editor.
8. At the screen that notifies you the installation is complete, remove all diskettes
from drive A, and then restart your computer by pressing ENTER.
9. After rebooting, remove the REM from the command-line statements, and
reboot again to load INTERLNK again.
What if I get a message I do not understand while installing?
If you receive one of the following messages when running SETUP, see the
explanation that follows each message.
Message
Explanation
"Your current operating system on drive C
is not recognized as being DOS
Version 3.3 (or higher)."
You might have purchased the wrong
version of DOS. The upgrade version
requires a previous version of DOS to be
installed before you can install this
version.
One or more of the following incompatible
TSR programs has been detected. Stop
the program, or remove it from your
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files
and run SETUP again.
Run SETUP by booting off diskette or
stop the conflicting TSR by editing them
out of your CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
•
•
•
•
FASTOPEN 4.0
DESQVIEW
TASK SWAPPER
WINDOWS
Memory Problems
How can I get DOS to run in the high memory area?
If your computer has extended memory, the Setup program will configure your
system so that DOS runs in the high memory area (HMA), which is the first 64K of
extended memory. This conserves conventional memory for use by other
programs.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
287
You can confirm that DOS is running in the HMA by using the MEM command. If
DOS is in the HMA, you see the following on the last line of the message:
PC DOS is resident in the high memory area.
If your computer has extended memory and DOS is not running in the HMA, the
problem is either that your CONFIG.SYS file does not contain the correct command,
or your extended-memory manager is not correctly installed. HIMEM is the
extended-memory manager provided with DOS. HIMEM (or another
extended-memory manager) is required in order for DOS to use the HMA.
To run DOS in the HMA:
• The CONFIG.SYS file must contain the statement DOS=HIGH,UMB or
DOS=HIGH.
• The CONFIG.SYS file must contain a DEVICE command for the HIMEM
memory manager (or another extended-memory manager), as in the following
example:
device=c:\dos\himem.sys
• The DEVICE command for HIMEM musf appear before the DEVICE commands
for other memory managers.
• The HIMEM.SYS file must be in the path specified by the DEVICE command in
your CONFIG.SYS file.
• HIMEM must be properly installed on your computer. The computer must have
at least 1MB of memory and be a 286 computer or above.
Normally, the Setup program installs HIMEM and makes any necessary
. adjustments.
I
If DOS does not run in the HMA, even though your CONFIG.SYS file contains the
correct commands and HIMEM is properly installed, the memory configuration of
your computer might not permit use of the HMA.
Note: Windows·and PC DOS contain several programs that have the same name.
However, the PC DOS programs have been updated after the release of
Windows 3.1. If you install Windows after installing DOS, check your
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files to make sure that you are using
the programs HIMEM.SYS, EMM386.EXE, and SMARTDRV.EXE from the
DOS directory and not from the Windows directory.
288
PC DOS User's Guide
What can I do when I receive a packed file corrupt message?
DOS displays the message Packed fi 1e corrupt when a program cannot be
successfully loaded into the first 64K of conventional memory. This is most likely to
occur when you load device drivers into reserved memory, thereby freeing more low
conventional memory.
DOS provides the LOADFIX command. It ensures that a program is loaded above
the first 64K of conventional memory. To use the LOADFIX command, include it at
the beginning of the command that starts the program. The syntax of this
command is:
loadfix drive: \path\jilename
- For example, to ensure that a program file named MYAPP.EXE (in the C:\APPS
directory) is loaded above 64K, you would type:
loadfix c:\apps\myapp.exe
What can I do when a program does not use XMS extended memory?
Most programs that use extended memory conform to the
Lotus**/Intel**/Microsoft/AST** (LIM) eXtended Memory Specification (XMS). To use
such programs with DOS, you need an extended-memory manager, such as
HIMEM.
Some programs do not conform to the XMS. Such programs cannot use extended
memory if this memory is managed according to the XMS.
If you are using HIMEM, you can allocate a portion of your extended memory to
programs that use extended memory but do not conform to the XMS. This is done
by including the /int15 switch with the DEVICE command for HIMEM.SYS. The
value you specify for the /int15 switch should be the memory you want set aside,
plus 64K. For example, to reserve 512K of non-XMS extended memory, you would
include the following command in your CONFIG.SYS file:
device=c:\dos\himem~sys
/int15=576
Some of the programs that do not conform to the XMS cannot run when DOS is in
the high memory area. If you encounter problems with such a program, load DOS
into conventional memory.·
**
**
**
Lotus is a trademark of the Lotus Corporation.
Intel is a trademark of the Intel Corporation.
AST is a trademark of AST Research Incorporated.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
289
What memory managers can I use with DOS?
Most memory managers work with DOS. In general, you cannot simultaneously
use two memory managers that provide access to the same memory. Similarly,
you cannot use EMM386 to simulate expanded memory if you already have an
expanded-memory manager installed.
How can I increase the environment size of my system?
The environment is an area of memory in which DOS stores variables such as
PATH, COMSPEC, and PROMPT. These variables are called environment
variables. The default environment size is 256 bytes. You can allocate more
environment space by specifying the Ie switch with the SHELL command.
For example, if you added the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file, you
would allocate 1024 bytes of environment space:
shell=c:\command.com /p /e:1024
If you are using more than one environment and you do not specify the Ie switch for
each, the size of the environments might vary. For information about environments,
type help set at the DOS command prompt.
How do I run device drivers and programs in the upper memory area?
If you have a system with an 80386-based or higher processor and extended
memory, you can make more conventional memory available by running certain
device drivers and programs in the upper memory area. DOS provides RAM Boost,
a memory optimizer program, that rearranges the existing items in your
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files for you when you run the RAM Boost
Setup program. RAMBoost Setup rearranges your configuration and restarts the
computer to load programs into upper memory. For information about using the
upper memory area, see Chapter 13, "Making More Memory Available" on
page 205.
290
PC DOS User's Guide
I'm getting an error message regarding the option ROM or RAM being
detected within a page frame when I restart my computer. What does it
mean?
If you see the message Option ROM or RAM detected wi thi n page frame, the
EMM386.EXE memory manager is detecting a device in the address area where it
is trying to locate a page frame. It has found another 64K contiguous space but is
notifying you that its original try was not successful. No action need be taken if you
do not mind the message.
Another option is to include the area where the conflict is occurring. For example,
on an AT BUS, EMM386.EXE detects a video adapter at the location COOO. By
including I=COOO-CFFF on the EMM386 command line, this eliminates the warning
message. Refer to the EMM386.EXE device driver information in the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more information.
I have EMM386.EXE loaded in my CONFIG.SYS, but I still do not have access
to my upper memory blocks. Why?
Besides using EMM386.EXE, you must have DOS=UMB or DOS=HIGH,UMB in the
CONFIG.SYS.
I'm getting an error message at the EMM386.EXE setup line in my
CONFIG.SYS file. When the system is finished starting up, I do not have
access to the upper memory. What can I do?
If you see the message Unabl e to set page frame base address, the memory
manager, EMM386.EXE, is trying to locate a 64K EMS page address, but it is
already occupied by another device, such as an Ethernet** or IBM Token Ring.
With IBM PS/2* systems, you can use the Reference Diskette to change the
address of these devices. Generally speaking, they are easiest to move out of the
way if they are placed at the very beginning or the very end of the allowed address
ranges.
Note: Windows and PC DOS contain several programs that have the same name.
However, the PC DOS programs have been updated after the release of
Windows 3.1. If you install Windows after installing DOS, check your
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files to make sure that you are using
the programs HIMEM.SYS, EMM386.EXE, and SMARTDRV.EXE from the
DOS directory and not from the Windows directory.
**
Ethernet is a trademark of Western Digital Corporation.
*
PS/2 and IBM Token Ring are trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
291
DOS Command Problems
I accidentally deleted a DOS file. Can I get it back?
If you inadvertently delete a DOS file. that you need, there are two ways to get the
file back:
• Restore the file by using the UNDELETE command.
The UNDELETE command can restore a deleted file. It is effective only if you
have not changed any of the information on your hard disk or diskette after
deleting that file. If you move or change any files or directories, you might not
be able to restore the deleted file. For information about the UNDELETE
command,' type help undelete at the DOS command prompt.
• Rerun SETUP using the Ie switch.
During installation, Setup copies all the DOS files and all the files for the optional
tools you selected to your hard drive. By rerunning SETUP using the Ie switch, the
file that was deleted will be restored.
However, to save some time, you first need to determine whether the file'that was
deleted is either:
• An optional tool file.
• A DOS file pertaining to the operating system.
By determining whether a DOS file or an optional tool file, you save time because
only the specified group of files are copies. Refer to "Recovering Files from the
Setup Diskettes" on page 546 for the complete procedure.
I
How can I get the UNDELETE command to'work?
In general, the UNDELETE command works best under the following
circumstances:
• If you use the UNDELETE command immediately after you delete a file.
• If you deleted only one file.
• If you use the DATAMON command, a memory-resident program that keeps
track of certain changes you make to your hard disk or diskette. For more
information about the DATAMON command, refer to "Central Point Data
Monitor" on page 270.
Warning: Never run a storage-compaction program (defragmentation utility
program) after deleting files you want to restore. The UNDELETE command cannot
restore files that were deleted before you ran the storage-compaction program.
292
PC DOS User's Guide
Why can't I get the RESTORE command to work?
There are several reasons the RESTORE command might not be able to restore
files that were backed up by using the BACKUP command.
• You are trying to restore files to a different directory.
The RESTORE command restores files only to the directory from which those
files were backed up. For example, you cannot restore files backed up from
C:\WORD to a directory named C:\OLDWORD. (However, you can change the
drive letter. For example, you could restore files backed up from C:\WORD to
the directory D:\WORD.)
• You are trying to restore a file to a different file name.
The RESTORE command does not change the name of a file. For example, if
you back up a file named REPORT.TXT, you cannot restore it to a file named
MYREPORT.TXT.
• The RESTORE command is not compatible with the BACKUP command you .
used to back up the files.
Only if you backed up the files by using the DOS BACKUP command from
versions of DOS prior to Version 6.1 can you use the RESTORE command to
restore them.
The RESTORE command supplied with this version of PC DOS cannot restore
files that you backed up by using the CPBACKUP command from DOS Version
6.1 or later.
With PC DOS 7, use the Central Point Backup optional tool to back up files or
directories for safekeeping. This tool also compares and restores files. Restore
can restore an entire hard disk or specifically selected files and directories.
For more information about the Central Point Backup program and restoring files
backed up by this program, see Chapter 20,· "Using. Central Point Backup" on
page 383.
I just got the error message Out of Memory right in the middle of running
DEFRAG. How' can I make DEFRAG finish running?
To ensure this problem does not occur again, disable all TSRs before running
DEFRAG. This will free up conventional memory.
Follow the prompt to reboot your computer. Then, run DEFRAG again to run the
DEFRAG routine. The problem that caused this message was that DEFRAG used
up all of the conventional memory available.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
293
What should I do when the program or device driver reports the wrong
version of DOS?
Some programs or device drivers run only with specific versions of DOS. If a
message appears indicating a program or device driver does not run with DOS,
contact your vendor to get an updated program or to find but whether the current
version of the program or device driver is actually compatible with DOS.
If the current version of the program or device driver is compatible with DOS, use
the SETVER command to change the version number that DOS reports to the
'program or device driver. When you use SETVER, the program or device driver
interprets DOS as the version it is designed to use. For example, if a program
named MYAPP.EXE runs only with DOS 3.3 or earlier, you would type:
setver myapp.exe 3.3
This entry updates the Setver table with your program name. DOS will then report
the changed version number to the program if there is a DEVICE command for the
SETVER.EXE device driver in your CONFIG.SYS file. If the program is compatible
with DOS, the SETVER command eliminates the apparent incompatibility.
Note: Make sure there is only one SETVER.EXE on your hard disk, because each
SETVER.EXE contains a separate version table.
Type hel p setver for more information about the SETVER command.
Warning: ,Contact your software vendor for information about whether a program
works with PC DOS 7. It is possible that IBM has not verified whether the program
will run successfully if you use the SETVER command to change the program
version number and version table. If you run the program after changing the
version table in DOS, you might lose or corrupt data, or introduce system
instabilities. If you do not contact your software vendor to determine the
compatibility of a specific program with DOS, IBM is not responsible for any loss or
damage.
294
PC DOS User's Guide
PC DOS Shell
I changed the display type on my computer and now it doesn't work correctly
with the DOSSHELL command. What can I do?
The easiest way to undo the modifications you have made is to reinstall PC DOS
Shell as an optional tool using the SETUP command with the Ie switch to return PC
DOS Shell to the original default settings. Using this switch allows you to install (or
reinstall) the selections you make at the optional tools menu. You musf reinstall PC
DOS Shell to the same path where you initially installed DOS.
Or, if you change the type of display you use, you can manually install files so that
the display can work correctly with the PC DOS Shell. For example, if you were
using an EGA display and change to a VGA* display, you do not gain the benefits
of the VGA display when running PC DOS Shell until you manually install the VGA
files.
PC DOS Shell supports seven types of displays. The files for each are located in
your DOS directory after installing PC DOS 7.
The following table shows the files needed for each of the supported displays.
Display
Required files
MONO
(No .VIO file necessary), MONO.INI, MONO.GRB
CGA*
CGA.VIO, CGA.INI, CGA.GRB
EGA*
EGA.VIO, EGA.INI, EGA.GRB
EGA MONO
EGA.VIO, EGA.INI, EGAMONO.GRB
COLOR (VGA, Super VGA,
XGA*, 8514, and other
high-resolution displays)
VGA.VIO, VGA.INI, VGA.GRB
MONO (VGA, Super VGA~
XGA, 8514, and other
high-resolution displays)
VGA.VIO, VGA.INI, VGAMONO.GRB
Hercules
HERC.VIO, MONO.INI, HERC.GRB
To install the DOS files for a different display, locate the files you need, copy the
correct .VID and .GRB files, and then either create a DOSSHELL.INI file or modify
your previous one.
* VGA, CGA, EGA, and XGA are trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
295
To find and copy the .VID and .GRB files you need:
1. Use the preceding table to determine which files you must install.
2. Find the names of the files you need for your display.
3. Make sure you copy the destination files with the .VID and .GRB extensions,
respectively.
For example, you would type the following to copy the VGA.VID file:
copy c:\dos\vga.vid c:\dos\dosshell.vid
You would type the following to copy the VGA.GRB file:
copy c:\dos\vga.grb c:\dos\dosshell.grb
At this point, determine whether to replace your current DOSSHELL.INI file. If
you choose to replace this file, you can immediately use any additional colors
your new display provides. However, you lose any modifications you previously
made to PC DOS Shell, such as progra:m groups and program items. If you do
not want to lose these modifications, you must manually add the new color files
to your existing DOSSHELL.INI file.
To create a DOSSHELLINI file with updated colors:
Use the COPY command to replace your current DOSSHELL.INI file with the .INI
file you need. Make sure you name the destination file DOSSHELL.INI.
For example, you would type the following to expand the VGA.lNI file:
copy c:\dos\vga.ini c:\dos\dosshell.ini
Can I start a TSR or my network connection from PC DOS Shell with task
swapping enabled?
Because PC DOS Shell is not a multi-tasking environment, you should load
networks and TSRs before activating PC DOS Shell.
I deleted a file from my system and I do not know how I did it. What
happened?
If you are using PC DOS Shell, be very careful with the Sel ect Across
Oi rectori es option. When this option is enabled, if you select a file in one directory
to delete (or change an attribute, or move), this file remains select~d even if you
change to a different directory. If you later chose to delete a file, ALL files that you
have selected in every directory you have accessed are deleted.
296
PC DOS User's Guide
If you did not realize that you have this option enabled, you might delete files
accidentally. To disable Sel ect Across Di rectori es, from the Options menu, click
next to Sel ect Across Di rectori es, or press ENTER. To verify that Select Across
Directories is disabled, look at the options menu again. The diamond to the left of
Sel ect Across Di rectori es is gone.
AntiVirus
Every effort has been made to ensure that AntiVirus is compatible with your system.
The following is a description of problems that might be encountered and how you
can deal with them.
New viruses continue to be written and released. A small fraction of them become
widespread problems. To deal with these new viruses most effectively, any
anti-virus software should be kept up to date. Select Contacts from the Help menu
for more information on howto obtain updates to IBM AntiVirus/DOS.
How will I know if I have a virus on my system?
When AntiVirus is loaded, it performs a self-integrity test and warns you if
something has changed one of the AntiVirus programs. If you get this warning, it
indicates that a virus is active or that some accident has corrupted the program.
What should I do if I get an Abnormal program termination error message?
On DOS systems, if you get the message Abnorma 1 program termi na t i on when first
loading AntiVirus, this indicates that insufficient memory is available to run the
program. Remove some of your resident programs and try again, add more
memory to your system, or use the AntiVirus stand-alone program instead. This
message can also occur if a virus has corrupted the AntiVirus program files.
Not all my Windows files are being checked for viruses. What should I do?
On systems using Windows 3.0 or later with SHARE installed, Windows locks some
files and prevents them from being checked by the Windows portion of AntiVirus. If
you want to check these files, exit from Windows and use the DOS portion of ,
AntiVirus (lBMAVD).
On Windows systems, the Windows portion of AntiVirus (IBMAVW.EXE) is installed
as a read-only file. This permits a self-integrity check under Windows even if the
SHARE program is loaded. If you need to delete IBMAVW.EXE for some reason,
you will need to make this file read-write before doing so. You can do this with the
ATTRIB command.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
297
On Windows systems, you can have only one copy of AntiVirus open at a time. If
you try to open a second session of AntiVirus, the second session will not start; you
can work only with AntiVirus in the session that is already open.
While ,the Windows portion of AntiVirus correctly detects infected boot sectors, it is
not always able to disinfect them. If your system has infected boot sectors, exit
Windows, and invoke the DOS portion of the product by going to the DOS
command prompt and typing:
ibmavd
Can AntiVirus scan for ·viruses in a diskette-image file?
Viruses that infect boot sectors are detected by AntiVirus only in boot sectors, not in
files. If you have a diskette-image file you want to check for viruses, create a
diskette from the image and check the diskette. The only exceptions to this rule are
the files BOOT.DOS and BOOT.OS2, which hold boot-sector images when you use
the Dual Boot utility. If AntiVirus finds a virus that infects boot sectors in one of
these files, it will warn you and offer to erase the file. Obtain clean copy o! the
file from a similarly configured machine or from a service center before using the
Dual Boot feature again.
a
I'm having problems with Shield DOS. What can I do?
Normally, Shield DOS tries to install itself into expanded memory if it is available on
your DOS system. If this causes problems on your system, edit the file
IBMAVDR.BAT in the \DOS directory, and remove the Ix switch from both lines that
call IBMAVSH (the DOS shield program). This tells Shield DOS not to install itself
in expanded memory.
Normally, the DOS shield in AntiVirus checks high memory (memory above the
640K DOS limit) for resident viruses. This causes problems on some systems,
especially where adapters are sensitive to having their memory space read. A
common symptom of this problem is that the adapter (often a communications
adapter) does not function properly when the DOS shield is installed.
To fix problems with your hardware caused by the installation of Shield DOS:
1. Uncheck the Check hi gh memory check box on the Shield DOS window.
2. Select OK to save the settings.
3. Restart your system to let the new settings take effect.
298
PC DOS User's Guide
Stacker Compression
A few general procedures can solve virtually any problem you might have with a
Stacker drive. When you need help, scan the first part of this Stacker problem
,determination section to see the general troubleshooting tips and procedures,
including how to:
• Run the DOS CHKDSK utility.
• Remove attributes from STACVOL files.
• Run other disk-repair utilities.
The rest of this section includes specific information in three categories. Most
topics include reference to the tips and procedures for details.
• Troubleshooting during Stacker Setup
• Computer startup problems
• Other Stacker Problems
Stacker Tips and Procedures
How can I secure my compressed data and fix problems?
Stacker's AutoProtect feature runs every time you start your computer. It scans all
Stacker drives on the system and quickly checks the status of each. AutoProtect
can fix some problems immediately so you never even know they existed. Other
problems may be more serious. If AutoProtect cannot repair a problem on a
Stacker drive, Stacker write-protects the disk so your data will not be damaged and
then reports to you. Stacker may suggest you run CHECK IF to correct the
problem.
What can I do if my Stacker drive is corrupted?
Running the Stacker CHECK program is always a good first step. "Using the
Stacker Tools (DOS and Windows)" on page 440 details how to use CHECK. If the
Stacker drive is corrupted, the CHECK.COM file may be damaged. You can run
CHECK from your Stacker startup diskette (if you created one) or from the
uncompressed drive. CHECK is the only way to remove write protection from a
Stacker drive.
What should I do first to solve system problems?
You can solve some system problems by running the DOS CHKDSK program.
Running CHKDSK also runs CHECK on a Stacker compressed drive. You can use
CHKDSK to make repairs. Back up damaged files, if you can, before running
CHKDSK.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
299
To run CHKDSK:
1. Change to the directory that contains DOS files, if necessary. It should be
necessary only if this directory is not in your PATH statement.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
chkdsk drive:
where drive: is the drive to be checked. Run CHKDSK for both the Stacker
drive and its uncompressed drive.
3. If CHKDSK reports:
Errors with lost allocation units only:
a. At the DOS command prompt, type:
chkdsk drive:
If
b. Let CHKDSK fix any errors it finds.
Other errors:
I
a. Use a complete disk-repair utility to fix them.
b. Exit CHKDSK and run your other disk-repair utility.
c. If you have no other disk-repair utility, try to back up any files reported as
damaged.
d. Run CHKDSK again and let it fix the errors. Stacker CHECK runs after
DOS CHKDSK finishes.
4. If it offers to do a disk surface test, type y for YES.
How can I diagnose and repair my Stacker drives?
A Stacker drive is contained in a STACVOL file. You may have to remove hidden,
system, and read-only attributes from it to correct errors or to run a surface scan.
To remove attributes from a STACVOL file:
1. At the DOS command prompt, identify the full STACVOL file name from a
displayed message or by typing:
stacker
2. Change to the host drive and type the following at the DOS command prompt:
attrib -r -s -h drive:stacvol .xxx
where drive: is the drive and xxx is the extension of the STACVOL file.
300
PC DOS User's Guide
What do I have to do before using a disk-repair utilities program? ,
A multipurpose disk-repair utility can locate hard disk errors, repair many, and block
out areas of the disk that are bad. If Stacker has write protected the drive, run
CHECK IF to remove the write protection. You will have to run the disk-repair utility
on the uncompressed drive that holds the Stacker drive. To do this, change the
attributes of the STACVOL file that holds your Stacker drive.
Type stacker if you do not know the letter of the uncompressed drive and the full
name of the STACVOL file.
To run a disk-repair utility:
1. Change to the uncompressed drive that contains the STACVOL file.
2. Make the STACVOL file accessible by removing its attributes (see the
procedure in this chapter on page 300).
3. Unmount the Stacker drive by typing:
stacker -drive:
where drive: is the mounted drive letter.
4. Start your disk-repair utility and follow its instructions.
5. Restart your computer.
When your computer restarts, Stacker reapplies the attributes and mounts the
Stacker drive.
How can I unmount my Stacker drive to use a disk repair utility?
Some disk-repair utilities cannot work while a Stacker drive is mounted. You may
have to unmount the drive as well.
To unmount a Stacker drive:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stacker -drive:
where -drive: is the Stacker drive to be unmounted.
When the computer restarts, Stacker remounts the drive.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
301
Troubleshooting during Stacker Setup
Error messages during Stacker Setup always have online help available. Just
press F1 when you get the error. The message and its help explain what to do
next. Wherever it is always safe to stop Stacker Setup, you will see an Exit button.
However, Stacker provides safeguards in case Stacker Setup is interrupted at some
other point.
What can I do if Stacker Setup (SSETUP) is .interrupted?
Stacker AutbRecover keeps your data safe when Stacker Setup is interrupted for
some reason. AutoRecover may complete the compression process or it may
remove Stacker compression from the disk, depending on the stage in progress
when Stacker Setup was interrupted.
To let AutoRecover take over:
1. Remove any disk in drive A and restart your computer.
2. When Stacker Setup messages appear, follow the instructions. If it offers to
decompress data, let it.
3. When the DOS command prompt returns, run a disk-repair utility or CHKDSK,
and then restart your computer.
4. Run Stacker Setup again, if necessary.
What if Stacker Setup is interrupted or the power goes out while its creating a
Stacker drive?
If Stacker was finished compressing your data when the power went out or Setup
was interrupted for any other reason, restart your system. Setup continues verifying
your Stacker drive and completes Setup for that drive.
If Stacker was not finished compressing your data, at system restart Stacker will
prompt for a choice between decompressing or leaving the drive as is. If you
choose to decompress, your system will be restored to its original state. The option
to leave the drive as is should not be used unless you prefer to make changes
manually.
302
PC DOS User's Guide
Computer Startup Problems
When your computer runs, the Stacker driver controls any Stacker drives. If your
computer does not start normally, you may not be able to access to data on
Stacker drives. If you have trouble starting, scan this section to find out what to do.
What do I do if I have installed Stacker and now my computer won't start?
If your system will not start up at all on drive C, the DOS system files might be
missing or corrupted. The PC DOS startup diskette contains those files. All you
have to do is copy them back to your drive C.
You might want to make a backup copy of your Setup Diskette before beginning
and not use your orig!nal Setup Diskette for this procedure.
To restore the Stacker configuration files:
. 1. Insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation diskettes into drive A
and restart your computer.
2. Answer N for NO when queried if you want to install DOS.
3. At the DOS command prompt, type:
c:\stacker\config
4. Press ENTER.
You can use the Stacker startup diskette instead if you created one. Let it
make suggested changes.
If your Stacker files are stored in a different directory, use it instead.
5. When the DOS command prompt returns, remove the Setup Diskette and
restart the computer again.
If the computer still does not restart from drive C, you may have to restore the DOS
system files as well.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
303
To restore DOS system files:
1. Insert 'your Setup Diskette into drive A and restart your computer.
2. Answer N for NO when queried if you want to install DOS.
3. At the DOS command prompt, type:
c:\stacker\stacker
This command lists your drive map.
If you specified for Stacker Setup to store the files in a different directory, use
that directory instead.
4. Identify the drive letter of the uncompressed boot drive (in brackets at the end
of the drive Cline).
5. At the DOS command prompt, type:
sys drive:
where drive: is the uncompressed drive letter.
6. Remove the Setup Diskette and restart your computer.
If your computer still will not start up from drive C, you might have a problem with
your DOS version. Check the PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more
information.
computer Starts, But Cannot Access Compressed Data
When the computer appears to start up normally but you cannot find your
compressed data, it usually means the Stacker drive was not mounted. To verify
that the Stacker drives were not mounted, type:
c:\stacker\stacker
If STACVOL files are not listed, they were not mounted. DCONVERT does not
mount the drive.
To mount a Stacker drive temporarily:
Type stacker drive:, where drive is the disk that contains the STACVOL file.
If you restart your computer, this drive will be unmounted again.
If you see a message that there are no available replaceable drives, edit the
STACKER.INI file (refer to "Editing the STACKER.INI file" on page 460 if you need
information on how to edit this file) to add /RP=2. If you already have an RP
command, increase its value by at least one.
304
PC DOS User's Guide
To mount a Stacker drive permanently:
Edit the STACKER.INI file to cause a converted drive to be mounted when you
restart your system. DCONVERT does not modify the STACKER.INI file. (refer to
"Editing the STACKER.INI file" on page 460 if you need information on how to edit
this file) and add a drive-specification line. For example, on a new line, you would
type:
drive:\stacvol.dsk, sw
When you restart your computer, the drive is mounted, along with any other drives
specified in STACKER.INI.
The STACKER.INI file is a hidden file in the root directory of the boot drive.
See "Using the Stacker Tools (DOS and Windows)" and "Working with Advanced
Stacker" for details on mounting removable Stacker drives.
When you type di r C:, you see files on the uncompressed drive. Several critical
DOS and STACKER files are stored here. Stacker includes the CONFIG command
that you can use to rebuild basic configuration files that mount existing Stacker
drives.
To rebuild the Stacker configuration:
1. At the DOS command prompt, change to the usual boot drive (usually drive C)
and type:
c:\stacker\config
CONFIG searches for STACVOL files and builds the entries needed to
configure the basic system. If you modified it earlier, you will have to do it
again.
2. Restart your computer.
Write-Protected Stacker Drive
When an application exits improperly, a damaged file, such as a temporary swap
file, a holding file, or a document, may be left behind. This damage is present
whether or not Stacker is on your system.
The next time you restart your computer, Stacker's AutoProtect notices the problem
and tells you what to do. When CHECK /WP runs from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file,
it automatically repairs the damage, removes the write protection, and restarts your
computer. If you are not sure if the disk is still write protected, run CHECK IF. If
any problems remain, CHECK fixes them and removes write protection for you.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
305
Detected a Restart While Stacker Optimizer Was Writing
The system was restarted while the Stacker Optimizer was in the "Writing New
Directories ... " stage of optimization. The program must finish what it started to put
the STACVOL file in usable condition. Your data is safe, but you cannot access it
until Stacker can mount the drive.
Do not restart your computer while the Stacker Optimizer is running. If you must
interrupt it, press F10 to exit safely.
To let Stacker Optimizer continue:
1. Determine the STACVOL file name (use the STACKER command, if
necessary) .
2. Insert the Setup Diskette and change to that drive (or change to the Stacker
installation drive and directory), and type:
sdefrag /restore=drive:\stacvol.xxx
where drive: is the uncompressed drive and xxx is the file extension of your
STACVOL file (most likely DSK).
3. Let Stacker Optimizer continue working. When finished, it restarts your
computer and mounts the Stacker drive.
Detected a Restart While Stacker Optimizer Was Optimizing Files
The system was restarted while Stacker Optimizer was in the "Optimizing files ... "
stage of optimization. Stacker write-protected the Stacker drive to protect your
data. You will have to let the Optimizer repair the Stacker drive. Then, restart to
remove the write protection.
To complete Stacker Optimizer and remove the write protection:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
sdefrag drive:
where drive: is the Stacker drive. The SDEFRAG command repairs the drive
and restarts your computer.
2. Run CHECK IF. Then, run Stacker Optimizer again.
306
PC DOS User's Guide
Unable To Repair FATs, #139 (SDEFRAG)
If SDEFRAG is not able to repair the Stacker drive in the above situation, you will
get this message. It means that both copies of the File Allocation Table (FAT) have
been corrupted. You will lose some data following this procedure, but it is the only
way to save the remaining data on your disk.
To repair FAT and get rid of damaged files:
1. At the DOS command prompt, make the Stacker drive current and type:
check /=a /f
Be careful when using the /=a parameter.
2. When CHECK offers to repair the drive, let it.
3. When CHECK offers to delete files, respond No.
4. Restart your computer and run CHECK IF again. Let it delete any files still
reported as damaged. Then, use your most recent backup to restore missing
files.
Other Stacker Problems
This section explains how to deal with some problems that occur occasionally while
using Stacker:
•
•
•
•
Stacker Optimizer and 32K clusters
Errors while running Stacker Optimizer (SDEFRAG)
Bootable Stacker diskette
Deletion of last Stacker drive
Stacker Optimizer and 32K Clusters
If you use drives with 3,2K clusters, Stacker Optimizer may need more memory
(more than the 600K needed in previous Stacker versions). If you do not have that
much conventional memory available, run Stacker Optimizer with a special option.
Using this option affects speed, but it allows you to run Stacker Optimizer using
less memory.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
307
To run Stacker Optimizer in less memory:
1. Exit Windows completely.
2. From the DOS command prompt, type:
sdefrag /buffer=nnn
where nnn is a value between 256 and 4096, inclusive. By default, SDEFRAG
normally runs at /buffer=4096.
The following examples show how much memory you can save with various values:
sdefrag /buffer=3072
sdefrag /buffer=2048
sdefrag /buffer= 256
21 K memory saved
42K memory saved
78.75K memory saved
Read, Write, and Media Errors While Optimizing
When you run the Stacker Optimizer, SDEFRAG reads, writes, and verifies every
bit of data on your Stacker drive. In the process, it may come across disk surface
errors, inconsistencies in the file, or directory structures on the disk. It cannot
continue until these are fixed. Depending on your system and the exact problem,
you may see any of these message numbers: 109, 110, 112, 118, 120, 170. They
all indicate that the Stacker Optimizer found an error on your disk while attempting
to read, write, verify, or decompress a file. The problem may be in the file
allocation table (FAT) or on the disk itself. It is a good idea to back-up your data if
you have not done it recently. If the message indicated a read error (1'09 or 120),
however, you will not be able to back up until you correct the problem.
There are two steps to finding and fixing the problem. First, run a surface-scan
utility on the uncompressed drive to deal with media problems. Then, run a read
scan on the Stacker drive to deal with any resulting data problems.
308
PC DOS User's Guide
To identify and correct the problem:
1. Repair the uncompressed drive using a utility such as Central Point's PC Tool
DiskFix.
Message 170 indicates a serious problem. First run a tool such as Central
Point PC Tools's DiskFix. If it finds a problem and offers to fix it, let it. If it
does not find any problems, however, you will have to run Calibrate, which
takes more time but is more thorough.
2. Run CHECK
IF to find
and repair data-structure problems on the Stacker drive.
3. When CHECK asks if it should do a surface scan, let it.
If you prefer, you can use a disk repair utility to do a read scan of the Stacker drive.
You will have to add a command to the STACKER.INI file first.
To scan the Stacker drive with another utility:
1. Use the PC DOS E Editor to add the IR command to the beginning of your
STACKER.INI file.
\
2. Restart your computer. Then, run a disk-repair utility PC Tools' DiskFix on the
Stacker drive.
3. Remove the IR switch (it is only for diagnostic use), and restart your computer.
4. Use Check Drive Integrity in the Stacker DOS Toolbox and follow the
instructions. Let CHECK delete any damaged files.
Bootable Stacker Diskette
M~my problems with compressed data result from errors in the DOS file system or
defects in the hard-disk media. When Stacker detects either type of problem, it
write-protects your disk to protect your data and suggests how to fix the problem.
When all else fails, you can always start your system using the PC DOS startup
diskette. It gets you to the DOS command prompt. You cannot troubleshoot your
machine under Windows.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
309
How do I create a bootable Stacker diskette?
One of the best precautions you can take to protect your data from a system failure
is to have a bootable diskette that is Stacker-aware. If your system has
compressed data files, all the files your system needs for rebooting are available on
this diskette.
You can create your own Stacker-aware startup diskette in the event of a system
emergency. Keep this startup diskette in case your system ever has a problem.
You will be able to start your system from this disk; it will know about Stacker and
provide access to your data.
To create a Stacker bootable diskette:
1. Insert a blank unformatted diskette into drive A. The capacity of the diskette
must be larger than 720K to hold the files you need to copy.
2. Type format a: /s /u to provide a formatted diskette containing the operating
system files.
3. Use the DOSKey program or type the following commands to copy some
- essential DOS files to a diskette.
Note: Make sure you are at the A:> prompt before you begin typing.
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
c:\dos\e.exe
c:\dos\e.ex
c:\dos\attrib.ex~
c:\dos\chkdsk.com
c:\dos\defrag.exe
c:\dos\format.com
4. Some of the compression files you need to copy are hidden. You must use the
ATTRIS command to unhide them before they can be copied onto your
diskette:
5. Change to the host drive and type the following at the DOS command prompt:
attrib -r -s -h drive:filename.xxx
where drive is the drive where your compression files are located and filename
is the name of the file or STACVOL to be copied.
If you need to see your systems drive mapping, type stacker at the DOS
command prompt.
.
310
PC DOS User's Guide
\
6. Use the DOS Key program or type the following commands to copy some
essential compression files to your diskette.
Note: Make sure you are at the A:> prompt before you begin typing.
The following example assumes your files are on drive C and your
STACKER.INI file is on drive G, so you would type:
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
copy
c:\dos\stacker\check.exe
c:\dos\stacker\config.exe
c: \dos \stacker\stack,er. com
c:\dos\stacker\stacker2.bin
c:\dos\stacker\stacvol.xxx
c:\dos\stacker\sysinfo.exe
c:config.sys
c:\dos\dblspace.bin
g:\stacker.ini
You do not need to rehide your Stacker Compression files; they are rehidden
when you reboot your computer.
7. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette in drive A so that only the following
line remains:
fil es=30
8. Try rebooting your computer with this diskette in drive A. Verify that it starts up
with the A:> prompt rather than the usual C:> prompt. Verify that you can
access the files on your drive C.
9. Remove the diskette from drive A, write protect it, and label it as a bootable
Stacker diskette. Then, store the diskette in a safe place.
10. Restart your computer from your hard disk by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
Deletion of Last Stacker Drive
If you choose to uncompress Stacker drives, after your last (or only) Stacker drive
is uncompressed, you are prompted whether you want to remove the Stacker driver
from your system. You should answer NO.
If you answer YES, you will need to recreate your DBLSPACE.BIN file unless you
copied the required files suggested in "Bootable Stacker Diskette" on page 309; if
not, use the following procedure.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
311
To recreate your DBLSPACE.BIN file:
1. Change to the Stacker directory.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
copy /b stacload.bin + stacker.com dblspace.bin
3. Locate and copy the DBLSPACE.BIN file to the root directory of the boot drive
(usually drive C).
4. Copy the STACKER2.BIN file from the Stacker directory to your root directory.
5. Reboot your system to reload the Stacker driver.
After rebooting, you can rerun Stacker to create new Stacker drives.
Central Point Backup
This section provides answers to some of the most common questions asked about
. Central Point's Backup program.,
How do IBM tape devices and Central Point Backup correspond to each
'
other?
When configuring tape devices for Central Point Backup, the software attempts to
determine what type of device is attached. The following table provides a cross
reference between IBM tape devices and their corresponding Central Point Backup
equivalent.
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
Tape Device Name/Model
1.2GB 3450-001
2.0GB 4mm 3440-001
2.3GB 8mm 3532-023
5.0GB 8mm 3445-001
Central Point Backup Tape Device Name/Model
Tandberg IBM 4100
IBM35480A
EXABYTE EXB-8200
EXABYTE IBM-8505
I am running an IBM 2.3GB Bmm SCSI tape drive and get the error Function
not supported when I try to run Central Point Backup. What do I do?
The Central Point Backup program does not support the IBM 2.3GB 8mm SCSI
tape drive (3532-023). This tape drive is an OEM version of the EXABYTE 8200
SCSI tape drive. The firmware was modified to meet a business need. This
changed the commands used to communicate with the tape's hardware. As far as
Central Point Backup is concerned, it is communicating with an EXABYTE SCSI
drive. Because of the modification this is not the case and the error occurs.
312
PC DOS User's Guide
File Update Utility
I made changes to my directory pairs and now I can't find them. What
happened?
If you update directory pairs before you select Update From Di skette, directory
changes on the "to" location are replaced. You must re-enter your directory
changes.
I keep running into memory problems? Am I doing something wrong?
Using File Update from the DOSSHELL can cause memory problems. Exit from the
DOSSHELL (F3) before starting File Update.
My files are "out of sync" at the base and remote locations. How do I align
and synchronize my files without having to manually copy. files from one
location to the other?
If the files at your locations are not synchronized, select Copy all fi 1es from all
di rectori es from the Custom File Selection choice.
I am misSing files. What can I do?
If you are missing files, make sure that:
• The extension is not included in the Files Being Excluded list.
• The subdirectory is defined in the Directory Pairs list.
Other Common Problems
What should I do when the program or device driver reports the wrong
version of DOS?
Some programs or device drivers run only with specific versions of DOS. If a
message appears indicating a program or device driver does not run with DOS,
contact your vendor to get an updated program or to find out whether the current
version of the program or device driver is actually compatible with DOS.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
313
If the current version of the program or device driver is compatible with DOS, use
the SETVER command to change the version number that DOS reports to the
program or device driver. When you use the SETVER command, the program or
device driver interprets DOS as the version it is designed to use. For example, if a
program named MYAPP.EXE runs only with DOS Version 3.3 or earlier, you would
type:
setver myapp.exe 3.3
DOS reports the changed version number to the program when you restart your
computer. If the program is compatible with DOS, the SETVER command
eliminates the apparent incompatibility. There must be a DEVICE command for the
SETVER.EXE device driver in your CONFIG.SYS file in order for the SETVER
command to report a different version to a program. Also, make sure there is only
one SETVER.EXE on your hard disk, because each SETVER.EXE contains a
separate version table.
Note: Make sure the SERVER.EXE is being loaded before your device drivers in
the CONFIG.SYS file.
Type he 1p setver for more information about the SETVER command, or refer to
the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
Warning: Contact your software vendor for information about whether a program
works with DOS. It is possible that IBM has not verified whether the program will
run successfully if you use the SETVER command to change the program version
number and version table. If you run the program after changing the version table
in DOS, you might lose or corrupt data, or introduce system instabilities. It-you do
not contact your software vendor to determine the compatibility of a specific
program with DOS, IBM is not responsible for any loss or damage.
I have installed PC DOS 7 and want to expand drive C: to be larger than
32MB. What steps do I need to take?
This can be accomplished by backing up your system to diskettes, formatting the
hard disk, repartitioning it, and then reformatting it. Then, you can reinstall DOS
along with the other files.
314
PC DOS User's Guide
To back up your entire system using CPBackup:
1. Type the following at the DOS command prompt to start CPBackup:
cpbackup
2. Back up all the files on all your drives.
If you need more information about backing up your files, refer to Chapter 20,
"Using Central Point Backup" on page 383.
3. Insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS installation diskettes into the
diskette drive.
4. Leave the Setup Diskette in the diskette drive and press CTRL+ALT +DEL. This
restarts your system.
'
S. Press FS immediately after your computer displays the message Starting
PC DOS ..•
6. From your Setup Diskette, run FDISK.
7. Delete all partitions and remake the desired number of partitions. Refer to
"Using FDISK" on page 83 for more information.
8. Format drive C and any other hard disk partitions.
9. Install DOS again.
10. Restore all files using CPBackup program. Refer to "Restoring Data" on
page 409.
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting
315
316
PC DOS User's Guide
Part 2. Using the DOS Optional Tools
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
363
.....................
383
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
...................
427
...........................
481
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
......................
501
317
318
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
Through the use of color and graphics, the PC DOS Shell offers a visual way of
working with DOS. Information is set up in different areas on your screen, making it
easy to find. For example, when you first run the PC DOS Shell, the following
information is displayed on your screen:
j
•
•
•
•
The disk drives available on your system.
The directory structure or tree for the current disk drive.
A list of files in the current directory.
A list of programs that you can run.
You can use the PC DOS Shell to perform many of the same file-management and
disk-maintenance tasks that you perform from the command line. For example, you
can use the commands on the File menu to create directories, copy files, and view
the contents of a file. You can use the Disk Utilities group to perform
disk-maintenance tasks, such as formatting and copying disks. You can also use
the PC DOS Shell to organize and start programs, and to switch between them.
Installing the PC DOS Shell after Installing PC DOS
If you did not choose to use the PC DOS Shell for file-management and
disk-maintenance tasks at initial installation of PC DOS, you can still rerun
PC DOS Setup using the Ie switch.
The PC DOS installation diskettes contain everything you need to install PC DOS
Shell. You might want to refer to Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3 before you
begin the installation of additional optional tools.
To install PC DOS Shell using the Ie switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into
drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The Ie switch allows you to return to the optional tools selection menu without
having to do a complete reinstallation of PC DOS. Only the necessary files for
the optional tools will be installed.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
319
3. After Setup begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Make sure
you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the initial
PC DOS installation.
At the Optional Tools screen, use the UP ARROW to scroll up the list of optional
tools, or click on the UP ARROW shown in the brackets next to the word "More"
to scroll. You see NO next to PC DOS Shell.
4. Press the UP ARROW until you highlight PC DOS Shell and then press ENTER.
Or, use your mouse to seleCt the PC DOS Shell.
5. Select other optional tools you want to install either by highlighting the name of
each optional tool and pressing ENTER to select each item if you are using the
keyboard, or clicking on the item if you are using a mouse.
6. After you select the optional tools you want to install, move the cursor to
highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
and press ENTER to accept the optional tool selections. Or, if you are using a
mouse, just click on this line.
7. Continue to follow the instructions on the screen until you have completed the
installation of the optional tools.
Starting the PC DOS Shell
You have two ways to view DOS and enter commands:
• The PC DOS Shell view
• The DOS command prompt view
The PC DOS Shell View
The PC DOS Shell is a type of interface used to operate PC DOS, known as a
graphical user interface (GUI). GUI is a graphical way to present information
on-screen and to accept information from you. You can manage your computer
from the PC DOS Shell by using graphical alternatives to the DOS commands
typed at the DOS command prompt.
To start the PC DOS Shell each time you start your computer:
During PC DOS 7 installation, if you select PC DOS Shell, the command-line
statement to load the PC DOS Shell automatically is added for you by the Setup
program. Therefore, whenever you start your com'puter, the PC DOS Shell is
displayed instead of the DOS command prompt.
320
PC DOS User's Guide
However, if you are upgrading your version of PC DOS, you previously had the PC
DOS Shell installed and do not install the PC DOS Shell that is provided with
PC DOS 7, you must use the following procedure:
To modify the AUTOEXEC.BAT file if not installing the PC DOS 7 Shell:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
e autoexec.bat
2. Use the DOWN ARROW to move the cursor to the following line:
rem C:\DOS\DOSSHELL.EXE
3. Press ALT +L to mark this line of text.
4. Move the cursor to the last line of this file.
5. Press ALT+M. to move this line of text so it becomes the last line of the file.
6. Press ALT+u to unmark the line of text.
7. Remove the REM statement so the line is as follows:
C:\DOS\DOSSHELL.EXE
8. Press F4 to save and close the file.
9. Reboot your system by typing CTRL+ALT +DEL
The PC DOS Shell window is displayed.
The DOS Command Prompt View
The DOS command prompt view is the traditional look of the DOS command
prompt (C:\». Using the command line is quicker after you know the commands
and their options. When you first start out using DOS, however, the PC DOS Shell
eliminates the need to know the names of some commands and their options.
If your system is currently set up so that the DOS command prompt appears, you
can start the PC DOS Shell from there.
Note: A terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program is a program that is loaded
and stays loaded in memory until you unload it. If you start a TSR program
before starting PC DOS Shell, do not quit the TSR program by using its exit
procedure while you are still in the PC DOS Shell. Instead, you must first
leave the PC DOS Shell and then quit the TSR program.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
321
To start the PC DOS Shell from the DOS command prompt:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
dosshell
2. Then press ENTER to display the PC DOS Shell window.
Menu Bar Area
Drive Icon Area
UTOEXEC.OOO
B AUTOEXEC.OOl
B AUTOEXEC.002
EJ AUTOEXEC.BAT
B AUTOEXEC.OLD
1"<"r-A1 1T1I1.:n:I:. STC
EJ
B
B
B
B
B
274
06-24-94
rnHHIANn--t'J1H
COItFIG
COItFIG
COItFIG
COItFIG
COItFIG
File Manager
Showing these areas:
• File List
• Directory Tree
Program Manager
Showing this area:
___*'___________________-
• Program List
Function Key Area
Disk Utilities Group
In the section "Introducing PC DOS Shell Basics" on page 324, the PC DOS Shell
is discussed in greater detail. Right now you simply are taking a "first look."
322
Menu Bar
Provides a list of menu options. The menu bar is below
the title bar of the main window.
Drive Icon area
Lists the disk drives that your computer recognizes.
The selected drive is highlighted. Drives A and Bare
diskette drives. The first hard disk drive is C. If your
hard disk drive or drives are partitioned into separate
logical drives, each drive letter is treated as a separate
physical drive.
Directory Tree area
Shows the directories for the selected drive. The
current directory is highlighted.
File List area
Shows the files for the current directory. A current file
is highlighted.
Program List area
Lists the programs available from the current program
group, and lists other program groups.
PC DOS User's Guide
Status Line
Shows function keys, messages, and the current time at
the bottom line of the PC DOS Shell window.
A title for an area is highlighted when this area is selected, such as the title for
Main shown in the illustration above.
Displaying Information About Your Files and Programs
The PC DOS Shell displays information about your files and programs. You can
choose from a number of different ways to display this data. These different views
are called display modes.
When you start the PC DOS Shell, you see a full-screen display. This initial display
contains information that is displayed automatically. The display shows you the list
of disk drives in your computer, the files in the root directory, and a list of some of
the DOS programs available.
Selection Cursor
COlTllTland ProlTlpt
Scroll bars
E:J PC DOS E Ed i tor
E:J Central Point Scheduler
E:J Central Point Undelete
~
Disk Utilities
In graphics mode, the PC DOS Shell uses icons-small picture that graphically
represents an object-such as disk drives, directories, programs, and text files.
If you have an EGA or VGA display, you can display the PC DOS Shell in graphics·
mode. The following PC DOS Shell view is in 30-line graphics mode. You can use
this mode if your display has EGA or better resolution. Changing the display
options for this mode is discussed in "Changing the PC DOS Shell View" on
page 345 .
.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
323
Other parts of the PC DOS Shell, such as the scroll bars and the mouse pointer (a
usually an arrow, that shows you the position of the mouse) are easier to
read in graphics mode.
sym~ol,
Selection Cursor
Indicates the selected drive, directory, file, or program
with a highlighted area or band in graphics mode. In
text mode, the selection cursor is a small triangular
arrow. If no title bar is highlighted, the selection cursor
is in the disk drives area.
Mouse Pointer
Indicates the current position of the mouse on the
display. Use the mouse pointer to select items.
Scroll Bars
Scrolls any list of directories, files, or programs that is
too long to fit in the display area.
Introducing PC DOS Shell Basics
The PC DOS. Shell makes DOS easier to use. No commands to memorize, no file
names to remember, and help at the touch of a key. You just select actions from
menus, type answers to questions, and check off options in dialog boxes. The PC
DOS Shell is a shortcut for those who already understand the basics of DOS. You
can issue most of the same DOS commands that you type at the DOS command
prompt by using a mouse or the keyboard to point to and select the following:
• A menu-displays below the menu bar when you select any of these menu
options: ,File, Options, View, Tree, and Help.
• A dialog box-a window containing options that appears when a command
needs additional information.
The PC DOS Shell view is a full-screen window with menus and help screens. The
PC DOS Shell provides a visual presentation of DOS, with options'from which you
make selections.
When DOS needs you to supply more information to complete a command, DOS
displays a dialog box. You type the answers to the prompts, and DOS completes
the command.
Selecting Items from Lists or Menus
From the PC DOS Shell, you can initiate DOS commands, run programs, find files,
view the contents of files; and change the way that the PC DOS Shell area
appears. All these actions are performed by selecting menu options. You do not
have to remember command names or the format and parameters of the
commands.
324
PC DOS User's Guide
The concept of selecting an item and then performing some action with that item is
one of the main concepts behind the PC DOS Shell graphical user interface. An
item can be a disk, a directory, a file, or a program. You select an action from a
menu.
You select an item by using either the mouse or the keyboard.
Using the Mouse
Although you can use the PC DOS Shell with the keyboard or the mouse, you will
find that using the mouse is much easier. The graphical user interface was
designed to be used with a mouse.
With the mouse, you can select items and menu options. As you move the mouse,
the mouse pointer moves in the same direction on-screen. The mouse pointer
takes on different shapes in the various modes of PC DOS. In graphics mode, for
example, the mouse pointer is an arrow. In text mode, the mouse pointer is a
colored rectangle. In addition, the mouse pointer sometimes changes shape to
indicate the action taking place.
You should be familiar with mouse terminology. To select an item with the mouse,
make sure that the tip of the mouse pointer is over the item you want to select and
click. When you click a mouse button, you press and release the left mouse button
once without moving the mouse. Your mouse might have two or three buttons, but
unless otherwise indicated you should use the left button. Sometimes you
doub/e-click, meaning to click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Selecting a menu option and a command from the menu with a mouse is easy.
Follow these steps:
To use the mouse to work with menus:
1. Move·the mouse pointer to the menu option and click the mouse button.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the menu command you want to use and click the
mouse button again ..
To drag the mouse, move the mouse pointer over an object, and then press and
hold down the mouse button as you move the object with the mouse pointer. You
can move the mouse in any direction: up, down, left, right, or at any angle.
A directory listing is automatic when you are in the PC DOS Shell. You always see
a iisting of the subdirectories and files in the current directory. If you move the
mouse pointer to the folder icon next to C:\ in the Directory Tree area and click the
left mouse button, the directory tree alternately expands (to show all branches) and
collapses (to show no branches).
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
325
If you move the mouse pointer to the icon next to Disk Utilities in the program area
, and double-cli~k the left mouse button, the program area title switches from Main to
Disk Utilities. The program area now displays the DOS disk utilities. Double-click
the icon next to Main to switch back to the Main program list.
Using the Keyboard
If you prefer to use the keyboard to select an item, you can use any of the following
procedures:
• Press TAB to select the area you want. Pressing TAB highlights the selected
area title. If no title bar, which identifies the name of the current window or
dialog box, is highlighted, the selected area is the disk drive area near the top
of the display.
• Press SHIFT+TAB to move back to the previously selected area.
• After you are in the appropriate area, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to
move the selection cursor, (a highlighted band or area that indicates that an
item is selected) to the directory, file, or program you want to select.
• In the disk drives area, use the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW to select a
different disk drive.
• Use a shortcut key
You can use a shortcut key, which is a key or key combination instead of a
menu selection to issue a command, as explained in "Making Menu Selections"
on page 328.
• Use mnemonic selection
Mnemonics are characters that appear highlighted or underlined on the menu
bar or list of menu items. Make a selection by typing the single character
displayed in a different color or different highlighting. If your menu bar does not
display a highlighted character, press ALT.
To access the menu bar, you must press ALT followed by the highlighted letter
in the menu choice. For example, to access the File menu, you would press
ALT +F to get the list of menu items.
To select a menu option and a command from the menu with the keyboard:
1. Press ALT or F10 to access the menu bar.
This action highlights the File menu bar item.
2. Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW to highlight the menu bar option you
want.
3. Press the DOWN ARROW to access the menu.
326
PC DOS User's Guide
4. Press the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to highlight the menu item you want.
5. Press ENTER to select the menu item.
Using Mnemonic Selection
. You also can use another keyboard method to make selections from a menu more
quickly.
To use the mnemonic selection keyboard method:
1. Press ALT or F10 to access the menu bar.
This action highlights the File menu bar.
2. Type the underlined or highlighted letter, depending on the type of system you
have, of the. menu bar item you want.
This step opens the menu for that menu bar item.
3. Type the underlined or highlighted letter of the menu item you want to use.
Using Shortcut Keys
A shortcut key lets you press a key or combination of keys instead of selecting a
menu item. Some of the most common menu items have shortcut keys. These
keys do save time when you use a menu item often.
Shortcut key
Dimmed if not
selectable - - - - Mnemonic---selection
Shortcut keys are listed next to the menu item in the menus. If no key is listed, that
command has no shortcut key. If two keys are listed together, press both keys at
the same time.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
327
Making Menu Selections
Performing tasks in the PC DOS Shell is similar to performing tasks in everyday life.
When you want to open a file in the PC DOS Shell, you first select File (the object),
and then you select Open (the action).
Most often you choose an action from a menu. The initial menu options are listed
in the menu bar. The possible men,:! selections are File, Options, View, Tree, and
Help. When the program area is highli~hted, the Tree menu is not available.
When you select a menu option, a menu is displayed. From the menu, you select
the specific action you want, such as a DOS command. Menu options that appear
dimmer than others are unavailable for selection.
Some menu options remain dim if you do not have a file or text selected. Most of
the options in the File menu, for example, require something to be highlighted
before the option is available for use.
Selecting More Than One Item
If you want to perform the same actions, such as copying, on more than one item,
you can use the multiple selection method.
To select more than one item that are consecutive in a list:
1. Click on the first item to highlight it using the left mouse button.
2. Press SHIFT and hold it down.
, 3. Click on the last item using the left mouse button.
All the items in between the first and last items are highlighted.
To select more than one item that are not consecutive in a list:
1. Click on the first item to highlight it using the left mouse button.
2. Press CTRL and hold it down.
3. Click on the each item you want to select it using the left mouse button.
All the items you selected are highlighted.
Cancelling Menus
If you
menu
menu
press
328
select a menu in error, you can cancel the selection and make a different
selection. To cancel a menu with the mouse, just click anywhere outside the
area, or click the right mouse button. To cancel a menu with the keyboard,
ESC.
PC DOS User's Guide ,
If you make the wrong menu selection with the mouse, just click on the correct
menu option in the menu bar. The incorrect menu disappears, and the new menu
opens. If you make the wrong menu selection with the keyboard, just press the
LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW to select the menu choice you want.
Using Dialog Boxes
Sometime you mu~t enter additional information before DOS can carry out the
command you selected. When DOS needs additional information, it opens a dialog
box. When a command has a dialog box, the command name in the menu is
followed by an ellipsis (... ). A dialog box may request one piece of information or
many separate pieces of information, depending on the command .
..
File
C:,D
~A
,FileiDisplay,Options':..!':
'.
ClG
/".
B
E::J
E:l
E:l
E:l
E:l
E:l
PZP
B
..
E:l
E:l
E:l
E:l
~
"
E:l
E:l
E:l
E:l
E:l
README • TXT
REMOVDRV. COM
REPA IR . EXE
REPORT .EXE
RESIZE .COM
RES IZE2 •EXE
SCREATE . S'iS
SCREXEC . EXE
SCREXEC2 • EXE
SDEFRAG .COM
SDEFRAG2. EXE
SDIR
.EXE
18.580
1,051
37.201
50.131
1,052
70.813
15.571
95.151
77.593
1,055
125.160
36.587
10-27-91 110-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91 '
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91 ..
aln
CQll'lIl'Iand Prompt
PC DOS E Ed i tor
Central Point Scheduler
Central Point Undelete
Disk Utilities
Ions
If you click on Fi 1e Di sp 1ay Options from the Options menu, for example, you see
a dialog box that lets you change the way data is displayed in the files area.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
329
The File Display Options dialog box requests that you enter the files you want to
see, how you want them sorted, and whether you want the hidden or system files
displayed.
The dialog box is one of the main features of a graphical user interface. With some
menu systems, you must choose many different levels of menus to get to the one
you want. Often, you must make more than ten selections to start one command.
With menus and dialog boxes, however, you select a menu a"nd a command; then,
if additional information is needed, DOS prompts you for that information in a dialog
box, which can be as large as a full screen if necessary.
Dialog boxes can contain the following elements:
Text box
A box in which you type text, such as a file name.
Check box
An on-and-off or yes-or-no question enclosed in square
brackets. If the option is selected, an "X" appears in the
square brackets.
Option Button
A circle next to a specific option. The selected option has a
black dot in the circle. Related option buttons are grouped
together. You can choose only one option button at a time
from a group.
List box
A list of options that is similar to a list of option buttons, but in
a different format. You can choose only one option from the
list.
Command button
A possible action you can take from the dialog box. The OK
button processes the command. The Cancel button cancels
the command. The Help button displays online h~lp for the
dialog box.
Entering Text in Dialog Boxes
To use the mouse to select a text box in a dialog box, move the mouse pointer to
the text box and click the left mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, press
TAB or SHIFT+TAB until an underline appears in the text dialog box where you want
to enter text.
To type over an existing entry, just type the new entry. To change an existing
entry, press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW to position the cursor. Press
BACKSPACE to delete a character to the left of the cursor and DEL to delete the
character at the cursor; then type any new text.
330
PC DOS User's Guide
Selecting Options in Dialog Boxes
To select or deselect a check box with a mouse, move the mouse pointer between
the square brackets and click. To use the keyboard, press TAB or SHIFT+TAB to
move to the check box, and then press the SPACEBAR.
To use the mouse to select an option from a list of option buttons, move the mouse
pointer to the option button and click. A black dot appears in the selected option
button and disappears from any other button in the list. If you click the black dot,
nothing happens. With. a keyboard, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move
the black dot to the option you want to select.
In some dialog boxes, a list of possible options is displayed in a box. You select
from this list. To select an option from a list box with the mouse, move the mouse
pointer to the option you want and click. With the keyboard, use the DOWN ARROW
or UP ARROW to highlight the option you want.
COI'\IIIand Prompt
El PC DOS E Editor
El Central Point Scheduler
El Central Point Undelete
~
Disk Utilities
This list box lets you select from a number of different color schemes, depending on
the type of display you have.
Using Command Buttons
After you supply the requested information in a dialog box, you select the OK
command button to start the command with your choices. Select the Cancel button
to ignore all information entered in the dialog box and cancel the command. Other
command buttons might be available, such as Help.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
331
To select a command button with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to the button
and click the left mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, press TAB or
SHIFT +TAB until an underline appears on the command button 'you want; then press
ENTER or the SPACEBAR. You can press ESC to cancel a command at any time.
Using Scroll Bars
Sometimes a list is too long to fit within a display area or dialog box. If you use a
mouse, you can use scroll bars to view text that is not visible. The scroll bar runs
the length of a list. The scroll box is a gray, rectangular box inside the scroll bar.
The scroll box represents the position and the fraction of the data in the currently
displayed list. In this Directory Tree area, the scroll box starts at the top of the
scroll bar, which means that the top of the list of directories is displayed.
To scroll down a list, click the black area of the scroll bar, below the scroll box.
The scroll box moves down a page at a time, and the list scrolls down to display
another part of the list.
After you click below the scroll box, the text scrolls down. You can keep clicking
until the scroll box reaches the bottom, revealing the bottom of the list of directories.
At the top and bottom of the scroll bar is a scroll arrow-an arrow you can click to
scroll the screen in the direction of the arrow. To scroll up or down by one line,
move the mouse pointer,to the up scroll arrow or the down scroll arrow and click.
For every click, the display scrolls one line and the scroll box moves accordingly.
~
G
ClD
ClE
1"
C:\
G~
~b
[ tb
b
b
ClF
DATA
STACKER
S'iSTEM
pZP
ClG
B
E:l
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Command Prompt
PC DOS E Editor
Central Point Scheduler
Central Point Undelete
Disk Util ities
332
PC DOS User's Guide
HIMEM
.S'iS
IBMAVD .EXE
IBMAVD01.HLP
IBMAVD02.HLP
IBMAVD03 . HLP
IBMAVD01 . HLP
IBMAVD05.HLP
IBMAVD06.HLP
IBMAVD07 . HLP
IBMAVD08.HLP
IBMAVD09.HLP
IBMAVD10.HLP
..
11,160
399,712
8,200
758
1, 257
5,683
2,653
6,635
2,173
2,881
11 , 671
1,017
10-27-91 1"
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91'"
The DOS directory contains many files. The size of the scroll box lets you know
how much of the list is visible. If the scroll box is halfway between the scroll
arrows, this indicates that only about half of the files are visible.
When a list is long, you can scroll swiftly by dragging the scroll box. To drag a
scroll box, move the mouse pointer to the scroll box, hold down the right mouse
button, and move the pointer up or down. As long as you keep the mouse button
pressed while you move the mouse, the scroll box moves with the mouse pointer
and also scrolls the list.
To scroll with the keyboard, press TAB to select the area you want; then press the
UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the selection cursor one item at a time in the
direction of the arrow. Page up or page down to scroll up or down, respectively,
one full screen at a time.
Using PC DOS Shell Commands
When you choose a menu option, DOS displays a menu and a list of menu
commands for that selection pop down. To move, copy, or rename files or to
execute other commands, you do not have to remember command names; you just
select items from command menus.
.
EI
EI
B
B
EI
B
B
'"
EI
EI
EI
EI
,
C:\DOS\*.*
CHEC](UP .DB
? .322
13.170
CHKDSK •COM
1.596
CHOI CE •COM
172.118
CMDREF • INF
855
CMOSCLK .SYS
52.956
COMMAND •COM
872
CONTACT .LST
22. 158
COUNTRY .SYS
122.386
CPBACKUP. EXE
10.893
CPBDIR .EXE
4.916
CPSCHED •EXE
9.219
CRC
.EXE
11-01-94
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-94
10-27-91
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-91 '"
The PC DOS Shell provides procedures online for performing each menu
command. Use the following steps for each menu command under the File option.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
333
To access the online procedures:
1. Select the File menu.
2. Use the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to highlight the command you want
procedures for, such as Copy.
3. Press F1.
4. Select the hypertext link under "Related Procedure."
5. Scroll to where the procedures are visible within the window.
Getting Help
PC DOS Shell online help provides a quick way to get information about PC DOS
Shell basics and how to use menus, commands, dialog boxes, dialog box options,
and procedures.
You can get help in three ways:
• By pressing F1.
• By selecting the Help button that appears in most dialog boxes.
• By using the Help menu.
To request help on a menu:
1. Press ALT.
2. Use the RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW to highlight the menu you want
help on.
3. Press F1.
To request help on a
Mouse
command~,
.1. Click on the menu that contains the command you want help on.
2. Use the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to highlight the command you
want Help on.
3. Press F1.
334
PC DOS User's Guide
Keyboard
1. Press ALT to select the menu bar.
2. Use the RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW to highlight the menu that
contains the command you want help on.
3. Use the DOWN ARROW or
you want Help on.
UP ARROW to
highlight the command
4. Press F1.
A Help window containing information about the selected menu appears.
You will notice that in most help screens, several terms appear in bold type. By
double-clicking on a bold term, you can move to another help screen on that
particular topic. Use the Back button when you are ready to return to the Help
screen from which you came.
To request help on a dialog box option:
1. Open the dialog box you want help on.
2. Select a command button or option using the TAB or the arrow keys.
3. Press F1.
For example, if you have selected Search For in the Search File dialog box and
you press F1, the PC DOS Shell displays the following Help window:
Each F1 Help screen contains the following command buttons:
Command Button
Description
Close
Back
Keys
Index
Help
Cancels help
Displays previous Help screen
Displays help on keyboard keys
Displays the Help index
Displays help on how to use the Help system
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
335
Getting Help on a Related Procedure
Often Help refers you to a related procedure. For example, if you requested Help
on the Color Scheme dialog box, this Help contains a reference to the procedure for
changing colors.
Within Help, related procedures are displayed in a different color or in reverse
video, depending on the color scheme you have selected.
To view a related procedure:
Mouse
Keyboard
Double-click on the related procedure.
1. Press TAB until the related procedure is selected.
2. Press ENTER.
A Help window containing information about the related procedure appears.
Using the Help Menu
You can use the commands on the Help menu to view an index of Help topics;
information on the keys you can use with the PC DOS Shell; basic skills for working
with the PC DOS Shell commands and procedures; and information about using the
Help system.
To use the Help menu:
Mouse
Keyboard.
From the Help menu, click on the Help category you want.
1. Press ALT +H.
2. Press the highlighted letter for the Help category you want.
Or, press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to select the Help
category you want, and then press ENTER.
Either information about the subject or a list of topics related to the subject appears.
Note: If you have not used Help before, select Us i ng Help from the Help menu to
learn more about the type of information available.
336
PC DOS User's Guide
Help Menu Options
The following items are available from the Help menu:
Index
Provides a list of all the PC DOS Shell Help topics.
Keyboard
Lists keys and key combinations you can use with the PC DOS
Shell.
Shell Basics
Provides an introduction to using the PC DOS Shell.
Commands
Explains all the PC DOS Shell commands. This information is
organized according to the menu in which the command appears.
You can get the same information by selecting a command and
then pressing F1.
Procedures
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing tasks in the PC
DOS Shell.
Using Help
Provides an introduction to using the PC DOS Shell Help.
About Shell
Displays copyright and version information about PC DOS Shell
If you select Shell Basi cs from the Help menu, the following help window
demonstrates the type of information you would see:
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
337
Starting a Program
PC DOS Shell automatically displays information about a disk, a directory, and
programs. You use a mouse or the keyboard to move around the display, to select
menu items, and to start programs.
This section introduces the idea of starting programs from the PC DOS Shell.
Programs are files that have an .EXE or .COM file extension. Batch files with a
.BAT file extension contain DOS commands and start programs.
Central Point Scheduler, Central Point Undelete, and the E Editor are PC DOS
programs available from the PC DOS Shell.
Programs can be started from the Main group of PC DOS Shell by double-clicking
on the program name or by using the TAB key to move the cursor to the Main
group and then using the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW until the program name is
highlighted. Then press ENTER.
Ways to start a program from PC DOS Shell include:
• From a program group, choose a program item.
For example, Disk Utilities and Main are two program groups available with PC
DOS Shell. From the Main group you could start Central Point Scheduler by
selecting the program-by highlighting it and then pressing ENTER if you are
using the keyboard, or double-clicking on the item if you are using a mouse.
• From a file list, choose a program file or a file associated with that program.
From the list of files in a specific directory, you can start the program by
selecting any file with an extension of .BAT, .EXE, or .COM. For example, to
start the E Editor, select the program by highlighting the E.EXE file and then
pressing ENTER if you are using the keyboard, or double-clicking on the item if
you are using a mouse.
• From the File menu, select Run. Type the name of the program file in the Run
dialog box, and then select OK.
For example, type qconfi 9 to start the QCONFIG program.
338
PC DOS User's Guide
• From the Main group, double-click on Command Prompt and you see the
message Type EXIT and press ENTER to return to DOS Shell. You do not
see this message if the Task Swapper is running.
Type the name of the program at the DOS command prompt. After the
program completes its processing or you exit from the program, type exi t and
press ENTER to return to the PC DOS Shell.
- Do not type dosshell to return to the PC DOS Shell because the program
is already running.
- To return to the PC DOS Shell, you must type exi t and then press ENTER.
Finding Files
You have seen how the PC DOS Shell simplifies using commands. The PC DOS
Shell also lets you work with the files on your disk. For example, it can help you
keep track of all the files you have stored, including finding files.
The PC DOS Shell gives you many ways to find lost files. You can use the Search
option from the File menu, or you can change the PC DOS Shell view and the file
display options.
You will learn how to change the file display options in "Changing the PC DOS
Shell View" on page 345.
Using Search
If you know the name or extension of the file.you need to find, or even if you only
know part of the name or extension, you can use Search to find it. You can use
wildcard characters if you want to search for a series of files.
To search for one or more files:
1. Press ALT+F or click on Fi 1e to display the File menu.
2. Click on Search from the File menu. The Search File dialog box opens.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
339
El
El
El
I'ii!il
Command
PC DOS E Editor
Central Point Scheduler
Central Point Undelete
Disk Uti lities
3. Enter the name of the file you want to find in the Search for text box.
You can use wildcards. To search for all the files with a .BAT extension for
example, type *. BAT in the Search File dialog box.
4. To search the entire disk, select the Search entire disk check box. To search
only the current directory, deselect the Search entire disk check box.
5. Select OK.
DOS lists all the files it finds on the Search Results screen.
El C:\DOS\IBMAVDR.BAT
6. Press ESC to return to the main PC DOS Shell screen from the Search Results
screen.
340
PC DOS User's Guide
Using the Task Swapper
A feature of the PC DOS Shell is the Task Swap per. With the Swapper running,
you can start more than one program at the same time and swap between them.
This feature can be handy if you regularly use more than one program, such as a
word processor and a spreadsheet and often change between them.
To enable the Task Swapper:
1. Click on Opt ions from the menu.
2. Select Enabl e Task Swapper.
A black diamond appears to the left of the command on the menu to indicate
that the Swapper is enabled.
When the Task Swapper is enabled, the program area at the bottom of the screen
is split into two areas. The Active Task List area lists all programs that have been
started.
II
:: ,';;::,/i < ";,:; :"','r,,'
, ;J!Hef'::OvtiO\ls:;'UiAeli$;,;,tree:;,,:HeI
C:'DOS
~A ~B
e=J c:,
t E£ltJ
~
CJD
IHrec or-II
CJE
ree'
[il!l:'l
P2P
CJF
.!
CJG
II
El
B
El
El
El
B
El
B
El
B
El
El
El
El
El
El
rnm
COl1ll1land Prol1lpt
PC DOS E Editor
Central Point Scheduler
Central Point Undelete
Disk Utilities
DEFRAG • EXE
DEFRAG .HLP
DELTREE .EXE
DISKCOMP .COM
DISKCOP'l.COM
DISPLA'l .S'lS
DOSDOCK • COM
DOSERROR. INF
DOSKE'l • COM
DOSREXX .INF
DOSSHELL. COM
DOSSHELL. EXE
COl1ll1land Prol1lpt
PC DOS E EdH~
77 , 593
9,017
5,111
7,638
9,311
15,315
2,578
91,611
5,812
173,581
2,271
110,336
10-27-91 f"
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91
10-27-91 ..
iii
~
f"
~~
;~
I '- Task swapper
is loaded
With the Swapper enabled, you can start a program, and then suspend the program
and return to the PC DOS Shell.
To return to the PC DOS Shell from a program, press ALT +ESC. Once back in the
PC DOS Shell, you can start one or more other programs, which also can be
suspended by pressing ALT+ESC.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
341
In this example, the E Editor and the Command Prompt programs are running as
active tasks, and current action has been returned to the PC DOS Shell.
When you start one or more programs and return to the PC DOS Shell, the
programs are listed in the Active Task List area.
To resume an active task:
• Double-click on the task name
• Or, select the task. and press ENTER.
When you return to an active task, you return to the exact environment you left.
The same file or files are in memory, the cursor is in the same spot, and any
options are unchanged.
It is important to remember to quit all active tasks before you leave the PC DOS
Shell, or turn off your computer. If you do not, you run the risk of damaging your
program files.
Updating a directory
If you made changes to a directory such as adding or deleting files, the changes
will not be qisplayed in the File List area until you update the directory.
To update a directory:
1. Select the directory that you want to update.
2. Press CTRL+FS.
Leaving the PC DOS Shell
You can leave the PC DOS Shell and move to the DOS command prompt in two
ways. You can quit the PC DOS Shell temporarily, in which case you can work at
the DOS command prompt while the PC DOS Shell is still in your system's
memory. Or you can quit the PC DOS Shell and remove it from your system's
memory before you switch to th~ DOS command prompt.
To leave the PC DOS Shell temporarily:
• Press SHIFT+F9.
• Or, select Command Prompt from the Main group on the program list.
To return to the PC DOS Shell, you must type ex; t and then
pre~s ENTER.
Note: Do not type dosshell to return to the PC DOS Shell because the program is
already running.
342
PC DOS User's Guide
If Task Swapper is enabled, you can switch back to the PC DOS Shell without
quitting Command Prompt by pressing CTRL+ESC. Note that Command Prompt is
still running and listed in the Active Task List.
To quit the PC DOS Shell:
1. If there are programs displayed in the Active Task List, you must quit each·
program before leaving the PC DOS Shell.
If you try to quit the PC DOS Shell while you still have programs listed in the
Active Task List, the Exiting Error dialog box appears. The dialog box tells you
that you cannot quit the PC DOS Shell without first quitting all programs that
you have running.
Select OK to close the dialog box.
Use one of the following three options if you decide to exit the PC DOS Shell
and return to the DOS command prompt:
• Press F3.
• Press ALT +F4.
• Click on Exi t from the File menu.
Customizing the PC DOS Shell
Before you begin customizing the PC DOS Shell, make sure that the PC DOS
Shell is installed on your computer and that you know how to use it.
You can customize the PC DOS Shell in several ways. You can change the screen
colors or change the way information is displayed in the PC DOS Shell window.
You can also organize your programs into groups and display the groups
graphically, making it easier to find and use your programs. When you add a
program item to a group, you can further customize the program by creating your
own Help text, controlling the memory needed to run the program, and defining
application shortcut keys.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
343
Changing Screen Colors
If you have a color display, you can view the PC DOS Shell in color. You have a
choice of available color schemes.
To choose a color scheme:
1. From the Options menu, select Colors.
The Color Scheme window appears.
2. To select the scheme you want, click on the scroll arrows until the color
scheme you want comes into view and then click on that color scheme. Or use
. the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to select the color scheme you want.
3. If you want to see what the selected color scheme looks like on your screen,
select Pr:-evi ew.
4. Select OK to implement the color scheme.
Switching between Text and Graphics Mode
The appearance of the PC DOS Shell on your screen depends on what type of
display adapter you have and the screen mode you are using. A display adapter
determines the screen display's capabilities, such as resolution and screen mode.
The screen mode controls the size and shape of the images that appear on your
screen.
There are two types of screen modes: text and graphics. All display adapters
support text mode, which is the mode the PC DOS Shell uses the first time you ,_
startit. Only some display adapters support graphics mode.
Within text or graphics mode, you usually have a choice of how many lines you
want displayed. For example, if you choose to view 50 lines instead of 25 lines (the
default), you see more information on your screen at once, but the words and
symbols appear smaller.
344
PC DOS User's Guide
To change the screen mode:
1. From the Options menu, select Di sp 1ay.
The Screen Display Mode window appears.
2. Select the screen mode you want.
3. If you want to see what the selected screen mode looks like on your screen,
select Previ ew.
4. Select OK to implement the screen mode.
The PC DOS Shell appears in the screen mode you selected.
Changing the PC DOS Shell View
The PC DOS Shell view used so far has three or four areas: a directory area, a
files area, a program area, and if the Swapper is enabled, an active task list area.
You can change this display with the View menu options. Each display choice is
called a view. Five possible view choices are available.
The View menu shows the possible view choices:
The Program/File Lists View
The default view is Program/File Lists. This view lists directories and files at the top
of the scr~en and programs at the bottom of the screen. The current view choice
appears gray or dim on the View menu because you cannot change the view to the
current view. Program/File Lists is the most common view because it permits you
to work with both files and programs at the same time .
•BAT
.EXE
.PRF
.S'iS
.EXE
.COM
El ATTRIB .EXE
B AUTORUIt .PRF
El BACKUP •COM
8
22.827
715
8.906
7.735
5.102
8.664
215
22.561
11-02-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
345
The Dual File Lists View
The Dual File Lists view makes it easier when you want to copy or move files. You
can display two directories on the same disk or on different disks at the same time.
PC DOS Shell
~,
C:'DOS
~A
M
~B
ClD
ClE
ClF
ClG
; <+.;->~~.~:'t/;%\~:l~'/.Q·.: ··reO;t·ortl.; ~'lree"\ ":<'>U:,th T:~i. $::~~ i1)·q~¥:~;';'i~ +.~} ;~t,t g%~ ~:..;. i":~·~;~/t~~" "¥:l1tYl'(. "(\iNh1--;: y ~~ <~\t,;~·'
c:,
!iI!I!'l
8
8
[
E:J
E:J
E:J
t
E:J
' ..
B
~
B
EI
EI
B
DATA
STACKER
SYSTEM
PZP
B
..
~A
~B
M
ClD
8[~DOS
E:J DATA
t-E:J
STACKER
tE:J SYSTEM
E:J PZP
ClE
ClF
..
EI
EI
EI
865
.CPI
9,920
915
.CPI
AC66DOSC.BAT
ACALC
.EXE
ADM IN
•PRF
ANSI
.SYS
APPEND .EXE
ASSIGN •COM
ATTRIB .EXE
9,920
8
22,827
715
8,,906
7,735
5,102
8,664
10-27-94
11-02-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94 ..
AUTOEXEC .BAT
COMMAND •COM
CONFIG .SYS
EJ3B9S30 .PCX
EJ3B9S31.PCX
EJ3B9S32.PCX
EJ3B9S33.PCX
EJ3B9S34. PCX
EJ3B9S35. PCX
161
52,956
83
63,369
61,364
55,452
55,452
63,273
54,357
11-01-94 ..
10-27-94
11-01-94
11-02-94
11-02-94
11-02-94
11-02-94
11-02-94
11-02-94 ..
dP-rifI
10-27-94"
'JI!tAoWIol''*'4@
ClG
EI
EI
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
The Single File List View
The Single File List view is good for when you want to look at a large group of files.
With this view, you can see the entire directory tree and many more files in the
DOS directory.
EI
EI
EI
B
EI
EI
B
B
B
B
EI
EI
B
B
EI
B
B
EI
EI
EI
346
PC DOS User's Guide·
APPEND .EXE
ASSIGN .COM
ATTRIB .EXE
AUTORUN .PRF,
BACKUP .COM
BROWSE •COM
CGA
.GRB
CGA
.INI
.VID
CGA
CHECKUP .DB
CHKDSK .COM
CHOICE •COM
CMDREF .INF
CMOSCLK .SYS
COMMAND • COM
CONTACT .LST
COUNTRY .SYS
CPBACKUP. EXE
CPBDIR .EXE
CPSCHED .EXE
CRC
.EXE
CUM
. LOG
7,735
5,102
8,664
215
22,561
1,,069
2,106
16,864
9,607
7,322
, 13,470
1,596
472,418
855
52,956
872
22,158
422,386
10,893
4,946
9,249
162
."
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
\'
;;;~
The All Files View
The All Files view lists every file on the disk, in alphabetical order, regardless of the
directory. The All Files view is good for when you are trying to locate a specific file
or looking for duplicate file names in different directories.
II
File Uptions Vie",
Tree Help
"""
C:'DOS
~A
~B
~ C:::::ID
ClE
ClF
B
File
Nallle :
Attr :
Selected
NUlllber:
Size :
Directory
Nallle :
Size :
Files :
Disk
Nallle :
Size :
Avail :
Files :
Dirs :
r"w,
865
ClG
.CPI
~ i'f~a
B 915
.CPI
EI AC66DOSC. BAT
C
.EXE
EI ACALC
1
B ADMIN
.PRF
9.920
B ANSI
.S'lS
EI APPEND .EXE
DOS
EI ASSIGN .COM
5.611.966
EI ATTRIB .EXE
186
EI AUTO EXEC .BAT
EI AU TORCVR . COM
none
B AUTORUN .PRF
189.267.968
EI AUTOSAVE .EXE
165.961.728
EI BACKUP .COM
374
EI BROWSE .COM
6
B CGA
.GRB
B CGA
.INI
B CGA
.VID
.EXE
EI CHECK
B CHECKUP .DB
EI CHKDSK .COM
EI CHOICE .COM
"l'~H":t:IIIIt aM {'rollin""'.:
865.CPI
•.. a
.....
9.920
10-27-94
12:00p l'
9.920
8
22.827
715
8.906
7.735
5.102
8.664
161
1.054
215
101.888
22.561
1.069
2.106
16.864
9.607
53.112
7.322
13.470
1.596
10-27-94
11-02-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-.27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
11-01-94
10-27-94
10-27-94
12:00p
10:40a
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
3:00p
12:00p
3:25p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
12:00p
3:25p
12:00p
12:00p
·WtAoWuR*4;_tAloIorn
.: .... ,.
...
"18:'>4.
The Program List View
The Program List view is useful if you are using a long list of programs and they do
not all fit in the program area with the Program/File Lists view. The Program List
view is also a useful tool in setting up your system; you do not have to directly
access directories.
EI COlllmand Prompt
EI PC DOS E Editor
r;; 'Gtip',mm""'StTI m
EI Central Point Undelete
I'!!!!l Disk Utilities
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
347
Organizing Programs
You can organize programs into program groups to suit your needs. When you
create a program group, you give it a title, which appears in the program list. In the
default view, Program/File Lists, the program list appears in the lower-left corner of
the PC DOS Shell window. To work with a group, you choose its title.
Adding and Deleting Groups
You can add groups to the Main group, the Disk Utilities group, or a group you
have created. For example, you might use three programs to keep track of your
finances-one to maintain your checkbook, one to estimate taxes, and one to track
your monthly bills. You might add a group named Accounts and put these account·
programs into it.
When you create a group, you must give it a title. You can also give it a password
that a user must know to view the group, and a Help message that provides
'information on the group and its program items.
To add a group:
1. Make sure you have selected Program/Fil eLi sts on the View menu.
Whatever is currently selected appears greyed out. If the mnemonic character
for Program/Fi 1eLi sts is highlighted or underscored, then type F to select.
2. Press TAB to move to the program-list area of your screen. Or click anywhere
'
inside the program-list area.
3. If the, group to which you want to add the new group is not open, open it by
double-clicking the group name. Or use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key
to select the group and then press ENTER.
For example, double-click on the Disk Utilities group icon under Main, which is
the program-list area.
4. From the File menu, select New.
The New Program Object window appears.
5. Select Program Group.
6. Select OK.
348
PC DOS User's Guide
The Add Group window appears .
.
.
Requir-ed
Title . •
Opt.ional
Help Text • •
( Cancel
Help:J
7. In the Title field, type a title for the new group.
8. If you want the group to have a Help message, type up to 255 characters
(including blanks) in the Help Text field.
For example, you might type a Help message that reads, "Use the programs in
this group to perform statistical operations." When you select this group and
press F1, the PC DOS Shell displays the message. The message appears
exactly as you have typed it and is formatted to fit in the Help window. If you
want a Ih,e break to appear in the text, type Am (a caret followed by the letter M)
at the point where you want the new line to start.
9. If you want the group to have a password, type the password in the Password
field.
10. Select OK.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group you want to delete.
2. From the File menu, select Delete.
Or, press DEL.
The Delete Item window appears.
3. Select OK.
When you delete a group, the PC DOS Shell removes the group name from the
program list and deletes the group's password and Help message.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
349
Changing the Contents of a Group
You can change the contents of a group by adding program items, copying program
items from another group, reordering items, and deleting items.
Adding a Program Item
When you add a program item to a group, you give it a title and specify the
command that starts the program. In addition to assigning titles and startup
commands, you can associate a variety of other information with a program item.
For more information, see "Working with Properties" on page 353.
To add a program item to a group:
1. Make sure you have selected Program/Fil e Li sts on the View menu.
2. Press TAB to move to the program-list area of your screen. Or click anywhere
in the program-list area.
3. If the group to which you want to add the new item is not open, open it by
double-clicking the group name. Or, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key
to select the group and then press ENTER.
4. From the File menu, select New. The New Program Object window appears,
with New Program Item already selected.
5. Select OK. The Add Program window appears.
6. In the Program Title field, type the program-item title that you want to appear in
the program list.
7. In the Commands field, type the startup command, the command that starts the'
program. If the command is not in the current directory or in a directory
specified by the PATH environment variable, or if it is not an internal command,
you must include the complete path of the file in the command.
You can include,more than one command in this field. For more information
about startup commands, see "Specifying a Startup Command" on page 354.
350
PC DOS User's Guide
8. Specify optional information you want to associate with the program item. You
can specify the following:
• A startup directory, which the PC DOS Shell changes to before starting the
program.
• An application shortcut key, which (after you have started a program) you
can use to switch to the program from other programs or from the PC DOS
Shell.
• Pause after exit, which prompts you to press any key to return to the PC
DOS Shell after the program has finished running.
• A password, which will be required before starting the program item. For
more information about these options, see "Working with Properties" on
page 353.
9. If you want to specify other options, select Advanced.
For information about the options in the Advanced window, see "Specifying
Advanced Properties" on page 360.
10. Select OK. If you select Advanced, you return to the Add Program window
when you select OK. You must then select OK in that field, also.
Copying a Program Item to Another Group
To copy a program item to another group, you select Copy For example, if you
have an spreadsheet program item in your Account group, you can also put it in
your Tax group. You can copy a program item to as many groups as you like.
To copy a program item from one group to another:
1. Select the program item you want to copy.
2. From the File menu, select Copy. Instructions appear in the status bar.
3. Open the group you want to copy the program item to.
4. If the group you are copying to has a password, type the password when the
Password window appears and select OK.
5. Press F2.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
351
Reordering Items in a Group
To move a program item or group title from one position in a group to another, use
the REORDER command.
To reposition a program item or group title:
1. Select the program item or group title you want to reposition.
2. From the File menu, select Reorder. Instructions appear in the status bar.
3. Double-click on the new location.
Or move the selection cursor to the new location, and then press ENTER.
The selected program item or group title moves to the new location.
Deleting a Program Item from a Group
You can delete a program item that you no longer need. Deleting a program item
from a group does not delete the program file from the directory that contains it.
To delete a program item from a group:
1. Select the program item you want to delete.
2. From the File menu, select Del ete.,
Or, press DEL.
The Delete Item window appears.
If the program item has a password associated with it, you will see a warning
message, but you can still delete the program item,'
3. Select OK.
352
PC DOS User's Guide
Working with Properties
A property is a piece of information that you associate with a program item. You
can specify numerous properties for each program item.
The following two properties are required:
• Program-item title
• Startup command
These properties are optional:
•
•
•
•
•
Startup directory
Application shortcut key
Pause after exit
Password
Additional advanced properties
For information about creating program
page 350.
it~ms,
see "Adding a Program Item" on
After you create a program item, you can change its properties by using the
PROPERTIES command.
To change the properties of a program item:
1. Select the program item.
2. From the File menu, select Properti es.
If the program item has a password,
password, and select OK.
t~e
Password window appears. Type the
The Program Item Properties window appears. The Program Title field and the
Commands field show the properties that have been specified for the program
item you selected, along with any optional properties.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
353
The Program Item Properties window is the same as the Add Program window,
which is displayed when you create a program item.
3. Type the information for the properties you want to change.
4. Select OK.
Specifying a Startup Command
When you create a program item, you must type a startup command in the
Commands field of the Add Program window. If the command is not in the current
directory or in a directory specified by the PATH environment variable, or if it is not
an internal command, you must include the complete path of the program file. For
example, if you are creating a program item named WordPerfect and the path for
WordPerfect is C:\WP\WP.EXE, you would type that path in the Commands field.
You can also specify additional commands, run batch programs, and include
replaceable parameters for the program. The following sections describe how to
include these options.
Specifying Additional Commands
PC DOS Shell carries out each command in the order it appears in the Commands
field. Each command must be separated by a semicolon (;). There must be one or
more spaces on each side of the semicolon. Text in the Commands field cannot'
exceed 255 characters.
For example, suppose you want to put an abbreviated list of the files in a directory
into a text file, load the file into your text editor, edit the file, save it under a different
name, and delete the original file when you are finished. If you are using the
E Editor, your startup command might look like this:
dir /b
>
tmp.txt ; c:\dos\e.exe tmp.txt ; del tmp.txt
In this example, the PC DOS Shell first stores the names of files in the current
directory in a file named TMP.TXT. Then it runs the E Editor, loading the TMP.TXT
file. When you quit the E Editor, the TMP.TXT file is deleted, and you return to the
PC DOS Shell.
Running Batch Programs in a Startup Command
You can run batch programs by including CALL commands in the startup command.
For example, suppose you want to run a batch program named PREP.BAT before
you start WordPerfect,and one called POST.BAT after you quit WordPerfect. You
would type the following in the Commands field:
call prep; wp ; call post
354
PC DOS User's Guide
For information about batch programs, see Chapter 7, "Working with Batch
Programs" on page 97.
Using Replaceable Parameters
A parameter is additional information you give a program when you start it. For
example, when you start E Editor from PC DOS Shell, the File to Edit window
appears. You can specify a filename in the Text field. If you type reci pes. txt, for
example, E Editor loads the file RECIPES.TXT as soon as it starts.
Many programs accept parameters in this manner. If the program item you add to
a program group accepts parameters, you can include these parameters in the
Commands field.
If you want to be able to specify a different parameter whenever you run the
program item, you can put a replaceable parameter in the Commands field. Each
time you select the program item, PC DOS Shell· displays a window that prompts
you to fill in the value for the replaceable parameter before the program starts.
In the Commands field, you indicate a replaceable parameter with the percent sign
(%) followed by a numeral (1 through 9). For example, if you want the PC DOS
Shell to prompt you for a filename when you start WordPerfect, you might type the
following in the Commands field:
c:\wp\wp.exe %1
The %1 in this example indicates that you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you to
type a value in place of %1 every time you select the program item for WordPerfect.
the PC DOS Shell will prol1)pt you by displaying a prompt window.
To include a replaceable parameter in a startup command:
1. Select the program item.
2. From the File menu, select Propert i es
If the program item has a password, the Password window appears. Type the
password and select OK.
The Program Item Properties window appears.
3. In the Commands field, specify the command and indicate the replaceable
parameters by typing a percent sign (%) followed by a numeral (1 through 9) for
each.
4. Select OK.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
355
A Program Item Properties or Add Program window appears for each replaceable
parameter you have specified.
The information you type in this window will create a customized window for the
program item that you are adding or changing.
Type the information that you want to appear in the window. Each time you select
the program item, PC DOS Shell displays the information you have typed.
The Window Title you supply will appear at the top of the window. The Program
Information you supply will appear under the title. You can type up to 106
characters in the Program Information field. The Prompt Message you specify will
appear to the left of the field where you specify the parameter value.
If you specify a value in the Default Parameters field, the value will appear in the
prompt window. You can accept the default parameter or change it. Specify a
default parameter value if you plan to use that value frequently when you run the
program. For example, if you are working on a project that often requires you to use
a particular document, you might type that document's name as the default
parameter for a text editor.
There are two special parameters that you can use in the Default Parameters field
to automatically set a default parameter. The %f parameter (a percent sign
followed by the letter f) sets the default filename to the filename currently selected
in the file list. The %1 parameter (a percent sign followed by the letter L) sets the
default parameter to the parameter that was specified the last time the program
item was run.
\
356
PC DOS User's Guide
If you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a file to load when you start a text
editor, you can specify values such as the following in the Program Item Properties
window:
IBM AntiVirus/DOS
Start AntiU irus?
[ _______
--.1
Each time you select the program item, the PC DOS Shell will prompt you with a
prompt window.
Using the Same Replaceable Parameter More Than Once: You can use the
same replaceable parameter more than once in a Commands field. For example,
suppose you create files by using WordPerfect, and you store them in C:\EDlnWp.
Suppose that as you create these files, you always back them up on a disk in drive
A. To load a file into WordPerfect and then back up the file (onto a disk in drive A)
after you have edited it, you would type the following in the Commands field:
c:\edit\wp\wp.exe %1 ; copy %1 a:
Using More Than One Replaceable Parameter: You can include up to nine
different replaceable parameters in the Commands field. For example, suppose
you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a file to load with WordPerfect and
for a backup directory to copy the file to when you finish editing. You would include
two different replaceable parameters in the Commands field, as in the following
example:
c:\wp\wp.exe %1 ; copy %1 %2
If you add this command in the Commands field, you will be prompted to provide
the name of the file you want to edit in addition to the directory to which you want
to copy the file. Then you can edit your WordPerfect document.
For each replaceable parameter, the PC DOS Shell prompts you for information to
appear in the prompt window, as described previously.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
357
Specifying a Startup Directory
You can specify which directory you want DOS to change to before it starts a
program that is in a program group. For example, if you keep budget spreadsheets
in a directory named C:\FILES, you need to make sure the PC DOS Shell changes
to that directory before starting your spreadsheet program.
To specify a startup directory:
1. Select the program item whose properties you want to change.
2. From the File menu, select Properti es.
The Program Item Properties window appears.
3. In the Startup Directory field, type the drive and path of the directory you want
the PC DOS Shell to change to before it starts the program, as in the following
example:
Specifying an Application Shortcut Key
If you have started a program but are not currently working with it, you can use a
key combination to switch quickly to it from another program or from the PC DOS
Shell. The shortcut key must have the form CTRl+character, SHIFT+character, or
AlT+character, where character is a letter, number, or function key on your
keyboard. Exceptions are noted. in the following section, "Reserved Combination
Keys" on page 359. You can use any combination of the CTRl, SHIFT, and AlT
keys with the character.
To specify an application shortcut key:
1. Select the program item you want.
2. From the File menu, select Propert i es
The Program Item Properties window appears.
3. In the Application Shortcut Key field, specify the key combination by preSSing
and holding down CTRl, SHIFT, or AlT, and then pressing a character.
For example, suppose you have a program item named My Editor in the Main
group and 'that you have enabled Task Swapper. You could assign CTRl+E as the
shortcut key for My Editor. If My Editor is on the Active Task List, you can press
CTRl+E to switch back to it from another program or from the PC DOS Shell.
The name of the shortcut key will appear next to the program-item title in the Active
Task List.
358
PC DOS User's Guide
Reserved Combination Keys
The following key combinations are reserved and are not available as application
shortcut keys:
CTRL+M
CTRL+I
CTRL+H
CTRL+C
CTRL+[
CTRL+5 (on the keypad)
SHIFT+CTRL+M
SHIFT+CTRL+I
SHIFT+CTRL+H
SHIFT+CTRL+C
SHIFT+CTRL+[
SHIFT+CTRL+5 (on the keypad)
Specifying Whether to Pause After a Program Ends
You can specify whether the PC DOS Shell should pause after you quit a program
that is in a program group. By default, the PC DPS Shell prompts you to press a
key to return to the PC DOS Shell after you quit such a program.
To eliminate the pause after you quit a program:
1. Select the program item you want.
2. From the File menu, select Properti es
The Program Item Properties window appears.
3. Clear the Pause After Exit option by clicking on the "X".
Or, press TAB until you select the option, and then press the SPACEBAR to
clear it.
4. Select OK.
Specifying a Password
If you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a password before it starts a
program item, you can specify the password in the Program Item Properties
window.
To specify a password for a program item:
1. Select the program item.
2. From the File menu, select Properti es
You see the Program Item Properties window.
3. In-the Password field, type the password you want.
4. Select OK.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
359
Specifying Advanced Properties
When you select Advanced in the Add Program or Program Item Properties window,
another window appears in which you can specify additional properties. The
Advanced window looks like this:
.
Adding Help Text
You can add a Help message of up to 255 characters to any program item. This
Help message is displayed if you press F1 when the program item is selected. the
PC DOS Shell displays the message exactly as you have typed it and formats it to
fit in a Help window. If you want to begin a new line of text, type Am (a caret
followed by the letter M) at the point where you want the new line to start.
If you do not want the program item to have a Help message, leave the Help Text
field blank.
Specifying Conventional Memory
Use the Conventional Memory KB Required field to specify how many kilobytes of
conventional memory must be free in order to start a program. This property is
useful for programs with specific memory requirements.
Regardless of what you type in the Conventional Memory KB Required field, when
you start a program, the PC DOS Shell gives it all available conventional memory.
The number you type in this field determines how much memory must be available
before the PC DOS Shell starts the program; it does not limit how much
conventional memory the program receives.
If the PC DOS Shell cannot provide as much memory as you specify, a message
appears, telling you there is not enough memory to run the program.
If Task Swapper is not enabled, the PC DOS Shell ignores any conventional .
memory specification.
360
PC DOS User's Guide
Specifying Extended Memory
Use the XMS Memory options to specify how much extended memory to give to a
program that uses memory according to the Lotus/lntel/Microsoft/AST Extended
Memory Specification (XMS) standard. If Task Swapper is not enabled, the XMS
memory specifications are ignored.
A description of each XMS Memory option follows. Before using these options, you
must have extended memory set up on your system. For more information, see the
discussion about extended memory in Chapter 13, "Making More Memory
Available" on page 205.
KB Required
Specifies how many kilobytes of extended memory must be free in
order to run a program.
Leave this setting blank for most programs. Specifying a value significantly
increases the time it takes to switch to and from a program. Specify a value only if
a program requires a certain amount of extended memory in order to run.
If you run a program that requires extended memory, and the PC DOS Shell cannot
provide as much memory as you specify, a message appears when you try to start
the program, telling you there is not enough memory. However, if Task Swapper is
not enabled, the memory specification is ignored.
KB Limit
. Specifies the maximum amount (in kilobytes) of extended memory
that the PC DOS Shell can give to a program.
This option is useful for limiting a program's access to extended memory because
some programs take all available extended memory whether they need it or not. If
Task Swapper is not enabled, the KB Limit specification is ignored.
Leave this setting blank to prevent a program from gaining access to any extended
memory.
Setting this option to ~ 1 gives the program all the extended memory it requests (up
to the maximum amount available). Set this option to -1 only if the program
requires large amounts of extended memory.
Using Video Mode
Video Mode has two options: text and graphics. Use text mode unless you are
having trouble switching to a program.
Usually the memory reserved by text mode is enough, but you might need more
memory if you are using a CGA monitor. Graphics mode requires more memory
than text mode. Use text mode for all program items if you have a high-resolution
graphics (VGA or EGA) monitor or a monochrome monitor.
Chapter 18. Using the PC DOS Shell
361
Reserving Shortcut Keys
Use the Reserve Shortcut Keys option when you want a program to use shortcut
keys typically used by Task Swapper (ALT+TAB, ALT+ESC, and CTRL+ESC). If you
want to reserve a shortcut key for a program, select it in the Reserved Shortcut
Keys area of the Advanced window.
For example, suppose you have a text editor thattypically uses the ALT +TAB
shortcut key to insert a special character. If you want to maintain that function while
your text editor is running under PC DOS Shell, you need to select the shortcut key
for the program. When you select this key, it is no longer reserved for the PC DOS
Shell.
Preventing Program Switching
If you want to prevent a program from switching to another program or to the PC
DOS Shell, select the Prevent Program Switch option from the Advanced window. If
you select this option, you must quit the program to return to the PC DOS Shell.
Changing Group Properties
A program group must have a title associated with it. It can also have Help text and
a password. You can change any of these properties for all groups except the Main
group.
To change group properties:
1. Select the appropriate group.
2. From the File menu, select Propert; es
If the group has a password, the Password window appears. Type the
password and select OK.
The Program Group Properties window appears.
3. Change the title, Help text, or password.
4. Select OK.
362
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
IBM AntiVirus/DOS (AntiVirus) is a comprehensive antivirus product for DOS and
Windows systems. It is designed to detect and remove viruses from your system.
It can detect as many as 2,100 different types of viruses ..
This chapter will help you understand viruses. It explains how to protect your
computer data from viruses and describes how to install and use AntiVirus.
AntiVirus offers two kinds of automated protection. When you install AntiVirus,
Automated check and Shield DOS are installed. If you want to turn off these
features, refer to "Customizing AntiVirus" on page 372.
Automated check checks your fixed disks for viruses whenever you start your
system. When Automated check detects a virus, you are given the opportunity to
examine your system thoroughly to find every instance of the virus and to remove it.
Shield DOS checks DOS memory for viruses when you start DOS and monitors
programs as you run them. If Shield DOS detects a virus when you start DOS, you
are notified, and the virus is disabled. If a virus is detected when you are running a
program, you are notified and the virus is prevented from becoming active or
spreading. When the program is no longer infected, you can use the program
without further spreading of the virus.
Note: After a virus has been detected, it is very important to run AntiVirus to check
your entire system for viruses as soon as possible.
Some common viruses destroy programs, so it is not possible to disinfect them
reliably. Such programs, including AntiVirus, do not function correctly and must be
reinstalled when they become corrupted. Keeping the DOS shield installed at all
times helps prevent this from happening.
Installing IBM AntiVirus/DOS after Installing PC DOS
If you did not choose antivirus protection at initial installation, you can still install
IBM AntiVirus/DOS by rerunning DOS Setup using the /e switch.
The PC DOS Setup diskettes contain everything you need to install AntiVirus.
Refer to Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3 before you begin.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
363
During Setup, PC DOS checks whether your computer has Windows 3.1 installed.
If you do not have Windows 3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
provided with DOS for Windows, you should make sure you install in this order:
1. Install PC DOS as you normally would, selecting the optional tools you want
from the list provided. You will not see any of the optional tools for Windows
listed if you do not have Windows 3.1 installed already.
2. After you have installed PC DOS, install Windows 3.1 as you normally would.
3. Install PC DOS again using the Setup /e switch after DOS and Windows have
both been installed.
To install IBM AntiVirus/DOS using the Setup /e switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into
drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The /e switch allows you to return to the optional tools-selection menu without
having to do a complete reinstallation. At this point, only the necessary files for
the optional tools for Windows will be installed.
3. After Setup begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Make sure
you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the initial
PC DOS installation.
At the Optional Tools scree'n, you see a NO next to IBM AntiVirus/DOS and IBM
AntiVirus/DOS for Windows.
4. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you highlight IBM AntiVirus/DOS.
5. Press ENTER.
You now see YES next to IBM AntiVirus/DOS.
6. Select other optional tools you want to install at this time" such as IBM
AntiVirus/DOS for Windows, by highlighting the name of each optional tool and
pressing ENTER for each item. '
If you are using IBM Boot Manager to start various operating systems, have
IBM AntiVirus/DOS on each of the DOS and Windows partitions. For DOS,
Boot Manager does not allow one bootable partition to access another.
364
PC DOS User's Guide
7. Move the cursor to highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
8. Continue to follow the instructions displayed on the screen until the optional
tools are installed.
Starting IBM AntiVirus/DOS
AntiVirus has been designed to protect your system automatically. You can also
use it to check your system for viruses whenever you want. In addition, AntiVirus
provides the following features:
AntiVirus Defaults: The defaults for the PC DOS Setup program have been
constructed to provide the best protection for your system. PC DOS is set up to
run a virus check on the first boot of the week on any new or changed program
files. Shield DOS is installed whenever you start (boot) DOS.
Stand-alone AntiVirus Program: AntiVirus also includes a stand-alone program.
The stand-alone program can be used from a diskette when you cannot access the
usual AntiVirus program or start your system due to virus problems on your system.
The stand-alone program can be started from a .BAT file or any command prompt
after starting your system from a write-protected, virus-free diskette. See "Running
the AntiVirus Stand-Alone Program" on page 379 for more information on the
stand-alone program.
Dual Boot Systems: With Dual Boot systems, you can start either DOS or OS/2
from the same partition. If you want protection under both operating systems, you
must have the AntiVirus program installed during PC DOS Setup and you must
purchase the IBM AntiVirus/2 program separately for use with OS/2. See the
coupon for IBM AntiVirus/DOS and IBM AntiVirus/2 for information about ordering
updates for IBM AntiVirus/DOS.
To start the DOS version of AntiVirus:
1. Type the foliowing at the DOS command prompt:
ibmavd
2. Press ENTER.
You see the main IBM AntiVirus/DOS window.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
365
Menu Line
Push Button
Function Keys
3. To begin a check for viruses, type P or click on the box in the center of the
window where you see Push here. This box remains permanently placed in the
center of the main IBM AntiVirus/DOS window.
You can use mnemonic selection with IBM AntiVirus/DOS. Make a selection by
typing the single character displayed in a different color or shade on the push
button. This single character is known as a mnemonic character.
To access the menu bar, you can either:
• Make a selection using' a mouse.
• Press F10 and then press ENTER.
• Press ALT followed by the letter shown in a different color on the list of menu
choices. For example, to access the Check menu, you would press ALT+C.
366
PC DOS User's Guide
To check your system
for viruses now:
The first time you check your system, it will take longer to check for viruses
because AntiVirus is building a database that remembers what your files look like.
On subsequent checks for viruses, AntiVirus does not have to rebuild this database
again; therefore, the time needed to run checks is shortened.
To start the Windows version of AntiVirus:
You can start IBM AntiVirus/DOS for use within Windows by double-clicking on the
AntiVirus icon located in the PC DOS Tools program group.
You then see the main window for IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows.
Protecting Your Computer Data against Viruses
A computer virus is a program that can "infect" other programs by modifying them
to include a (possibly "evolved") copy of itself.
Viruses can spread themselves, without the knowledge or permission of the
workstation users, to potentially large numbers of programs on many machines.
Viruses can also contain instructions that cause damage or annoyance; the
combination of possibly-damaging code with the ability to spread is what makes
viruses a considerable concern.
Viruses are not mysterious. They are just computer programs and only do things
that programs can do. However, unlike most other programs, they are specifically
designed to spread themselves.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
367
Viruses can often spread without any readily visible symptoms. When a virus is
started on a workstation, it can run any instructions that its author chooses to
include. These instructions can' be event-driven effects (for example, triggered after
a specific number of executions), time-driven effects (triggered on a specific date,
such as Friday the 13th or April 1st), or it can occur at random.
Depending on the motives of the virus author, a virus can contain no intentionally
harmful or disruptive instructions. Or, it can cause damage simply by replicating
itself and taking up scarce resources, such as hard disk space, CPU time, or
network connections.
IBM AntiVirus/DOS has been carefully designed to help you reduce the risk of a
virus infecting your computer. AntiVirus, examines your system for characteristics of
specific viruses or classes of viruses. When it detects something with one of these
characteristics, it warns you, and tries to clean (remove) the virus.
No program can entirely eliminate the risk of viruses, but there are a few simple
things you can do to make sure the risk is reduced:
• Use AntiVirus' Automated checking and Shield DOS features to detect viruses
sooner than you would without these features. Use AntiVirus to check diskettes
for viruses before starting or running programs from these diskettes.
• Keep AntiVirus up to date. As new viruses are discovered, AntiVirus will be
updated to deal with them. Select Contacts from the Help menu for more
information about ordering updates for IBM AntiVirus.
• Keep good backups and update them periodically. In some cases, the only
way to clean up a system that has become infected with a virus is to restore it
using virus-free backup copies. Check your system using AntiVirus just before
you do a backup to help prevent backing up infected files. If you do not
currently have a good backup of your system, make one immediately after you
install PC DOS.
• Keep your diskettes write-protected whenever possible. Write protecting your
diskettes keeps them from becoming infected. Most viruses travel from one
computer to another on diskettes. Diskettes become infected when they are
used in an infected system and have not been write-prot~cted.
• If possible, prevent executable files on LAN file servers from being modified by
-client computers. Preventing modifications keeps an infected client computer
from infecting the LAN file server and keeps the infection from spreading to
other client PCs. The DOS "read-only" attribute does not prevent virus
infection.
Your LAN' administrator knows how to use the server's operating system to
protect the server files.
368
PC DOS User's Guide
Checking for Viruses
You can choose to check for viruses by either:
• Checking your system
• Checking diskettes
Checking Your System
Normally, Automated check verifies whether your system has any viruses when
your computer is restarted. However, you can check your system whenever you
want.
To check your system:
1. Select Push here on the main AntiVirus window.
AntiVirus checks boot sectors (including Boot Manager boot sectors) and files
on your system for known viruses and for changes that might indicate the
presence of an unknown virus. Network drives (on LAN servers) and local
drives also can be checked.
2. If a virus is detected, a thorough examination of your system will be done to
find every instance of the virus, and you will be given the opportunity to remove
them.
Checking Diskettes
It is a good idea to check diskettes for viruses before starting (booting) from them
or before running programs from them.
To check a diskette:
1. From the Check menu, select Check di skettes
The following illustration shows the Check diskettes window.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
369
Boot sectors and files on diskettes in the selected diskette drive are checked for
viruses.
2. Select Execute after all selections have been made.
3. When a virus is detected, you are given the opportunity to remove it from the
diskette.
Checking Compressed Files
Many people use compression software to store individual program 'files and data
files. This software reduces the amount of disk space required to store a file and
reduces the amount of time required to transmit it via modem. Some programs are
distributed in compressed form and decompressed automatically before they are
run. Because compression changes the contents of the file, it also inhibits scanning
software from examining the byte patterns within the original, decompressed file to
see if they match any known viruses.
IBM AntiVirus/DOS determines if individual compressed files have changed
suspiciously but will not usually be able to search them properly for known viruses.
To search them properly, decompress the files before you check your system.
IBM AntiVirus/DOS will properly check disks that have been compressed with disk
compression software, such as Stac**'s Stacker** compression program, as long as
the disk compression software is currently active.
**
Stac and Stacker are trademarks of Stac Corporation.
370
PC DOS User's Guide
Shield DOS detects and deactivates any of the viruses it knows about if you run an
infected program-no matter what compression technique is used to store the
program file.
Reviewing Logs
AntiVirus logs its activities so you can review them later. These logs contain
information about when your system was checked, what files were checked, and
whether any viruses were detected.
The log from your current session of AntiVirus is stored in the file CURRENT. LOG.
The log from your previous session is stored in PREVlo.US.LOG. A cumulative log
that briefly summarizes the results of any automated checks is stored in CUM.LOG.
All these log files are stored in the \OOS directory. These files can be printed
directly to your printer.
An entry is added to the cumulative log each time AntiVirus does an automated
check. It does not record checks you do manually. You can edit or erase this
cumulative log file if it grows too large.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
371
Customizing AntiVirus
You can customize the automated checking, the DOS shield, diskette checking, and
system checking features of IBM AntiVirus/DOS.
The default settings for AntiVirus have been designed to do the right thing for most
systems. Use the default settings unless you have a specific reason for preferring
another setting.
'
Customizing Automated 'Protection
To customize Automated check:
1. From the Setup menu, select Automated check.
2. Specify Automated check to be done either periodically or whenever you start
your system. Then, select Save s~tti ngs.
3. Select Check options on the Automated check window to specify which drives
to check, what kinds of files to check, and whether to check only new or
changed files or to even check unchan'ged files. Then, select Save setti ngs.
372
PC DOS User's Guide
( .) Only new/changed files
( ) Even unchanged files
] Advanced options selection
For Automated check to work, set it for any option except the Never option.
Select Help from the Automated check window for more information on specific
options, such as Advanced opti ons.
To customize Shield DOS:
1. From the Setup menu, select Shi el d DOS.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
373
2. Check (or uncheck) the Install shield check box on the Shield DOS window,
and then select OK.
If you check Install shield, the shielding program will be loaded whenever
DOS is started in the future, and the DOS memory space will be checked for
resident viruses. Subsequently, the shielding program monitors for indications
of activity from common DOS viruses. If viral activity is found, you will see a
warning. The virus is not 'allowed to become active or to spread.
or
If you do not want to install Shield DOS, uncheck the check box on the Shield
DOS window to prevent shielding from being installed when you run DOS.
3. Check (or uncheck) the Check hi gh memory option, and then select OK.
Normally, IBM AntiVirus/DOS checks high memory (memory above the 640K
DOS limit) for resident viruses. This check might cause problems on some
systems, especially where hardware adapters are sensitive to having their
memory space read. Refer to page 298 for more information.
For more information on customizing Shield DOS, select Help from the Shield DOS
window.
Customizing Diskette Checking
To customize the way diskette checking is done:
1. From the Check menu, select Check di skettes.
The Check diskettes window lets you specify which drive to check and whether
to check all files or only program files.
,2. Select Save setti ngs to save changes when you have completed the changes
you want.
Select He 1p from, the Check diskettes window for more information on specific
options.
Customizing System Checking
You can choose to check the system at times other than when scheduled for
automated checking.
To check the
sys~em
at any time:
1. Select Push here on the main AntiVirus window.
2. From the Check menu, select Check system to customize the way in which this
checking is done.
374
PC DOS User's Guide
( .) Only new/changed files
( ) Even unchanged files
] Advanced options selection
( .) Program files
( ) All files
The Check system window lets you specify which drives to check, what kinds of
files to check, and whether to check new and changed files, or all files. Other
combinations of disks, directories, and files can be checked by selecting
Advanced Options.
3. Select Save setti ngs to save any changes after resetting to the new options.
Select He 1p from the Check system window for more information on specific
options.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
375
Cleaning Up When a Virus Is Detected
When a virus is detected during a check of your system, you are given the
opportunity to clean up any infected files or boot sectors that have been detected
so far. However, cleaning up a virus infection does not stop there. It is likely that
your check examined only some of the files on your system-those in which viruses
are most likely to be detected. It is possible that the virus has also infected other
parts of your system. If you clean up only the infection you have detected so far,
the infection you did not detect can continue to spread within your system and
perhaps to other systems as well.
Whenever a routine check turns up a virus, AntiVirus provides an opportunity to
perform a thorough check of your entire system and to let you clean up any viruses
detected. This thorough check can take more time than your routine check, but it
helps ensure that you have thoroughly cleaned your system. Let AntiVirus
complete this thorough check anytime you encounter a virus.
Infected Systems
When AntiVirus finds a virus on your system, the virus infection report presents
choices on how to remove the virus. Viruses whose identity can be positively
verified can usually be disinfected, thereby restoring the infected files or boot
sectors to their original, uninfected condition. AntiVirus is designed so that all
common viruses can be reliably repaired this way.
Some viruses damage files or boot sectors when they infect them. In this case,
AntiVirus does not disinfect them becaus~ you would be left with damaged
programs afterwards. You are cautioned that they might not be disinfected.
AntiVirus can deal with hundreds of infected objects at one time. In the unlikely
event that there are too many infected objects to deal with, you are presented with
a series of virus infection reports. After you have dealt with one set of infected
objects, the next set is displayed.
Infected Diskettes
The virus you detected on your system came from somewhere and might have
spread beyond your system as well. If it was a boot sector virus, it infected your
system when the system was started from an infected diskette. If it was a
file-infecting virus, it infected your system when an infected program was executed
or copied from a diskette or file server. In either case, the virus might have spread
to the diskettes used in your system, if your diskettes were not write-protected.
376
PC DOS User's Guide
After an infection is detected, it is very important to check for viruses on the
diskettes that were used recently in the infected systems. If you do not check, the
virus might reinfect your system or might spread to other systems.
To check diskettes for viruses, see "Checking Diskettes" on page 369.
Infected Nearby Systems
When you share diskettes with other systems and use file servers on local area
networks, infections can be passed between systems. The virus that infected your
system might have come from one of these types of systems. It is very important
to notify the users of these other systems and to make sure they also check their
systems for viruses. You cannot eliminate this step in the antivirus procedure 'or
the virus continues to spread from their systems, reinfects your system again, and
continues to infect other systems.
If you find a virus on your own system and your system is connected to a file
server, it is very important to check that file server thoroughly for viruses. If any
viruses are detected on the server, all the client PCs that use that server must be
checked as well.
Even if your system is not connected to a file server, nearby systems should be
checked for viruses because you might have exchanged diskettes with them
recently. This includes all the other systems in your office or laboratory, systems
that belong to your friends; systems in your department or related departments, and
systems belonging to people located near you.
Ideally, all these other systems also have AntiVirus installed on them. In this case,
the users of these systems can have AntiVirus check their systems. If AntiVirus is
not installed, you can use the AntiVirus stand-alone program to check them.
Uncommon Viruses
Although it is unlikely to happen, your system can be infected with a new or very
uncommon virus that AntiVirus cannot positively verify.
Infected files or boot sectors that cannot be disinfected reliably, either because the
virus could not be positively verified or because the virus damaged them, should be
erased/replaced. AntiVirus overwrites and erases infected files, so they cannot be
restored accidentally.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
377
Names of files you erase are written to the log to help you to restore them from
backups, if necessary. You can view any of these logs:
• Current log
• Previous log
• Cumulative log
Select the log you want to view from the Log menu.
Information about the current log, the previous log, and the cumulative log is stored
in the files CURRENT.LOG, PREVIOUS.LOG, and the CUM.LOG, respectively,
located in your \DOS directory. These are text files that can be printed directly to
your printer.
Erasing/replacing the master boot record of a hard disk is required to replace it with
a valid master boot record. This is almost always the right thing to do. The only
exceptions are when the disk has an unusual master boot record, like those used
by some DOS security products. In these cases, erasing/replacing the master boot
record can leave the system in an unusable state. Contact the vendor of the
security product for assistance before trying to remove an unverified virus from
these systems.
System boot sectors infected with unverified viruses cannot be repaired
automatically because their structure depends upon the operating system and
version you are using, including Boot Manager boot sectors. In this case, use the
DOS SYS command to replace an infected system boot sector. If you need
information about the SYS command, type hel p sys at the DOS command prompt.
378
PC DOS User's Guide
Be sure you start your system from a DOS diskette that:
• Is the same version that your hard disk uses.
• Has been checked and is free of viruses.
• Is write-protected at all times.
Start your system by turning off the power, inserting the DOS diskette in drive A
and turning on the power. Do not use CTRL+ALT+DEL to start your system. Some
viruses can remain active in your system if you use CTRL+ALT +DEL. Issue the SYS
command to replace the system boot sector. Then, restart and use AntiVirus to
check your system for viruses once more, just in case.
Running the AntiVirus Stand-Alone Program
A system can be so corrupted by a virus that it is not possible to run the usual
version of AntiVirus. In some cases, it can be so corrupted that it cannot even be
started. In these situations, you should use the AntiVirus stand-alone program to
clean up your system. This program can be run from:
• A .BAT file, by adding command-line arguments.
• A diskette, after starting your system from a virus-free DOS diskette. Write
protect this diskette immediately to prevent it from becoming infected.
The AntiVirus stand-alone program is not intended to be used in place of the
standard versions of AntiVirus. It does not have the features of automated
operation, heuristic virus detection, or higher performance of the standard versions.
Make a separate emergency diskette by copying the AntiVirus stand-alone program
files to a virus-free DOS diskette. Write protect this diskette immediately to prevent
it from becoming infected. This AntiVirus stand-alone program can be used to
check DOS and Windows systems if you have virus problems that do not allow you
to access the IBM AntiVirus/DOS program on your system. The stand-alone
program files consist of the following:
ADMIN.PRF
Data file for profile information used to record settings in IBM
AntiVirus/DOS. Do not change this file.
IBMAVSP.EXE
The AntiVirus stand-alone program itself. It can be run
directly from a DOS command prompt.
LOCAL.MSG
A message that is displayed if a virus is detected.
VERV.VDB
Data file used by the stand-alone program to verify the
identity of viruses and disinfect them. Do not change this file.
VIRSIG.LST
Data file used by the stand-alone program to scan for
indications of viruses. Do not change this file.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
379
If you create a batch file as discussed in "Running the Stand-Alone Program from a
BATCH File or REXX Program" on page 380, place a copy of this batch file on the
diskette also.
.
To run the AntiVirus stand-alone program:
1. Type the following from the drive A prompt:
ibmavsp
2. When you use the AntiVirus stand-alone program, specify whether to check all
local fixed drives for viruses or only selected drives. You can check diskettes
by specifying their corresponding drives.
3. You are then asked if you want to check all files on the drive or only program
files. Because you already suspect that there are viruses on the system, you
should check all files because viruses can infect files that are not normally
thought of as program files.
When a virus is detected, you are given the opportunity to remove it.
If AntiVirus can determine that it is· safe to disinfect the boot sector or file, you will
be given the opportunity to do so. Otherwise, you are asked if you want to have
the file erased or the boot sector replaced. Respond in one of three ways:
Yes
To perform the operation on this file or boot sector.
No
To skip this file or boot sector. It remains infected. It is important not to
do this, because the infection can continue to spread.
Go
To perform the operation on this file or boot sector and perform it without
asking about any others that are detected to be infected. Use this option if
there are many infected files and you do not wish to respond to them
individually.
Running the Stand-Alone Program from a BATCH File or REXX
Program
You might prefer to run the AntiVirus stand-alone program interactively as outlined
previously. However, because the stand-alone program is a utility that protects
your system, you can incorporate this program into a batch file or REXX program
so that it monitors for viruses automatically.
If you use this stand-alone program in .BAT files, you are able to specify
command-line options. For example, to scan all programs on all local hiud drives
and place the log into the file IBMASVP.LOG on drive C, you would type the
following command:
c:\dos\ibmavsp * -programs
380
PC DOS User's Guide
~logc:\ibmavsp.log
This method of operation is useful in .BAT files and whenever user interaction is not
desired.
Type i bmavsp /? for more information about the IBMAVSP command.
Using the AntiVirus Stand-Alone Program on an Infected System
Starting from an infected diskette or hard disk can cause the virus to become active
and to spread. Some viruses remain active even after restarting with
CTRL+ALT +DEL.
To start an infected machine safely:
1. Turn off the computer's power.
2. Insert a write-protected DOS diskette that has been checked and is free of
viruses into drive A. Make sure the diskette is write-protected or you might
infect it accidentally.
3. Turn on the computer's power. Let it run from the diskette.
4. After the computer has started, type:
ibmavsp
at the DOS command prompt to run the AntiVirus stand-alone program and
check the system for viruses.
Systems that Use Resident Data Compression
Some systems use resident data-compression software to allow them to store more
data on the hard disks. This software operates by intercepting reads and writes to
the disk, compressing data as it is written, and uncompressing it as it is read back.
Although the data is stored in compressed form on the disk, most programs only
see it in uncompressed form.
If you start from a diskette, you might not have the necessary software resident to
access the compressed data correctly. In particular, the AntiVirus stand-alone
program might not be able to correctly check or repair your disk, if you have started
such a system from a diskette.
In these cases, consult the product documentation for your data compression
software to determine proper operation after starting from a diskette, or contact the
data compression software vendor for assistance.
Chapter 19. Using IBM AntiVirus/DOS
381
Systems that Use Security Software
Some systems use security software that is designed to prevent unauthorized users
from accessing individual files, disks, or the entire system. In some cases, this
software modifies the hard disk so that it cannot be accessed without going through
the security software. In particular, such disks might not be able to be accessed
correctly when your system is started from a diskette. This can cause the AntiVirus
stand-alone program to be unable to check or repair your disk, if you started from a
diskette.
In these cases, consult 'the product documentation for your security software to
determine proper operation after starting from a diskette, or contact the security
software vendor for assistance.
Troubleshooting IBM AntiVirus/DOS
For troubleshooting tips or procedures for some of the most common IBM
AntiVirus/DOS problems, refer to "AntiVirus" on page 297.
382
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
The Central Point Backup** program (CPBackup) provides protection against data
loss by allowing you to make a backup copy of data. This backed up copy ensures
that you can restore data quickly if the need ever arises. With CPBackup, you can
do the following:
• Back up an entire disk, specific files and directories, or only files that have
changed since your last backup. The backup can be processed to diskettes,
tape, hard disk, or a network volume.
• Compare data on your backup media to your original hard disk data to ensure
that the data is restorable.
• Restore your entire backup or only selected files and directories. The
restoration can be done on the computer you backed up from or to a different
computer.
• Back up your data to a network directory.
Installing Central Point Backup after Installing PC DOS
If you did not select Central Point Backup for DOS or Central Point Backup for
Windows at initial installation, you can still install these optional tools by rerunning
DOS Setup.
The PC DOS installation diskettes contain everything you need to install Central
Point Backup on your system.
During Setup, PC DOS checks whether your computer has Windows 3.1 installed.
If you do not have Windows 3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
provided with DOS for Windows, you should make sure you install in this order:
1. Install PC DOS as you normally would, selecting the optional tools you want
from the list provided. You will not see any of the optional tools for Windows
listed.
2. After you have installed PC DOS, install Windows 3.1 as you normally would.
3. Install PC DOS again using the Ie switch after DOS and Windows have been
installed.
**
Central Point Backup is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
383
To install Central Point Backup using the Setup Ie switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS Setup diskettes into drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The Ie switch allows you to return to the optional tools selection menu without
having to do a complete reinstallation of PC DOS. Atthis point, only the
necessary files for the optional tools are installed.
3. After Setup begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Make sure
you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the initial
PC DOS installation.
At the Optional Tools screen, you will see NO next to Central Point Backup.
4. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you highlight Central Point
Backup.
You can also select any of the other optional tools, such as Central Point
Backup for Windows, that you want to install by highlighting each tool and then
pressing ENTER for each item.
You now see YES next to all the optional tools you selected.
5. Move the cursor to highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
6: Press ENTER to accept the optional tool selections.
7. Continue following the instructions on the screen until the optional tools are
installed.
Configuring Central Point Backup
The following procedure assumes you already have Central Point Backup installed
on your computer by using the PC DOS Setup diskettes. See "Installing Central
Point Backup after Installing PC DOS" on page 383 if the program is not installed.
During configuration, the program guides you through the process and saves your
choices in a file called CPBACKUP.CFG.
384
PC DOS User's Guide
To start configuring CPBackup from the DOS command prompt:
Type cpbackup and press ENTER.
The first time you use CPBackup, a Welcome screen is displayed. Each
subsequent time, a selection screen is displayed, allowing you to specify:
• Backup
• Restore
• Compare
To start configuring CPBackup from PC DOS Shell:
If available in your Main program group of PC DOS Shell, double-click on Central
Poi nt Backup if you are using a mouse. Or, if you are using a keyboard, press TAB
until you highlight Main. Use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to highlight Central
Point Backup, and then press ENTER.
If Central Point Backup is not available in your Main program group of PC DOS
Shell, refer to "Adding a Program Item" on page 350 for information on how to add
programs to the PC DOS Shell.
To start configuring Central Point Backup for Windows:
You can start Central Point Backup for Windows by double-clicking on the Central
Point Backup icon located in the PC DOS Tools program group.
The first time you use CPBackup, you must configure the program to work optimally
with your system.
You start with a Welcome screen and proceed to specify the following:
• Type of tape drive (none, OIC 40/80-FDC, or SCSI)
SGSI is defined as Small Computer System Interface and FOG is defined as
Floppy DISK Controller.
To configure a SCSI tape drive, insert a tape cartridge into your SCSI tape
drive before configuring. This allows CPBackup to determine the size of the
tape you use.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
385
• Equipment
Based on previous selections, you are given a choice of hardware options
available for performing the backup.
• Drive and media type
Drive type is the physical type of disk drive (hardware) in your yomputer.
Media type is the diskette or tape you use for the backup.
Whenever you need help, press F1.
Performing the Confidence Test
After designating the configuration of the system you use for your backups,
CPBackup determines whether a confidence test is needed. When the backup
media is a tape or floppy drive, a confidence test is requested; when backing up
files to the hard disk, a test is not needed.
CPBackup tests your computer for the speed setting that gives you the best
performance and reliability. This eliminates guessing whether your computer
supports high-speed backups. Run this test on every computer, especially if you
change the system environment in any way (such as adding or removing drives or
using different media). That way, you can be sure that CPBackup always works
with your current configuration.
To skip the confidence test, select Ski p on the Backup Confidence Test screen.
CPBackup ~ets the speed to High automatically.
Warning: Skipping the confidence test can result in unreliable backups.
Understanding the Results of the Confidence Test
CPBackup always tests your system at high speed first. If the test fails, it repeats
automatically at medium speed. However, at times, some computers fail the
high-speed test in such a way that prevents testing at medium speed.
386
PC DOS User's Guide
To change the Backup Speed if your computer fails the high-speed setting:
1. Turn your computer off and then back on to reset the hardware.
2. Type cpbackup at the DOS command prompt.
3. Select Backup Speed from the Configure menu.
4. Select Med; urn.
5. Select OK.
6. Select several files to back up for the test.
7. Select Start Backup.
When the test is complete, a message window informs you of the results. The
backup speed is set automatically to the fastest speed as determined by the
test.
8. Select Compare when the backup is complete.
If all files compare, your computer can do safe, reliable backups at the chosen
speed.
9. Select Save as Defaul t from the File menu to save the new information.
The confidence test checks only the drive and media you selected. If you change
the drive or media you use for backing up, test the new drive and media
combination. Some systems can run at high speed with one type of media but
might need to use medium or low speed with other media to be reliable.
If you have difficulties with the confidence test during the initial configuration
process and have since corrected the problem, you can run the test again by
selecting choices from the Configure menu.
To rerun the confidence test:
1. Select Choose Dr; ve and Med; a from the Configure menu and select a setting.
2. Select Backup Speed from the Configure menu.
3. Select Test.
4. Select OK when the test is complete.
5. Select Save as Defaul t from the File menu to save the new information.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
387
Viewing the Main Central Point Backup Window
After you have configured CPBackup, the next time you load CPBackup, the main
Central Point Backup window appears.
.
Backup safeguards hard disk files by
copying them to tape or disk.
Backup
H+ Backup for DOS -.- - - -
Central Point Backup has an extensive online help facility for your use. If at any
time you need help, press F1.
When you select Backup, Restore, or Compare from the main Central Point Backup
window, the following Express window appears:
Ensures medium Compresses dam
is readable
to save time or spare
Eaves Selection,~s:......~• • •
in setup files -
Schedules bacKups
Retumsto
liIEIiI .I!!D rmdEll ~!JQ':iiI+-pdmary wliwvw
Displays current
s~pfik ----1--ijIlIlIlIlEl5l1C~
1 drive
39 directories:
1673 files
Dicplayst>ool(ur:r--t--t-&I regabytes
statistics
..388
PC DOS User's Guide
1 tape
88:35 nlootes
Ddvesand volumes
......-+-to back up
CPBackup defaults to this Express Window. This Express feature simplifies your
backup, compare, or restore procedures with a simple "point-and-click" interface.
Buttons let you perform certain menu options quickly. All of the button commands
also appear on the menus. At the Beginner and Intermediate user levels, some of
these buttons are dimmed, meaning the default value is used and cannot be
changed.
Changing the User Level
If you want to change the user level from Advanced user, use the following
procedure. The default user level is Advanced.
To change the user level:
1. Select User Level from the Configure menu.
2. Select the level you want.
Beginner:
If you are not concerned with options you are not familiar
with or just want to do a' backup as easily as possible,
use the Beginner level. Central Point Backup
automatically defaults to the options that reflect the
highest degree of safety, security, and ease of use for
the Beginner level.
Intermediate:
If you want to perform backups as quickly and easily as
possible but need additional control over file selection
and backup methods, then use the Intermediate level.
Advanced:
For maximum control over all aspects of your backup,
use the Advanced level. If you are familiar with previous
versions of Central Point Backup, use the Advanced
level.
3. Select the check box to password-protect the user level so it cannot be
changed without the proper password.
An "X" appears, indicating that password protection is on.
4. Select OK to continue or Cancel to retain the current user level.
The table on the following page shows the commands available in each level.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
389
Menu Command
Beginner
Intermediate
Advanced
X
X
X
Save Setup
X
X
Save Setup As
X
X
X
X
File menu
Load Setup
Save as Default
X
Print history
Exit
X
X
X
X
Start Backup
X
X
X
Backup From
X
X
X
Select Files for Backup
X
X
Schedule Backups
X
X
Action menu
Restore
X
X
X
Compare
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Options menu
Backup Method
Reporting
X
Compress
X
Data Encryption
X
Verify
X
Media Format
X
Auto Compare
X
Format Always
X
Error Correction
X
Virus Detection
X
Save History
X
Overwrite Warning
X
Time Display
X
X
Selection Options
X
X
Display Options
X
X
The Configure, Tape Tools, and Help menus remain the same for all user levels.
390
PC DOS User's Guide
Making a Backup
This section explains how to do a full backup of your hard drive using the default
settings of CPBackup.·
The following procedure assumes that CPBackup is installed and that you have
configured it to match your system.
You can start CPBackup by:
• Selecting Central Point Backup from the PC DOS Shell.
• Typing the command at the DOS command prompt.
To start CPBackup:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
cpbackup
2. Press ENTER. and the main Central Point Backup window appears.
Central Point Backup
,
Backup safeguards hard disk files by
copying them to tape or disk.
Backup
..-H Backup for DOS - - - ' - - -
up safeguards hard disk files by copying them to tape or disk.
3. Select Backup.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
391
Backing Up All Files
CPBackup performs a quick scan of each local hard drive when you select it. This
scan identifies problems that could potentially interrupt the backup or cause data
distortion.
1. Select a drive to back up in the Backup From list (also available as Backup
From on the Action menu).
By default, all files on that drive are selected, as indicated by a checkmark to
the left of the drive icon. If you would rather not scan each drive when
selected, you can turn off the scan by selecting Dri ve I,ntegri ty from the
Configure menu.
'
Or, select specific directories and files to back up by choosing Select Fi 1es
for Backup.
When you choose this method, all files are unselected by default. To apply
your selection filters, press Fa while displaying the directory tree and file lists.
Refer to "Selecting Files" on page 394 for more information.
2. Select a backup destination in the Backup To drop-down list box (also available
as Choose Dri ve and Med i a from the Configure menu).
3. Select Start Backup (also available from the Action menu). The Name Backup
Set window is displayed.
I
4. Type a descriptive name of up to 30 characters, press TAB, and type an
optional password; then select OK.
Describe your backups\uniquely. This description is what appears in the
History list, Select Directory, or Search History files window when you do a
compare or restore, and it can help you remember the correct history file to
use.
Warning: Remember your password. If you attempt to restore a
password-protected backup set, the program asks you for the password. If you
forget or lose the password, you cannot restore your data. This password is
different than the user-level password. It is specific to each backup and is
intended to prevent unauthorized restoring of your data.
5. Insert the backup diskette or tape into the drive, when prompted.
392
PC DOS User's Guide
Note: It is normal for the drive light to stay on continuously during a backup
using high and medium speed. You will not damage your disks by
inserting or removing them when you are prompted to do so, even when
the drive light is on.
If you are using diskettes or fixed media for your backup, skip ahead to step 6.
If you are using tape, do not remove the tape cartridge from the drive when the
tape is moving. Doing so can damage the tape.
When you are backing up to a tape, a list of all the backups made to the tape
appears in the Tape Directory box. The list contains the descriptions entered at
the beginning of each backup. The list also includes the date and time of the
backup, the size of the files on the tape (in compressed format), and the
original sizes of the files.
If you are backing up to a SCSI tape, the Tape Directory window contains a
Catalog selection button.
a. Select OK to append to the tape, Erase to overwrite the tape, or Cance 1.
If you are sharing a SCSI tape with other users, select the Cat a109 button
to scan the tape for all backup sets and update the tape directory on your
hard disk. See "Synchronizing the Volume Tape Content (VTC) Files" on
page 421 for details.
b. Enter the tape password if you select Erase and if it is password-protected.
This prompt for a password is a security measure to prevent deletion of
other backups on that tape.
6. Press ESC, after the backup begins, any time you want to pause or cancel the
backup.
A window displays options to Resume, End, or Quit the backup.
Warning: If you are using a SCSI tape, quitting the backup results in an
unreadable tape. Previous complete backups can be recovered from the tape.
The current backup cannot be recovered. The tape must be erased before
future backups can be written to it. Use the End option (not Quit) so that
proper end-of-data markers are written to the tape.
When the backup is complete, the backup statistics appear.'
Perform a comparison at this point to be absolutely sure your backed-up data
matches the original data exactly.
7. Select Compare to begin the comparison process. See "Comparing Data" on
page 407 for further details.
If you are using' a tape drive, you can have CPBackup perform an automatic
comparison by selecting Auto Compare from the Options menu.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
393
Selecting Files
You can use one of the following two ways to select files:
• Automatically with file-filter commands.
For information about file-filter commands, refer to page 394.
• Manually from the directory tree.
For information about the directory tree, refer to page 398.
Selecting Files Automatically
There are several options that affect selected files: the backup method, manual file
selections, and the following automatic file selection filters, grouped under the
command Selection Options from the Options menu. These file-filter commands
are:
•
•
•
•
Manual subdirectory inclusion
Include/exclude files
Attribute exclusions
Date range selection
Manual Subdirectory Inclusions
This command is on by default. Therefore, any time you click a directory to select
or deselect it (or press ENTER when the cursor is on it), all subdirectories are also
selected or deselected.
Including and Excluding Files
The Include/exclude files process is the only method by which you can save file
selections for future backups. Selecting Incl ude/excl ude displays a text window
where you can enter an unlimited number of statements that list the drives,
directories, and files to include or exclude in a backup. The default is *.* (all files
selected).
CPBackup processes the files on your drive by looking at the include/exclude list.
The applicable backup method is applied to the list of files and then the files are
backed up.
To include and exclude files:
1. Select Selection options ~ Include/exclude files from the Options menu.
The Include/Exclude Files window is displayed.
394
PC DOS User's Guide
These are the guidelines for using the list:
• You can create an unlimited number of include/exclude statements. Each
statement can define only one specification.
• If you have multiple drives selected to back up, you can enter different
specifications for each drive.
• Check the Include Subdirectories box while creating a specification, if you
want to back up nested subdirectories contained in the specification. For
example, if your \WORD directory contained subdirectories named \DATA
and \LETTERS:
Path/File
Include
Subdirectories?
What is Backed Up
C:\WORD\*.*
Yes
All files contained in \WORD, \WORD\DATA,
and \WORD\LETIERS.
C:\WORD\*.*
No
Only files contained in \WORD.
• For multiple-drive backups, each entry must begin with the drive letter it
applies to; otherwise, the entry applies globally (to all selected drives).
• You can use DOS wildcard characters (* and ?).
• If you do not specify a path, the root directory is used by default.
• If you do not specify a file, the specification *.* is used by default.
Include/Exc
2. Type the path of the directory you want to include or exclude in the Path text
box.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
395
3. Type the file specification for the group or type of file you want to include or
exclude in the File text box.
4. Select I ncl ude or Excl ude.
5. Select Incl ude Subdi rectori es if you want CPBackup to apply your designated
file specification 'to all subdirectories of the directory you specified on the Path
line.
6. Select Check Path to have CPBackup ensure that every path you have entered
in the Path text box exists. When you choose the Add or Replace buttons, the
path of your entry is checked and, if it is not valid, a message prompt advises
you to enter the correct path.
7. Select Log dri yes and apply selection fil ters when you want CPBackup to
log every drive referenced by your entries and want the include/exclude filters
applied to your files.
8. Select one of the following:
Add
Adds the specification as a new statement· in the include/exclude
list.
Replace
Replaces the highlighted statement in the include/exclude list with
the new specification.
Delete
Deletes the highlighted statement in the include/exclude list..
Clear List
Deletes all statements in the include/exclude list.
9. Select OK when you have finished creating include/exclude statements.
Warning: Do not enter mapped drive letters and server\volume names in the
same include/exclude list. Errors can occur and drives might not be logged.
Including and Excluding a Single File or Directory
You can use function keys to automatically add include/exclude statements to the
include/exclude list by doing the following:
1. Highlight a specific file or directory while displaying a selected drive's files and
directories.
2. Perform one of the following:
Shift+FS
Inserts an include statement in the include/exclude list.
Shift+F7
Inserts an exclude statement in the include/exclude list.
All subdirectories of a directory are selected by this process if you have the
Manual Subdirectory Inclusion selection turned on.
396
PC DOS User's Guide
Attribute Exclusions
The Attribute exclusions command acts as a modifier to the Include/Exclude Files
command. For example, when you select a directory to back up and Excl ude
Hi dden Fi 1es is marked, no hidden files in that directory are backed up.
To exclude file attributes:
1. Select Sel ecti on opti ons
~
Attri bute excl usi ons from the Options menu.
2. Select the attributes you want to exclude and select OK.
Hidden Files: Hidden files (and directories) are usually a sign of
copy-protection and can be position-sensitive on the hard disk. Therefore, if
you copy the files off the diskette and onto another diskette, they probably will
not work because of the copy protection. If your hard disk crashes, you will
have to reinstall the program from the original diskettes.
System Files: These are your DOS system files (for example, IBMBIO.COM).
Because they are DOS system files, you probably do not need to back them up
as they are also position-sensitive.
If you are backing up a drive prior to changing DOS versions, do not back up
the DOS files. If you do, do not restore them.
Read-Only Files: Files you can open and use but not modify in any way.
Date Range Selection
Date Range Selection modifies the include/exclude entries by letting you select files
by date. Files are selected if their dates are within the range set by the start and
end dates you specify.
To set a date range:
1. Select Sel ecti on opti ons
~
Date range sel ecti on from the Options menu.
2. Select On. Date Range Selection is off by default.
3. Type the range of dates as follows:
mm/dd/yyyy
CPBackup uses the date format that is standard in 'your country. For example,
the United States uses the format shown above. Enter the date as you would
with the DOS DATE command.
4. Select OK.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
397
Selecting Files Manually
Manual file selections apply only to your current backup session. To save file
selections in your setup file for future backups, add your selections to the
Include/exclude list.
If you are accustomed to displaying your hard drive's tree structure to select
directories and files, you can pop up a directory tree from Express, or you can
disable Express to use the tree exclusively.
To display the Tree List using the Express window:
1. Select Acti on on the Action bar; then, select Sel ect Fi 1es for Backup from the
Action pull-down menu.
Or, select Sel ect Fi 1es for Backup.
By default, all files are unselected. To apply your selection filters, press Fa while
displaying the directory tree and file lists.
Note: Displaying the tree is not available at the Beginner user level.
The Tree List lets you select directories and files by clicking on each with the
mouse, or using the TAB, ENTER, UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, LEFT ARROW, and
RIGHT ARROW to navigate around the tree and select files.
When a directory is active in the Tree List, the files contained in that directory
appear in the File List on the right. You can select or deselect individual files with
the mouse by clicking, or you can use the keyboard.
If you press Fa while displaying the directory tree and file lists, the Include/Exclude
file specifications will overwrite your manual specifications.
398
PC DOS User's Guide
To select files or directories:
1. Select the directories and files you want to back up with the mouse by clicking
on them or by using the keyboard:
• Use LEFT ARROW to move to the previous directory at the same level as
the current directorY.1
• Use RIGHT ARROW to move to the following directory at the same level as
the current directory.
• Scroll the lower-level directories with the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW.
The number of selected directories appears at the bottom of the Tree List and
the number of selected files appears at the bottom of the File List, if you are
using the Express Interface.
2. If you want to deselect all files and directories, press SHIFT+FB (ClrTree) while
displaying the directory tree and file lists. For monochrome users, a bullet
appears to the left of each file that is selected.
3. Press ESC or F10 to return to the Express selection window.
Disabling Express
The directory tree always appears when you turn off the Express interface. If you
prefer, you can disable Express so the tree always appears.
To disable Express:
1. Select Express Interface from the Configure menu. The Tree List appears for
the currently selected drive.
Displays number of directories
and files selected and totci number
of kilobytes
Displays how many disks
or tapes Ere needed and
how long the procedure
will take
Displays current settings
lIIP
Tree List
U 03-11U91 09:16a 8-8 83-11tr91 89:19a A-4826 82.-1lS"g 1 96: ..1ip j}.-
1<13 OZt'2Zt'!Il
113:3~
8--
File List
3B:34 82.-1lB~1 87:8~ - 212 021'22/91 93:J!\:I 8-626 82.-1lB~1 B6:3~ - 445 92"11"g1 91 ;97p j}.111111 06t'28t'!18 81:23a 1928 99...a8~8 94 :2~ - 121lJ 121'29/98 98; lOa - -
1024 82".z1~1 18:53a - 7.H 92.-1lS"g1 96:3
--
Displays function keys and messages
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
399
The number of selected directories in the Tree List and the number of selected
files in the File List appears at the top, if you are not using the Express
Interface.
2. Select Save as Defaul t from the File menu. This makes the Tree and File
Lists always visible for future sessions.
Selecting Drives to Back Up
CPBackup displays all the storage devices it finds (such as hard drives, network
drives, and Bernoulli** drives) in the Backup From list. You can select multiple
drives to back up at one time. A checkmark appears next to each selected drive in
the Backup From list.
Selecting Local Drives
1. Select the drives you want to back up in the Backup From list box.
Or, select Backup From from the Action menu.
2. Select the drives to back up.
When Express is disabled, additional options appear:
Allow Single Drive Backups: When selected, all drive icons dim except for·
the currently selected drive. The path box appears so you can type a specific
path (for example, E:\ACCOUNTS). The drive letter appears in the path box, if
you select the drive icon first.
Allow Multiple Drive Backups: When selected, the path box disappears. You
can then select more than one drive to back up.
You cannot specify a path when drives are displayed as server volume names.
3. Select OK.
Displaying Multiple Drives with Express Disabled
The letters of the drives you have selected to back up appear in the Settings box
when Express is disabled.
The currently selected drive's directories appear in the directory tree window.
• Press F4 or + on your numeric keypad to display the next drive.
• Press SHIFT+F4 or - on your numeric keypad to display the previous drive.
**
Bernoulli is a trademark of Iomega Corp.
400
PC DOS User's Guide
You will see only the next drive displayed using F4, if you have more than one drive
selected.
Multiple-Drive Backups
If your system consists of multiple drives, you might want to back up all of them
during the same backup session. CPBackup processes each drive of a
multiple-drive backup as separate backup sets.
For example, if you select drives C, 0, and E to back up, CPBackup prompts you to
insert diskette #1. After drive C is backed up and the history file is written, you are
prompted again to insert diskette #1 of set#2. Do not insert diskette #1 of your
just-completed backup. Use a new diskette. This diskette becomes the first of the
backup set for drive D. This process repeats for each drive of a multiple-drive
backup. Similarly, if you use tape, each drive creates a separate backup set on the
tape.
If you are using low speed, the Fixed or Removable Drive and Path options, and
backing up multiple drives, each drive cre'ates a subdirectory named X_DRIVE on
the destination media (where x=drive letter) that contains the, data for each drive.
Displaying Novell Network Drives
• If you are connected to a Novell network, you can select how you want local' and
network volumes displayed in the Backup From list. CPBackup defaults to
displaying drives by drive letters.
Many network volumes are mapped to a drive letter that is actually a specific path
on a particular volume of a particular file server. For example, if you map drive G
to the directory NOVELL\SYS:ACCTS\RECEIVE, you access that directory
whenever you type G: at the DOS command prompt.
You can select to display the server and volume name instead of a drive letter. By
referencing network servers by name, you avoid confusion if the network drive
mappings change.
For example:
This Drive:
Indicates:
Drive C
Local DOS drive.
Drive G
[SYS:ACCTS\RECEIVE] mapped drive.
NOVELL\SYS: ACCTS
Single volume on a network drive.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
401
I
Be careful when backing up and restoring files that appear as mapped drive letters.
If the mappings change after the files are backed up, the files might not be
restored.
To select to display the server and volume name instead of a drive letter:
1. Select Nove 11 Network
~
Fil e Select; on from the Configure menu.
2. Select from the following:
Drive Letter: Displays logical drive letters, assigned by the NetWare Map
command to a network volume.
Server\Volume: Displays network drives as true network volumes, rather than
as logical drive letters.
If you want to back up an entire volume on a server, select the Server\Volume
option, or make sure that the drive mapping for the backup is mapped to 'the
root of the volume. CPBackup allows up to 10 server volume drives in a setup
file.
Viewing Files
CPBackup features viewers for many popular applications. The viewer
automatically adjusts to display the correct file format (a spreadsheet display for '
spreadsheet files, for example). However, the viewer cannot let you edit the
contents of the file.
Viewing a file can be especially useful if you have multiple files with the same
names in different directories or if you cannot remember the contents of a file.
CPBackup can view word-processing files, spreadsheet files, database files,
graphics files, as well as binary fi.les containing executable code.
To view specific files:
1. Select the file you want to view.
2. Press F2 (QView).
Use the online help available for this optional tool to see how to use the function
keys when using the Central Point Backup viewer.
402
PC DOS User's Guide
Working with Setup Files
CPBackup comes with several preconfigured setup files. One, named
WEEKLY.SET, does a full backup of all files on the first hard drive of your computer
system, which is usually drive C. Other preconfigured setup files include
SPREAD.SET, which backs up Lotus 1-2-3**, Excel**, and Quattro** files on your first
hard drive; and WORDPROC.SET, which backs up many word-processing
documents from applications such as Microsoft Word**, WordPerfect**, Lotus
Write/Ami**, and Lotus Ami Pro**. The database set, DATABASE.SET, backs up
files with extensions .DB, .DBF, .NDX, .IDX, .PX, and .DTF.
Select the setup file you want to use from the Setup Files drop-down list. You can
modify the setup file to further customize it for your system and backup needs. If
you make changes, select the Save Setup button to save the new information.
Follow steps 3 through 7, beginning in "Backing Up All Files" on page 392.
Setup files offer a way to save your selections for future use without having to go
through repetitious configurations. You can load these setup files from the
comma~d line or from within CPBackup.
Note: You must have setup files to schedule unattended backups with the
Scheduler.
You can use setup files with all operations-backup, compare, and restore-to
instantly configure CPBackup to the specifications contained in that setup file. This
is especially important if you want to compare or restore a backup where you might
not remember all the details about the setup you used at the time.
A setup file processes the files on your hard drive according to the criteria
contained in that setup file. Although you can always see all files and directories on
your hard drive when the Tree List is displayed, only the highlighted ones are used
during a backup, compare, or restore.
**
**
**
**
**
Lotus 1-2-3, Write/Ami, and Lotus AmiPro are trademarks of Samna Corporation.
Quattro is a trademark of Borland International, Inc.
Microsoft Word is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
WordPerfect is a trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.
Excel is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
403
The information contained in a setup file includes the settings for the following
commands:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup description
Backup from (all selected drives)
Back up to (media size)
Server/volume or Drive Mappings display
Backup speed (high, medium, or low)
Backup method (full, incremental, differential, f':111 copy, separate incremental, or
virus scan)
Reporting (to file, printer, or none)
All include/exclude statements
Attribute exclusions
Date range selections
Overwrite warning (on or off)
Compression
Display options
Error correction (on or off)
Data encryption (on or off, and the type)
Formatting options
Save history (on or off)
Verification option
Virus detection (on or off)
Exit when complete
Defining and Saving Setup Files
The Save Setup commands let you define and save multiple backup types and
options.
Save setup As: Saves the settings and include/exclude statements you make
during a backup session with a specific file name and .SET as the extension.
Save setup: Saves all current settings and include/exclude statements without
prompting you for a setup name (thus overwriting the current setup file). If there is
not a current setup file, the Save Setup command defaults to a setup file name of
Untitled.
Note: The Save Setup commands are not available at the Beginner user level.
If you save setup files with include/exclude file statements, then another file with a
.INX extension is also saved with its parent .SET file.
404.
PC DOS User's Guide
If you are backing up seNer\volumes to a OIC-format tape, be sure to turn on the
Save History command. This ensures that the name of the seNer\volume is saved
with the backup information on your hard disk. Because of the OIC-format design,
seNer\volume names cannot be saved on the tape itself.
Saving Setup Files
1. Select the Save Setup option (also available as Save setup As from the File
menu).
2. Enter the name to use for this backup configuration.
3. Enter a description of this setup file, using up to 32 characters.
4. Select OK.
Warning: When you save files, all the manual file specifications in these files are
lost. To save your changes, you must use the include/exclude command to enter
all of your specifications.
Loading Setup Files
Load setup lets you select and load a previously saved backup configuration. If you
have saved setup files from previous versions of CPBackup, you can load and use
them with this command.
Note: The BACKUP command is not compatible with the Central Point's Backup
Program (CPBACKUP).
To load setup files:
1. Click on Setup.
Or, select Load setup from the File menu.
2. Select the setup file to use for this session, and select OK.
Using Preconfigured Setup Files
CPBackup includes several preconfigured setup files. One, named WEEKLY.SET,
does a complete backup of all the files on the first hard drive of your computer
system, which is usually drive C. Another file, DAILY.SET, backs up only those
files that have changed since the last full backup.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
405
The following table shows other preconfigured setup files. Use these setup files as
a foundation to customize for your particular needs and system. Be sure to save
any modifications you make.
Preset File Name
Files Backed Up
DATABASE. SET
*.DB
*.DBF
*.NDX
*.IDX
*.DTF
*.RBF
*.PX
SPREAD.SET
*.XL*
*.WK*
*.CAL
*.WQ*
WORDPROC.SET
*.00*
*.STY
*.WP*
*.WRI
*.JW
*.SAM
*.TXT
Scheduling Backups
The. Scheduler button and the Schedule Backups command use Central Point
Scheduler, which is an application that lets you schedule backups without
- monitoring the procedure. Scheduler can also be used whenever you want to
:.schedule any program to run automatically at a specified time. For example, you
might want to run a program that has to be compiled. You can set up a batch file
first and then schedule it to run automatically when you are not using your
computer. This is especially useful for backing up to tape drives, removable
cartridges, or to a network volume.
Note: The Schedule Backups command is not available at the Beginner user level.
Scheduler provides a 15-second warning before it runs the scheduled backup in
case you are in the middle of an application that you do not want interrupted.
When the backup is complete, Scheduler returns to the application you were
running.
The memory-resident program, CPSCHED, must be resident in order to launch
CPBACKUP at the scheduled time. You can arrange to have CPSCHED load each
time you start your computer by placing this statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
If you chose not to have CPSCHED automatically load, you must load CPSCHED
prior to any scheduled backups.
To load CPSCHED, from the DOS command prompt, type:
cpsched
406
PC DOS User's Guide
For complete instructions on how to schedule events, such as scheduling a backup,
see Chapter 16, "Using Central Point Scheduler" on page 275.
Unattended Backups
When you want the backup to run, be sure the computer is on, CPSCHED is
loaded, and a tape is in the drive. CPBackup performs the backup at the specified
time and returns the machine to the state it was in prior to the backup.
If the setup file used in the scheduled backup has a description, that description
also becomes the description of that backup. Otherwise, the backup has the name
"Unattended Backup."
• If CPBackup is launched from a batch file and the backup progresses without
interruption, control is returned automatically to the batch file to execute the
next command.
• If CPBackup is launched from the command line with a setup file or from
Scheduler, then Express is automatically disabled to conserve memory. This
means the directory tree and file list is always visible on screen. Any automatic
backup (scheduled or run from the command line) answers the default button in
any window that appears. At the beginning of tape backups, a window
appears, showing the tape contents, and offers options to Append or Erase the
t!3pe. For all backup methods, except Full/Erase Tape, the default button is
Append, which is what happens in automatic tape backups.
Comparing Data
After performing a backup, compare your hard-disk data with the data contained on
your backup media. This comparison is an extra measure of security so that you
are sure the data contained on your backup disks or tapes matches the files on
your hard drive and is restorable.
Use Compare whenever you make changes to your hardware configuration or
backup settings, or when you use new media. You can have CPBackup perform an
automatic comparison by selecting AutoCompa re from the Options menu.
Comparing Your Backup to the Original Data
If you used a setup file when doing the backup, use the same setup file for the
comparison, so all the settings are identical. You have the opportunity to start a
comparison immediately after a backup is complete.
Compare saves a report of the comparison results automatically, if you have turned
on the Reporting command.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
407
To compare your backup to the original data:
1. Select Compare from the main selection window (or Compare from the Abtion
menu).
2. Select the setup file (if any) from the Setup list used to create the backup you
want to compare to. This is necessary if you are doing a comparison at a time
'
other than immediately after a backup.
3. Select History and select the history file of the backup set containing the data
you want to compare.
Or, highlight the history file you want, press the SPACEBAR to load the history
file, and press ENTER to display the history tree.
Or, use the Retri eve Hi story button, if the history file you want to compare is
not in the History list.
Double-click on a drive icon in the Compare To list to display a text box, and
type a specific path to compare to or press ENTER.
4. Select Start Compare.
If you used a password when the backup was originally performed, you see a
prompt to enter it now. Also, if you encrypted the data, you are prompted for
the encryption key. For online help about Data Encryption, select this item from
the Options menu and then press F1 for online help.
5. Insert the first diskette or tape of your backup set. Continue to insert diskettes
or tapes as prompted.
At the conclusion of the comparison, the results are displayed.
Displaying the Compared Files
If some of your files do not match, it is easy to see which ones they are. The icons
next to each mismatched file indicate why the file did not compare. (See the
symbol table that follows.)
To display the compared files:
Double-click on the history file you just compared.
Or, press TAB until you get to the History list, and then press ENTER.
Windows updates certain files every time you exit from Windows. Therefore, if you
back up with the Windows version of CPBackup, you should exit from Windows.
Then use either version to compare the backup. Some of the backed-up files from
your Windows directory will never compare with the original files on the hard disk.
These files include most of the .GRP files, and some .INI files, including
PROGMAN.INI.
408
PC DOS User's Guide
Compare Symbols: The symbol next to each file icon indicates how that file
compared with the original file, as follows:
Symbol
What it Means
The backup file was identical to the hard-disk file.
x
The backup file did not match the hard-disk file, although the date and time
stamps matched.
The following symbols can appear (in addition to the above symbols) if you are
doing a comparison at a time other than immediately after a backup:
Symbol
What it Means
<
The backup file did not match the hard-disk file, and the date/time stamp was
older.
>
The backup file did not match the hard-disk file, and the date/time stamp was
newer.
s
The backup file matched the hard-disk file, but the date/time stamp was
different.
The backup file was missing from the hard disk.
No symbol next to a file means that the file has not been compared (for example, if
you are not comparing all files on your hard disk).
Restoring Data
CPBackup can restore an entire hard disk or specifically selected files and
directories. You can restore files that were backed up on one machine to a
different machine, or restore files to a previous state.
All the restore functions available in Express are also available when Express is
disabled. For each command button of Express, there is a corresponding menu
command on the Action menu when in Restore mode. To perform a restore or
search a history file, select the appropriate command from the Action menu. To
retrieve, rebuild, or print a history file, select Choose di rectori es from the Action
menu.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
409
Full Restore
If you experience a hard-disk crash and need to reformat, you must install DOS and
CPBackup again before you can start your restore.
If you are restoring multiple drives, you must restore each drive individually. If you
are restoring network volumes, see "Performing Network Backups" on page 411.
It is important to restore your files using the same speed as the original backup.
For example, if you backed up your files using low speed, you must restore your
files at that speed.
If you are accustomed to using a mouse, reinstall your mouse drivers before
running CPBackup.
To perform a full restore of your system:
1. From the DOS command prompt, type:
cpbackup
and then press ENTER.
Because this is the first time you are using CPBackup after installing it on your
hard disk, you must configure it again.
2. Select Restore after configuration.
3. Select Retri eve Hi story.
Or, if Express is disabled, select Choose Di rectori es from the Action menu.
4. When prompted, insert the last diskette or the requested tape of the backup
set.
The history file is read from the backup and the history name and backup date
appear in the History drop-down list.
To select the restore destination, double-click on a drive icon in the Restore To
list box to display a text box. Then, type a specific path to restore to, or press
ENTER.
5. Select Start Restore.
6. When prompted, insert the first diskette or
t~pe
of your backup set.
The progress of the restore process appears on the screen.
7. Continue to insert disks or tapes until the restore is complete.
41 0
PC DOS User's Guide
It is normal for the drive light to stay on continuously while restoring at high and
medium speed. You will not damage your disks by inserting or removing them
when you are prompted to do so, even when the drive light is on.
Overwrite Warning: If this warning is on, a window appears when the directory
containing your newly restored CPBackup files is detected. Select Ski p thi s fi 1e
and Repeat for all Later Fil es to avoid overwriting the files.
Be especially careful if you are restoring a backup that might contain an older
version of DOS than what is currently on your hard drive.
If you are restoring a directory with attributes that are different than the existing
directory, an overwrite warning appears.
If your backup method is incremental, you need to do only a single restore because
all incremental backups are appended automatically to the parent full backup, and
only the most current files are selected to restore.
Printing a Directory from a History File
Use the Print History command from the File menu to print the directory of a
backup set to a disk file or to a printer.
If you send the directory to a file, you can view the directory when the File List is
displayed in Backup mode. The file is named VYMMDD.RPB.
To print a directory from a history file:
1. Select the history file you want to print from the History list.
2. Select Pri nt Hi story.
Performing Network Backups
Central Point CPBackup allows you to back up files between your personal
workstation, Local Area Networks (LANs) , and networks such as Novell NetWare.
Backing Up the Local Area Network
If you are connected to a Local Area'Network and have write access to the LAN,
you can back up your workstation files to the LAN drives (if backups are permitted).
Or, you can back up LAN drives the same way you back up your own workstation
drives, by specifying the full path of the LAN drive.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
411
Before you back up files from a specified path, make sure that the Express
Interface is disabled and there are no Novell Network ServerNolumes designated.
If the box does not provide a path, select All ow Si ngl e Dri ve Backups because
you cannot specify a path with a multiple drive backup.
Backing Up Workstation Data
A workstation user can back up the data on a hard drive to a directory on the
network.
To back up to a network directory:
1. Create a subdirectory named FULL on the network and do a full backup, either
weekly or monthly, to that directory. This subdirectory should be a subdirectory
of your \HOME directory.
2. Create two subdirectories named DAILY1 and DAILY2 on the same volume.
Alternate daily differential or separate incremental backups to the two DAILY
directories.
By creating the three directories, you avoid the problem of overwriting the three
files that CPBackup writes that contain your data and information about the
backup. These three files are:
• CPBACKUP.001, which contains your backed-up data.
• CPBACKUP.DIR, which contains the directory of the backed-up data.,
• CPBACKUP.INF, which contains boot-record information.
Normal network security is in effect during a backup. This means each user
must have rights to read from and write to the drive and directory specified.
3. Select the data you want to back up.
4. Click the Backup To drop-down list and select Fi xed Dri ve.
Or, select Choose Dri ve and Medi a from the Configure menu and then select
Fixed Drive and Path.
5. Enter the path as a destination, and select OK.
To enter a server\volume name, turn on the Server\Volume option in the File
Selection window, which is under Nove 11 Network from the Configure menu.
6. Select Save' Setup to save the settings for future use.
7. Select Start Backup.
You can use the Scheduler command to schedule a backup of your data to the
network after you go home for the day. See "Scheduling Backups" on page 406.
412
PC DOS User's Guide
Backing up Novell Networks
CPBackup can back up data to a network directory or to a SCSI device or
QIC-02/36 tape device attached to the server. You can display server\volumes by
name or as drive letters mapped to specific paths.
As a network supervisor, you can back up and restore the network data.
Retry on Busy File
If you are attempting to back up a file that is locked or in use by someone else, you
can instruct CPBackup to keep trying to back up the file or skip the file.
If you activate this option and, if during a backup, CPBackup encounters a busy file,
the backup stops for as long as the file is busy. No other files are backed up while
CPBackup is in the retry mode.
To activate the retry on busy option:
1. Select Novell Network - Retry on Busy from the Configure menu. The Novell
Network File Busy window is displayed.
2. Select one of the following:
Option
Retry every
Action
n minutes
Specify how often you want the busy file
accessed to back it up. This number must be a'
whole number (between 1-600). No decimal
points are accepted.
Retry until not busy
Specifies that CPBackup is to continue trying to
access a busy file until it is no longer busy.
When the file is no longer busy, it is backed up.
Do not retry
Specifies that busy files are to be'skipped by
CPBackup. This is the default.
Total retry time
Specifies how long you want CPBackup to
continue to attempt to back up a busy file. You
can specify 9 hours and 60 minutes.
Backing Up and Restoring Bindery Files and Trustee Information
Backing up and restoring bindery files and trustee information is supported by SCSI
tape drives only. You must have administrative authority to perform this function.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
413
To back up bindery files and trustee information:
1. Select Nove 11 - Bi ndery Trustee from the Configure menu. The Novell
Network window is displayed.
2. Select one of the following:
Selection
Action
Back up bindery information
This selection affects a backup of
the bindery; the database that
contains the network user lists and
the groups they belong to on the
network. The bindery consists of
permanent, hidden system files
that are always located in the
SYS:SYSTEM directory. Refer to
the documentation that comes with
your network· software for more
information.
Back up trustee information
This selection affects a backup of
the assigned right~ of every
selected file.
3. Select OK.
To restore bindery/trustee information:
1. Select Restore on the Main CPBackup window. The Restore window is
displayed.
2. Make adjustments using the choices on the Restore window as needed.
3. Select Start Restore.
During Restore, the catalog file of the backup set is opened and checked for
bindery, trustee information, and directory information. The Novell Network
window is displayed, prompting for confirmation of the files that have been
found.
4. Select the files you want restored.
5. Select OK.
414
PC DOS User's Guide
Configuring Tape Drives
CPBackup supports a variety of tape drives, ranging from those that connect to a
floppy controller card to multiple-gigabyte SCSI drives. The most common type of
tape drive for single-user PCs is the mini-cartridge drive, which encompasses the
OIC standard as well as proprietary formats. Mini-cartridges are quarter-inch tapes,
generally known as DC-2000 or DC-2120, and can hold up to 250MB of
compressed data.
Many drives that are sold as 120MB or 250MB capacity actually are referring to the
capacity of the tape when data compression is used. How much the data is
compressed depends a great deal on the data itself.
Note: If you are having trouble configuring your tape drive or other problems
related tape drives, refer to "Central Point Backup" on page 312.
Floppy or Secondary Controller Card and QIC Drives
CPBackup is compatible with the following tape drives:
The following lists of tape drives represent those that have been tested with this
product. If you do not find your tape drive among these lists, you should check with
your manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
Aiwa T0803
Aiwa T0811
Alloy 120
Alloy Retriever 40/60
Alloy Retriever 60e
Alloy Retriever 125c
Alloy Retriever 250c
ArchiveXL 5580i
Archive 5540
ArchiveXL 5580e
Backtrax 80MB
CMS Tape 40/INT
CMS T2120AT
Colorado OJ-10 (Jumbo 120)
Colorado OJ-20 (Jumbo 250)
Colorado KE-10
Colorado KE-15
Colorado KE-15
Compaq**
Internal 40MB
Compaq Internal 80MB
EdisonTech 40MB
IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit
Identity 120
Identity 120e
Identity ~Oi
Insight 125/250
Insight 80i
.
.
** Compaq is a trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
415
lomega** Tape 250MB
Irwin 445
Irwin 485
Irwin 745
Irwin 785
Irwin Accutrac A 120
Irwin Accutrac A250
Irwin DC 2000 Series: Model 2040 (40MB)
Irwin DC 2000 Series: Model 2080 (80MB)
Irwin SXe 120/250
Irwin SX 5540 and 5580
Mountain Filesafe FS-4000
Mountain Filesafe FS-8000
Mountain Filesafe TD-4000
Mountain Filesafe TD-4340
Mountain Filesafe TD-4440
Mountain Filesafe TD-8000
Mountain 4400
Procom 80MB
Summit SE 120
Summit SE 250
Sysgen Valuestor 250
Tallgrass FS120
Tallgrass FS300
Tallgrass TG1140
Tallgrass FileSecure 80
Tecmar MiniVault 120i
Tecmar MiniVault 120e
Tecmar MiniVault 250i
Tecmar MiniVault 250e
Tecmar QT-40e
Tecmar QT-40i
Tecmar QT-80e
Tecmar QT-80
Wangtek 3040
Wangtek 3080
Wangtek FAD 3500
Well-Tech (Colorado drive for Toshiba* T5200)
If you use a tape drive that is connected to your high-speed floppy controller card,
you cannot access the floppy drives during the tape backup.
SCSI Tape Drives
CPBackup is compatible with the following SCSI tape drives:
Archive Turbo Python (2.0GB)
Archive Python (2.0GB)
Archive Viper 2060 (60MB)
Archive Viper 2125 (125MB)
Archive Viper 2150 (150MB)
Archive Viper 2525 (525MB)
Exabyte 8200Sx (2.0GB)
Exabyte 8200 (2.0GB)
Exabyte 8500 (5GB)
Exabyte 8505 (5GB)
Exabyte 850c (5GB)
Exabyte 4200 (2.0GB)
** Iomega is a trademark of Iomega Corp.
*
Toshiba is a trademark of the Toshiba Corporation.
416
PC DOS User's Guide
Tandberg 3620
Tandberg 3640
Tandberg 3660 (150MB)
Tandberg 3820 (525MB)
Tandberg 4120 (1.0GB)
Tandberg 4220 (2.0GB)
Teac MT-01 (250MB)
WangDAT 1300 (2.0GB)
WangDAT 3200 (2.0GB)
Wangtek 5525ES (525MB)
Wangtek 7200HS (2.2GB)
Tape Formatting (non-SCSI)
Formatting a tape is a process that is required only once; however, it is a good idea
to purchase preformatted and certified tape cartridges. This is not only more
convenient for you but also saves time during a backup. CPBackup can format a
tape during a backup, if necessary, but the time involved is considerable. Use
Format on the Tape Tools menu to format a tape before you use it.
Every tape must have two things done to it before it is ready to use:
• Formatted (initialized): Formatting lays out data tracks and maps them for the
read/write mechanism. This process is very similar to formatting a diskette.
Formatting a tape is not the same as erasing a tape. Erasing deletes data from
the tape; formatting lays out the data tracks th?t the data is stored on.
• Certified: Verifies the tape by checking for bad blocks and locking them out
(similar to DOS locking out bad sectors on a diskette). This is done last.
An Irwin-formatted tape has one additional process done to it before it is formatted
and certified:
Servo-written: Writes permanent information to the tape. This information is
precisely placed along the track so the tape drive's read/write mechanism is guided
along the proper data tracks. This is usually a one-time-only procedure. If a tape
ever needs to be servo-written again, bulk-erase the tape first.
The following table shows the approximate time it takes to fully format various
non-SCSI tapes. The third and fifth columns refer to special tapes that can be
formatted to greater capacity. These tapes are marked "XL," which means they
have extra length. If you buy a 40MB tape marked XL, you can format it to hold
60MB of data. Similarly, if you buy an, 80MB XL tape, you can format it to hold
120MB of data.
Procedure
40MB
non-SCSI tape
40MB XL
non-SCSI tape
80MB
non-SCSI tape
80MB XL
non-SCSI tape
Servo-written
(Irwin only)
36 min
54 min
51 min
76 min
Formatted
18 min
27 min
33 min
50 min
Certified
18 min
27 min
33 min
49 min
Totals:
36 min
54 min
66 min
99 min
Totals with
servo-write:
72 min
108 min
117 min
175 min
. Chapter 20. Using Central Poi~t Backup
417
These times are based on a 500 Kbps (kilobits per second) data rate that a
high-density diskette controller uses, such as those found in AT-class machines. All
times should be doubled if done at the 250 Kbps rate used by low-density diskette
controllers, such as those found in XT-class machines. All times should be halved
if using a high-speed 1000 Kbps controller card.
If you insert a blank tape, CPBackup first rewinds the tape and attempts to read the
tape header. If that is unsuccessful, the tape is retensioned and you have the
opportunity to format the tape, insert a new tape, or cancel.
QIC Format and Full-Screen CPBackup Format
CPBackup supports the standard 'QIC-40/80 format for tapes and the proprietary
Full-Screen CPBackup format. There are some differences between the
Full-Screen CPBackup format and QIC, which are summarized in the following
table:
*
QIC
Full-Screen CPBackup
Freely interchangeable with other QIC
format backup programs.
Proprietary format can be restored only with
CPBackup.
Writes directory information at the beginning
of the backup set.
Writes directory information at the end of
the backup.
Supports all backup methods but
incremental because of placement of
directory.
Supports all backup methods.
Might have to insert every tape of a
multiple-tape backup to restore a single file.
Needs only the specific tape of a
multiple-tape backup to restore a single file.
If the first tape (where directory is stored) of
a multiple-tape backup is lost, no data is
recovered from any of the remaining tapes
(even if a history file exists on the hard
disk). You cannot restore any data
contained on tapes beyond the missing
tape. (For example, if tape #3 of a six-tape
backup is lost, only the data on tapes 1 and
2 can be restored.)
If the last tape (where the directory is
stored) of a multiple-tape backup is lost,· but
the history is on the hard disk, all data up to
the missing last tape is recovered. As long
as a directory exists (on tape or hard disk),
all data is recovered except what was
contained on the missing tape.
Micro Channel is a trademark of IBM Corporation.
418
PC DOS User's Guide
There is no significant performance increa$e of one format over the other, and both
formats use about the same amount of space on the tape (all things being equal
such as method and compression).
'After a tape is formatted as OIC, it does not need to be reformatted as Full-Screen
CPBackup because the low-level formatting is identical. There is one exception to
this-non-SX Irwin tape drives. These drives use special servo-writing (described
previously) which is not OIC-compatible. The Irwin SX series of tape drives is
OIC-compatible.
Be aware that using encryption on a backup set written to a OIC tape makes that
backup set unrestorable by other OIC-compatible backup programs.
If you are backing up server\volumes to a OIC-format tape, be sure the Save
History command is on. This ensures that the name of the server\volume is saved
with the backup information on your hard disk. Because of the way OIC format was
designed, server\volume names cannot be saved on the tape itself.
Tape Controller Card Technical Information
CPBackup supports various manufacturers' floppy and tape controller cards. In
many cases, the card is recognized and used with no information required from
you. However, some cards require special parameters to be set the first time you
use CPBackup so the card is recognized for future backups. This is saved in the
default configuration file. This section provides details on the various cards that
require this special information.
Adapter cards connect between the primary diskette controller and the diskette and
tape drives. CPBackup automatically detects the following cards when you select
Sea rch with the Define Equipment command.
• Archive XL20A
• Colorado AB-1 0
• Irwin 4251
Secondary Tape Controller Cards Supported (Micro Channel): It is not
necessary to specify any address information for these cards:
• Irwin 4100MC
• Mountain MACH2 (Micro Channel*)
• Tecmar MCA Floppy Tape Controller
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
419
Secondary Tape Controller Cards Supported (ISA): The following tape
controller cards, which are Industry Standard Architecture (I SA) , must have the I/O
port address, IRQ channel, and the DMA channel specified.
ADDR
IRQ
DMA
Alloy FTFA Controller
340
3
2
Colorado FC-10
180
3
2
Colorado TC-15
180
3
2
Compaq Expansion Chassis #1075-70-001
370
6
2
Iomega PC10p
370
3
Archive/Irwin 4100NM
370
6
2
Mountain MACH2
3E7
5
3
Summit Accelerator
3E7
5
3
Tecmar QT
300
3
Wangtek Lightning Thunderbolt
300
3
Tape Drive
The addresses listed are the factory settings of the cards. If you have altered these
settings in any way, you must specify the values you have set so CPBackup can
recognize the card.
You can specify settings by entering the correct values in the Tape Configuration
window, which you access with the Define Equipment command.
The Colorado FC-10 and TC-15 are jumperless controllers and are not fixed at the
rates shown in the above table. If CPBackup does not find your tape driver,
reconfigure and try one of the following sets of value until it does find the tape
drive:
•
•
•
•
420
180-3-2
300-6-1
300-6-2
370-6-2
PC DOS User's Guide
Synchronizing the Volume Tape Content (VTC) Files
During the SCSI configuration of CPBackup, a window appears.
The options that appear in this window can vary, depending on the type of SCSI
adapter card you have.
A *.VTC (volume tape catalog) file is written to your hard disk after the backup
process for each SCSI tape used and is subsequently updated after each backup.
When the Resync Volume Table before each Backup option is on, which is the
default setting, the *.VTC file on your hard disk is updated with the *.VTC file on the
tape before the tape directory appears on your screen. This process is
time-consuming because the tape must be rewound and searched for the last
*.VTC file.
If you use a tape for a single PC, and you are the only one using that tape, you can
safely turn off the Resync Volume Table before each Backup option because your
*.VTC files are always identical. Turning off this option saves time by not having to
rewind the tape and search for the last *.VTC file.
However, if multiple users are backing up to the -same tape, it is essential that the
Resync Volume Table before each Backup option is on. This ensures that the
*.VTC file on each user's hard disk always displays the actual directory of the tape.
If there is any doubt about the contents of a SCSI tape, select the Catalog button in
the Tape Directory window, which automatically compares and updates the VTC
files.
Backup Strategies
Backing up your data depends on how frequently that data changes. Consider the
following questions:
• How valuable are my files to me or my business?
• How many of my files change daily?
• How long would it take to replace those files if something happened to them?
CPBackup offers several methods of backing up your data, depending on drive,
media, and speed.
Diskette Backup Strategy
Make and use setup files for different backup methods, or use the WEEKLY and
DAILY setup files that came with CPBackup. Use at least two sets of backup disks
so that you are never overwriting your last backup with the current backup.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
421
Using a Preconfigured Setup File
CPBackup ships with a preconfigured setup file (WEEKLY) that is set to back up all
files on your first hard drive (usually C) and another one called DAILY that backs up
only the changed files since the last full backup.
To back up only changed files on a weekly basis:
1. Start CPBackup on Friday by typing:
cpbackup weekly
2. Begin your backup using the first set of diskettes.
3. Label each diskette with its backup sequence number, name, and set number.
For example, #1, Fri day backup, Set A. The next diskette would be #2,
Fri day backup, Set A, and so on.
4. Start CPBackup on Monday through Thursday by typing:
cpbackup daily
When prompted, insert the last diskette of your backup set (if doing an
incremental backup). For example, if you used 25 disks for your Friday backup,
you would insert diskette #25 of backup set A. When prompted, insert
additional diskettes as needed.
5. Label each diskette with its proper sequence number (#26 of Set A, #27 of Set
A, and so on).
Each day, you back up and append the changed files to the Friday full backup set.
By the end of Thursday's daily backup, you might have several disks beyond the
original 25 you used on Friday.
Conversely, if you do a differential backup, you are prompted to insert a new
diskette each day. If the need to restore ever arises, you restore the full backup
and the last differential diskette.
To back up on even-numbered weeks starting on Friday:
Repeat the above steps, using the second set of diskettes. Be sure to label these
as Set B.
422
PC DOS User's Guide
Using Different Backup Methods
For many people, a monthly full backup is sufficient, coupled with daily backups of
the changed files. Use one of the following methods, depending on your particular
needs, every day:
• Do a daily differential backup to diskettes. ,Alternate between two sets of disks
for safety. When the sets use more than six diskettes, do another full backup.
The differential method does not save multiple daily versions of the changed
files. It saves only the latest versions.
• Do a separate incremental backup on Monday (which starts a new backup set),
followed by daily incremental backups to diskettes. This keeps daily versions of
the files that change but creates less backup sets than using separate
incrementals exclusively.
Tape Backup Strategies
A tremendous advantage to using a tape drive for your backup is its ability to totally
automate your backups. A simple strategy is to use at least two tapes so you are
never writing over your last backup with the current backup.
To back up using the two-tape strategy:
1. Schedule a weekly full backup using the WEEKLY setup file and Tape #1 .
2. Schedule a daily backup using the DAILY setup file and Tape #1.
3:. Use Tape #2 the second week, and continue alternating tapes each week.
Another popular backup strategy, referred to as "Grandfather, Father, Son," uses 10
tapes and gives you a complete backup of 12 weeks' data.
To back up using the ten-tape strategy:
1. Label the tapes as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
-
Monday
Tuesday'
Wednesday
Thursday
1st Friday
6':-· 2nd Friday
7 - 3rd Friday
8 - 1st Month
9 - 2nd Month
10 - 3rd Month
2. Use tape 5 on the first Friday and back up your entire system.
3. On the following Monday, use tape 1, labeled Monday, to do a separate
incremental or differential backup of the changed files. Repeat this every
weekday using the appropriately labeled tape.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
423
4. On the second Friday, use tape 6 (2nd Friday) for another full backup, and
repeat the Monday through Thursday backups, using the corresponding tapes
(you will overwrite these tapes).
5. Repeat step 4 for week 3, using tape 7 (3rd Friday).
6. Repeat step 4 for week 4, and use tape 8 (1 st Month) on the fourth Friday.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, using tape 9 (2nd Month) on the fourth Friday of the.
second month and using tape 10 (3rd Month) on the fourth Friday of the third
month.
In subsequent months, recycle the three "Month" tapes, always overwriting the
oldest tape.
To back up using the combined diskettes and tapes strategy:
Do full backups to tape, with subsequent differential or separate incremental
backups to diskettes. This saves the expense of purchasing many tapes (as in the
above strategy).
Use this method if you are backing up to a removable cartridge, such as a Bernoulli
or SyQuest drive, or to a directory on a network.
To back up using the removable media or network backup strategy:
1. Create a subdirectory named FULL on the network or cartridge and do a full
backup, either weekly or monthly, to it. '
•
2. Create two subdirectories named DAILY1 and DAILY2 on the same drive.
Alternate daily differential backups to the two DAILY directories.
By creating the three subdirectories, you avoid the problem of overwriting the three
files that CPBackup writes that contain your data and information about the backup.
These three files are:
• CPBACKUP.001, which contains your backed-up data.
• CPBACKUP.DIR, which contains the directory of the backed-up data.
• CPBACKUP.INF, which contains boot record information.
424
PC DOS User's Guide
Using the CPBDIR Program
The CPBDIR program determines the number of disks and the correct order of a
high-speed or medium-speed diskette backup (very helpful if you forgot to label the
disks in their proper order) as well as information about how the backup was made.
Use the DOS DIR command on low-speed disks to find out the diskette number and
date of backup. There will be two files on the diskette:
• CPBACKUP.INF
• CPBACKUP.nnn, where
nnn is the diskette number of the set.
There will also be a CPBxxx.DIR on the last diskette of the set (this is the history
file).
CPBDIR is a stand-alone application that you run by typing the following at the
DOS command prompt. If you want to read a backup diskette from a different
drive, type:
cpbdir d:
where d is the drive letter of the drive where the backup diskette is inserted.
You must put a colon after the drive letter.
CPBDIR then displays information from the backup diskette, such as the disk
number of the backup set, media used, formatting, speed used, and whether a
directory exists on the diskette. CPBDIR recognizes the following parameters:
d
The drive the backup diskettes are in.
Ix
An extended list of information about the backup disk.
Chapter 20. Using Central Point Backup
425
426
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
Stacker for Windows & DOS is the award-winning data compression standard that
safely increases your disk capacity. Stacker's patented LZS** compression and new
Stacker SmartPack** combine to give you more disk space than any other data
compression product.
Stacker transforms a typical 100MB disk into 250MB. Other compression products
only double your disk, at best. Stacker is the first to more than double your disk
and break through the 2-to-1 compression barrier.
Stacker takes full advantage of compression features built into PC DOS 7. If you
have DoubleSpace/DriveSpace drives, SuperStor/DS drives, or previous Stacker
versions Stacker automatically converts them and gives you even more extra
space-the exception being Stacker for OS/2 & DOS.
Installing Stacker after Installing PC DOS
If you did not select Stacker Compression at the initial installation of PC DOS 7,
you can still install this optional tool by rerunning PC DOS Setup using the /e
switch.
The PC DOS installation diskettes contain everything you need to install Stacker on
your system. Just install PC DOS again using the /e switch after PC DOS and
Windows have been installed. The /e switch allows you to return to the optional
tools selection menu without having to rerun PC DOS Setup again. At this point,
only the necessary files for the optional tools are installed.
To install Stacker using the Setup /e switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into
drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
** LZS and SmartPark are trademarks of Stac Electronics.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
427
3. After Setup for PC DOS begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Make sure you specify the same "Install to Path" as for the initial PC DOS
installation.
At the Optional Tools screen, you will see NO next to Stacker Compression.
4. Either press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you highlight Stacker
Compression, and then press ENTER, or click on the optional tool if using the
mouse.
You can also select any of the other optional tools that you want to install by
highlighting each tool and then pressing ENTER for each item.
You now see YES next to all the optional tools you selected.
Note: Selecting Yes to install Stacker Compression copies only the required
compression files to the DOS directory. You must run Stacker Setup
before compressing your data (explained in detail in "Starting the
Stacker Setup Program (SSETUP)" on page 431).
5. Move the cursor to highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
6. Press ENTER to accept the optional tool selections.
7. Continue following the instructions on the screen until the optional tools are
installed.
Before Using Stacker
Stacker gives you more disk space by compressing files so they take up less
space. Stacker's patented data compression technique-Stacker LZS-eliminates
repetitive information from your files. And, Stacker SmartPack tightly packs your
files into spaces on your disk that DOS cannot access without Stacker's help.
Unlike other compression products, Stacker monitors your compression. If your
data compresses better than 2.5·to 1, Stacker adjusts your actual compression ratio
to reflect the improvement, giving you the most space possible.
After you set up Stacker and more than double your disk space, you still use your
computer just as you did before. The only difference is that you have a great deal
more space on your disk.
428
PC DOS User's Guide
What's New about PC .00S's Stacker Compression
Stacker now frees up more of your disk space and makes it easy to monitor your
drives from either the Stacker DOS Toolbox or the new Stacker Windows Toolbox.
Stacker:
• Gives you the most disk space. Stacker continues to improve upon its'
patented, Stacker LZS technology to give you the most space possible.
• Lets you take data on compressed disks anywhere-even if the computer does
not have Stacker installed, using Stacker Anywhere**.
• Instantly converts other compressed drives. The resulting Stacker drives give
you more space than either DoubleSpace/DriveSpace or Superstor/DS.
• Uses less memory. Stacker uses as little memory as possible.
• Makes monitoring your drives effortless. Stacker DOS Toolbox tools show you
eXtra bytes, free space, and fragmentation. All Stacker's tools are on an
easy-to-use menu in the Toolbox.
• Fine-tunes for Stacker MaxSpace ** or Stacker MaxSpeed**. Choose from 10
tuning settings (available for DOS by editing the STACKER.INI file or available
for Windows using the Windows Toolbox). Then, even if you set your computer
for MaxSpeed, you can use the Optimize tool's Full-MaxSpace method to
recompress occasionally and gain more space.
• Guards your data. Every time you start up your system, Stacker runs
AutoProtect to make sure your data is in good condition. Stacker AutoSave,
available only through the Windows Toolbox, backs up important file-access
information.
• Shows how much data needs backing up. The new Backup Status gauge,
available only through the Windows Toolbox, keeps track for you.
• Flashes or plays sounds to remind you of disk maintenance tasks. You can set
up the Stacker Windows Toolbox to let you know when the disk is getting full or
when it is time to back up files or optimize your disk.
** Stacker Anywhere, Stacker Maxspace, and Stacker Maxspeed are trademarks of Stac Electronics.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
429
Getting Stacker Help
Stacker includes comprehensive online help. Help is available at the press of a key
or a click of your mouse.
• Need help during Stacker Setup? Press F1 or click on Help.
• Need help using the Stacker DOS Toolbox? Press F1 to get context-sensitive
help from any screen.
• Need help using the Stacker Windows Toolbox? Select Tool box Hel p from the
Help menu to see the index of topics. Or, press F1 to get context-sensitive help
on any dialog box or screen.
• Need help on general topics? Double-click on the Stacker Help icon in the
Stacker Windows Program group.
For late-breaking information not included in this guide, refer to the README.TXT
file located in the STACKER subdirectory.
Note: If you have not run Stacker Setup (SSETUP), this file will be in the
C:\DOS\STACKER subdirectory (if this is the directory where you installed
PC DOS to). After running SSETUP, this file will be located in the
C:\STACKER directory.
For PC DOS, use any text editor, such as the PC DOS E Editor, to view this
document. For Windows, double-click on the Readme icon in the Stacker Program
Group.
Setting Up Stacker
Setting up Stacker is easy. All you have to do is:
• Install Stacker files using the' PC DOS Setup program (PC DOS SETUP
command).
• Back up your data before you run the Stacker Setup program.
• Set up Stacker initially using the Stacker Setup program (SSETUP).
• Use the Stacker Setup program (SETUP) for compressing additional drives
thereafter (after you initially have run SSETUP).
430
PC DOS User's Guide
Backing Up Your Data
Before setting up Stacker, back up your data. Stacker is completely safe and does
not harm your data. Still, before making any system change, it is always a good
idea to back up. If you have a backup routine, just follow it, but do a complete
backup.
If you use a tape backup, do a file-by-file backup (not an image backup). Refer to
Chapter 20, "Using Central Point Backup" on page 383 for details on backing up.
Starting the Stacker Setup Program (SSETUP)
Start the Stacker Setup program (SSETUP) from DOS or Windows and press
ENTER as required in response to the screens. When Stacker finishes, continue
working with your system as you always did but with more than double the disk
capacity.
Setting up Stacker is easy under either DOS or Windows. Even if you set it up
under Windows, Stacker still has to exit to DOS to perform its work.
To set up Stacker:
1. Be sure you selected Stacker Compression when you first installed PC DOS.
You can verify that you selected compression by checking if you have a
Stacker directory (for example, if you selected the default directory when .
installing PC DOS, the Stacker files are copied to the C:\DOS\STACKER
directory) until you run Stacker Setup (SSETUP).
If you did not select compression during the installation of PC DOS, you cannot
run SSETUP,. Refer to "Installing Stacker after Installing PC DOS" on
page 427 before proceeding with Stacker Setup.
2. From the DOS command prompt, type:
ssetup
3. Press ENTER.
4. Follow the instructions on your screen.
If your computer has an LCD, gray-scale, or monochrome monitor, type ssetup
so you can read the screens easier.
1m
If you are planning to use Stacker from Windows, from the Program Manager's File
menu, select Run. In the Command Line field, type ssetup and press ENTER.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
431
If you do not have Windows installed yet, you should install Windows first so that
your Stacker Windows group will be set up automatically for you. If you already
have Stacker installed and need to install Windows, do so and then use the Stacker
SGROUP command to create the Stacker Windows group. Type hel p sgroup at
the DOS command prompt for complete information.
Creating Stacker Drives after Initial Stacker Setup (SETUP)
While running SSETUP for the initial installation of Stacker, the Stacker directory
and files are moved from C:\DOS\STACKER to C:\STACKER.
Thereafter, just use Stacker's SETUP command to compress any additional drives.
Refer to "Compressing Additional Drives" on page 440 for complete instructions.
Getting Help on Stacker Setup·
Stacker Setup guides you through a series of decisions. If you are not sure which
choice to make, you can get help by pressing F1 or click on Help from any of the
screens. If you are still not sure about a Stacker Setup screen choice, accept
Stacker's default-simply press ENTER.
Choosing Express or Custom Stacker Setup
If earlier versions of Stacker or other types of compressed drives are detected when
you run Stacker Setup, you are asked to choose one of two setup
methods-Express or Custom.
Choose Express to:
• Set up Stacker quickly and easily.
• Set up Stacker on all hard disks or partitions larger than 5MB.
• Let Stacker make the decisions for your system.
Choose Custom to:
• Set up Stacker on one disk or partition ata time.
• Compress only the free space left on the disk. Free space is space not used by
data. You will be asked how much free space you want to reserve as
uncompressed space.
• Control options such as whether or not to use Expanded Memory Specification
(EMS), the cluster size of your Stacker drives, or how much space to leave
uncompressed.
432
PC DOS User's Guide
Upgrading Stacker and Getting the Best Compression
When you run Stacker Setup, it detects any earlier versions of Stacker on your
system and offers you two options-Full Update or Quick Update. Select Full
Update. It might take as long as a few hours, but Full Update is a thorough
upgrade for your entire system and gives you the best compression.
Stacker 4.8 for Uindous & DOS
SETUP
Setup updates Stacker drives and recoMpresses the data to take
advantage of Stacker 4.8's superior cOMpression. If ~ou prefer,
Setup can quickl~ update the drives and ~ou can reCOMpress the
data later.
Setup autoMaticall~:
1) Restarts ~our cOMputer.
2) Updates these drives:
. C, D
If ~ou choose Quick Update, ~ou Must recOMpress existing data
later to iMprove cOMpression. Use the OptiMize tool in the
Stacker Toolbox and ch~ose Full-NaxSpace.
F1 for Help, TAB to select then press ENTER
Choosing a Full Update:
• First updates earlier Stacker files.
• Then defragments the drive.
• Recompresses the data using Stacker's improved compression technology to
give you up-to-date optimum compression.
If you select Qui ck Update, Stacker updates any earlier files but does not
defragment or recompress any files on the drive. To take advantage of Stacker's
compression, recompress the drive later to improve compression. To do so, you
can use the Stacker Optimizer** tool through the Stacker DOS Toolbox. Just select
Full-MaxSpace as the optimization type.
Stacker's Optimizer uses extended memory while defragmenting your Stacker
drives. Stacker Optimizer uses as much extended memory as it can, thus reducing
the amount of conventional memory it needs.
**
Stacker Optimizer is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
433
Note: If your system does not use extended memory, the Optimizer uses
conventional memory.
For more detailed information about memory requirements, refer to "Using DPMS
with Stacker" on page 462.
Converting DBLSPACE or DRVSPACE Drives
If you have DBLSPACE or DRVSPACE drives compressed by:
• PC DOS's SuperStor/DS (Versions 6.1 and 6.3)
• Microsoft's DoubleSpace (Versions 6.0 and. 6.2)
• Microsoft's DriveSpace (Version 6.2.2)
Stacker Setup automatically converts them to Stacker drives. The drives must be
mounted before Stacker can convert them. Refer to your original compression
product's documentation for mounting details.
Stacker and another compression program cannot both work on the same system.
After you install Stacker, you will not have access to the data on unmounted drives
compressed by other products. You must first mount the drives, temporarily or
permanently, and then run either DCONVERT or HCONVERT (for previous versions
of Stacker). For information about these commands, type hel p at the DOS
command prompt followed by the name of the command (for example, help
dconvert).
During Stacker Setup, when it encounters mounted drives compressed by other
software, Stacker Setup lists the drives it converts.
Setup will convert the following Dbl/DrvSpace hard drive(s) to
Stacker drive(s):
C, D
Setup autOMatically:
1) Restarts your COMputer.
2) ~sks if you wish to perforM a safety check of each drive.
Ue recoMMend that you answer Yes to this question.
3) Converts each DbIlDrvSpace drive.
4) Restarts your COMputer.
Choose Convert to begin conversion.
434
PC DOS User's Guide
When Stacker builds a compressed file on one of your existing uncompressed fixed
or removable disks (called the host drive after compression is completed), Stacker
remaps your drives.
When you select Convert, Stacker restarts your computer, runs CHKOSK, and
offers to run a base-level safety check to make sure none of your data was
corrupted by previous compression. Press ENTER to answer Yes. Ensuring your
data's safety takes only about two seconds per megabyte. If the safety check finds
any errors and offers to fix them, let it.
Running the safety check and fixing even minor problems now helps you avoid
major problems later. After the safety check, Stacker Setup converts your
OoubleSpace/OriveSpace or SuperStor/OS drives to Stacker drives.
If you are converting compressed files from another type of compression program,
Stacker Setup may display a message that there is not enough space to convert
the files. Try moving some files to another disk or drive and rerun Stacker Setup.
If you get the same message, you may need to make more space available on the
uncompressed portion of the drive. See your other compression program's
documentation for information about how to make more uncompressed space
available. Then, rerun Stacker Setup.
Stacker's safety and compression features are now installed on your computer. To
take advantage of Stacker's compression, you will want to recompress the data on
the converted drive. You can run the Stacker Optimizer from the Stacker Toolbox
and select Full-MaxSpace. Until you have optimized the drive, each time you start
the computer, Stacker reminds you to do so to get the best possible compression
and safeguards for your data.
Converting Removable Disks
Stacker's Setup converts only mounted, fixed OoubleSpace/OriveSpace or
SuperStor/OS (OBLSPACE) drives. However, Stacker's DCONVERT program
easily converts a removable disk, such as a floppy disk, a Bernoulli, or a SyQuest.
This program works only under DOS.
For this example, let's assume that drive G: is a Bernoulli drive that was
compressed with SuperStor/OS. In the conversion procedure, you will check the
drive for any pre-existing problems, run a program called OCONVERT to convert
the drive, and then mount the new Stacker drive.
Because it is not yet a Stacker drive, drive G does not appear in Stacker's drive
map.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
435
The following procedure assumes you have already installed Stacker.
To use the DCONVERT program to convert the drive and mount the new
Stacker drive:
1. Check for any pre-existing problems.
2. If you are in Windows, you must exit to DOS because this procedure works
only under DOS.
3. Insert the removable disk into its drive.
4. Check the drive for any pre-existing problems. For this example, at the DOS
command prompt, you would type:
ehkdsk g:
5. Press ENTER.
Let the DOS CHKDSK utility fix any problems it finds.
To convert the drive to a Stacker drive:
1. Find the name of the compressed volume file by typing:
dir g: lah
2. Press ENTER.
3. Look for a filename such as DBLSPACE.OOO. Note the name to use in the next
step.
4. At the DOS command prompt, type:
dconvert Ie g:\dblspaee.000
where DBLSPACE.OOO is the drive to be converted to a Stacker drive.
5. Press ENTER.
CAUTION:
Do not interrupt the conversion process! If you do not let DCONVERT finish,
you may lose data.
DCONVERT converts the drive into a Stacker drive. The name of Stacker's
''volume file" is STACVOL.DSK.
436
PC DOS User's Guide
To mount the drive as a Stacker drive:
1. Ensure that the removable disk is in its drive.
2. From the DOS command prompt, type:
config
3. Press ENTER.
4. Allow the program to make changes to your STACKER.INI file.
5. Restart your computer.
To recompress your data with the Stacker Optimizer:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. Press ENTER.
3. Select Stacker Optimi zero
4. Select the drive you want to recompress.
Stacker 4.0 for Windows & DOS
,
Stacker Toolbox
Ui
in
FI for help.
.
~L"
After a quick optimization. each file
is stored ill one continuous piece on
the disk. Free space may sti 11 be
scattered t1lroughout· the disk.
Arrows eU) to select.
Fie to exit.
5. Select Full-MaxSpace.
Stacker recompresses the data on the selected drive.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
437
Monitoring Your Drives from DOS
After Stacker is installed, you do not have to do anything else. But, if you want to
check how a drive is doing or modify Stacker settings, you can. Stacker's Toolbox
is your gateway to Stacker tools.
You will learn how to:
• Use the Stacker DOS Toolbox to perform Stacker ta?ks when you are not using
Windows.
• Use the Stacker Windows Toolbox to:
Get drive information and perform Stacker tasks.
Interpret the Toolbox gauges.
View Stacker information about your files and drives from the Windows File
Manager.
Both the Stacker DOS Toolbox and the Stacker Windows Toolbox are described in
the following sections.
The Stacker DOS Toolbox lets you monitor your Stacker drives from DOS. The
Toolbox contains Stacker's most commonly used tools.
Once you select a tool
on the left, the information
on the right explains
how to use it.
...
Fl for help.
Then, for more information,
press F1 for help.
438
PC DOS User's Guide
To use the Stacker DOS Toolbox:
1. If the Stacker directory is not already in your PATH statement, change to your
Stacker directory first.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
and press ENTER.
3. Using the UP ARROW or the DOWN ARROW, highlight the tool, and press
ENTER, or press the highlighted letter of the tool.
4. Follow the directions on the screen for choosing options. You can press F1 to
get help at anx time.
The following table summarizes the tools in the Toolbox.
Use this tool ...
To do this ...
Compress Drive
Run Stacker Setup to compress additional hard disks or diskettes.
Compress Floppy
Compress the available free space on diskette or other removable
diskettes.
Uncompress
Uncompress your Stacker drive and reverse the Stacker Setup
process.
Check Integrity
Check the integrity of your Stacker drive and fix any errors.
Compression Report
Display compression and disk usage information.
Stacker Optimizer
Defragment or recompress files on your Stacker drive.
Stacker Tuner
Control the balance between how tightly and how quickly Stacker
compresses data after Stacker Setup.
Change Drive Size
Increase the Stacker drive size or make more compressed space.
Expected
Compression
Change the expected compression ratio for your Stacker drive.
Passwords
Assign a password to your Stacker drive for read/write or read-only
access or remove an existing password.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
439
Using the Stacker Tools (DOS and Windows)
Stacker has a complete set of tools for compressing additional data, improving your
computer's performance, and protecting your data. This section describes how to
use tools from the Stacker Toolbox. You will find information about:
• Compressing your data whether it is on another hard disk, a diskette, or
another removable drive.
• USing a compressed diskette (or other removable) on computers with or without
Stacker by running Stacker Anywhere.
• Improving your Stacker drive's performance by tuning, defragmenting, or
recompressing.
• Protecting your Stacker drives by ensuring the safety of your data and limiting
access with passwords.
Compressing Additional Drives
After installing Stacker, you can compress data on another hard disk or on
removables, such as diskettes or opticals.
Compressing Hard Disks
When you set up Stacker, you may have left some partitions uncompressed on your
disk. Or, perhaps you have added another hard disk to your computer.
From DOS, you can use the Compress Drive command in the Stacker DOS
Toolbox to compress data on another partition or on another hard disk.
To compress another hard disk:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose the Compress Drive tool.
Stacker Setup begins.
If Stacker detects any terminate-and-stay resident programs loaded in memory
that might interfere with compressing your disks and prompts you for a
response as to whether you want to remove them temporarily.
440
PC DOS User's Guide
.
0
I
;
SETUP
II
Setup can disable any programs loaded in memory
by AUTOEXEC.BAT that might interfere with
compressing your disk.
Choose Restart to let Setup take care of this.
3. Select Restart if you want Stacker Setup to take care of them.
4. When prompted, choose the drive to compress.
5. To compress existing data on the disk, choose Ent; re Dr; ve.
6. To create a new Stacker drive from the free space on the disk, choose Free
Space. You will have to specify how much free space to use on the disk.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen.
For an overview of the Stacker DOS Toolbox, see "Monitoring Your Drives from
DOS" on page 438.
From Windows, select an uncompressed drive, if necessary, to make the Compress
tool available; then, select the Compress tool. After Stacker Setup begins, choose
OK when prompted to exit Windows and continue the steps above under DOS,
starting with step 4.
Adding New Drives
Here's what happens when you add another drive to your system. When DOS
loads, it assigns drive letters to recognized hardware, such as hard drives. If you
have one hard drive (C) and you compress it with Stacker, an<;J you add another
drive, DOS assigns it the next letter (D).
When you use Stacker to compress the data on a hard disk, such as drive C,
Stacker creates an uncompressed drive that works in concert with the original drive.
Stacker drive letter assignments begin after the other DOS drive letter assignments.
Because letters C and 0 have been ass'igned, Stacker drive letters adjust. The
next drive letter (E) is assigned to the uncompressed drive that works with drive C.
You 'still find your data on drive C, and your new hard disk is drive D.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
441
To see all your drive letters and their corresponding Stacker drive letters, at the
DOS command prompt, type:
stacker
If you add a software-driven removable drive or one that requires a specific drive
letter, you will need to modify Stacker's configuration. See "Working with Advanced
Stacker" on page 455, for the procedures.
Compressing Diskettes (or Other Removables)
Use Stacker to compress your diskettes or other types of removables, too. Why be
. content with a standard 1.4MB diskette when Stacker can turn it into approximately
a 3.4MB diskette. You can use these diskettes anywhere, even on computers that
do not have Stacker.
Most users format several diskettes at a time. It is just as easy to compress
several diskettes at the same time, so have several diskettes ready to use.
You can use either the Stacker DOS Toolbox or the Stacker Windows Toolbox to
compress diskettes or removables.
To compress a removable or a diskette:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose Compress Dri ve and press ENTER.
If Stacker detects TSRs, it will prompt you for a response as to whether you
want to remove them temporarily. If Stacker removes them, the system must
be rebooted before Stacker Setup lists drives you can compress.
Note: If you are using OS/2, any files shared by DOS and OS/2 should not be
compressed. A warning message appears if OS/2 files are detected.
3. Following the removal of TSR programs and reboot of the system, insert the
removable or diskette into the diskette drive.
4. Select the drive where you inserted the removable diskette (usually drive A or
B) to let Stacker create and verify the drive.
5. Select Continue.
6. When Stacker Setup asks if you want to compress the Entire Disk or just the
Free Space, select Enti re Dri ve,
442
PC DOS User's Guide
If you want to compress empty diskettes using this procedure, select Free
Space. If you should choose to compress only free space, decide how much of
the free space you want to compress.
7. Then select Compress to continue. Answer any additional screen prompts.
You will see a message if the Stacker drive is created successfully.
8. If you have more diskettes to compress, select Compress Another and follow the
instructions on the screen and repeat the procedures for each diskette. '
9. When Stacker Setup finishes, restart your system by selecting Restart after all
the diskettes have been compressed.
If you want to use Windows to compress an empty diskette or a removable that
already has data on it, you can use the Stacker Windows Toolbox. Insert the
empty diskette into the disk drive. From the Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the
removable drive (usually A or B) and click on the Compress tool, and then click on
OK to let Stacker create and verify the drive. Choose OK to return to the Windows
Toolbox. Then, click once more on the removable drive to refresh the screen and
see the new compression.
After you compress a disk in a removable drive, you can use either standard disks
or Stacker disks in that drive. Stacker recognizes both formats. For more
information about AutoMounting procedures, see "Working with Advanced Stacker"
on page 455.
The Stacker-compressed disk is slightly less than 3.4MB. When you compressed
the disk, Stacker put a special program-Stacker Anywhere-onto the
uncompressed portion of the disk, which is why you have a bit less than 3.4MB.
This program lets you use the disk on non-Stacker systems. Because you already
have Stacker on your system, you do not need to use this program. But, if you
want to use the disk on a computer that does not have Stacker, you can use
Stacker Anywhere to access your data.
Using Stacker Anywhere on Non-Stacker Systems
If you try to use a Stacker-compressed diskette on a non-Stacker system, you will
not see your data files.
Note: If you have Stacker on your system, use the Stacker tools instead of
Stacker Anywhere to work with your data files.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
443
Mounting a Drive on a System Without Stacker
First you need to mount the drive so it can recognize Stacker's format. How can
you mount a drive on a system that does not have Stacker? Use the Stacker
Anywhere program that Stacker conveniently loaded onto the disk during
compression.
To mount a Stacker Anywhere drive under DOS:
1. If you are using Windows, you must exit Windows completely.
2. Change to the drive where you insert your diskettes or removable.
3. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stacker drive:
where drive: is the letter of the drive you want to mount.
This is a temporary mount. If you restart your system, you will have to remount the
drive.
When you use Stacker Anywhere to mount a drive under Windows, the data on the
disk is available only from Windows. If you try to view the data from DOS, DOS
reports that the drive is no longer valid. If you want the data to be accessible from
either Windows or DOS, mount the drive under DOS.
To unmount a Stacker Anywhere drive under DOS:
1. Change to the drive where you insert your diskettes, or removables.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
exit
Each time, type ex; t to unmount the last drive that Stacker Anywhere mounted.
This is a temporary unmount. If you restart your system, the drive will not be
remounted. For information on permanently mounting a drive, refer to
"AutoMounting a Removable Diskette Drive" on page 465.
If you used Windows to mount the drive, you will need to unmount it from Windows.
444
PC DOS User's Guide
To mount a Stacker AnyWhere drive under Windows:
1. Start Windows File Manager.
2. Insert the Stacker removable diskette into the disk drive.
3. Click on the drive icon for that drive.
The Windows File Manager lists files on the uncompressed portion of the drive.
4. Double-click on STACKER.EXE to run the Stacker Anywhere program.
5. Click on OK to let Stacker Anywhere mount the drive.
6. Click on OK again.
7. Reselect the drive icon to refresh the Windows File Manager and access your
data files. Use the disk as you would any other disk.
The STACKER.EXE file does not appear when the drive is mounted. Instead, you
see your data files. After you start Stacker Anywhere, it stays in memory until you
exit Windows. You can mount and unmount removable drives at any time during
this Windows session. Use the icon that remains on the desktop for easy access.
Note: When the Compression Ratio gauge on the Stacker Windows Toolbox
shows 1.0 compression (none) if you insert a compressed, removable
diskette, then the drive is unmounted. Either perform a temporary mount or
AutoMount the drive to access the data on the disk. For information on how
to perform either a temporary or a permanent mount, refer to "AutoMounting
a Removable Diskette Drive" on page 465.
Unmounting a drive
If you need to unmount a Stacker Anywhere drive, the procedure will depend on
how you mounted the drive. If you mounted the drive from DOS, you must
unmount the disk under DOS.
To unmount a Stacker Anywhere drive under Windows:
1. Start Windows File Manager.
2. Insert a compressed removable diskette into the diskette drive, if necessary.
3. Click on the drive.
4. Press ALT+TAB until you see the Stacker Anywhere icon. Choose Unmount from
the Stacker Anywhere icon's menu.
5. Click on OK.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
445
Uncompressing a Stacker Drive
Stacker's Uncompress tool takes all your files out of the Stacker drive,
decompresses them, and places them back on the uncompressed drive.
In the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose Uncompress. When you choose it,
Uncompress first checks to ensure that you have enough space for your
uncompressed data. It may ask you to remove some files to make room before it
can uncompress.
To uncompress a Stacker drive:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox menu, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW.
3. Select Uncompress, and press ENTER.
Stacker i.e for Windows & DUS
Stacker Toolbox
~~
~t;
,Ft>,::--<
"A llyour Stacker dH ves
UncoMpresstngaSta~k~~ drt VI!
"are .•. ·listed •.. Selectthe,.·one . . • ;decoMpresses·.·al.l.yo':tr·. files "and
't you want to uncoMpress.
'11 theM·, to ., the .• uncoMpresseddr iye :
.
ve
:JTJle. Stacker '.' dr i
must .haveenough
:.spacetoholdthe.uncompressed files.
:' Ifthedriveisn'tlarge)mough.>
;;iyou'llhaveto:freeupspaceby· .
ltdeletingorrnovingfUesfrom the.
L'Stacker dr i veal' ; its u nc.ompressed
drivebeforeyouuncoMpress.
,."
":':".:
"
..,."'
i After YOlt press Enter:. choose the'
'L,drivetolmCoMpress.
"H'"
",,:,,:, .:." ... "'
, :.
Fl for help.
f~
Arrows
(f.l.)
to select.
Fle to exit.
4. Select the Stacker drive you want to uncompress.
Stacker makes sure you have enough space for all your uncompressed data
and optimizes your disk in preparation for decompressing the data.
5. When the optimization is done, Stacker asks Are you SURE?? that you want to
Uncompress. Answer Yes if you really want to uncompress and press ENTER.
If this is the last Stacker drive, Stacker asks if you want to remove Stacker from
your system configuration. Select Remove Stacker to do so.
6. Press ENTER to restart your system.
446
PC DOS User's Guide
In the Stacker Windows Toolbox, the Uncompress Disk tool appears only on the
Tools menu. When you are using Windows, click on the Uncompress tool, and
then click on OK to leave Windows. The process is the same as under DOS.
Improving Stacker Drive Performance
Stacker drives can get even better performance when you maintain them in optimal
condition. In this section, you will learn how to improve the speed and
responsiveness of your Stacker drive.
You will see how to:
• Tune your system for the best balance between compression and speed.
• Optimize the Stacker drive by defragmenting it.
• Recompress data while defragmenting it by choosing Full-MaxSpace. This
process is especially important if you have upgraded Stacker or converted from
another compression product. It ensures that you get the best compression
and all Stacker's safety features.
• Increase performance by using 32-bit file access and Windows for
Workgroups**.
Tuning Your Compression
Stacker works by compressing and decompressing data as you use it. The Stacker
Tuner controls the balance between how fast Stacker works (speed) and how tightly
it compresses data (space). For Windows, the tuning is known as MaxSpeed and
MaxSpace, respectively.
Stacker Setup automatically sets the Tuner to maximum space. This gives you the
maximum compression, but Stacker's speed is a bit slower. However, most
computers today are very fast. You will probably never notice any difference in
speed. If you prefer, you can select a faster speed, but data will not compress
quite as well.
The DOS Toolbox offers three tuning settings. You can use Stacker's maximum
compression, a middle setting, or the fastest setting.
**
Windows for Workgroups is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
447
Stacker 4.0 for Windows & DOS
TUNER
Fl for Help, TAB to select then press ENTER
Or, you can fine tune your compression settings even further by editing the
STACKER.INI file. The /p=n parameter can be set to any number from 1 to 10,
where 10 is the most compression and 1 is the least.
The tuning setting you choose affects all Stacker drives on your system. Whenever
your system has to read to or write from a drive, depending on the tuning setting
you selected, you might notice some reduction in system performance.
To change compression tuning:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select Stacker Tuner.
3. Use the arrow keys to get the setting you want, and then select Conti nue.
If you have an older, slower computer, you can lower the Tuner setting to increase
. Stacker's speed. Of course, this means that you will not receive the best
compression. To keep the speed and also get maximum compression, periodically
choose Full-MaxSpace from the Stacker Optimizer to recompress all the data on
the drive.
Changing the tuning affects your entire Stacker configuration. From this point on,
any data you write to your disk is compressed using this tuning setting.
448
PC DOS User's Guide
When you are not using DOS, click on the Tune tool from the Stacker Windows
Toolbox. You can tune to 10 compression settings. Move the slider to the setting
you want or click on MaxSpace (for maximum compression) or MaxSpeed (for fastest
speed). Then, click on OK.
Statker@ Toolbox
Tune Stacker Performance
Drag to choose one of 10
settings ...
·~-·>-·-····-·-··'········1
Stacker can maximize how
fast it works (MaxSpeed) or
how much space it saves
(MaxSpaceJ •
-:-2
3
.4
-5
-6
... or click the button to _ _-+---f--l' .~..•..... !~
jump directly to either
~....
MaxSpeed or MaxSpace
Choose the driver setting
you want •
l.III!Il
Understanding Fragmentation
When you save files, DOS organizes them and writes them to the disk in areas
called clusters or allocation units. DOS tries to store each file in one continuous
location. As disks get full and file sizes change, however, DOS might not be able
to find large blocks of contiguous space. As a result, file acce~s takes longer while
DOS locates an'd keeps track of all the pieces.
Optimization reduces fragmentation on disks. If a disk is highly fragmented,
optimization will speed up file access and increase your disk's efficiency.
Optimizing a Stacker Drive
You can defragment a drive with quick or full optimization or while recompressing
the data. A quick optimization defragments the clusters, making access quicker
and easier. A full optimization defragments the files as well; it also compacts the
free space so that all the files are at one end of the disk and all the free space is at
the other. Full optimization takes much longer, of course. Choosing Full-MaxSpace
tightly recompresses all the data on the disk, along with a full optimization.
Note: Always use the Stacker Optimizer to defragment your Stacker drives. Do
not use a non-Stacker optimizer unless it has been updated to work on
Stacker drives.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
449
To optimize your Stacker drive:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select Stacker Optimi zero
3. Select the drive you want to optimize.
4. Select one of the following: Qui ck Optimi ze, Full Optimize, or Full-MaxSpace.
Do not press CTRL+ALT+DEL or reset your computer during optimization. If you
have to quit, press FlO as indicated on the screen. This leaves the disk in
usable condition.
You will see messages on the screen as the Stacker Optimizer analyzes the
drive. It reports a fragmentation level and lets you continue or exit.
If you choose to continue, Stacker Optimizer begins optimizing the drive. You
ultimately see a drive map on the screen like the following one.
The Stacker Optimizer moves data around as it defragments the drive.
5. When it is finished, follow the instructions on the screen. DOS is able to find
data more quickly after optimization.
To optimize your Stacker drive if using Windows, select the drive, and then click on
the Optimizer tool. Click on Qui ck, Full, or Full-MaxSpace. Then, click on OK.
Follow the same procedures as for DOS until you have to click on OK to leave
Windows so the Stacker Optimizer can complete its work. After Stacker Optimizer
leaves Windows, you ultimately see a drive map on the screen similar to the one for
DOS.
450
PC DOS User's Guide
Recompressing Data
The Stacker Optimizer can recompress data as it optimizes. Just choose
Full-MaxSpace to get the very best compression possible. After defragmenting and
recompressing the data, Stacker recalculates how much space is available, based
on the current status. If you have converted from an earlier Stacker drive format or
another compression product, optimizing with Full-MaxSpace gives the full benefits
of Stacker.
You will want to recompress a Stacker drive if you have:
• Converted from another compression product.
• Chosen Quick Update when you upgraded from an earlier Stacker version.
• Used Stacker for several months without your tuning set to MaxSpace.
To recompress data:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select the Optimizer tool.
3. Choose the drive to optimize, and then select Full-MaxSpace.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
If you are using Windows, select the drive and then click on the Optimizer tool.
Click on Full-MaxSpace. Then, click on OK to leave Windows so the Optimizer can
complete its work. Follow the instructions on the screen. It works much as it does
through DOS.
The Optimizer fully optimizes while recompressing all the data, so you get the most
space possible. Stacker returns you to Windows after it is finished.
Protecting Your Data
Like most computer users, you are concerned about the safety of your data.
Stacker includes many features that protect data from damage and help you correct
any problems that may occur.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
451
This is how these safety features work:
• AutoProtect looks for problems every time you start up your system and fixes
most of what it finds. Stacker automatically write-protects a disk whenever it
senses a problem.
• Check verifies Stacker drives and repairs any problems.
I.
Passwords limit access to data on your Stacker drives.
• AutoSave, if you are using Windows, maintains a copy of the Stacker drive'
header, which contains essential information that lets Stacker find your data.
Running AutoProtect
Stacker's AutoProtect feature adds an extra level of protection for your data.
AutoProtect works when you restart your system and while you use your Stacker
drive.
AutoProtect regularly scans your Stacker drive for problems. When it detects a
problem, Stacker immediately write-protects the drive to protect your data from any
further damage. Just remember: the write-protection is there for you. Your data is
still safe; Stacker has write-protected it, so you do not risk losing data by making
changes.
Stacker Setup inserts a command like this one in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
c:\stacker\check /wp
Note: C:\STACKER is the default path where your Stacker compression files are
placed during Stacker Setup-unless you specified another path during
Setup. This chapter refers only to the default Stacker Setup path in its
examples.
This command looks for write-protected Stacker drives, makes any repairs it can,
and removes the write-protection. If CHECK detects problems it cannot handle, you
will see messages that tell you what to do.
Checking Your Stacker Drives
The same processes in your computer system that cause DOS-related problems
may also cause Stacker drive problems. It is a good idea to check your drive
regularly to prevent any potential problems.
Stacker's Check tool examines your data integrity and drive integrity. When run
under DOS, Check can correct any problems that involve the Stacker structures on
the disk.
452
PC DOS User's Guide
Checking drive integrity involves several steps:
• Checking the file structures on the disk (cluster and file allocation table (FAT)
integrity) .
• Repairing any errors found.
• Checking the disk media (surface scan).
It is a good idea to run the Check tool every few weeks to verify the Stacker
structures and eliminate trouble. Check might recommend that you run DOS's
CHKDSK to solve DOS problems. Running a disk-repair utility after running
CHECK, especially if CHECK detects any problems, can capture DOS problems
as well.
Note: Under PC DOS 7, after CHKDSK tests a Stacker drive, it runs CHECK to
look for Stacker structure problems.
Take time to correct any problems identified by either CHKDSK or CHECK before
doing anything else.- If Stacker write protects the Stacker drive to protect data from
further damage, restart your computer or run CHECK again. After it fixes problems,
CHECK removes the write protection.
Checking a Disk
Stacker works at the DOS level to repair your disk. If Check detects any problems,
it tells you how to repair them.
To check the drive integrity:
1. If you are running Windows, exit Windows.
2. To open the Stacker DOS Toolbox, type the following at the DOS command
prompt:
stac
3. Select Check Integri ty and follow the instructions on the screen.
You will see messages on the DOS screen as CHECK examines the Stacker
structures. If the Stacker CHECK command finds a Stacker problem, it suggests
that you run CH ECK IF under DOS to make the repairs.
If you are using Windows, while at the Stacker Windows Toolbox, choose the drive.
Then, click on the Check tool. To make repairs, just exit to DOS and run
CHECK IF to fix the Stacker drive.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
453
Using Passwords
You can assign a password for your Stacker drive to keep your data safe from
other users. Stacker supports two types of passwords:
Read/write
Gives a user full access to the disk.
Read-only
Lets a user read and print data but does not permit any changes or
file deletions.
After you have password-protected your disk, keep the password in a safe place for
system protection. Each time Stacker mounts the drive (usually at startup), you
enter the password to gain access to the disk.
To set or change a password:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select Passwords.
The first password you assign is always a read/write password.
3. Enter the new password. Then confirm it by entering the same password
again.
4. If the drive already has a read/write password, a Read-Only field appears.
Check it to use a read-only password.
If the Type Old Password field appears, you must enter it before changing an
existing password.
454
PC DOS User's Guide
5. Type your new password in the Type New Password field, and type it once
more in the Verify New Password field.
6. Select OK to activate the password.
7. Select OK again to return to the Stacker DOS Toolbox.
If you are using Windows, from the Stacker Windows Toolbox click on the drive,
click on the Password tool, and then click on Set Password.
To remove a password:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select Password.
3. Type the current password in the Password field arid press ENTER.
4. Leave the Password field blank if you want to remove the current password,
and press ENTER.
5. Then, leave the Password field blank again to verify the removal, and press
ENTER.
If you are using Windows, from the Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the drive and
then click on the Password tool. Click on Remove Password. Follow the same steps
as for DOS. When completed, click on OK.
Working with Advanced Stacker
After Stacker is installed, you may never have to think about it again. In certain
situations, you may have to go beyond the simple Stacker Toolbox. You can tailor
Stacker's configuration for your system and learn how to:
• Change the Stacker drive size or expected compression ratio if you change
how you use Stacker.
• Examine or change Stacker'S configuration to take advantage of changes in·
your system.
• Type advanced Stacker commands at the DOS command prompt to monitor
and maintain your computer.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
455
Changing Stacker Drive Size
After Stacker Setup, the Stacker drive (the STACVOL file) contains all your data in
compressed form. The uncompressed drive still contains some uncompressed
data, such as system files, and it holds the compressed STACVOL file.
The sizes of the STACVOL and the remaining space on the uncompressed drive
are fixed relative to each other; if you make one larger, the other gets smaller.
Making a larger Stacker drive: If you move a permanent swap file to a Stacker
drive, you may want to enlarge the Stacker drive to reclaim the unused,
uncompressed space.
Making more uncompressed space: If the STACVOL file is very large and there is
little free space available on the drive, move some files to another disk or drive to
free up space within the STACVOL file. You can then shrink the Stacker drive,
which results in more space on the uncompressed drive.
You will not have to change the size of a Stacker drive very often; most users never
have to. If you get a message indicating that there is not enough compressed or
uncompressed space to do something, use the following procedure to make room.
To change the Stacker drive size:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select Change Dri ve Si ze.
3. Select the Stacker drive.
4. Select the resize option you want:
• To make the Stacker drive larger, select I ncrease Stacker dri ve size.
• To make the Stacker drive smaller, select More uncompressed space
avail abl e.
Stacker can resize a Stacker drive without defragmenting first.
456
PC DOS User's Guide
Stacker
i.e
for Windows
a
DOS
RESIZE
Choose
if you need to store more
compressed data on the Stacker drive. This choice increases the
size of your Stacker drive and decreases the amount of your
uncompressed space.
Choose
if you need more room for
uncompressed data. This choice increases the size of your
uncompressed drive and decreases the size of your STACUOL.DSK
file. Stacker adjusts the expected compression ratio so your
Stacker drive remains the same size. If the expected and actual
compression ratios are significantly different. some programs may
not report available space accurately. You can change your
expected compression ratio using the St~cker DOS Toolbox.
Arrows (t.l) to select.
F1e to exit.
5. When Stacker displays the acceptable size range, type the size you want the
final Stacker drive to be.
6. If you agree with the displayed results, select Perform changes on Stacker
dri ve. Otherwise, select Modi fy settings or Exi t. Stacker changes the
Stacker drive.
7. When prompted, press ENTER or any other key to restart your system.
If you are using Windows, you can change the Stacker drive size by selecting the
Stacker drive. From the Stacker Windows Toolbox, click on the Configure tool, click
on Change Stacker dri ve size, and then click on OK.
Click on OK again to leave Windows and complete the o·peration. From this point
on, the procedure is the same as for DOS. After changing the Stacker drive size,
Stacker returns you to Windows.
Changing Expected Compression Ratio
As you use your computer, data on your disk may compress differently than it did
when you first set up -Stacker. This may result in an actual compression ratio
signifjcantly better or worse than the expected compression ratio. Stacker Windows
Toolbox gauges and the Stacker Report show how the expected and actual
compression ratios compare. If the two ratios are far apart, some programs may
not be able to accurately project how much space is available on the disk.
Note: When you recompress by choosing Optimize, Full-MaxSpace, Stacker
analyzes the data and adjusts your expected compression ratio if you are
getting better than 2.5-to-1 compression.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
457
You can use the Stacker DOS Toolbox to change the expected compression ratio
to get more accurate free-space projections. This process does not affect the
actual compression ratio on the disk.
To change your expected compression ratio:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
stac
2. Select Confi gure Expected Compress; on.
3. If you have more than one Stacker drive, choose the drive to be changed.
4. Press any key as prompted, so Stacker can optimize the drive, if necessary.
Stacker displays a range of valid compression values, such as 1.4:5.1 .
Stacker 4.8 for Windows
;1
& DOS
Stacker 0 timizer
TJi~.m~h ..<,,,,..:., ...,;,~w»>w».w.,~,.,,j >
~'Y
~"''''Y'Y~ '~"";"N=~~X"0''''<''''
.,,-:,
""',"'v"", yy , ..,' .... ,",
YYYW ..,,,',,<,,'W",,
,<"""~ ",~,..,,,.
.~
Backup Status Gauge: The Backup Status gauge shows how much of your disk
has been backed up. Use a backup utility such as PC DOS's CPBACKUP to
regularly back up data on your disk.
Represents data that
has been backed up.
Represents data that has
not been backed up.
Note: When you back up a Stacker drive, you can perform your standard backup
procedure to back up files on the Stacker drive. If you also want to back up
the files on the uncompressed drive, back up all files except the hidden
STACVOL file. (The STACVOL file actually contains your compressed data,
which was backed up during the regular backup procedure.)
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
471
To see a map of your Stacker drives and their corresponding uncompressed drives,
at the DOS command prompt, type:
stacker
The location of the STACVOL file is in brackets.
For example, on a computer with drive C as the Stacker drive, the uncompressed
drive is typically drive D [D:STACVOL.DSK=size]. You would back up all the files
on drives C and D except the file STACVOL.DSK.
Toolbox Gauge Preferences: The Stacker Windows Toolbox gathers information
and updates gauges regularly. Each gauge has different settings because each
monitors different information. You can accept Stacker's original settings, or you
can change any of them on a gauge's Preferences screen. When you change
settings on a gauge's Preferences screen, those settings affect all your Stacker
drives.
For any gauge, you can set:
,• How often the gauge updates.
• When the gauge should flash a warning message or playa sound to alert you,
such as when your disk reaches a certain level of fragmentation.
• How the gauge will alert you-a flashing message, a sound, or both.
Click any gauge to access its Preferences
screen and adjust settings.
You can speed up or slow down how often
a gauge updates.
When your disk reaches the warning level,
the gauge can flash a warning message or
playa sound to alert you, or both.
Enable a warning sound by choosing any
.WAVfile.
472
PC DOS User's Guide
To view or change preference settings for Stacker Windows Toolbox gauges:
1. Double-click on any Stacker Toolbox gauge to open its Preferences screen.
2. Type your new settings.
3. Click on OK to activate them.
When a gauge updates, you probably will not even notice it on most computers.
However, if you are using a slower computer or if you have more than one Stacker
Windows Toolbox running, you may notice a brief delay in your applications each
time a gauge gathers information. If this occurs, set a longer time between
updates.
For example, in Disk Space Preferences, Stacker lets you set a percentage of
space as a buffer so you can be alerted when your disk fills to that point. As you
use your computer, data fills the drive. When the data fills to the buffer zone' you
set, the gauge flashes a warning message to alert you. The warning flashes even if
you have minimized the Stacker Toolbox to an icon.
If you have a sound driver installed, you may also want to select a sound to warn
you when the disk has reached the disk full zone. You can use any .WAV file, such
as the ones in your Windows directory.
Note: Stacker can only alert you when the Toolbox is open. It is a good idea to
keep a minimized Toolbox open on the desktop so Stacker can alert you
with a flashing message or sound, when necessary.
At any time, you can disable a gauge's warning or sound on the Preferences
screen. Or, you can disable them all directly from the Toolbox. On the tool bar,
click on
I:Jil to disable sounds or Iz,rl to/stop any flashing messages.
disabled, the button is crossed out
When
1'~1.
Disk Space Details: The Disk Space Details button shows you more compression
information for the files on the selected drive. When you open the Stacker Toolbox,
this button is dimmed while Stacker gathers your drive information. When the
Toolbox updates, this tool becomes available.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
473
Most users have many types of files on their systems. The actual compression you
get depends on what you have on your system. Certain files, such as games,
programs, and ZIP files cannot compress further. However, other files, such as
spreadsheets, data files, and some kinds of graphics, compress well. Stacker
collects your files and sorts them into four categories:
•
•
•
•
Precompressed data
Programs
Data
Free space
In the following example, 7% of the files are data files that compress at 4.5 to 1.
The right column, Bytes Available, shows you how much more of this kind of data
will fit. Stacker assesses all these ratios to determine your actual compression
ratio.
Data-----Programs - - - - Precompressed Data
Free Space - - - - -
USing the Stacker Menu in Windows File Manager
You can monitor compression from the Windows File Manager as well as from the
Stacker Windows Toolbox. To do so, open the Windows File Manager. Then, from
the Stacker menu, you can choose Sel ected Fil es, All Fil es, or Di sk Summary to
view compression information about the current drive.
474
PC DOS User's Guide
The Selected Files view shows compression information about files and directories
you specify.
. Selected Files From Drive
c: ,.,
~
any
any/m
any/mc
. anyicon
congrat
dspace
dspace2
person
sereenOO
setupl
.'
CompB.atio
3.6: 1
.scr
.Sel
.ser
Click to sort by:
Name - Alphabetically by file name
Type - Alphabetically by file
extensions
Size - Numerically by the size of the files
Comp Ratio - Numerically by the
compression ratios
6.8: 1
4.0: 1
4.S: 1
4.0: 1
4.0: 1
4.0: 1
.sa
.. pC(
·PC(
Click Ascending or Decending to change
the order of the sorted items
First select the files and directories in the Windows File Manager window. Then,
click on Sel ected Fil es to see the compression information for these files. You
can set the sort order of each column separately. For example, you might want the
Type of files view to be in Ascending order but see the Compression Ratio in
Descending order.
The All Files view shows how different types of files are compressing on the current
drive. For this view, you do not have to select any files. Stacker automatically
shows information about all the files for the drive, grouped by extension .
. '."
• I!
~'~
Stacker Report,~AII Files From' Drive C: ,,',' r,,':' , 'C' ,
I,:
Click to sort by:
Type - Alphabetically by file extensions
Count - Numerically by file name extensions
Bytes - Numerically by number of bytes
Camp Ratio - Numerically by the actual
compression ratios
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
475
You can also get this information from the Stacker DOS Toolbox. From the tool bar,
select Report. To print the report, select Pri nt.
The Disk Summary view presents an overview of space used and free for the
current drive. It also lists the expected and actual compression ratios.
Choose Disk Summary from the
Stacker menu in File Manager to
see this information. - - - - - - I , f + - ,
Adding a Windows Permanent Swap File
A Windows Permanent Swap File (WPSF) must remain uncompressed. Stacker
allows you to keep a permanent swap file in an uncompressed area within the
compressed Stacker drive. If you had a permanent swap file when you installed
Stacker, Stacker Setup already reserved space for it on the uncompressed drive.
You can put a permanent swap file of up to 32MB within the Stacker drive, if you
are using Windows 3.1 in Enhanced mode.
To build a permanent swap file on a Stacker drive using the Stacker Windows
Toolbox:
1. Select any Stacker drive.
2. Click on the Configure tool.
3. Click on Change swap fi 1e setti ngs.
4. Click on Change».
5. Click on the Stacker drive to hold the swap file.
6. Click on Permanent as the type.
7. Accept the recommended New Size or type a size up to 32MB. Then click on
OK.
For more information about Windows swap files, refer to your Windows
documentation.
476
PC DOS User's Guide
Increasing Stacker Performance
Stacker now works seamlessly with Windows for Workgroups 3.11 32-bit file access
(32BFA). Stacker requires no special options or configurations. You do have to
enable lazy writes, however, in your SYSTEM.INI file and turn on 32BFA.
To enable lazy writes in Windows for Workgroups:
1. From the Windows Program Manager File menu, click on Run.
2. Type the following in the Command Line text box:
sysedit
3. Select the window that contains your SYSTEM.INI file.
4. Edit this file using a text editor, such as the E Editor,
5. Locate the [386Enh] section, and add the following line, which assumes that
your Stacker drives are C, D, and E:
ForceLazyOn=CDE
6. Save the file and exit the E Editor.
After you have enabled lazy writes, you must turn on the 32-bit file access.
To turn on 32-bit file access:
1. Double-click on the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the 386 Enhanced icon.
3. Click on the Vi rtua 1 Memory button,
4. Click on the Change button.
At the bottom of the dialog box, check the 32-bit file access box. A cache size
appears in the adjacent window. Accept the default setting for now. If you
want to change it later, you can.
Note: Make sure you check the 32-bit file ,access. Checking only 32-bit disk
access does not increase performance.
5. Click on OK.
6. Then click on OK again to accept the changes and return to the Control Panel.
7. Close the Control Panel.
8. Restart Window to make the changes effective.
If you have problems initializing 32BFA, refer to Stacker's README.TXT file in the'
STACKER directory for common 32BFA workarounds.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
477
Running AutoSave
The AutoSave tool, a tool available only by using the Windows interface, stores
updated versions of headers.
Each Stacker drive has a header that contains detailed information about its
structure. Stacker needs the information in the header to access data on the drive.
When you start up your system, Stacker can automatically save a copy of all
Stacker headers.
After you turn on AutoSave, it works in the background while your computer is idle.
AutoSave works only after there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a
certain period of time. When the time comes for saving a header, AutoSave makes
sure the computer is not in use, checks out the drive, and saves a header. If you
use the computer during this time, AutoSave stops immediately, giving you full
access to your computer. When the computer is idle again, AutoSave resumes.
To speed up the time ittakes Stacker to save header information at startup, edit
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Move the line C: \STACKER\CHECK !WP so it follows the
DOS SMARTDRV.EXE line; your path should also point to the DOS
SMARTDRV.EXE instead of Windows SMARTDRV.EXE if using PC DOS 7. You
can change the frequency or time of the AutoSave and, if you prefer, you can
configure the settings for each Stacker drive individually.
To change AutoSave headings:
1. From the Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the Stacker drive.
2. Click on the AutoSave tool.
3. To enable AutoSave for that drive, click on Enabl e AutoSave.
4. To change the interval, click on Interval. Then, type or select how often
Stacker should save the header.
5. To schedule AutoSave for a particular time, click on Schedul ed and enter the
time to AutoSave.
6. To make the current setting the default, click on Set As Defaul ts.
7. To change settings to the current
de~ault,
click on Use Defaul ts.
8. To let Stacker AutoSave interrupt processing to display problems, check Enable
Warning Messages.
9. By default, AutoSave runs invisibly. To display the AutoSave icon continuously,
uncheck Run AutoSave Invisibly.
478
PC DOS User's Guide
After AutoSave has saved a header, you can be sure that your Stacker drive is in
good condition.
Using the Stacker Screen Saver
Stacker provides a special screen saver that you can use with Windows 3.1. You
can install the Stacker Screen Saver on your Windows desktop.
To install the screen saver under Windows 3.1:
1. In Windows Program Manager, double-click on the Control Panel icon.
2. From the Control Panel, double-click on the Desktop icon.
3. Under Screen Saver, click on the arrow, select the Stacker screen saver, and
click on OK.
Troubleshooting Stacker
For troubleshooting tips or procedures for some of the most common Stacker
compression problems, refer to "Stacker Compression" on page 299.
Chapter 21. Using Stacker Compression
479
480
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
PenDOS** lets you use pen-based applications as well as standard mouse-based
DOS applications on any 386** or higher computer. Computing has never been
easier because you can write, draw, and issue commands using two skills you
learned as a child: pointing and using a pen.
PenDOS lets you use the mouse as a pen. You do not need any other special
equipment to try pen computing. To get you started, PenDOS lets you use the
mouse as a pen. For instructions, see "Using the Mouse as a Pen" on page 484.
Using a pen tablet computer or externally attached digitizer tablet, you can write
naturally because PenDOS includes CIC's Handwriter** Recognition System. To
introduce you to pen computing, this version of Handwriter recognizes numbers and
symbols only. A full version of Handwriter that recognizes uppercase and
lowercase letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols is available separately
from IBM.
Installing PenDOS after Installing PC DOS
If you did not choose to use pen-based applications at initial setup, you can still
install PenDOS by rerunning PC DOS Setup using the Ie switch.
The PC DOS Setup diskettes contain everything you need to install PenDOS. You
might want to refer to Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3 before you begin the
installation of optional tools.
Note: PenDOS requires the EMM386 memory manager to run. Then, running
RAMBoost Setup allows you to install the EMM386 memory manager.
Select the EMS option on the Advanced Option screen when running
RAMSETUP.
**
**
**
PenDOS is a trademark of Communication Intelligence Corporation.
386 is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Handwriter is a trademark of Communication
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
Intelligenc~
Corporation.
481
To install PenDOS using the PC DOS Setup Ie switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into drive A or
B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The Ie switch allows you to return to the Optional Tools menu without having to
do a complete reinstallation. At this point, only the necessary files for the
optional tools for Windows will be installed.
3. After Setup for PC DOS begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Make sure you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the
initial PC DOS installation.
4. At the Optional Tools screen, press the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW until you
highlight PenDOS.
At the Optional Tools screen, there is a NO next to PenDOS.
5. Press ENTER.
You now see a selection of pen and mouse tablet drivers. Look for the name
of the tablet or pen computer you will use with PenDOS and select one of the
following:
• Your computer's tablet driver, if you have a pen tablet computer with a
self-contained digitizer.
• The proper tablet driver for your digitizer, if you have an externally attached
digitizer.
• The Digitizing Pad Emulation via Mouse tablet driver, if you will be using
your mouse as a pen.
Use the arrow keys to scroll up or down until your selection is highlighted, and
then press ENTER.
When you return to the Optional Tools menu, you now see YES next to
PenDOS.
6. Select any other optional tool you want to add at this time by highlighting an
optional tool and pressing ENTER. Repeat this step for each optional tool.
You now see YES next to the optional tools you want to install.
7. Move the cursor to highlight the following:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
482
PC DOS User's Guide
8. Press ENTER to accept the optional tool selections.
9. Continue following the instructions on the screen until the optional tools
installed.
~re
10. After your computer reboots, you need to edit your CONFIG.SYS file and add
the following line, if it is not present:
device=c:\dos\system\pendev.sys
11. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to make this change effective and restart your computer.
12. Then run RAM Boost Setup and select the EMS option.
Starting PenDOS
Before starting PenDOS, it is important to make sure you have the proper hardware
installed and the correct tablet driver selected. If you have a pen tablet computer
with a self-contained digitizer, you should have chosen that computer's tablet driver
during PC DOS Setup. Refer to "Installing PenDOS after Installing PC DOS" on
page 481 for details.
If you have an externally attached digitizer, be sure the digitizer is connected to the
proper communication port on your computer. Refer to the digitizer manufacturer's
instructions for the proper installation procedure. You should have also selected
the proper tablet driver for your digitizer during PC DOS Setup. If you will be using
your mouse as your pointing device, select the Digitizing Pad Emulation via Mouse
tablet driver during PC DOS Setup.
The DOS Setup program modifies your CONFIG.SYS file by adding the appropriate
device statement when you select PenDOS as an optional tool and then select a
tablet or mouse device.
If you do not want to modify your AUTOEXEC.BAT to have PenDOS start
automatically whenever you start your computer, you can type the PENDOS
command at the DOS command prompt each time you want to use this program.
To start PenDOS:
1. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
pendos
2. Press ENTER.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
483
Using the Pen
With PenDOS, you use the pen to write, edit, draw, select text or objects, and issue
commands such as saving or closing a file.
Hold the pen the same way you hold an ordinary pen or pencil.
• Rest your hand and forearm on the writing surface as you would when you
write on a piece of paper.
• Press the pen tip lightly against the writing surface.
The pen has two'important
features: the pen tip and
the side button.
Side Button
Pen Tip
• Pen Tip: You press the pen tip on the writing surface to write in the Writing
Window, make gestures, select text and objects, choose menu commands, and
tap the on-screen buttons.
• Side Button (some pen models): You hold down the side button with the pen
close to the writing surface to display the PenDOS menu. You also hold down
the side button while you make editing gestures, such as delete or insert.
If your pen does not have a side button, tapping the extreme upper-right corner
of the writing surface is equivalent to·holding down the side button.
USing the Mouse as a Pen
If you have a pen tablet computer or an externally attached digitizer tablet and pen,
you will not need to use your mouse as a pen. Simply install the correct tablet
driver for your hardware as explained in "Starting PenDOS" on page 483.
To use the mouse as a pen, use the Digitizing Pad Emulation via Mouse tablet
driver by selecting it during PC DOS Setup.
484
PC DOS User's Guide
If you do not have a statement about MOUSE.COM in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file,
before you start PenDOS, type mouse on the DOS command prompt to load
MOUSE.COM.
Then, when you move the mouse in PenDOS, the special "arrow" cursor displays
, the location of the pen tip. To write characters, hold down the left mouse button
while you move the mouse. Use the right mouse button as the pen's side button.
To write gestures, hold down both buttons simultaneously.
Using the PenDOS Menu
The PenDOS menu contains buttons you can tap to display the Writing Window and
the PenDOS keyboard, as well as to send ESC and ENTER to an application.
To display the PenDOS menu: press the pen tip lightly against the writing
surface while holding down the side button. The PenDOS menu appears in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
C:\PENDOS>
The PenDOS menu buttons perform the following actions:
Button
What it does
Displays a keyboard, used for entering all characters, including
non-printable characters such as CTRL, ALT, SHIFT, and function keys.
Acts like the ESC key on a keyboard.
Acts like the ENTER key on a keyboard.
Displays the Writing Window.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
485
Entering Characters
There are two ways to enter characters with PenDOS: writing in the Writing
Window and tapping keys on the PenDOS keyboard.
Using the Writing Window
The Writing Window provides a pop-up window in which you can enter and edit
characters and then send them to the DOS command prompt or to an application.
In this version of PenDOS, only numbers and symbols are recognized.
To display the Writing Window:
You can:
1. Press the pen tip lightly against the writing surface while
holding down the side button.
The PenDOS menu appears.
2. Tap the WW button on the PenDOS menu.
Or, you can:
Write the Insert gesture anywhere on the writing surface.
For information about gestures, see "Editing Characters" on
page 490.
The Writing Window appears:
Editing Line
,
Writing Area
,
rclEARIl";--.~~]· lSPAce-! ··CANceQ·
!-ser6" C:;:F] .f'M'ooeJ
Function Buttons
The Writing Window has three important areas:
• The editing line displays the characters that were entered.
• The writing area contains a row of boxes. Write one number or symbol in each
box.
486
PC DOS User's Guide
• The function buttons let you edit the cha~acters you wrote as well as send them
to an application. You can also display the PenDOS keyboard by tapping the
K button.
Button
What it does
CLEAR
Clears all characters in the Writing Window.
Deletes the last character before the cursor in the editing line, like the
BACKSPACE k.ey on a keyboard:
SPACE
Inserts a space character at the editing line cursor.
CANCEL
Closes the Writing Window without sending any characters to the
application.
SEND
Sends characters to the application, closes the Writing Window, and
returns to the application.
Works like SEND, but it also sends a carriage return after the last
character.
MORE
Sends the characters to the application and clears the editing line.
K
Displays the PenDOS keyboard.
To display the PenDOS keyboard:
tap the
K on the Writing
Window.
To return to the Writing Window from the PenDOS keyboard:
CANCEL button on the PenDOS keyboard.
tap the
Using the PenDOS Keyboard
If a DOS application does not provide mouse-aware menus or if you need to enter
non-printable characters such as ALT +F1, use the PenDOS keyboard to issue
commands. PenDOS sends the keystrokes to the application as if you had typed
them on a physical keyboard.
To display the PenDOS keyboard: hold down the pen's side button and tap the
K button on the PenDOS menu, or tap the K button on the Writing Window.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
487
Editing Line
Numeric Keypad
Function Buttons
The PenDOS keyboard has three important areas besides the standard keys:
• The editing line displays the characters that were entered.
• The numeric keypad lets you enter ASCII values. It is displayed only when the
NL (Num Lock) button is selected.
• The function buttons let you edit the characters you wrote as well as send them
to an application, or you can display the Writing Window.
The buttons on the PenDOS keyboard have the same function as the buttons
on the Writing Window:
Button
What it does
CLEAR
Clears all characters in the editing line.
Deletes the last character before the cursor on the editing line,
.
like the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard.
488
CANCEL
Closes the keyboard without sending any characters to the
appl ication.
SEND
Sends characters to the application, closes the keyboard, and
returns to the application.
MORE
Sends the characters to the application and clears the editing line.
ww
Displays the Writing Window.
PC DOS User's Guide
To use the PenDOS keyboard: use the pen to tap the keys for the desired
characters. The characters appear in the editing line.
To use special keys such as SHIFT and CTRL:
1. Tap the modifier keys. The modifier keys on the PenDOS keyboard are SHIFT,
CTRL, ALT, CL (Caps Lock), NL (Num Lock), and SL (Scroll Lock).
2. Tap the desired character that follows the modifier key.
Note: The notation appears for some control characters, function
and certain instances of ALT +character.
~eys,
For example, to enter CTRL+A, tap CTRL, and then tap A. PenDOS sends AA to the
editing Ii!le at the top of the PenDOS keyboard.
To send keystrokes to the application: tap the SEND or MORE button, or tap
the ~ key on the PenDOS keyboard. Tapping.---1 sends the contents of the
editing line, followed by a carriage return, to the application.
To enter an ASCII value:
1. Tap NL (Num Lock) to display the numeric keypad.
2. Tap ALT.
3. Tap the numbers of the ASCII code on the numeric
keypad (located on the right side of the PenDOS
keyboard).
156
£
For example, the ASCII code 156 is equivalent to the £
character.
The ASCII code and the associated character appear
above the numeric keypad.
4. Tap ALT again.
The value is sent to the editing line.
To display the Writing Window:
tap the WW button on the PenDOS keyboard.
To return to the PenDOS keyboard from the Writing Window:
CANCEL button on the Writing Window.
To remove the PenDOS keyboard from the screen:
the PenDOS keyboard.
tap the
tap the CANCEL button on
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
489
Editing Characters
To edit the characters in the Writing Window, on the PenDOS keyboard, or in an
application, you make gestures with the pen. Gestures are simple pen strokes that
resemble proofreaders' marks.
Some gestures have the same effect in most DOS applications. These are called
universal gestures. For example, the Delete gesture is a universal gesture for
deleting a single character. Not all gestures are supported in every application.
For example, if the application does not have a command for undoing the last
action, the Undo gesture has no effect in that application.
Note: You can use gestures if your pen does not have a side button. Tapping the
extreme upper-right corner of the writing tablet is equivalent to holding down
the side button.
The following table describes the PenDOS gestures:
Gesture
l.:• .
i[;:•. ~.~:.~
~:
r••.. •:•. • .• . •. . •,.• . . • :.•. . . .:•. . . .:.'.:. . .•.•:,.
i·:~••.J.l4l~< . . '.:' .• . :.:.
490
PC DOS User's Guide
What it does
Universal
gesture
Deletes a single character.
Yes
Deletes the highlighted block of text.
Yes
Displays the Writing Window and
inserts text at this location.
Yes
Inserts a space.
Yes
Gesture
~
.~/
cS~
p/
~
~
What it does
Universal
gesture
Simulates clicking the right mouse
button. To write the Tap gesture, hold
down the pen's side button and tap
the pen tip lightly against the writing
surface.
Yes
Undoes the last action.
No
Pastes previously copied text.
No
Copies the highlighted block of text.
No
Most gestures have hot spots, shown in the table as a black dot on the gesture
stroke. The hot spot indicates where you want the action to occur. For example,
the hot spot for the Insert gesture is at the tip; that is, when you write the Insert
gesture, make sure the tip is centered on the character to the right of where you
want to insert.
The following gestures do not have hot spots, so you can write them anywhere on
the writing surface:
•
•
•
•
Undo
Delete a block
Copy a block
Tap
For your convenience, PenDOS provides gesture macros used by many popular
applications. A macro is a sequence of keystrokes that executes a command.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
491
To write a gesture:
1. Press the pen tip lightly against the writing surface, while holding down the side
button.
2. Write the gesture.
The gesture should remain within a 2.5-inch by 2.5-inch square.
3. Lift the pen from the writing surface.
\
Editing Characters in the Writing Window and PenDOS Keyboard
This section describes how to edit the characters that appear in the editing line of
both the Writing Window and the PenDOS keyboard.
.
To delete a character:
hold down the side button and write
one of the delete gestures over the character in the editing
line.
1'11 X t
The character is deleted. Any characters to the right move
over to close the space.
To insert a character:
1. In the editing line on the Writing Window or PenDOS keyboard, place the
cursor by tapping the character to the right of the position where you want to
insert the new character.
For example, to insert a "7" before the "8" in the following illustration, place the
cursor on the "8."
1 234 5 6 BJ9 0
Write Numbers Only
IIIIIII III IIIIII
The insertion point is highlighted, and all characters in the writing area
disappear.
2. Write the new character in the writing area, or tap the new character on the
PenDOS keyboard.
492
PC DOS User's Guide
To insert a space:
1234567~
There are two ways to insert a space:
• Write the Insert Space gesture in the editing
line.
Make sure the hot spot is centered on the
character to the right of where you want the
space to appear.
• Tap the character in the editing line that is to
the right of where you want the space to
appear and then tap the SPACE button.
To clear the writing area: hold down the side button and
write one of the delete gestures anywhere in the writing area:
Note: The delete gestures clear the writing area only. To
clear the editing line as well as the writing area, tap
the CLEAR button.
Working with Applications
This section explains how to work with standard mouse-aware applications using
PenDOS.
Starting Applications
You can start applications whether you are using PC DOS Shell or not.
To start an application if you are using PC DOS Shell:
1. Tap twice rapidly with the pen (double-tap) on the drive that contains the
application you want to start.
2. Double-tap the directory name.
If the directory does not appear in the scroll list, scroll down by using the scroll
arrows or thumb or by making a fast, vertical pen stroke that starts anywhere
and extends below the window. Do not hold down the side button when you
make the pen stroke.
3. Double-tap the application's file name. Executable files normally have the
extension .EXE or .BAT.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
493
To start an application if you are not using PC DOS Shell:
1. At the DOS command prompt, hold down the side button and press the pen tip
lightly against the writing surface.
The PenDOS menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen.
2. Tap the
K button to display the
PenDOS keyboard.
3. Go to the directory that contains the file by tapping cd \directory_name and then
tapping the .-.J key.
If you make an entry mistake, see "Editing Characters" on page 490.
4. Start the application by tapping the keys for filename and then tapping the
key.
.-.J
Note: You can also start applications by typing commands on a physical
keyboard.
Pointing and Selecting
. To position the application cursor: lightly tap the writing surface with the pen
tip. Tapping with the pen tip is equivalent to clicking the left mouse button.
To select menu items:
tap the item with the pen tip.
To select a block of text or group of objects:
1. Tap one end of the selection and keep
the tip in contact with the writing surface;
then, drag the pen to the other end of the
selection.
2. Lift the pen from the writing surface.
This is equivalent to holding down the
mouse button and dragging the mouse.
Note: These instructions apply only to
mouse-aware applications ,that support
block highlighting.
494
PC DOS User's Guide
Editing Characters in the Application
To delete a character: hold down 'the side button and write
one of the delete gestures. Make sure the hot spot is
centered on the character you want to delete.
.;vI \ f
To delete a highlighted block or group of objects: hold
down the side button and write the Delete Block gestllre.
To insert a character using the Writing Window:
1. Hold down the side button and write the Insert gesture in
the application file. Make sure the hot spot is centered at
the location where you want to insert the character.
The Writing Window appears.
2. Write the characters you want to insert.
3. Tap
.....J , SEND, or MORE.
To insert a character using the PenDOS keyboard:
1. Place the cursor by tapping the character to the right of
the position where you want to insert the new c~aracter.
2. Display the Pen pas keyboarq by holding down the pen's
side button and tap the K button on the PenDOS menu.
3. Use the pen to tap the keys for the desired characters.
4. Tap the
.....J key, the SEND, or MORE button.
To insert a space: hold down the side button and write the
Insert Space gesture. Make sure the hot spot is centered at
the; Idcation where you want to insert the space.
To paste previo!Jsly copied text or objects: hold down the
side button and write the Paste gesture in the application file.
Make sure the hot sp()t is centered at the location where you
want to paste the te~ or objects.
I.··.· •. ".:. ••. :~/.,/ .: :
~
' ;>:~." '. :'
~
\,~,.../
..':.•......~~'~,
.: • '.: ' ...•.i(.\.
•':.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
495
To undo the previous command: hold down the side
button and write the Undo gesture anywhere on the writing
surface.
Note: The Undo gesture is not a universal gesture; it might
not work in all applications.
Using an Off-the-Shelf Application
You can use PenDOS with most of the DOS applications you already have. See
.
the following example.
To use PenDOS with Borland's Quattro Pro** spreadsheet application:
1. In Quattro Pro, tap a cell to highlight it.
To select a group of cells, drag the pen.
2. Hold down the side button with the pen close to the writing surface to display
the PenDOS menu.
3. To enter characters in the highlighted cell, write the Insert gesture, or tap
or
WW
K on the PenDOS menu.
• In the Writing Window, write numbers in the boxes and then tap
SEND, or MORE.
.....J ,
• On the PenDOS keyboard, tap the keys of the characters you want to enter
and then tap ENTER (.....J).
4. To clear a cell, highlight the cell and write one of the delete gestures.
5. To delete a cell or several cells, highlight the cells and write the Delete Block
gesture.
6. To copy a cell or several cells, highlight the cells and write the Copy gesture.
7. To undo the last action, write the Undogesture.
Note: Undo must be enabled.
** Quattro Pro is a trademark of Borland International, Inc.
496
PC DOS User's Guide
Aligning the Tablet
If the ink does not seem to line up with the tip of your pen, you can align the tablet.
To align the tablet:
1. Start the PSETUP.EXE file.
Note: Follow the instructions in "Working with Applications" on page 493. You
will find the PSETUP.EXE file in the C:\DOS\SYSTEM directory.
The following window appears:
2. Use the pen to tap the center point of the cross-hairs.
Hold the pen at the same angle you do when you write.
3. Test the alignment by writing anywhere outside the box that contains the
cross-hairs. To clear the ink, tap the CLEAR button.
4. If the alignment is still not precise, tap the center point again.
5. When the tablet is aligned to your satisfaction, tap the SAVE button to save the
new alignment and exit the program.
To exit the alignment program'without saving any changes, tap the CANCEL
button.
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
497
Recognition Tips
This section contains tips to help you ensure that PenDOS recognizes all of your
characters.
Separate Your Characters
The Writing Window contains boxes to help you separate the characters. Write one
character in each box.
Closing Loops
Make sure the loops are fully closed. An open "9" could be
misinterpreted as a "4."
4
VB
9
Retracing
To avoid confusion, do not retrace characters. PenDOS
interprets retraces as a new character.
I
VB
I
Writing Slashes and Parentheses
Write slashes and parentheses so that they cross both the top
and bottom lines of the box.
498
PC DOS User's Guide
III ( I ) I
Character Variations
PenDOS uses CIC's Handwriter Recognition System. This section lists the
characters that this version of Handwriter recognizes and how to write them. When
the direction and sequence of the pen strokes is important, arrows indicate the
direction of the pen stroke and numbers indicate the sequence of the strokes.
Horizontal lines represent the top and bottom lines of the boxes in the PenDOS
Writing Window.
Numbers
1f
1f 1* 1
22)1 (21
3~1
@1
Ie¢ 2~ 1~21
It
1 2 1
L~
L5 L5 L5
~~6
17 1; 11.
(f? (f? ~ 1cfJI
1~
1cn
1((J1
ra2
Symbols
~ 2r
J.
1-9'
Y
A2
«
1
»
3~2
37;..
12 1 4
\(
)/
•1
~1
1~2
3~
1_
2"'::;
Chapter 22. Using PenDOS
499
500
PC DOS User's Guide
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
A computer having Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
(PCMCIA) support provides sockets into which you can insert credit card-sized
devices called PC Cards. A PC Card*" lets you extend the capabilities of your
computer by adding functions, such as:
•
•
•
•
Communications (FAX/Modems, Token Ring, Ethernet, 3270, and 5250)
Memory (SRAM and Flash)
Rotating media (ATA disk drives)
Solid state disk drives
PC DOS provides PCMCIA support through PhoenixCARD Manager Plus
Version 3.01 from Phoenix Technologies, Ltd. This product is referred to as PCM+.
This latest version provides user-friendly, menu-interfaced utilities for the setup,
configuration, and maintenance of your system. Y9ur specified configuration is
stored in an initialization file, PCM.INI, which can be modified through these utilities.
Notes: ,
1. You can also edit the PCM.INI file in a limited way using a text editor, such as
the E Editor supplied with PC DOS. Refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command
Reference for more information about the PCM.INI file.
2. For prior DOS versions of Phoenix PCMCIA, the command-line switches
previously specified are no longer part of the command-line syntax. Everything
is specified through the PCM utilities that modify the PCM.INI file.
This latest version of PCMCIA provides the following features:
• An uninstall program that backs up your current system PC DOS and Windows
configuration files as .PCM files. Any command-line statements for prior
versions of PCMCIA are commented out of the current configuration files. This
ensures that the majority of conflicts are avoided when installing this new
version of PCMCIA over an existing PCMCIA system.
• A Setup program that allows the new user to quickly and easily install PCMCIA
while also providing a full range of customizing features for the sophisticated
user.
• Support for PC DOS multiple-configurations.
*"
PC Card is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
501
• Support for Microsoft's Flash File System II (FFSII) device driver.
TheMS Flash device driver is not suppli~d yvith PC QOS. you cannot use this
interface without the device driver. The int~rface driver is included in PC DOS
so that, if you have Microsoft's Flash support, you can use it with the PC DOS
PCMCIA support.
• Easy-to-use information and configuration utilities for managing PC Cards in
both PC DOS and Windows environments.
• Hot insertion and removal of PC cards without the need to reboot.
• Support for Power Management.
• Support for the largest number of PCMCIA cards: Flash Memory, SRAM
Memory, FAX/Modem, ATA, hard disks, SCSI, LAN, and other I/O Cards. See
"Configuring PC Cards after the Original Installation" on page 524 for
information about configuring the?e cards after PCM Plus is initialized on your
system.
Installing Phoer,jx PCMCIA Support ~ft~r Installing PC DOS
If you did not choose Phoenix PCMCIA Support at initial installation, you can still
install it by rerunning PC DOS Setup using the Ie. switch.
The PC DOS installation diskettes c~ntain everything you need to install Phoenix
PCMCIA Support. You might want to refer to Chapter 1, "Installing" on page 3
before you begin.
.
During Setup, PC DOS checks whether your computer has Windows 3.1 installed.
If you do not have Windows 3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
provided with PC DOS for Windows, you should make sure you install in this order:
1. Install PC DOS as you normally would, selecting the optional tools you want
from the list provided. You will not see any of the optional tools for Windows
listed if you do not have Windows 3.1 installed already.
2. After you have installed PC DOS, install Windows 3.1 as you normally would.
3. Install PC DOS again using the Setup Ie switch after DOS and Windows have
both been installed.
502
PC DOS User's Guide
To install Phoenix PCMCIA Support using the Setup
Ie switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into
drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
The Ie switch allows you to return to the optional tools-selection m'enu without
having to do a complete reinstallation. At this point, only the necessary files for
the optional tools for Windows will be installed.
3. After Setup begins, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Make sure
you specify the same "Install to Path" as you did when you did the initial
PC DOS installation.
At the Optional Tools screen, you see a NO next to Phoenix PCMCIA Support.
4. Either press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you highlight Phoenix
PCMCIA Support and then press ENTER, or click on Phoenix PCMCIA Support
if you are using a mouse.
You now see YES next to Phoenix PCMCIA Support.
5. Select other optional tools you want to install at this time by highlighting the
name of each optional tool and pressing ENTER for each item, or click on each
optional tool if using a mouse.
6. Either move the cursor to highlight the following:
Opt; ons correct. Cont ;·nue Setup.
and press ENTER or click on this line if using a mouse.
7. Continue to follow the instructions displayed on the screen until the optional
tools are installed.
Starting PCMCIA
If you choose the PCMCIA optional tool during the installation of PC DOS 7, the
files for this tool are copied to the PCM directory of the drive and path you
specified. The exception is the Flash File System. PC DOS includes an interface
driver to the MS Flash File System. If you have this Flash File System, you can
use it with the PCMCIA supplied with PC DOS.
Chapter 23, Using PCMCIA Support
503
To successfully activate PCMCIA, you need to:
• Do one of the following before running PCMDINST.
If RAMBOOST is already installed and configured:
Edit the CONFIG.SYS file. Remove both the RAM BOOST statement and the
EMM386 statement.
If RAMBOOST is not already installed and configured:
Before you install RAM Boost, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file and remove
the EMM386 statement.
After running PCMDINST, running RAMBoost Setup re-adds these statements
back into the CONFIG.SYS file for you and configures your system based on
your current PCMCIA configuration. If you are using hardware other than an
IBM Thinkpad, refer to the procedures in "Running RAMBoost with PCMCIA
(Non-IBM Thinkpad)" on page 528.
I
• Uninstall prior version of PCMCIA (including Phoenix). This is automatically
done for the majority of PCMCIA programs by running PCMDINST.EXE.
However, if you are using client or point enablers shipped with your PC Cards,
you need to manually remove them.
• Have access to the following information to help you during the setup and
configuration routines:
- The number of PCMCIA sockets your computer possesses, including the
number of sockets associated with your docking bay station, if you have
one.
- The full path to the directory where you installed Windows. If you are
uncertain, look for the WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files. The directory
containing these files is your Windows directory.
-
If you are using multiple configurations, be aware that PCMCIA changes
your CONFIG.SYS file and installs itself in the configuration that you have·
designated to start when you turn on your computer.
You must boot with the desired environment you want PCMCIA to run
under.
-
If you are using a memory manager other than EMM386, you must
manually exclude UMB memory for Card Services and ATA support and
reset the system.
-
If you intend to run RAM BOOST with PCMCIA, see "Running RAM Boost
with PCMCIA (Non-IBM Thinkpad)" on page 528.
If you did not specify the PCMCIA optional tool during the initial install, you can
install itlater by rerunning PC DOS Setup using the Ie switch.
504
PC DOS User's Guide
Setting Up PCMCIA (PCMDINST)
To begin the setup and configuring process for PCMCIA:
1. Remove any PC-cards from the sockets.
2. Change to your DOS directory (for example, C:\DOS) and type:
pcmdinst
This is generally done only once. The only other time you might have to use
the PCMDINST command is if PCMCIA is removed from your system and you
have to reinstall. For future configuration changes, you must use PCMSETUP.
A'message is displayed, indicating that your current PCMCIA configuration will
be reconfigured and that your current system files will be backed up. Type Y to
answer Yes and continue the process.
If you are using EMM386 in your CONFIG.SYS file, it is commented out and
replaced by a generic one. After the installation is complete, copy any
Excludes for I/O cards from your old EMM386 line to the new one.
PCMSETUP adds the Excludes for Card Services and ATA Support, as
necessary.
PCMINST is automatically started, and the Phoenix Card Manager Installation
screen is displayed. This utility determines if your system has a PCMCIA
controller supp'orted by PC DOS. If found, the controller type is displayed on
the PCMCIA Controller Found screen. If the controller in the system is not
supported, an error message is displayed and PCMINST stops.
Upon completion, PCMINST automatically starts PCMSETUP so that you can
continue to configure your system.
Configuring Your PCMCIA System (PCMSETUP)
Use the following steps each time you need to reconfigure your computer.
To use these steps independent of the initial installation:
1. From the directory in which PCMCIA resides (for example, C:\DOS\PCM), type:
pcmsetup
2. Follow the instructions on the PCMCIA SETUP screen.
If you have configured your system before, the existing configuration message
is displayed.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
505
3. Press any key to continue.
The Socket information screen is displayed.
4. Verify the default number of sockets and press ENTER.
If the number of sockets is not correct, specify the correct value (including
sockets in a docking station).
The Windows screen is displayed with the Yes selection highlighted.
5. Press ENTER to select Yes, if you are going to use PCMCIA cards under the
Windows program. A default path statement screen is displayed. If the path
shown is correct, press ENTER. If it is not correct, specify'the correct path, and
press ENTER.
Or, select No and press ENTER.
The Advanced Setup screen is displayed.
Designating Values on the Advanced Setup Screen
The Advanced Setup screen is displayed with default values shown that apply to
most system configurations. Unless you are very familiar with memory
management, accept the defaults.
IRQ .................
CIS Window Address ..
Token Ring Speed ....
Card Settle Tine ....
506
PC DOS User's Guide
(0-15)
(COOOH-EFOOH)
(1/16)
(ns)
10
DFOO
1
660
To designate values on the Advanced Setup Screen:
1. If your cards require values that are different than the default values displayed,
specify values for the following:
IRQ
The default value is 10. You can accept this value and
not change it. Card insertion and extraction are
recognized within the system through polling (instead
of interrupts), which provides greater system
compatibility.
CIS Window Address The default value shown relates to your system's
current boot configuration. The value can be different
for each system. Unless you understand memory
management, accept the default value.
If you need to manually specify this value, it requires a
4K memory window; hence, you must have 4K of free
memory from the start address. For example, if you
specify COOO, you must have the range of COOO-COFF
available.
Token Ring Speed
The default speed is 4. If you do not have a Token
Ring Network Card, accept the default. If you do have
a Token Ring Network card, choose 4 or 16,
depending on your network setup.
Card Settle Time
The default is 660, representing milliseconds. This
value specifies the amount of elapsed time after a card
is inserted before Card Services accesses the socket.
2. Press ENTER to accept all the values listed.
If you select a value that conflicts with an existing driver or device, a conflict
warning is displayed. You are returned to the Advanced Setup screen, and you
can either:
• Enter another valid value.
• Or, exit PCMSETUP, resolve the conflict, reboot your computer after
resolution, and then rerun PCMSETUP.
You must resolve the conflict before continuing the configuration. When there
are no conflicting values, the Flash File System screen is displayed.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
507
Designating Values for the Flash File System
The Flash File System screen is displayed with Yes highlighted as the default.
To designate values for the Flash File System:
1. Press ENTER if you are using the MS Flash File System. Accepting Yes
indicates that you have the MS-FLASH.SYS device driver. This driver is not
supplied with PC DOS. If you do not have this file, contact your Service
Representative (not IBM).
or
Select No and press ENTER. Go to "Designating Values for PCMCIA
FAX/Modem Cards" on page 509. If you obtain the MS Flash File System in
the future, rerun PCMSETUP and select YES.
'.
2. If you accepted YES as the selection, a path default screen is displayed. The
Flash File System path defaults to the C:\DOS directory. If this is correct, press
ENTER. If it is not correct, type the correct path and press ENTER. The Flash
File System Information screen is displayed with the default values that the
system has determined you need to use with your Flash Card.
If the MS-FLASH.SYS file is not found in the specified directory, a warning
screen is displayed. When you escape from the warning screen, you are
moved forward to the Communication Ports screen.
3. Press ENTER to accept the defaults on the Flash File System Information
screen. The Communication Ports screen is displayed.
If you select a value which conflicts with an existing driver or device, a conflict
warning is displayed .. You are returned to the Flash File System Information
screen. You can:
• Enter another valid value.
• Exit PCMSETUP, resolve the conflict, reboot your computer after resolution,
and then retry this configuration.
You must resolve the conflict before continuing the configuration.
508
PC DOS User's Guide
Designating Values for PCMCIA FAX/Modem Cards
The Communication Ports screen is displayed with YES highlighted as the default.
To designate values for PCMCIA modem/FAX cards:
1. Press ENTER if you are going to use PCMCIA modem/FAX cards. A
Communication Ports screen is displayed, allowing you to specify the
communication port you want your computer to use for the cards.
or
Select No and press ENTER. Go to "Designating Values for ATA-type Cards."
2. Select an available communication port and press ENTER. The ATA Socket
screen is displayed.
Designating Values for ATA-type Cards
The ATA Socket screen is displayed with YES highlighted as the default.
To designate values for ATA-type cards:
1. Press ENTER if you are going to use ATA-type cards. An ATA Socket screen is
displayed with a default value highlighted for the window address.
or
Select No and press ENTER. Go to "Designating a PCMCIA Card" on
page 510.
2. Change the value and press ENTER. An ATA Socket screen is displayed with a
default value highlighted for the number of minutes to allow for a drive to be
inactive before powering down the drive.
Unless you understand memory management, you should accept the default
value for the ATA window address. If you need to manually specify this value,
it requires a 16K memory window; hence, you must have 16K of free memory
from the start address.
3. Verify the default value (or change it) for the number of minutes you want to
allow a drive to be inactive. The lower the value, the fewer minutes of inactivity
allowed before the hard disk is powered down.
4. Press ENTER, and an ATA Socket screen is displayed starting with Socket 0 as
the slot into which the ATA card is to be inserted.
Most ATA hard disk drives (Type III PCMCIA card) occupy two sockets. Make
sure you specify the correct socket (slot) number.
When you select Yes, an ATA Socket screen is displayed that allows you to
specify the number of partitions the ATA drive is to have.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
509
5. Specify the number of partitions the ATA drive is to have, and press ENTER.
The PCMCIA Card Selection screen is displayed.
For each socket on your computer, including the docking bay, you must specify
a socket number and the number of partitions ..
ATA cards can have up to four partitions. Make sure you specify the maximum
number of partitions you are using or plan to use. You can always change this
value later by rerunning PCMSETUP.
Designating a PCMCIA Card
You can choose to select one at a time, all, or none of the card selections during
PCMSETUP or wait until you actually have the card. If you wait, your system will
be dynamically configured using the PCM or PCMWIN utilities.
An additional advantage to waiting is saving memory. If you configure for a card
you do not have, the unused configuration still gets loaded and occupies memory.
To wait:
1. Press ENTER. The SETUP Complete screen is displayed with Yes selected.
2. Press ENTER, and you are returned to the DOS command prompt.
3. Restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
If this is an initial Setup, your computer reboots automatically.
To select one or more of the card selections:
1. Use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to highlight the desired card.
2. Press the SPACEBAR to select the card. An arrow appears to the left of your
selection. To deselect that card, press the SPACEBAR again. The arrow
disappears.
3. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The Setup Complete screen is displayed
with Yes selected.
4. Press ENTER, and you are returned to the DOS command prompt.
5. Restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
If this is an initial Setup, your computer reboots automatically.
51 0
PC DOS User's Guide
To select all the choices:
1. Press F5 to select all the choices.
2. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The Setup Complete screen is displayed
with Yes selected.
3. Press ENTER, and you are returned to the DOS command prompt.
4. Restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
If this is an initial Setup, your computer reboots automatically no matter what
choice you make on the final screen.
PCMSETUP updates the PCM.INI file, CONFIG.SYS, WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI
files, as appropriate. It also adds the PCM directory to. your PATH statement in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The updates are activated when you restart your
system. PCM.INI is an editable ASCII file. You can change values as needed by .
using the E Editor. Refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more
information.
During the installation process, after a system reboot, the following drivers were
loaded into your system:
CNFIGNAM.EXE Used to specify which PCM Plus configuration should be
accessed from the PCM.INI file.
PCMSS.EXE
Socket Services support. Works at the BIOS level as an
interface between the PCMCIA card socket and the Card Service
program.
PCMCS.EXE
Card Services support. Works at the operating system level to
manage all PCMCIA cards, resources, and client drivers.
PCMRMAN
Scans the system for resource status and availability.
PCMSCD.EXE
Super Client Driver support. Configures FAX/Modem cards, LAN
cards, or other I/O cards.
PC MATA.SYS
Used for IDE hard-disk emulation. Supports SRAM, rotating disk
cards, or solid-state mass storage cards.
PCMFFCS.EXE
If Flash is selected, this driver is used to support the Microsoft
Flash File System (FFS) protocol. Supports SRAM and Flash
memory cards.
For more information about these drivers, refer to the online version of the
PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
511
Configuring PCMCIA
After PCMCIA is installed and set up, it should recognize the majority of the
PCMCIA cards when you insert them into your computer. It dynamically configures
memory, modem, and ATA cards. Most I/O cards must be configured before they
can be used.
To configure I/O cards, you can use PCM or PCMWIN, the configuration programs
provided with PCMCIA. These programs do not configure ATA or memory cards.
For ATA and memory cards, you need to use PCMSETUP for configuration.
Using the DOS Configuration Utility (PCM)
To use the PCMCIA configuration program:
1. Insert the I/O PCMCIA card or cards into the available slots.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type the following command:
pcm
After pressing ENTER,the General Information Per Socket window is displayed
with information about the card presently inserted in the designated socket.
Socket Hunber:
Status:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Type:
Menory Window 1:
Menory Window Z:
I/O Window 1:
I/O Window Z:
IRQ:
e
Card configured successfully
IBM Corp.
Ethernet
Network LAN Adapter
D4eeh - D7FFh
None
3eeh - 3eFh
31eh - 31Fh
5
If you have multiple cards inserted in slots, use PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN to
view the information for each card.
3. Check the status line.
This line displays the current status of the resident card. If PCMCIA was able
to configure the card automatically, the status reads Card confi gured
successfully. If the program did not recognize the card or the card has no
CIS, this line reads Unconfi gured.
512
PC DOS User's Guide
4. Go to "Using PCM Configure" on page 513 if you need to:
• Define an I/O card that PCMCIA cannot recognize.
• Assign a new set of configuration values to an existing I/O card.
• Edit an existing configuration for an I/O card.
5. To view additional information about the I/O card, press ALT+V to access the
menu for View. Then, select Advanced or press the A key.
To exit the Advanced Information screen, press ESC. You are returned to
General Information Per Socket screen.
6. To exit the General Information Per Socket screen, press ALT+V to access the
menu for View.
7. Type X or select Exi t and press ENTER. You are returned to the DOS
command prompt.
Using PCM Configure
To use PCM Configure, leaving the card in the slot, select Confi gure from the
Menu Bar on the General Information Per Socket screen. The menu associated
with this selection allows you to:
• Add a card to the PCMCIA card list.
• Edit the configuration values associated with a card already listed.
To add a PCMCIA card to the card list:
1. Starting from the General Information Per Socket screen. press ALT+C. The
configure menu is displayed.
2. Select Add Card to Li st and press ENTER. The Add New Card to List screen
is displayed. There may be several card configuration possibilities. The
number of possibilities associated with the card is identified by the value shown
for "Config Number."
3. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to switch between configurations.
4. Press ENTER when you find the configuration you want to use. A message
prompt is displayed asking you whether you want the system to validate the
configuration.
5. Select Yes or No and press ENTER. If you selected Yes, PCMCIA tests the
configuration for conflicts and returns a message indicating no conflicts or that a
conflict exists.
If a conflict exists, it will be in one of the following values:
• Memory Window address range
• I/O Window address range
• IRQ level
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
513
You can choose one of the following:
• Select another configuration, if one exists that meets your needs.
• Correct the value that is in conflict. Check the documentation that came
with your card. If you cannot find the value you need, call the manufacturer
of the card.
If you selected No, a message prompt is displayed asking you whether you
want the system to save the configuration.
6. Select No not to save the settings. You are returned to the General Information
Per Socket screen.
The configuration is applied immediately by the system and, if saved, the
configuration information is written to the PCM.INI file. .
To edit the configuration ,values for a card you have already added to the card
list:
1. Starting from the General Information Per Socket screen, press ALT +C. The
Configure menu is displayed.
2. Select Edi t Confi 9 Parameters and press ENTER. The Edit Card Configuration
screen is displayed.' There may be multiple configurations to choose from.
3. Edit the following editable fields:
• Memory Window
• I/O Window
• IRQ
Press TAB or use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to move into the editable
fields and scroll forward from field to field. Use the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT
ARROW to move within the input area ofa field. Press SHIFT+TAB or use the
UP ARROW to scroll backwards from field to field.
4. Press ENTER when you are finished making changes. A message prompt is
displayed asking you whether you want the system to validate the configuration.
5. Select Yes or No and press ENTER. If you selected Yes, PCMCIA tests the
configuration for conflicts and returns a message indicating no conflicts or that a
conflict exists.
If a conflict exists, recheck your changes, make corrections, and press ENTER
to start the process again.
6. Select No not to save the settings or select Yes to save the new values and
press ENTER. You are returned to the General Information Per Socket screen.
The configuration is applied immediately by the system and, if saved, the
configuration information is written to the PCM.INI file.
514
PC DOS User's Guide
Using the PCM Information Selection
Using PCM, you can access a list of I/O cards and their configuration sets that have
been saved to the PCM.INI file. You can also access a list of PCMCIA client
drivers that are active. To use this feature, start from the General Information Per
Socket screen, and press ALT+1 to display the menu for Information.
To review the card list:
1. Select Card Li st, and press ENTER. The Select PC Card screen is displayed.
The card list displays all PCMCIA cards currently enabled for use by PCMCIA,
together with specific configuration information. Not all cards need to be listed
in this database to be used by PCMCIA. Normally, LAN, FAX/modem, and
other cards that use multiple system resources should be added to the
configuration list.
2. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll and highlight the card you
want to view and press ENTER. The Preview PC Card Configuration screen is
displayed.
3. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll through the configurations that
have been established for the card.
4. Press ESC to return to the General Information Per Socket screen.
To review the client information:
1. Select Cl i ent Info and press ENTE.R. The Client Program Information screen
is displayed.
The Client Program Information lists the PCM client drivers currently loaded and
provides specific information on each client. A client driver is a device driver
(such as PCMATA.SYS) designed to support one or more PC Cards.
2. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll through the client
information~
3. Press ESC to return to the General Information Per Socket screen.
Using the PCM Option Selection
The Option selection allows you to specify the use of a displayed message to
confirm PC card insertion and removal while in PCM. The default is enabled.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
515
To disable this selection:
1. Press ALT +0 when the General Information Per Socket screen is active. The
Message On Card Events message is displayed.
2. Press ENTER. The following message prompt is displayed:
Card Events Disabled
Using Windows Configuration Utility (PCMWIN)
The PCMCIA configuration process is handled in Windows almost the same way as
it is in PC DOS. PCMWIN is installed automatically by PCMSETUP, if your
computer has Windows installed and you select Windows from the PCMSETUP
program. The installation program inserts a PCMCIA program group into your
Program Manager and places the PCMWIN icon inside that window. PCMWIN
does not work in Windows standard mode. It works only in 386 Enhanced mode.
If you do not currently have Windows installed, but install it at a later time, you need
to rerun PCMSETUP to activate PCMCIA for Windows.
Running PCMWIN
Running and configuring cards using PCMWIN is very similar to running the PCM
configuration program for PC DOS. Use your mouse to select menus 'and other
action items on a window. For detailed task oriented descriptions, see "Using the
DOS Configuration Utility (PCM)" on page 512.
An additional option is provided in PCM for Windows configuration that is not
available in PCM configuration for PC DOS is Associations.
To use the Associations option:
1. Starting from the General Information Per Socket screen, press ALT +0 to
display the menu for Options.
2. Select Associ ati ons and press ENTER.
The Associations window is displayed. This option works only with'Windows
applications. It enables you to specify an associated program whenever the
card is inserted. For example, most modem cards are used with a
communication program such as the Windows Terminal program. Using this
option, the communication program is started whenever the modem card is
inserted.
The card number, manufacturer name, and the model for this card are
displayed in the first three lines. This information should be helpful to ensure
that the proper association is used.
516
PC DOS User's Guide
3. To enable the start-up of the associated program, click the Enable check box.
An X appears to indicate that the association is enabled.
4. Use TAB or the mouse to move to the File field.
5. Type in the exact path and executable file to start the associated program.
If you do not know the path or name of the program, click on Select Fi 1e to
browse through your files until you locate the one you need. (Most executable
files have an .EXE extension.)
6. Click on Previ ous or Next to edit or create other card-program associations.
7. When you are finished, click on OK.
Using Advanced Configuration
PCMCIA also includes an assortment of utilities, drivers, and adaptations to
complement any PCMCIA environment, including:
• Multiple Configurations Support
• Advanced PCMCIA Utilities, such as PCMFDISK and PCMRMAN
Handling Multiple Configurations Support
PCMCIA supports multiple configurations. You can use the multiple configurations
option to select a specific configuration when the system is booted. For more
information about multiple configurations, see Chapter 13, "Making More Memory
Available" on page 205 or refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
When you start PCMSETUP, it scans the CONFIG.SYS file for the menu section. If
the multiple configuration option is detected, PCMSETUP checks the CON FIG
variable in the environment to determine the current configuration name.
Notes:
1. At startup, if you pressed F5 at the Startup Menu to bypass startup files, an
error message is generated when you try to run the PCMCIA installation
program, and it terminates. Reboot your system with a valid configuration to
run PCMCIA installation.
2. To check all of the current configuration settings on your system, type set at
the DOS command prompt. The configuration name appears as
CONFIG=configname, where configname is the name you selected at boot time
for a specific configuration. PCMCIA installs and sets up its files for the current
configuration only. Any other configuration environment is not edited.
3. To install PCMCIA for a different configuration, you need to boot your system
using that configuration and run the PCMCIA installation program. The
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
517
PCMCIA initialization file (PCM.INI) contains a section for each configuration
environment you install.
Using Advanced PCMCIA Utilities
The following additional programs are available for use when you install PCMCIA
and should be used with extreme caution:
• PCMFDISK
• PCMRMAN
PCMFDISK
PCMFDISK, like the DOS FDISK utility, sets the partition table for ATA-rotating disk
and solid-state, mass-storage PCMCIA cards only. PCMFDISK can be run from the
DOS command prompt or from within Windows under a DOS session.
Warning: PCMFDISK will destroy all data on the device if you create new
partitions. You cannot use PCMFDISK on SRAM PC Cards formatted for use with
PCMATA.
During PCMSETUP, you set the number of partitions to allow on ATA cards. All
ATA cards have a minimum of one and a maximum of four partitions. You can use
PCMFDISK to optimize the settings from PCMSETUP.
If you change the number of partitions to a higher number than what you specified
during PCMSETUP, you must rerun PCMSETUP and reset the number of partitions.
You can use the Environment selection to view the number of partitions that were
set during the original PCMSETUP.
After inserting the ATA PC Card, run PCMFDISK to set (or reset) the following:
• Number of partitions
• Number of drive heads
• The number of sectors per track
PCMFDISK calculates the resulting drive size. This utility can also be used to
adjust partition settings to enhance the performance of the disk. Consult the
documentation accompanying your ATA PC Card for the optimum configuration.
To run PCMFDISK:
1. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
pcmfdisk
2. Press ENTER.
The Partition and Geometry screen is displayed.
·518
PC DOS User's Guide
Help
Partition and GeoMetry
Socket HUMber: 0
Partition
1
2
SysteM
FAT16
Size
Usage
14 MB
100%
Head
Cyl
Sec
0
Sectors
28610
3
1
GeoMetry
Heads: 2
Cylinders: 118
Sectors/Track: 32
Total Disk Size: 11 Mbytes (28672 Sectors)
The Partition and Geometry screen presents information on the current partitions
existing on the ATA card. Information on each partition is provided, including the:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Socket number where the card is located
System type
Partition size
Amount of the partition currently being used
Number of heads used by the partition
Number of cylinders used by the partition
Number of sectors used by the partition
Below this information, the geometry for the total ATA disk is provided.
Usually, there is no reason to change the disk geometry. The default geometry has
computed the fastest access speed. However, some ATA cards allow you to
change their geometry.
Warning: After you change the geometry, the"partition table might be invalid and
need to be reset. Some ATA cards also fail to write and become unstable. If this
is the case, the original values should be returned.
To modify the Partition of the installed ATA card, you can do one of several things:
• Create a new partition. You must delete the existing partitions and then create
the new partition.
• Add a new partition to existing partitions. The new partition is limited to the
size of the disk minus the existing partition size. If the Usage field on the
Partition and Geometry screen shows one hundred percent, there is no room
on your disk to add a new partition.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
519
To use Delete Partition:
1. Press ALT +M to display the Modify menu.
2. Select Del ete Parti ti on and press ENTER. You are asked to confirm the
deletion or abort the process.
If more than one partition exists on the card, the system deletes the last
partition first. For example, if two partitions exist on your disk, Partition 2 is
deleted before Partition 1.
3. Press ENTER to confirm and continue the process.
Any changes made to the partition table using the Modify option are not
committed to disk until you use the Write Partition option under the Save menu.
To use the Create Partition Option:
1. Press ALT +M to display the Modify menu.
Use this option to create a partition entry in the first empty partition slot. At
most, up to four partition entries are allowed per ATA card.
2. Select Create Parti ti on, and press ENTER. The Create Partition screen is
displayed.
3. Press ENTER to accept the partition size shown in the highlighted field (this
value reflects the total size of the Megabytes remaining on the disk).
Or, type in a new size and press ENTER. The Partition table is displayed with
the new partition table values.
4. If you want to create another partition, repeat steps 1 through step 3.
Any changes made to the partition table using the Modify option are not committed
to disk until you use the Write Partition option under the Save menu.
To use the Save Option:
1. Press ALT+S to display the Save menu.
No modifications to the ATA disk's partition tables become actual until you use
the Write Partition option. This saves all the changes you have made and
deletes/creates a new partition table for the disk.
2. Select Wri te Part it i on and press ENTER. A warning and confirmation
message is displayed. The warning indicates that, if you go ahead with the
PCMFDISK process, it is possible to lose all of the data currently on the card.
3. Select Yes to confirm you want the process to be completed.
4. Exit to the DOS command prompt and format the drive using the PC DOS
FORMAT command.
520
PC DOS User's Guide
5. At the DOS command prompt, type:
format drive:
/u
where drive is the drive letter, and then press ENTER.
To exit from PCMFDISK:
1. Press ALT +8 to display the Save menu.
2. Select Exi t and press ENTER. You are returned to the DOS command prompt.
PCMFDISK provides three areas of help under the Help menu. These include:
Contents
A short overview of PCMFDISK and what it can change.
About PCMFDISK
The utility's version numbers.
Environment
Information about partitions and drive assignments that were
set up by PCMSETUP.
PCMRMAN
The PCMCIA Resource Management Utility (PCMRMAN) performs two distinct
functions:
• As a stand-alone utility, it detects and displays the resources used by PCM
Plus, such as memory and interrupts.
• As a command-line utility, it can change the current run-time values for the
allocation of some system resources. For more information, refer to the online
PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
Warning: This program should be used with extreme caution. When used
improperly, it can affect adversely the way your computer operates with PCMCIA
cards.
To run PCMRMAN as a stand-alone program from the DOS command prompt:
1. Remove any PCMCIA cards from your computer.
2. Type this command at the DOS command prompt:
. pcmrman
3. Press ENTER.
You can run this program from the DOS command prompt, from within
Windows at the DOS session, or click on the Fi 1e Run option, and type the
command to start the program.
The title screen appears.
4. Press any key to continue.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
521
A warning screen is displayed. Read this carefully before continuing.
5. Press any key.
The main PCMRMAN screen is displayed.
Upper Mell'lory
Systell'l status
DOOO-DOFF
Dl00-DlFF
D200-D2FF
D300-D3FF
D400-D4FF
D500-D5FF
D600-D6FF
D700-D7FF
DBOO-DBFF
D900-D9FF
DAOO-DAFF
DBOO-DBFF
DCOO-DCFF
DDOO-DDFF
DEOO-DEFF
DFOO-DFFF
Unauailable
Unauailable
Unauailable
Unauailable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auai lable
Auailable
User Ouerride
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Using Display
Display allows you to see available 'and unavailable values for Memory, I/O, and
IRQ. All the screens associated with these values are read-only. The main
PCMRMAN screen actually shows the memory ranges available and unavailable.
The two additional read-only screens are selectable from the Display menu:
• I/O Usage
• IRQ Usage
To use the Display menu:
1. Press ALT +D to display the Display menu.
2. Select I/O Range or I RQ Number and press ENTER. The applicable screen is
displayed.
Using Modify
Modify allows you to change memory, I/O, and IRQ values. The changes you make
are shown immediately on the screen where the change is being made. However,
the changes do not take effect until you save them to the peM.INI file and restart
your computer.
522
PC DOS User's Guide
To use the Modify menu:
1. Press ALT +M to display the Modify menu.
2. Select one of the resources to modify and press ENTER.
To modify memory ranges:
1. Select Memory Ranges from the Modify menu. The Upper Memory Usage
screen is displayed with a User Override column that has the first item
highlighted.
Each memory range block listed is 4K in size and the value shown reflects the
beginning and ending hexadecimal addresses. If you have installed a memory
manager and PCMCIA, the available ranges or levels have been selected
during this process.
2. Press the SPACEBAR, and the highlighted field displays a new value. Press the
SPACEBAR until you see the value you need. There are three values defined:
None
Allow the availability of this resource to be determined by whether
the computer itself is using it.
Excluded
This range has been specifically excluded from PCMCIA.
Included
PCMCIA has access to this range.
3. When you have modified all the User Override fields you require, press ENTER
to accept these changes. The changes are shown on the screen.
To modify I/O ranges:
1. Select I/O Ranges from the Modify menu. The I/O Usage screen is displayed,
along with the Edit I/O Range window.
2. Type in the new beginning and ending ranges you want to modify and then
specify the type of modification desired.
3. When the User Override field is highlighted, use the SPACEBAR to change the
value, if needed. The values are: None, Exclude, and Include and have the
same meaning as described for memory ranges.
4. When you are finished modifying the I/O ranges, press ENTER to confirm your
choice .. The I/O Usage screen changes to reflect your modifications.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
523
To modify IRQ numbers:
1. Select IRQ Number from the Modify menu. The IRQ Usage is displayed with first
line in the User Override column highlighted.
2. Press the SPACEBAR, and the highlighted field displays a different value. Press
the SPACEBAR until you see the value you need. The values are: None,
Exclude, and Include and have the same meaning as described for memory
ranges.
3. When you have modified all the User Override fields you require, press ENTER
to accept these changes. The changes are shown on the IRQ Usage screen.
To save changes you have made to the Memory, I/O, or IRQ,values:
1. Press ALT+F to display the File menu.
2. Select Save Confi gurati'on and a confirmation message is displayed.
3. Select No to ignore changes made and return to the main PCMRMAN menu.
Select Yes to save changes. If you save a modified configuration, the new
values take effect as soon as the computer is restarted.
To exit from PCMRMAN:
1. Press ALT +F to display the File menu.
2. Select Exi t and press ENTER. You are returned to the DOS command prompt.
Configuring PC Cards after the Original Installation
This section provides guidelines for configuring the following types of cards:
• I/O Cards - FAX/modem
• I/O Cards - All others (LAN, Audio, SCSI, RS232, and so on)
• Memory Card - Flash
• . Memory Card - SRAM
• ATA Drives (Rotating Hard Disk or Solid State File drives)
Configuring FAX/Modem I/O Cards Most FAX/modem cards are automatically configured through the PCM Plus Super
Client Driver. However, PCM can be used to configure and add the card to the
card lists, but the defined configuration overrides the generic successful
configuration.
524
PC DOS User's Guide
To configure:
1. Use PCM or PCMWIN.
2. Insert the card.
3. Select to add a card, if it is not already added through PCMSETUP. A list of
the preset configurations is displayed, one of which is displayed as being
loaded.
4. Select the configuration you want or build your own by using TAB to move to
the input fields and then typing the values needed. If all the resources are
available, the selected configuration is successfully configured.
It is suggested that you accept the automatic configuration rather than choosing
one other than the default or building one manually.
Configuring All Other I/O Cards
All I/O cards, with the exception of FAX/modem I/O cards, must be configured with
PCM or PCMWIN before they can be used. All resources that these cards need
must be made available prior to configuration. If the resources (for example,
memory, IRQ, or I/O) are not available when configuring, there might be a system
conflict and the card will not configure.
'
The resource requirements for your card are provided by the PC Card
Manufacturer. Consult your PC Card documentation for the resource requirements
prior to configuring.
Use the following guidelines to help ensure that the needed resources are available
for your card:
Memory
The default memory configuration shipped with PCM PLUS requires little or no user
intervention for the majority of users. The default limits PCMCIA card services to
the top 48K of the D segment; D400-DFFF. You should attempt to configure your
PCMCIA resources within the default range. If you cannot or you need to make
additional adjustments, see "Running RAM Boost with PCMCIA (Non-IBM Thinkpad)"
on page 528 for more information.
Most I/O adapters use upper memory windows for ROM and RAM addressing
areas. If you are using a memory manager such as EMM386, the memory
manager makes use of all available upper memory space.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
525
For example, if you are using EMM386 and an IBM Token Ring PC Card that
requires the memory ranges of DCOO-DDFF and D800-DBFF, the following
exclusions need to be added on the EMM386 line in your CONFIG.SYS:
device=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems x=df88-dfff x=d488-d7ff x=dc88-ddff x=d888-dbff
If you intend to run RAMBoost on your system, refer to "Running RAM Boost with
PCMCIA (Non-IBM Thinkpad)"- on page 528 for more information.
A memory conflict could exist even if you are not using a memory manager such as
EMM386. An adapter could be using the same memory you need to use. In this
case, you could use PCMRMAN to help identify what memory regions are available.
At the DOS command prompt, type:
pcmrman /map
A status of your system's resources is displayed. If you need to make adjustments
for your memory ranges, you can use a text editor (such as the E Editor supplied
with PC DOS) to make the change in your CONFIG.SYS file. To make the change
effective, make sure that you reboot your system after making a change in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
IRQ
Use PCMRMAN with the /map parameter to view the resource status for PCM.
Verify that the IRQ you plan to use is listed in the IRQ allocation section under
Avail abl e.
If the IRQ you plan to use is not available, check your PC Card manufacturer's
documentation to see if you can use any of the IRQs that are available. If you still
believe that the IRQ you want to use is available, use the full-screen PCMRMAN
utility to force the IRQ to become available. See page 524 for more information
about modifying the IRQ number.
526
PC DOS User's Guide
The following table provides the IRQ values that have been assigned to devices:
IRQ Number
Assigned Device
o
Timer Output
Keyboard
Route to Interrupt' Controller 2, IRQ 8 to 15
Serial Port COM2
Serial Port COM1
Parallel Printer Port 2
Floppy-disk controller
Parallel Printer Port 2
Real-Time Clock
Software redirect to IRQ2 (INT OAH)
Reserved (default PC Card events)
Reserved
Reserved
80x87 Math Co-processor
Hard-Disk controller
Some Hard-Drive/SCSI controllers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O
. Use PCMRMAN with the /map parameter to view the resource status for PCM.
Verify that the I/O range you plan to use is listed in the I/O allocation section under
Avail abl e.
If the I/O range you plan to use is not available, check your PC Card
manufacturer's documentation to see if you can use any other available I/O. If you
still believe that the I/O you want to use is available, use the full-screen PCMRMAN
utility to force the I/O range to become avai!?lble. See page 522 for more
.
information.
Configuring the FLASH Memory Card
If you are using the Microsoft Flash File System support, you must select Flash in
PCMSETUP.
If you are not using the Microsoft Flash File System support, you must select No to
Flash in PCMSETUP. Consult your PC Card documentation on setting up your
Flash support drivers and configuring your Flash Card.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
527
Configuring a SRAM Memory Card
If, during installation, you selected Yes to ATA, your SRAM card is automatically
configured when you insert it.
Use PCM or PCMWIN to view your SRAM ~ard status. Ensure that the card is not
write protected. If the system returns a message that says the card configured
successfully, it is ready to use. If this message is not returned, check the following:
• Ensure that you have selected ATA support during PCMSETUP. If not, rerun
PCMSETUP and select ATA support.
• Ensure that the socket you inserted the card in was a socket selected for ATA
support during PCMSETUP.
Configuring ATA Drives (Rotating Hard Disk or Solid State)
If, during installation, you selected Yes to ATA, your ATA card is automatically
configured when you insert it. If you did not have the ATA card, run PCMSETUP
and select Yes for ATA support.
Use PCM or PCMWIN to view your ATA card status. If the system returns a
message that says the card configured successfully, it is ready to use. If this
message is not returned, check the following:
• Ensure that you have selected ATA support during PCMSETUP. If not, rerun
PCMSETUP and select ATA support.
• Ensure that the socket you inserted the card in was a socket selected for ATA
support during PCMSETUP. '
If you would like multiple partitions on your drive, use PCMFDISK to partition it.
See "PCMFDISK" on page 518 for more information.
Running RAMBoost with PCMCIA (Non-IBM Thinkpad)
If you have a computer, other than the IBM Thinkpad computer, that you want to
install PCMCIA Support on, you must remove any memory manager you might
have running first. After the installation of PCMCIA is complete, you can run the
RAMBoost memory optimizer.
To install RAM BOOST with PCMCIA on Non-IBM Thinkpad systems:
1. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and comment out, or remove, the memory manager.
2. Reboot your system (before activating PCMCIA).
3. Install PCM PLUS (the PCMCIA support product shipped with PC DOS 7),
issuing the PCMDINST command from your D~S\PCM directory.
528
PC DOS User's Guide
by
4. Configure all your PC Cards using the PCM or PCMWIN utility and ensure they
are functional. For example, if you have a network card, make sure you can
access the network.
5. Restart your system if it does not restart automatically after configuring your last
PC Card.
6. Start RAM Boost by typing ramsetup at the DOS command prompt.
Resolving Memory Conflicts
Memory utilization can be optimized with the use of PC DOS 7 memory optimizer
RAMBoost. But the systems must be configured so that memory areas for the PC
Card, adapter and Memory Manager (such as EMM386) do not conflict with one
another.
Note: The following descriptions are highly dependent on your hardware
configuration. You might have adapters (for example, CD-ROM,
SoundCard) which could occupy some of the upper memory.
The default memory configuration shipped with the PCMCIA support requires little
or no user intervention for the majority of users. The preconfiguration involves
limiting PCMCIA card services to the top 48K of the D segment; D400-DFFF.
The upper memory map would look like this to RAM Boost:
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ABC 0 E F
C 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
o 0000000000000000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
x- Memory available to PCMCIA Card Services
0~ Memory available to RAMBOOST
Users should attempt to configure their PCMCIA resources within the pre-set
D400~DFFF range. In the event that D400-DFFF is not available to PCMCIA or a
PC Card requires memory outside of the available range, the user will have to
manually re-configure PCMCIA resources. To determine the required memory
space boundary for the PC Card, refer to the manual that came with the PC Card.
Most PC Cards specific memory requirements can be relocated as long as the
specified boundaries are followed. Use the PCMRMAN utility to reconfigure
PCMCIA resources. See "Using Advanced PCMCIA Utilities" on page 518 for more
information.
Issue the command PCMRMAN /MAP to view PCMCIA resource allocation. This
displays the memory ranges currently available to PCMCIA.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
529
Issue the command PCMRMAN to modify the PCM Plus resources.
suppose you have a card requiring a 16K memory range starting at
PCMRMAN utility to "Include" ranges DOOO-D3FF; each block listed
Hence, the range of DOOO-D3FF (You must reboot the computer so
'
can take affect).
For example,
0000. Use the
is 4K in size.
the changes
When you start PCM, ignore the WARNING message that the included memory is
already excluded and follow the instruction to press any key to continue.
Use PCM or PCMWIN utility to configure the PC Card at the location made
available through PCMRMAN. Go to "Configuring PC Cards after the Original
Installation" on page 524 for information on how to use PCM or PCMWIN to
configure the different type of PCMCIA Cards.
Making More Memory Available to RAM Boost
When you run PCMCIA before running RAM BOOST, 4SK of upper memory is made
available for PCMCIA. You might not use all the allocated space. To release the
space PCMCIA is not using and make it available to RAMBoost, run PCMRMAN to
"exclude" the unused ranges.
For example, you only have a modem card (which requires no memory). You can
make 44K of upper memory available to RAM Boost by excluding the range
D400-DEFF. The upper memory map then looks like the following to RAMBoost.
o
123
4
5
6
7
8
9
ABC
D
E
F
C 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
D 000000000000000000000~00000000000000000000000000000000000000x
x- Memory available to PCMCIA Card Services
0- Memory available to RAMBOOST
If you only have an ATA (Harddisk) and a modem, you can then exclude the range
DSOO-DEFF giving RAMBoost an extra 2SK of upper memory.
The upper memory map then looks like the following to RAMBoost:
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
789
ABC
D
E
F
C 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
D 0000000000000000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0000000000000000000000000000x
x- Memory available to PCMCIA Card Services
0- Memory available to RAMBOOST
530
PC DOS User's Guide
After changing your PCMCIA configuration, reboot your system. Then, type
ramsetup at the DOS command prompt. Select the option to have RAMSETUP
rebuild the EMM386 statement.
Running RAMBOOST with IBM Thinkpad PCMCIA Software
The procedure you need to follow to run RAMBOOST with the Thinkpad PCMCIA
software depends on the date the Thinkpad was shipped. Thinkpads shipped
during 1993 contain the PCMCIA Version 2.0 release. Thinkpads shipped during
1994 contain PCMCIA Version 2.1
With PCMCIA Version 2.0 you need to make space available for RAMBoost to run
without a memory conflict. With PCMCIA Version 2.1, you need to make space
unavailable to RAM Boost to avoid memory conflicts.
To adjust the PCMCIA Version 2.0 release for RAMBOOST,
1. View your CONFIG.SYS file for the statement:
device=c:\pcmcia\dicrmu01.sys /ma=xxxx-xxxx
where
XXX)(
represents the reserved upper memory range.
2. Record the value indicated for the reserved memory. You will use this as a
guide when running RAMSETUP to allocate the available upper memory for
RAM Boost.
3. Type ramsetup at the DOS command prompt.
4. Select Advance.
5. Press TAB or click on the Upper Memory Usage Editor.
6. Click on the desired location or use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the
desired location.
7. Press F2 to set the space to -- (Available) and make that space (memory
range) available to RAM Boost.
8. Repeat until all desired ranges are edited.
For example, if you see the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file,
device=c:\pcmcia\dicrmu01.sys /ma=c000-cfff
You would need to set an available range of DOOO-DFFF in RAMSETUP for
RAMBOOST to run without a memory conflict.
Chapter 23. Using PCMCIA Support
531
To adjust the PCMCIA Version 2.1 release for RAM BOOST
1. View your CONFIG.SYS file for the statement:
dev;ce=c:\pcmc;a\d;crmu01.sys /ma=xxxx-xxxx
where XXX)( represents the reserved upper memory range.
2. Record the value indicated for the reserved memory. You will use this as a
guide when running RAMSETUP to allocate the available upper memory for
RAM BOOST.
3. Type ramsetup at the DOS command prompt.
4. Select Advance.
5. Press TAB or click on the Upper Memory Usage Editor.
6. Click on the desired location or use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the
desired location.
7. Press F7 to set the space to AD (Adapter RAM) so that the memory range
specified by the /ma switch (associated with DICRMU01.SYS) is blocked from
use by RAM Boost.
8. Repeat until all desired ranges are edited.
For example, if you see the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file,
dev;ce=c:\pcmc;a\d;crmu01.sys /ma=c000-cfff
You would need to make the range of COOO-CFFF unavailable to RAMBOOST to
run without a memory conflict.
532
PC DOS User's Guide
Appendix A. More About Installing
Procedures for a standard PC DOS installation can be found in "PC DOS Standard
Installation" on page 14. Be sure to review "Before You Begin" on page 5 before
performing any type of installation
This appendix provides installation procedures if you want to perform something
other than a standard PC DOS installation,
This appendix also provides more detailed information about the options and
choices you can make during a PC DOS installation, such as whether or not to
back up your current DOS version. Other installation-related information, is
provided in this appendix also.
Choosing the Correct Installation Procedure
Table 2 on page 13 helps you choose the correct procedure for the type of
installation you want to do. Unique types of installations are detailed in the
following sections.
Installing DOS Files on a Drive Other than Drive C
If you have previously partitioned your hard disk into logical drives, you can install
the DOS directory on any of those drives. ,The files required to run your operating
system are copied to primary drive C. All other files associated with the install are
copied to the drive you specify.
To install PC DOS on a drive other than drive C:
1. Follow the steps in "PC DOS Standard Installation" on page 14 until the
optional tools screen is displayed.
2. In addition to selecting the tools you want to use, highlight the Install to Path
line.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Type the drive and directory where you want to install PC DOS.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Continue until the installation i~ completed. PC DOS is installed to the drive
and directory you specified in step 4.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
533
Installing PC DOS If You Have OS/2 Installed
The following guidelines only apply if you have installed:
•
•
•
•
OS/2
OS/2
OS/2
OS/2
and a Dual Boot system.
with Boot Manager active.
as a FAT file system.
and have Stacker for OS/2 & DOS installed.
To install if your system only has OS/2 installed as a FAT file system:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
2. Restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
3. Follow the instructions on your screen.
You might receive a message informing you that your system will be turned into
a Dual Boot system.
After your installation is complete, first time users of the OS/2 Dual Boot feature
need to refer to "Switching Between PC DOS and OS/2 Using Dual Boot" on
page 535 for information on how to use the OS/2 Dual Boot feature.
If you are using OS/2 Version 1.2 or lower, upgrade your version of OS/2 before
installing PC DOS.
To install using the OS/2 Boot Manager:
You must do the following within OS/2 before PC DOS can be installed.
1. Use OS/2 FDISK to set the DOS partition to installable while OS/2 is running.
2. Shut down OS/2 by clicking mouse button 2 (normally the right mouse button)
on an empty area of the desktop. Place the Setup Diskette into drive A, and
then restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT +DEL.
3. Follow the install instructions as they are displayed on your screen.
4. At the screen that notifies you the installation is complete, remove the diskette
from drive A, and then restart your computer by pressing ENTER. The Boot
Manager starts, allowing you to choose which system you want to start.
534
PC DOS User's Guide
To install if your system already has Dual Boot capability:
1. Change to the directory where the BOOT.COM file is located (generally C:\os2).
by-typing:
cd \os2
Note: BOOT.COM is an OS/2 file that starts Dual Boot. If your system does
not have this file installed, you will have to retrieve it from your OS/2
diskettes and install it in your OS2 directory.
2. To move from the OS/2 operating system to the DOS operating system, type
the following at the command prompt:
boot /dos
3. When DOS finishes booting, insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS
installation diskettes into drive A.
4. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
a:setup
5. Follow the instructions on your screen.
6. After the PC DOS installation is done, remove the diskette from the diskette
drive and then you can return to OS/2 by typing the following at the command
prompt from the DOS operating system.
boot /os2
Switching Between PC DOS and OS/2 Using Dual Boot
Before you can use Dual Boot, you must switch to the directory that contains
BOOT.COM which will start Dual Boot. This file is generally located in the C:\OS2
directory.
To use OS/2 dual boot to switch between operating systems:
After you have installed PC DOS to operate along with your OS/2 system, use the
OS/2 Dual Boot feature to switch between the operating systems.
To get to this directory, type the following:
cd\os2
To move from the OS/2 operating system to the DOS operating system, type the
following at the command prompt:
boot /dos
Appendix A. More About Installing
535
To return to OS/2 from the DOS operating system, type the following at the
command prompt:
boot /os2
Installing PC DOS If You Have OS/2 Stacker Compression
If you are using OS/2, do not use PC DOS Stacker to compress any drives where
the following types of files are located:
• OS/2 files
• Files used for DOS sessions of OS/2
• Dual Boot files
If your OS/2 drives are already compressed using Stacker's own Stacker for
OS/2 & DOS version, remember you can use only one compression program at a
time. Refer to the Stacker README.TXT file in the STACKER directory, if you
want to uninstall Stacker from OS/2 and install Stacker from PC DOS.
If you compress drives with these types of files using PC DOS Stacker, OS/2 will
not function prop~rly.
Installing PC DOS on a PS/1 Computer
Follow the installation detailed in "PC DOS Standard Installation" on page 14 if
your PS/1:
• Is not a four-quad system
Or, you can disable the four-quad system during Setup by typing setup /p to
start Setup.
• Has compressk;m installed
The four-quad system will not be enabled after installation if you already have
compression and run Setup, or if you install compression after running Setup.
• Is a newer model PS/1New models of PS/1 do not have DOS built into the ROM.
Use the following installation procedure if your PS/1 is a PS/1 model (Model FCOB
or F830) that uses a specific ROM chip.
Note: Do not select the optional tool for compression.
536
PC DOS User's Guide
To install DOS on an earlier version of PS/1 that has a ROM four-quad
system:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
2. At the Four-Quad screen, select Your Software.
3. Select Dr; ve A.
4. Select Setup.
5. Follow the instructions in "PC DOS Standard Installation" on page 14 to
complete the installation.
Setup enables four-quad ROM systems by copying the ROMSHELL.COM file from
ROM memory and by copying the RSSTUB.EXE file from the PC DOS installation
diskettes to the same directory specified for the install-to path. Setup also adds an
RSSTUB statement to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that the four-quad screen is
displayed whenever the PS/1 machine is started.
Installing PC DOS on a Compressed Drive
Use the following procedures to install PC DOS on systems where drives have
been compressed using disk compression programs.
Setup recognizes and allows you to install on compressed drives using:
• SuperStor/DS** provided with PC DOS Versions 6.1 and 6.3.
• Any previous version of Stacker compression.
~ Microsoft's DoubleSpace or DriveSpace
• Novell's DR DOS 7.0's version of Stacker compression.
• Addstor**'s SuperStor** 2.0 and SuperStor PRO**.
• DoubleDisk Gold Version 6.0. for any drive other than drive C.
These compression programs are incompatible with the PC DOS Setup program:
• DoubleDisk Gold 6.0 (only if your drive C is compressed).
• Any version of XtraDrive.
• Versions of SuperStor before Version 1.4 (including DR DOS's Version 6.0).
Note: Refer to the README.TXT file on the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS
installation diskettes or, after installation, on the directory where your DOS
files are located.
** SuperStar, SuperStar/OS, SuperStar PRO, and Addstar are trademarks af Addstar, Inc.
Appendix A. Mare Abaut Installing
537
To install PC DOS on a drive that has been compressed with a compatible
disk compression program:
1. Start your system.
2. Type a: setup to run Setup. Your compatible disk compression program will be
recognized and handled accordingly.
3. Follow the installation steps in "PC DOS Standard Installation" on page 14.
To install PC DOS on a drive that has been compressed with SuperStor PRO
with no swappable drive support installed:
1. Start. your system with your current software.
2. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A, and type:
a:setup
3. When Setup ,is finished, insert the Setup Diskette into drive A again, and restart
your system.
4. Type N when prompted whether you want to install PC DOS. (If you do not
answer in 10 seconds, the default answer YES is assumed.)
The command prompt A:\> is displayed.
5. While at the A:\ > prompt, type:
sys c:
6. Remove the diskette and press CTRL+ALT+DEL to restart the system from the
hard drive.
7. Modify the CONFIG.SYS file and move the SuperStor device drivers to the top
of the file. Refer to your SuperStor documentation to determine what device
drivers it is using.
8. After rebooting, make sure IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM files, or the
compressed drive, get updated.
Note: When you install to a SuperStor PRO compressed drive that has the
files IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM, they might not be updated
correctly.
9. If you need to update these files, (assuming drive C is the compressed drive
and drive D contains the uncompressed files used to start your system), type:
attrib -s -h -r c:\ibmbio.com
attrib -s -h -r c:\ibmdos.com
del c:\ibmbio.com
del c:\ibmdos.com
538
PC DOS User's Guide
10. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS installation diskettes into the
diskette drive and type:
a:\sys a: c:
The SYS command copies the COMMAND.COM, IBMBIO.COM, and
IBMDOS.COM file to your hard drive.
11. Remove the Setup Diskette, and press CTRL+ALT+DEL to restart the system
from the hard drive.
Notes:
1. Before upgrading a compatible compression drive it is a good practice to
ensure your hard disk has the latest compression program installed. For
example, if you have a version of SuperStor before Version 1.4, you need to
upgrade. Refer to the PC DOS README.TXT file for further information.
2. If you have compressed your drives using a non-compatible disk compression
program, contact your software vendor.
Installing PenDOS
If you plan to select PenDOS optional tool, keep these things in mind:
• The proper hardware must be installed.
If you select PenDOS as an optional tool and then select a tablet or mouse
device, Setup will modify your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files and will
add the appropriate device statement. A command-line statement for
PENDOS.BAT is also added by Setup in your AUTOEXEC.BAT.
• The proper tablet driver is required for your digitizer:
-
If you have a pen tablet computer with a self-contained digitizer, you should
choose that computer's tablet driver.
-
If you will be using your mouse as your pointing device, select the Digitizing
Pad Emulation via Mouse tablet driver.
• The digitizer must be connected to the proper communication port on your
computer if you have an externally attached digitizer. Refer to the digitizer
manufacturer's instructions for the proper installation procedure.
• PenDOS requires the EMM386 memory manager to run.
• Running RAMBoost Setup allows you to install the EMM386 memory manager.
Be sure to select the EMS option on the Advanced Option screen.
Appendix A. More About Installing
539
Performing the LAN Server Administrator Installation of PC DOS
The following information is intended for LAN administrators who will be installing
PC DOS from a network server or a remote workstation. If you are installing
PC DOS on a single workstation that is not connected to a network, you do not
need this information.
Running SETUP /A provides two options for LAN administrators:
• Creating a LAN Administrator's Directory
Before you can install PC DOS across the network, you must first create an
administrator's directory on the server that will contain all the DOS and optional
tool files from the PC DOS Setup diskettes.
• Creating a directory for DOS Files and Tools
This option provides the LAN administrator DOS files and optional tool files in
an unpacked format available in a \DOSFILES subdirectory on the LAN.
Note: Setup does not allow you to select YES for both options at the same time.
If you want to select both options, you must run SETUP twice, selecting a
different option each time you run SETUP /A.
Creating a LAN Administrator Directory
Running SETUP /A creates a LAN administrator directory that allows for PC DOS
installation across the network by individual workstations. The name of the
directory is specified by the LAN administrator. After SETUP /A is completed,
PC DOS can be installed to a workstation using the SETUP program from this
directory.
These instructions do not apply to Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL**) systems or
medialess computers. For RIPL systems, see your manufacturer's instructions
about installing PC DOS images.
If your server is running OS/2 WARP, you can run SETUP/A from the DOS session
or DOS Window. If your server is running OS/2, run SETUP /A from a remote DOS
workstation. The workstation must have read/write access to the server.
** RIPL is a trademark of CTA, Inc.
540
PC DOS User's Guide
To create an administrator's directory at the server:
1. Make sure you have 9.5MB of disk space available for the LAN administrator's
directory before beginning the installation.
2. Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the system server.
3 .. Start Setup by typing:
n:setup fa
where n represents the drive where the Setup Diskette is inserted.
Note: If you use the /t switch, in combination with the /a switch (for example,
setup fa ft:c:pcdos7), to specify a directory path, the option selection
screen will be bypassed and Setup will default to this Create a LAN
admi ni strator di rectory option.
4. Press ENTER and follow the instructions on your screen.
5. When queried how you want to install DOS to a network, select Create an
administrator directory.
All the files on the PC DOS installation diskettes are then copied to the DOS7
directory unless you specified your own directory name. If you specify the
name for the administrator's directory, do not specify the DOS directory or the
DOSFILES directory, and do not specify the root directory.
The bundle files are not unpacked. Refer to "Working with Setup Bundle Files"
on page 554 for complete information about bundle files provided with
PC DOS.
6. Either use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
Then press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse.
7. After the installation has been completed, mark the files in the subdirectory as
read only.
8. Follow the LAN administrator procedures necessary to share this subdirectory
with workstations that will be installing PC DOS across the LAN.
Appendix A. More About Installing
541
To create an administrator's directory from a remote workstation to a server:
1. Start your network software on the workstation and connect to the network
server where the administrator directory is to be created. The workstation must
have read/write access to the server.
2. Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the workstation.
3. Follow step 3 through step 8 on page 541 in the instructions for creating an
administrator's directory at the server.
Note: Make sure you change the path to the network drive.
Creating a Directory for DOS Files and Tools
SETUP /A also provides the LAN administrator the option of having a \DOSFILES
subdirectory on the LAN containing DOS files and optional tool files in an unpacked
format.
This option does not permit you to install PC DOS to a workstation; this option
does allow you to copy individual DOS files.
To install a directory of DOS files and tools at a server:
1. Make sure you have 16.0MB of disk space available for the DOS files and tools
directory before beginning the installation.
2. Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the system server.
3. Start Setup' by typing:
n:setup fa
where n represents the drive where the Setup Diskette is inserted.
4. Press ENTER and follow the instructions on your screen.
5. Specify a directory name, when prompted, if you do not want to install to the
DOS7 directory or if you want to specify your own directory flame. Do not
specify the DOS directory, the DOSFILES directory, nor the root directory.
6. When queried how you want to install DOS to a network, select Copy a 11
PC DOS files and tools.
7. Make sure the "Install to Path" is for a network drive.
8. Select Opti ons correct. Conti nue Setup. to complete the installation.
All DOS files and all optional tools files are unpacked and copied to the
subdirectory DOSFILES. Subdirectories for DATA, SYSTEM, STACKER, and PCM
(for PCMCIA support files) are created under \DOSFILES. For example,
\DOS7\DOSFILES\DATA and \DOS7\DOSFILES\STACKER would be created.
542
PC DOS User's Guide
During Setup, you are not allowed to specify another name for the administrator's
\DOSFILES subdirectory.
To install a directory of DOS files and tools from a remote workstation to a
server:
1. Start your network software on the workstation and connect to the network
server where the DOS files are to be copied. The workstation must have
read/write access to the server.
2. lrisert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the workstation.
3. Follow steps 3 through 8 on page 542 in the instructions for installing a
directory of DOS files and tools at a server.
Installing PC DOS after the LAN Administrator Install
If you do not have access to the server containing PC DOS or are not sure how to
upgrade the network files, contact your LAN administrator.
To install PC DOS after the LAN administrator has made it available within
the LAN:
1. Start the workstation with your current version of DOS.
Avoid starting applications, terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs, disk
caches, multi-taskers, and task switchers when installing PC DOS.
If you are running OS/2 with the Dual Boot feature, type the following at the
DOS command prompt:
boot Idos
2. Start your network software; then connect to the server containing PC DOS.
Note: Upgrade your network files to work with PC DOS according to
instructions from the LAN administrator.
3. Start Setup that is on the server. For example, if the DOS files are located in a
subdirectory named PCDOS70 on network drive N, you would type:
n:\pcdos70\setup
Then' press ENTER.
4. After installing PC DOS, restart your workstation.
5. Reconnect to the LAN server to ensure your LAN software upgrade was
successful. If you cannot start the LAN software or reconnect to the LAN
server, see your LAN administrator.
Appendix A. More About Installing
543
Installing PC DOS from a CD-ROM Drive
Installing PC DOS 7 from a CD-ROM requires:
• The installation be while running under a DOS operating system; you should
not install from any other type of operating environment.
• A CD-ROM drive installed on your computer system. If this hardware is not
already installed, you will need to follow the hardware manufacturer's
installation documentation.
• The proper statements for the CD-ROM support utility are added to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. After PC DOS is installed, you can
type hel p mscdex for further information.
To install DOS from a CD-ROM drive:
1. Ensure that MSCDEX command to install CD-ROM devices is already loaded.
Or, type the command to load it at the DOS command prompt.
2. Insert the CD-ROM disk into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
cdromdrive:setup
where cdromdrive is your CD-ROM drive letter.
4. Continue following the instructions until the installation has completed.
The DOS and tools files are installed to the DOS directory.
Rerunning Setup
Rather than perform a complete installation of PC DOS, you can rerun Setup
instead. Reasons to rerun Setup include:
• To install additional optional tools for DOS and Windows using SETUP
IE.
• To change the current time and date, country support for international character
sets, keybqard layout for different countries, or ISO fonts for VGA hardware
(SETUP 10).
.
.
• To recover either a DOS file or an optional tool file from your PC DOS
installation diskettes if, after installation, they have been accidentally deleted or
damaged (using SETUP if a DOS file; using SETUP IE if an optional tool file).
544
PC DOS User's Guide
Installing Additional DOS and Windows Optional Tools
As you upgrade your equipment or as your needs expand, you will want to rerun
Setup to add any optional tools you did not install initially. You can install PC DOS
optional tools for DOS and Windows (provided Windows is already installed) as
many times as is necessary using the Ie switch. When you rerun Setup using the
Ie switch, you save time during installation because Setup does not re-copy the
DOS files.
When you rerun Setup, be sure to:
• Review the installation steps that apply to your system. (Use Table 2 on
page 13 to guide you.)
• Not select the optional tools you already have installed; select only the new
tools you want to add.
, • Install to the same drive and path that contains your current DOS directory
when you rerun Setup or else you will receive disk error messages.
To rerun Setup using the Ie switch:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A or B.
2. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:setup Ie
or
b:setup Ie
3. At the optional tools screen, either use the UP ARROW to scroll to the optional
tool you want to add. Then press ENTER, or click on the optional tool if using a
mouse. The selection choice changes from NO to YES.
It is not necessary to re-select options you already have installed. Using the Ie
switch only allows you to add tools-it does not remove your current optional
tools.
.
4. Verify that you have specified the same drive and path as where your current
DOS directory is located.
5. Either use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to the line:
Options correct. Continue Setup.
if you are not already there, and then press ENTER, or click on the line when
using- a mouse, if all the options are correct.
6. Continue to follow the instructions displayed on the screen until installation is
complete.
. Appendix A. More About Installing
545
Recovering Files from the Setup Diskettes
During installation, Setup copies all the DOS files and all the files for the optional
tools you selected to your hard drive ..
However, should you need to copy a file that might have been deleted from your
hard drive or damaged after you have installed PC DOS, run Setup entirely---:-only if
you do not know which file was deleted or damaged. Any files that might have
been deleted or damaged will be restored.
However, if you know which file was deleted or damaged, or know whether the file
is either:
• A DOS file pertaining to the operating system
• An optional tool file
you can save time by rerunning Setup using the Ie switch instead of rerunning
Setup completely.
To determine whether a file is a DOS file or an optional tools file:
1. View FILES.TXT file using the PC DOS E Editor by typing:
e fil es. txt
2. Search the FILES.TXT file by typing the following at the E Editor command
line:
Llfilename
where filename is the name of the deleted or damaged file you are trying to
search for.
3. Look in the bundle column and note whether the file is not packed in a bundle,
packed in the "DOS" bundle file or in a bundle file for an optional tool, such as
"COMPRESS" for Stacker Compression files.
Files not packed in a bundle show a hyphen in the "BUNDLE" column. All
non-bundled files are located on the Setup Diskette. If the file you need to
recover has a hyphen next to it, you can use the COPY command to copy it to
your hard drive instead of following this recovery procedure.
Refer to "Working with Setup Bundle Files" on page 554 for an explanation of
bundle files.
546
PC DOS User's Guide
4. Follow the instructions in step 5 for either recovering a DOS file or an optional
tool file from the Setup Diskette:
Note: In addition to the file you want to recover, all other files in either th'e
DOS bundle file or the specified optional tool bundle file are copied also.
5. If you want to recover a DOS file:
a. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
b. Rerun Setup by typing:
a:setup
c. Follow the instructions on the screen.
d. Do not select any optional tools at the optional tools screen.
Make sure there is a NO beside each optional tool.
If you want to recover an optional tool file:
a. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
b. Rerun Setup by typing:
a:setup
Ie
c. Follow the instructions on the screen.
d. At the optional tools screen, select only the appropriate optional tool.
Change the NO to YES only for the optional tool that pertains to the
missing or damaged file. This is the only tool that should have YES
next to it.
6. Complete the installation.
Uninstalling and Restoring Your Previous Version of DOS
If, in the future, you want to be able to uninstall PC DOS 7 and restore the
previous DOS version (the version on your system before the initial installation of
PC DOS 7), the Setup Uninstall process makes it easy.
However, you must select YES to the Back up previ ous DOS fi 1es option during
the initial installation of PC DOS 7. In most cases, there will be no reason to
uninstall DOS; however, the option exists if you need it.
The backup diskettes that Setup creates contain your previous version of DOS,
including copies of your previous CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
Appendix A. More About Installing
547
You cannot use your backup diskettes if you have done any of the following after
installing PC DOS:
• Repartitioned or reformatted your hard disk.
• Deleted or moved either of the two DOS hidden system files (IBMBIO.COM and
IBMDOS.COM).
• Installed a disk compression program. If you have done this, you must
uncompress the drive before the Uninstall process can work.
To restore your previous version of DOS:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
2. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
a:setup /u
3. Answer N for No when queried whether you want to install PC DOS 7.
4. Follow the instructions on your screen, using your backup diskettes.
Viewing and Editing the System Files during Install
Immediately before the PC DOS installation is completed, you can view or edit the
changes Setup has already made to your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files.
Optionally, you can make additional changes yourself. Any edits made to these
files will not be put into effect until after a system reboot.
To view or edit the changes to the system files:
1. While running Setup, follow the instructions on the screen.
2. When prompted whether you want to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS changes during the installation:
• If you do not want to see the changes, leave the selection asNO and make
sure the Option correct. Continue Setup. line is highlighted and then
press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse.
• Use the UP ARROW to highlight the edit changes line and then press
ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse. Your selection will change to
YES. Then highlight the line:
Option correct. Continue Setup.
Then press ENTER, or click on this line if using a mouse.
548
PC DOS User's Guide
If you selected YES, the E Editor is activated and three files are opened for
you:
• A help screen file explaining what you need to do when you either view or
edit the remaining two files.
• The AUTOEXEC.BAT file with comment lines (REM) added.
• The CONFIG.SYS file with comment lines (REM) added.
When SETUP changes the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files,
comments are added to identify what lines have been added, deleted, replaced,
or updated-similar to the following:
REM ===== PC DOS 7.8 - Add =====
Note:
If, after the SETUP program has completed.and the system has been
rebooted, you want to remove all the comments that were added by
DOS Setup, insert the Setup Diskette into drive A and use the SETUP
IC command. Any comments you may have added are not removed.
While viewing these files during Setup you cannot issue any DOS commands
from the E Editor command line; only E Editor commands can be issued while
viewing these system files during Setup.
3. Press CTRL+N (or F12 if available on your keyboard) each time you want to
alternate between the three files.
4. Do one of the following for each of the three files:
• View the file and then press F3 to close the file after viewing. If you press
F3, be sure you did not make any changes to the file because .your
changes do not get saved. Remember that any changes made by Setup
were already saved before being opened for· you to view or edit them.
• Edit the files, if necessary, and then press F4 after editing to save your
changes and exit the file.
This allows you to modify the files before Setup restarts the machine and
the changes Setup made to these files are put into effect.
5. Press F3 or F4 (depending on whether edits were not made or were made to
the file, respectively) until you have closed all the files and exited the E Editor.
6. Press any key to restart your system.
Appendix A. More About Installing
549
Viewing the README.TXT File
PC DOS comes with a README.TXT file. This file can be found either on the
Setup Diskette of the PC DOS installation diskettes, or in the directory where you
installed DOS.
This file contains important information. If you have a PC DOS system, you can
view or" print this file before installing PC DOS for additional information about
PC DOS.
When you want to look at the contents of a file, you can use any text editor, use the
E Editor's BROWSE command, or use the MORE command.
To use the BROWSE command to view a file:
1. Change to the directory where your DOS files are located (usually C:\DOS).
2. Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
browse readme. txt
This command allows you to use the E Editor's BROWSE command to see the
contents of the PC DOS README.TXT file.
3. Press PAGE DOWN to continue viewing the contents online.
4. If you want to stop viewing, press F3 .
.To print the README.TXT file:
1. Type the following command at the DOS command prompt:
print readme. txt
2. Press ENTER.
Working with XDF-Formatted Diskettes
Setup for PC DOS 7 uses a new format known as eXtended Density Format (XDF)
that extents the capacity of a standard 1.44MB diskette to approximately 1.86MB
and a standard 1.2MB to approximately 1.54B-increasing the capacity of the
diskette by almost 25% or 28%, respectively.
No special instructions are necessary to run Setup from XDF-formatted diskettes.
Setup is designed to handle this special format.
550
PC DOS User's Guide
XDF-formatted diskettes are read-only; you cannot write to, create a new file on,
copy a file to, or delete files from an XDF-formatted diskette. For these reasons,
the label for each XDF-formatted diskette is marked:
Diskette n
(XDF-formatted diskette)
Note: The Setup Diskette is not XDF-formatted.
Review the procedures first before attempting to do any of the following tasks that
involve using the PC DOS installation diskettes, which are XDF-formatted (other
than installing).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using DOS commands with XDF-formatted diskettes.
Viewing the contents of XDF-formatted diskettes.
Loading the XDF program.
Viewing the README.XDF file.
Formatting XDF-formatted diskettes.
Making backup copies of the PC DOS installation diskettes.
USing DOS Commands with XDF-Formatted Diskettes
Keep in mind that, if you are using XDF-formatted diskettes:
• Certain DOS commands only work with XDF-formatted diskettes (the XDF and
XDFCOPY commands)
- The XDF program is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that
supports XDF-formatted diskettes. It must be loaded to be able to see the
directory contents of your XDF-formatted installation diskettes. You can
unload this TSR program by typing xdf /u at the DOS command prompt.
Unloading this TSR saves memory.
- The XDFCOPY command performs a function similar to the DISKCOPY
command, except XDFCOPY is used only for XDF-formatted diskettes and
DISKCOPY only works on DOS-formatted diskettes.
• There are certain DOS commands that, if used with XDF-formatted diskettes,
will not produce the the same expected result as when you use them with
standard DOS-formatted diskettes (the DIR and FORMAT commands).
- The DIR command can be used with XDF-formatted diskettes to view the
entire contents of the diskette-but only when the XDF program is loaded.
Without XDF being loaded, the only file you see listed when the DIR
command is typed is a README.XDF file.
- Never use the FORMAT command on any original installation diskettes.
Appendix A. More About Installing
551
• Other DOS commands cannot be used with XDF-formatted diskettes at all (the
DISKCOPY and DISKCOMP commands).
- XDFCOPY can be used to make backup copies of the XDF-formatted
diskettes. However, you cannot use the DISKCOPY command with
XDF-formatted diskettes.
- The DISKCOMP command can only be used on the Setup Diskette.
Refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for complete details when
using these commands with XDF-formatted diskettes.
Making Backup Copies of Setup Diskettes
Use the XDFCOPY command to make backup copies of the XDF-formatted
installation diskettes; only use DISKCOPY for the Setup Diskette.
Note: Use DISKCOPY as you normally would for all diskettes other than the
PC DOS installation diskettes.
To make backup copies of your PC DOS installation diskettes:
If you have a new computer system that does not have any type of operating
system installed: install PC DOS before you make backup copies.
If you are installing over another version of DOS:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into your diskette drive.
2. To copy the necessary .EXE files needed to make backup diskettes to your
hard drive, type:
copy a:\diskcopy.exe c:\
copy a:\xdfcopy.exe c:\
This example, assumes your diskette drive is drive A and your hard drive is
drive C.
3. If you have only one diskette drive (drive A for example), leave the Setup
Diskette in drive A and type:
diskcopy a: a:
Press ENTER.
Or, if you have two diskette drives (drive A and B for example), type:
diskcopy a: b:
Press ENTER.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen until the diskette has been copied.
552
PC DOS User's Guide
5. Insert one of the XDF-formatted diskettes (any diskette other than the Setup
Diskette) into your diskette drive.
6. If you have only one diskette drive (drive A for example), type:
xdfcopy a: a:
Press ENTER.
Or, if you have two diskette drives (drive A and B for example), type:
xdfcopy a: b:
Press ENTER.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen.
During this XDFCOPY process, one progress bar appears, indicating the
progress as you copy from the source drive. Then another bar appears,
indicating the progress as it verifies and completes the XDFCOPY process for
this diskette.
8. Insert another XDF-formatted diskette into the source drive.
9. Repeat steps 6 to step 8 for each of the remaining XDF-formatted diskettes.
10. Label your backup copies similarly to the way your original PC DOS installation
diskettes are labeled to distinguish the standard DOS-formatted diskette (the
Setup Diskette) from the XDF-formatted diskettes.
11. Delete the copies of the two .EXE files you copied to your hard drive (for
example, the ones copied in the step above to drive C). Keep the copy of
these two files placed in the DOS directory by Setup.
del c:\diskcopy.exe
del c:\xdfcopy.exe
Formatting XDF-Formatted Diskettes
When you use the DOS FORMAT /U command on a XDF-formatted diskettes, they
become standard DOS-formatted diskettes. There is no command to format a
diskette to the XDF format.
Loading the XDF Program
The XDF program is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that supports
XDF-formatted diskettes. Two DOS commands were designed to work with XDF:
XDF and XDFCOPY.
When working with the XDF-formatted installation diskettes, the DIR command
requires that the XDF program be loaded before you can view all the contents of
the diskette. If XDF is not loaded when you use the DIR command, the only file
you will see listed is the README.XDF file.
Appendix A. More About Installing
553
You do not need to load the XDF program to use the XDFCOPY command, nor do
you have to load the XDF program during installation. Setup loads XDF for you
and also unloads it at the conclusion of Setup.
To load the XDF program into memory:
1. At the DOS command prompt, type:
a:\xdf
2. Then press ENTER.
You should always unload this program to save memory. After PC DOS is
installed, you can type xdf /u at the DOS command prompt.
Viewing the README.XDF File
Before you load the XDF program, the DIR command only lists the README.XDF
file. This file is a standard .TXT file that can be browsed or viewed using the
E Editor that comes with PC DOS, or you can use the TYPE command to display
the contents.
After loading XDF and typing the DIR command, you see the full list of the
diskette's contents. Note, however, that after XDF is loaded, the READMEXDF file
is no longer visible until XDF is unloaded. To see the READMEXDF file again,
type xdf /u
Viewing the Contents of XDF-Formatted Diskettes
If the XDF program is loaded, you can use the DOS DIR command (as you
normally would to view the contents of a diskette) on diskettes that are
XDF-formatted. If you see only the README.XDF file, this indicates that the XDF
program is not loaded. After PC DOS 7 is installed, you can type hel p XDF at the
DOS command prompt to find out more about the XDF command.
Working with Setup Bundle Files
When viewing the contents of any of the PC DOS installation diskettes, note there
might be large files without extensions. These files are called bundle files. A
bundle file groups together files pertaining to the same optional tool (or it may group
together the DOS files pertaining to the base DOS operating system).
There can be one or more bundle files with the same bundle name on multiple
diskettes. For example, all the files pertaining to AntiVirus are placed in one or
more bundle files named "AV"; all the files pertaining to the DOS base system are
placed in one or more bundle files named "DOS."
554
PC DOS User's Guide
Not all files are placed in bundles. Non-bundled files are placed on the Setup
Diskette.
To find out if a file is in a bundle or which bundle the file is in, use the E Editor to
look ,at the information in the FILES.TXT file. The FILES.TXT lists the:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name of the file
Bundle name
Number of the diskette where the bundle is located
Size of the file
DOS subdirectory name, if any
Brief description of what the file is
Bundle files have been grouped together and compressed using a special process
known simply as packing. The Setup program unpacks and copies the Setup files
during your PC DOS installation.
When you need to recover a single file from your PC DOS installation diskettes, the
preferred method is to rerun Setup. Follow the instructions in "Recovering Files
from the Setup Diskettes" on page 546.
More experienced DOS users' can use the UNPACK2 command to recover a file.
The UNPACK2 command allows you to see what is in each bundle or unpack and
copy one or more files from a bundle file. If you use the COpy command to copy a
bundle file to your hard disk, the files will still be in a bundle; therefore, use the
UNPACK2 command instead. After PC DOS 7 is installed, you can type hel p
unpack2 for information about the UNPACK2 command.
Warning: Do not unpack all the files from the Setup diskettes using the UNPACK2
command; Run Setup instead to unpack, copy the files, and place the files in the
directory that DOS expects for proper operation.
Using the Emergency Startup Diskette
Use the Setup Diskette to boot the computer when the hard disk is not accessible.
Many of the files needed when you have system problems are on this first diskette.
To view the list of files considered to be emergency files, use the DIR command.
The Setup Diskette is not an XDF-formatted diskette. No special procedures are
needed to use this diskette.
Appendix A. More About Installing
555
To use the Setup Diskette as the startup diskette:
1. Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
2. Turn the power for your computer on (cold boot) or, if it is already powered on,
press CTRL+ALT+DEL (warm boot) to restart your computer.
3. Type N when prompted whether you want to install PC DOS. (If you do not
answer in 10 seconds, the default answer YES is assumed.)
The command prompt A:\> is displayed.
Troubleshooting PC DOS Setup
If you have trouble during installation, there could be a number of causes. Refer to
"PC DOS Installation" on page 281 for resolutions for some of the most common
problems.
556
PC DOS User's Guide
Appendix B. Accessibility for Individuals with Disabilities
The IBM Independence Series· , is a family of products designed to help individuals
with disabilities achieve greater personal and professional independence through
the use of technology. The following products are designed specifically for
improving access between individuals with disabilities and others through the use of
a computer: Screen Reader·/DOS, Screen Reader/2, AccessDOS, KeyGuard, and
Screen Magnifier*/2.
Also, there are some clinical products that are designed to aid the therapy of those
people with speech and attention/memory impairments: SpeechViewer II,
THINKable*/DOS, and THINKable/2.
For further information or assistance with ordering any of these Independence
Series products, call the IBM Independence Series Information Center at
1-800-426-4832 (Voice) or 1-800-426-4833 (TDD). In Canada, call 1-800-465-7999
(Vo"ice).
IBM AccessDOS
\
AccessDOS is a complimentary DOS-based utility used to extend keyboard, mouse,
and sound access on a personal computer. AccessDOS is useful for people with
mobility, visual, or hearing impairments because of the specialized control it offers.
Key features include:
• StickyKeys
Enables you to individually press each key for multiple key operations. For
example, you can press CTRL, press ALT, and then press DEL to restart your
system instead of pressing the keys simultaneously.
• MouseKeys
Makes it possible to use the keys on the numeric keypad to simulate the use of
a mouse.
• RepeatKeys
Enables you to set the rate at which keys repeat when held down.
• SlowKeys
Instructs the computer not to accept a key as "pressed" until it has been held
down for a specific length of time.
• BounceKeys
• Independence Series, Screen Reader, Screen Magnifier, SpeechViewer, and THINKable are trademarks of
the IBM Corporation
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
557
Prevents double characters from being typed if your finger bounces on the key
when pressing or releasing it..
• SerialKeys
Enables you to control the keyboard and mouse functions using a special input
device (not included) attached to a serial port.
• ToggleKeys
Causes a beep to sound when the Caps Lock, Num Lock, or Scroll Lock keys
are activated.
• ShowSounds
Causes the screen to blink or display a small musical note on the screen when
the computer makes a sound.
IBM Screen Reader/DOS
Screen Reader/DOS reads the words on a display screen to people who are blind
or visually impaired so that they can use a computer as a sighted person would. It
can also be used effectively by individuals who have reading dysfunctions.
Screen Reader/DOS contains prewritten profiles for many application programs.
You can also modify existing profiles or write your own, using the Profile Access
Language.
Some of the major functions include:
• Powerful reading functions
Allow you to read complete screens, paragraphs, sentences, words, or letters.
You read only the amount of information you need.
• Dedicated 18-key keypad
Controls Screen Reader/DOS functions to enhance productivity by reserving the
keyboard for application functions. As an alternative, Screen Reader/DOS can
also be controlled from the keyboard.
• Autospeaks
Monitors the screen and alerts you when changes, such as status or error
messages, occur.
• Windowing
Provides easy access to many display formats featured in today's popular
applications.
• Host/LAN support
Enables connectivity.
558
PC DOS User's Guide
IBM KeyGuard
The IBM KeyGuard is designed for use on IBM keyboards on many IBM computer
systems, including the PS/2, PSNaluePoint*, AS/400*, and RiSe System/6000*.
The KeyGuard is a molded keyboard overlay with holes that expose and isolate
each keytop. It attaches securely so the keyboard can be tilted at any desired
angle. Features include:
• Better keying control
Enables mobility-impaired users to achieve greater control by pressing keys
through the corresponding holes on the KeyGuard when using a typing stick or
a single finger.
• Increased accuracy
Helps minimize accidental key strokes in a busy office or plant environment.
• Hand support
Provides a handrest, an important feature for individuals with palsied or other
coordination conditions.
The IBM KeyGuard is also appropriate for use in educational and preschool
environments with young children who have not yet mastered typing skills.
* PSNaluePoint, AS/400, and RISC System/GOOO are trademarks of the IBM Corporation.
Appendix B. Accessibility for Individuals with Disabilities
559
560
PC DOS User's Guide
Appendix C. Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates.
Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to state or
imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's
intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be used instead of
the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in
conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly
designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these
patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing,
IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.
Trademarks and Service Marks
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are trademarks or
service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:
AS/400
Micro Channel
CGA
OS/2
EGA
Personal Computer AT (PC/AT)
DisplayWrite
Personal Computer XT (PC/XT)
IBM
Personal System/2
IBM Personal Computer (PC) Personal System/55
IBM Token Ring
PhoneCommunicator
Independence Series
PS/2
PSNaluePoint
RISC System/GOOO
Screen Magnifier
Screen Reader
SpeechViewer
THINKable
VGA
XGA
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
trademarks of other companies as follows:
Addstor
AST
Bernoulli
BlueMAX
Brooklyn Bridge
Central Point
Central Point Backup
Compaq
dBASE
Delete Sentry
DoubleSpace
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
Addstor, Inc.
AST Research, Inc.
Iomega Corporation
Qualitas, Inc.
Fifth Generation Systems, Inc.
Central Point Software, Inc.
Central Point Software, Inc.
Compaq Computer Corporation
Borland International, Inc.
Central Point Software
Microsoft Corporation
561
DriveSpace
DR DOS
Ethernet
Excel
eXtended Density Format
FastLynx
Handwriter
Helix
Hercules
Intel
Iomega
LapLink
Lotus
Lotus AmiPro
Lotus 1-2-3
LZS
Microsoft
Microsoft Word
MS-DOS
MSCDEX
NCR
Netroom
NetWare
Novell
PC Card
PC Tools
PCMCIA
PenDOS
Phoenix
QEMM
Qualitas
Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager
Quattro Pro
RIPL
SmartPack
Stac
Stacker
Stacker Anywhere
Stacker MaxSpace
Stacker MaxSpeed
Stacker Optimizer
SuperStor
SuperStor/DS
Symphony
SyQuest
Toshiba
562
PC DOS User's Guide
Microsoft Corporation
Digital Research, Inc.
Western Digital Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Ametron, Inc.
Rupp Corporation
Communication Intelligence Corporation
Helix Corporation
Hercules Computer Technology, inc.
Intel Corporation
Iomega Corp.
Traveling Software, Inc.
Samna Corporation
Samna Corporation
Samna Corporation
Stac Electronics
Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
NCR Corporation
Helix Software Company
Novell Incorporated
Novell Incorporated
Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association
Central Point Software, Inc.
Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association
Communication Intelligence Corporation
Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
Quarterdeck Office Systems
Qualitas, Inc.
Quarterdeck Office Systems
Borland International, Inc.
CTA, Inc.
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
Stac Electronics
AddStor, Inc.
AddStor, Inc.
Lotus Development Corporation
SyQuest Technology
Toshiba Corporation
Weitek
Windows
WordPerfect
Workgroup for Windows
Write/AMI
XDF
386
386MAX
8086
8088
80286
80386
Weitek Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Work Perfect Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Samna Corporation
Ametron, Inc.
Intel Corporation
Qualitas, Inc.
Intel Corporation
Intel Corporation
Intel Corporation
Intel Corporation
Appendix C. Notices
563
564
PC DOS User's Guide
Index
Special Characters
A
/-DPMS switch (Stacker) 463
/? switch for online help 47
/=a parameter for CHECK (Stacker) 307
/A switch (Setup) 540, 542
/AUTO switch for Stacker 466
/B switch (COPY) 312
/BD=drive, Stacker 467
/C switch (Setup) 7
/E switch (Setup) 544,545
/EMS switch (Stacker) 463
/F switch (CHECK) 453
/F switch (CHKDSK) 232
/1 switch (E Editor) 460
/int15 switch 289
/P switch (DIR) 34
/Q (STACKER.INI) 461
/Q switch (Setup) 9, 544
/R switch (Stacker) 309
IT switch (Setup) 541
/U switch (FORMAT) 553
/U switch (XDF) 551
/UMB switch (Stacker) 463
/W switch (Setup) 9
... (ellipsis) 329
* (IBM trademark) 561
** (other company's trademark) 561
< (take output) 109
= (E Editor) 140, 166
> (send output) 109
» (adding output) 109
I (pipe) 111
AccessDOS 557
accessing
See a/so installation
Central Point Backup 391
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 365
Undelete 243
active partition
describing 83
setting 91
Active Task List area 341
active window, definition of 50
actual compression ratio, Stacker 457, 476
Add command (E Editor) 167
adding
a blank line (E Editor) 144
a line of text (E Editor) 137
numbers using E Editor 167
output from a command 109
PC card to the card list 513
search groups 257
address table for tape controller cards 420
ADMIN.PRF 379
administrator installation
copying PC DOS files and tools 541
creating administrator directory 541
advanced
configuration for PCMCIA 517
features of RAM Boost 214
PCMCIA utilities 518
properties of PC DOS Shell 360
setup, PCMCIA 507
All command (E Editor) 159
ALL file (E Editor) 159
All Files, Stacker 475
allocation units
defining 449
lost (Stacker) 300
recovering 232
Numerics
386MAX 225
386MAX and Stacker 464
8514 color display 295
8514 monochrome display 295
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1995
565
ALT, PenDOS modifier key 489
antivirus stand-alone program 379
AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 11
AntiVirus/DOS for Windows tool 11
AntiVirus/DOS tool 11,363
APPEND command 68
Append command (E Editor) 166
appending
deleted data (Undelete) 262
the PC DOS Viewer topic information 52
application shortcut keys 351, 358
archive file attribute 30
ASCII 56, 170, 489
Assembler syntax 164
assigning drive letters 90
ATA cards, PCMCIA 509
ATA Drives, PCMCIA 528
ATTRIB command 30, 300, 538
ATTRIB command with Stacker 300
attribute
deletion of 300
exclusions for CPBackup 397
file 30
AutoCompare 407
AUTOEXEC.BAT file
common commands in 67
editing 66
editing during installation 16
explanation of 53
multiple configurations 64
startup commands in 66
using to customize system 66
automated virus checking 363
AutoMount (Stacker) 465
automounting drives (Stacker) 464, 466
AutoProtect for Stacker 299,452
AutoRecover for Stacker 302
Autosave command (E Editor) 139
AutoSave for Stacker 299,478
B
back button (Help screens)
backing up
a file server 413
566
PC DOS User's Guide
335
backing up (continued)
before installing Stacker 431
files 282
multiple drives 401
Setup diskettes 552
Backup for DOS (Central Point) tool 12
Backup for Windows (Central Point) tool 12
Backup From command, CPBackup 400
Backup program
See CPBackup
backup status gauge (Stacker) 471
balancing compression 'and speed 448
base location, File Update 190
basics of PC DOS Shell 324
batch commands 98
batch files 338
batch program 97
calling from another batch program 104
creating 99, 100
creating conditional processing 106, 107
including comments in 103
running in a startup command 354
starting 99
stopping permanently 100
testing 101
batch programs
colon for labels 106
commands for 98
GOTO command 106
IF and GOTO together 107
IF command 106
naming conventions for 99
replaceable parameters 105
before installing Stacker 431
Bernoulli drive 400
block mark (ALT+B), E Editor 148, 149
block reflowing (ALT+R), E Editor 154
block, configuration 61
boot 460
bypassing startup commands 54
commands 54
drive 460
from Setup diskette 14
BOOT command (OS/2) 535
Boot Manager 364, 534
bootable
partition 364
Stacker diskette 309
startup diskette 78
bootable diskette
See system diskette
booting
Dual Boot 365
IBM Boot Manager 364
starting the system 364
using IBM Boot Manager 365
Box command (E Editor) 164
breaking a text line in E Editor 143
breaking connection between computers
BROWSE command 550
buffering, double 237
BUFFERS command 59, 235
bundle file
definition of 4
listed in FILES.TXT 546
on installation diskettes 554
buttons on PenDOS menu 485
bypassing
AUTOEXEC.BAT commands 56
CONFIG.SYS commands 54
bytes defined 73
c
183
C (Change) command (E Editor) 160
C language syntax 164
calculating mathematical expressions 167
CALL command 104, 354
calling
Central Point Backup 391
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 365
the E Editor 133
Undelete 243
cancelling menus 328
Caps Lock (CL), PenDOS modifier key 489
Card settle time, PCMCIA 507
carriage return
button for PenD OS 487
carriage return (continued)
sending 487
CD command 33
CD-ROM
caching with SMARTDRV 237
installing a device driver 57
installing PC DOS from 544
Stacker drive letters 466
using with RAMBoost 224
Central Point
Backup for DOS 12, 383, 391
Backup for Windows 12, 385
Data Monitor , 270
Scheduler 275
Undelete for DOS 241
Undelete for Windows 11, 242
certified tapes in CPBackup 417
CGA display 295
Change (C) command (E Editor) 160
changing
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 66
color schemes for the PC DOS Shell 344
colors, PC DOS Shell screen 344
CONFIG.SYS file 56
configurations 54
dialog box entries (PC DOS Shell) 331
directory (CD command) 33
expected compression ratio 457
file attributes 31
group contents for PC DOS Shell 351
group contents, PC DOS Shell 352
group properties, PC DOS Shell 362
hardware devices 54
margin setting (E Editor) 147
memory usage of a block 215
passwords 454
PC DOS Shell window 344
preferences 472
program item properties, PC DOS
Shell 353
screen attributes 68
screen background color 69
screen modes for the PC DOS Shell 344
screen text color 69
Index
567
changing (continued)
screen text format 69
search options (E Editor) 157, 161
Stacker drive size 456
swap file settings 476
system files during installation 16
tab setting (E Editor) 146
user level in CPBackup 389
version table in DOS 294
volume label 80
windox appearance (E Editor) 169
character
activating send, PenDOS 487
entering for PenDOS 486
variations for PenDOS 499
characteristics of viruses
CHECK /F command (Stacker) 453
check boxes (dialog boxes) 330
CHECK command 299,307,452,453
Check Integrity tool 439
checking
automatically for virus 369
compressed drives for viruses 370
diskettes for viruses 369
Stacker drives 452, 453
your hard drive for viruses 369
CHKDSK /F command 232
CHKDSK command 74, 234, 299, 300, 436
increasing disk space 232
running 300
choices (menu) for File Update 194
choosing correct install procedure 13, 533
CIS window address, PCMCIA 507
CL (Caps Lock), PenDOS modifier key 489
clearing the E Editor window
client, definition of 177
closing
a file (E Editor) 134
loops in PenDOS 498
clusters
available (free) 258
Stacker optimization 449
CMDREF online book 41
568
PC DOS User's Guide
CNFIGNAM.EXE 511
colon (:) in batch program 106
color for screen and text 68
colors, PC DOS Shell 344
combination keys 44
combining
commands with redirection characters
text lines in E Editor 143
command
ATTRIB 300,538
BOOT (OS/2) 535
BROWSE 550
BUFFERS .235
CD (change directory) 33
CHECK 307,453
CHECK /WP 452
CHKDSK 300, 436
CHKDSK /F 232
CON FIG 303, 437
CONFIG.SYS 56
CPBACKUP 285,315,410
CPBDIR 425
CPSCHED 406
DATAMON 292
DATAMON (Sentry) 271,272
DATAMON (Tracker) 271
DATE 397
DCONVERT 436
DEFRAG 234, 293
DELTREE 27,36
DEVICE 58, 238
DEVICEHIGH 58, 238
DIR /S 24
DIR (directory) 34, 551, 554
DISKCOMP 552
DISKCOPY 4, 551
DOS=HIGH 283
DOSSHELL 321
E /1 (E Editor) 460
EXPAND 4
FDISK' 83
FILES 311
FIND 112
FORMAT 551
113
command (continued)
HELP 45
IBMAVD 298, 365
INTERLNK 176,286
INTERSVR 179, 181
LOADFIX 289
MD (make directory) 35
MEM 206,236
MORE 111 , 550
MOVE 28
MSCDEX 544
PATH 233,284
PCM 512
PCMDINST 505
PCMFDISK 518
PCMRMAN 521
PCMSETUP 505
PENDOS 483
PRINT 550
QCONFIG 206, 221
RAMSETUP 208
RD (remove directory) 36
REM 7,210
REN (rename) 26
RESTORE 293
SDEFRAG 306
SET 239,286
SETUP (Stacker) 442
SETUP for PC DOS 8
SETVER 294,314
SHELL 290
SMARTDRV 236
SORT 112
SSETUP (Stacker) 431
STAC 437
STACKER 300, 442
SUBST 284
SYS 79,304,538,539
TREE command 189
UNDELETE 26, 28, 243, 292
UNPACK2 555
VIEW 41
XCOPY 38
XDF 551,554
command (continued)
XDFCOPY 551, 552
command-line options for RAMDrive 238
COMMAND.COM file 78
commands
combined with redirection characters 113
DOSKey editing keys 116
DOS KEY for movement 119
DOSKey for redirecting input and
output 126
for batch programs 98
for CONFIG.SYS file 56
for help if using /? switch 47
for help with DOS commands 46
for help with error messages 46
for help with REXX commands 46
for PC DOS Shell startup items 354
for program items, PC DOS Shell 354
for redirecting input from a file 110
for redirecting output 109
for Stacker, summary 467
for STACKER.INI 460
for startup in AUTOEXEC.BAT 66
PC DOS Shell online help 334
troubleshooting tips for 292
types of filter 111
comment lines, removing 7
common block, multiple configurations 62
common installation questions 281
compare, CPBackup
generating a report 407
symbols defined 409
comparing
data in CPBackup 407
files, FC command 29
memory types 219
Compress Drive command, Stacker 441
Compress Drive tool 439
Compress Floppy tool 439
compressed
data not available 304
diskette, Stacker Anywhere 443
drives if installing PC DOS 537
drives if using Stacker for OS/2 &
DOS 534
Index
569
compressed (continued)
drives using Stacker for OS/2 536
DRV/DBLSPACE drives 434
compressing
additional drives 440
diskettes 442
empty diskettes 442, 443
hard disks 440
compression
considering speed versus space 448
details 473
expected vs actual ratios 457
ratio gauge 470
using virus protection with 381
Compression Report tool 439
compression tool, Stacker
compatible programs 537
incompatible programs 537
installation of 12
computers, connecting 175
conditional processing 106, 107
confidence test (CPBackup) 387
CONFIG command 303, 305, 437
CONFIG.SYS file
adding commands to 56
bypassing commands in 54
changing 56
changing during installation 16
confirming each command during
startup 283
editing 56
EMM386.EXE 291
example of 59
explanation of 53
memory management 461
multiple configurations 63
configuration
blocks, defined 61
common blocks 62
first time for CPBackup 385
menu block 60
multiple 54
system 53
570
PC DOS User's Guide
Configure (PCM) 513
configuring
ATA Drives, PCMCIA 528.
configuration considerations 208
fax/modem I/O cards 524
Flash Memory Card, PCMCIA 527'
other I/O cards, PCMCIA 525
PC cards for PCMCIA 524
PCMCIA 505,512
RAM Boost 208
RAM Boost with PCMCIA 528
SRAM Memory Card, PCMCIA 528
using PCMSETUP command 505
confirming each CONFIG.SYS command 283
connecting a text line in E Editor 143
Contents push button 44
control characters using E Editor 170
controller cards (CPBackup) 419
conventional memory 219
specifying in the PC DOS Shell for
programs, 360
converting DBL/DRVSPACE drives 434
copy block of text gesture for PenDOS 491
Copy command (PC DOS Shell) 351
copying
administrator files and tools 541
directories 38
files to Setup diskettes 546
PC DOS Viewer topic information 52
previously typed command 129
program items among program groups 351
Setup diskettes 552
subdirectories 39
text (ALT +C) using E Editor 155
topics into a file 51
VGAVID file 296
with the E Editor (ALT +C) 152
country selections 9
CPBackup
changing user level 389
choosing files with the keyboard 398
compare symbols 409
comparing data '407
configuring for the first time 385
CPBackup (continued)
contents of setup files 404
CPBDIR command 425
date range selection 397
disabling Express 399
displaying the directory tree 398
drive display 401
excluding file attributes 397
failing high-speed confidence test 387
file-filter commands 394
files that do not compare 408
files, low-speed backups 412, 424
hidden files 397
include/exclude list guidelines 395
including subdirectories 395
installing 383
making a backup 391
monochrome file selection 399
network device or directory 412
non-Express window explained 399
performing the confidence test 386
preconfigured setup files 403, 405
previous versions 405
printing a backup directory 411
quitting a SCSI backup 393
restoring data 409, 410
restoring when Express is disabled 409
running confidence test, 387
SCSI tape directory 393
selecting files automatically 395
selecting files by date 397
selecting files manually 398
selecting multiple drives when Express is
disabled 400
setting passwords for backup set 392
setting tape password 393
setup files defined 403
setup files description 405
skipping he confidence test 386
starting a compare 407
strategies for backing up 421
system files 397
tape information 415
testing backup speed 387
CPBackup (continued)
troubleshooting confidence test 386
unattended backups 407
user level reference chart 390
using CPSCHED 406
using the include/exclude list 394
viewing files 402
volume tape catalog explained 421
CPBACKUP command 285, 315, 410
CPBACKUP.001 file 412
CPBACKUP.CFG file 386
CPBACKUP.DIR file 412
CPBACKUP.INF file 412
CPBDIR command 425
CPS format for tapes 418
CPSCHED command 68, 406
creating
batch programs 99, 100
DOS files and tools directory 542
DOSKey macros 121
E Editor file 137
extended DOS partition 88
LAN administrator directory 540
logical drives 89
online help 360
online help for PC DOS Shell 349
primary DOS partition 86
Stacker drive 440
system diskette 79
CTRL, PenDOS modifier key 489
CTRL+BREAK key combination 100
CTRL+C key combination 100
current directory 33
current drive 21
cursor movement
keys 141
move to beginning of marked area
(ALT+Y) 155
move to end of marked area (ALT +E)
custom setup, Stacker 432
customizing
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 66
automated virus protection 372
diskette checking for viruses 374
Index
155
571
customizing (continued)
E Editor 141
E Editor window 169
Help messages for the PC DOS Shell
PC DOS Shell 343
PCMCIA 518
Stacker configuration 459
STACKER.INI file 460
system checking for viruses 374
I
D
damaged files, removing for Stacker 307
data file, definition of 19
Data Monitor delete protection 247, 266
data, recovering 241
DATAMON command 68,271,292
DATAMON Delete Sentry 271
DATAMON Delete Tracker 271
DATE command 397
date range selection, CPBackup 397
DBLSPACE drives 434
DCONVERT command (Stacker) 436
defaults
resetting tape drive (CPBackup) 420
running AntiVirus 365
defaults (E Editor)
Change command case search 161
function keys 133
margin settings. 137
number of lines restored 145
search options 158, 162
stream mode 144
syntax-directed editing 171
tiled window 169
defective sectors reported 77
defining a startup menu 60
DEFRAG command 234, 293
defragmenting
configure selection 234
files 233
optimize selection 234
Stacker drives 449
DELETE command 27
572
PC DOS User's Guide
360
Delete command (PC DOS Shell) 349,352
delete protection methods 247
Delete Sentry method 247, 270
Delete Tracker method 247, 269
deleting
a character for PenDOS 488
a character left of cursor
(BACKSPACE) 145
a character right of cursor (DELETE) 145
a directory 27,36
a line of text (CTRL+BACKSPACE) 144
a program group, PC DOS Shell 349
a program item, PC DOS Shell 352
a word of text (CTRL+D) 145
all directory files 27
character gesture for PenDOS 490
directory entry, File Update 193
DOSKey macro 123, 124
file attributes 300
files and directories 37
highlighted block gesture for PenDOS 490
marked text (ALT +D) 155
partition or logical drive 92
program groups 349
program items from groups 352
search groups 258
Setup comment lines 7
text using E Editor 151
deletion, restoring (E Editor) 145
DELTREE command 27,36
destroyed Undelete file condition 246
details, disk space for Stacker 473
DEVICE command 58, 59, 238
device driver
386MAX 225
explanation of 57
HIMEM.SYS 288
install able 57
INTERLNK.EXE177,286
Netroom 225
order in CONFIG.SYS file 58
PCMCIA 230
QEMM386 226
RAMBOOST.EXE 212
device driver (continued)
RAMDRIVE.SYS 238
SMARTDRV.EXE 236, 237
device, hardware 57
DEVICEHIGH command 58, 59, 238
diagnosing Stacker drives 300
dialog boxes
changing entries 331
entering additional information 329
explanation of 324
list box 330
replacing entries 331
text box 330
dimmed menu options 345
DIR IS command 24
DIR command 34, 551, 554
directories
changing to another 33
copying 38
copying all files in a directory 38
creating as you copy files 39
deleting 27,36
making 35
moving files 28
naming 32
recovering deleted files from 26, 28
removing 36
renaming 40
undeleting files in 252
using the IP switch 34
viewing contents of 34
viewing groups of file names .in 35
directory 21
current 33
description of 21
new 35
parent 21
startup for program items 351
directory tree 32
CPBackup 398
PC DOS Shell 322
Undelete 244
disabilities, individuals 557
disabling warnings, Stacker 473
discontinue batch processing 100
disk
buffer size 235
definition of 73
definition of fixed disk 19
partition data 85
space used and free 470
summary of expected vs actual ratios
types of 74
utilities with PC DOS Shell 326
volume label for 76, 80
Windows File Manager 476
disk space 77
disk-~epair utilities 299, 301
DISKCOMP command 552
DISKCOPY command 4,551
diskette
bootable 54
new feature, XDF 5
sizes and types of 73
XDF-formatted 550
diskette drives 75
diskettes
backing up, installation 552
creating a Stacker bootable 310
creating a system diskette 78, 79
formatting 76, 77
restoring 78
transferring File Updates to 197
unmounting if compressed 445
using for emergency startup 555
viewing contents of 554
DiskFix, PC Tools 309
disks
formatting after FDISK 94
formatting using FDISK 75
making volume label 79
partitioning 81, 82
preparing for DOS files 76
recovering allocation units 232
renaming 79
restoring 78
speeding up your system 235
Index
476
573
Display command, PC DOS Shell 345
display mode
See graphics mode, text mode
display monitors, PC DOS Shell 295
displaying
batch commands and messages 101
multiple drives in CPBackup 400
the directory tree in CPBackup 398
document format, special 56, 66
documentation links 45
DOS
command prompt 321
editing keys 127
error messages 46
extended partition 82
memory managers 290
partition, primary 82
README.TXT file 281
restoring system files 304
running FDISK 83
starting the PC DOS Viewer from 41
Toolbox for Stacker 442
troubleshooting commands 292
version number 294
wildcards in CPBackup 395
DOS Protected Mode Services
See DPMS
DOS=HIGH command 283
DOS=HIGH,UMB command 59
DOSERROR online book 41
DOSKey program
characters and redirection 126
copying previously typed command 129
creating a macro 121
deleting a macro 124
editing 115
editing a macro 123
editing keys summary 116
editing previously typed command 129
loading into memory 115
movement keys summary 119
redirecting input and output 126
running a macro 122
saving a macro 123
574
PC DOS User's Guide
DOSKey program (continued)
typing multiple commands 116
using replaceable parameters 124, 125
using with commands 115
using with macros 120
viewing previous command 116
DOSREXX online book 41
DOSSHELL command 321
DOSSHELL.INI file 295
double buffering, SMARTDRV 236, 237
DPMS (Stacker) 462
DPMS.EXE 462,463
drawing lines 134
drive
compressed, DBLSPACE 434
compressed, DRVSPACE 434
current 21
installing if other than C 533
integrity, checking 453
letters for Stacker 459
letters for Stacker drives 460
map for Stacker 459
specifications in STACKER.INI 461
Drive Icon area, PC DOS Shell 322
drive letters
assigning 90, 441, 459
identifying 442, 459
specifying 466
substituting 91
drives
displaying multiple in CPBackup 400
light, during Backup 393
mapping explained 401
multiple selection in CPBackup 400
remapping for File Update 200
resetting defaults for tapes 420
scanning for available (free) clusters 258
selecting multiple in CPBackup 400
DRVSPACE drives 434
Dual Boot (OS/2) 534
dual boot systems 365
duplicating XDF-formatted diskettes
E
E Editor 131
activating the menu 134
adding and multiplying numbers 167
cursor movement keys 142
editing a file 134
function keys 133
joining and splitting lines 143
naming a file 134
printing a file 141
restoring a line 134
saving files 139
search options 161
unmarking text (ALT+U) 150
E /1 command (E Editor) 460
E command 137
E.INI file 141,144
ECHO command 101
ECHO OFF command 67
editing
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 66
characters in PenDOS 490
CONFIG.SYS 461
DOSKey macros 120
files using E Editor 134
keys defined 115 '
multiple files 140
multiple files (E Editor) 140
PCMCIA configuration values 513
previously typed command 129
system files during install 16
system files during installation 548
using DOS keys 127
using DOS Key program 115
editing keys, DOS Key 116, 119
editing, PenDOS
canceling, not sending characters 488
clearing characters 487, 488
closing Writing Window 487
copying 491
deleting a block 490
deleting a character 487, 488, 490
deleting last character before cursor 487
editing line 486, 488
editing, PenDOS (continued)
inserting a space character 487
inserting space gesture 490
pasting 491
sending characters to application 487, 488
sending characters with carriage
return 487
sending characters, clearing line 488
editor for RAM Boost 216
EGA display 295
EGA MONO display 295
emergency diskette 555
EMM386
ad"ding memory range exclusions 526
before running PCMDINST, PCMCIA 504
commenting out for RAM Boost 210
detecting within page frame 291
if not accessing upper memory 291
including noems switch 58
loading Data Monitor high 271
options '(lith RAM Boost 216
putting device drivers in order 58
required for PenDOS .481
simulating expanded memory 58
using PC DOS's vs Windows 236
using with expanded-memory
manager 290
using with I/O adapters 525
using with ram switch 59
using with RAMBoost 206
using with RAM Drive 239
using with Stacker 464
EMM386.EXE 237, 291
empty diskette, compressing 442, 443
EMS and Stacker 463
environment size 290
environment variable 111
erase to end of line (CTRL+E) 144
error messages
getting help for online 46
out of memory (DEFRAG) 293
reported by CHKDSK 300
searching for online 46
Setup program 287
Index
575
error messages (continued)
using online book 41
while optimizing using Stacker 308
examples of commands 45
excellent Undelete file condition 245
existing Undelete file condition 246
exiting
an E Editor file 137
E Editor 137
PC DOS Shell '343
PC DOS Viewer 45
Stacker Anywhere for DOS 444
EXPAND command 4
expanded memory (EMS or EEMS) 221
expected compression ratio
changing 457
for Stacker 476
Expected Compression tool 439
Express
disabling in CPBackup 399
restoring when disabled in CPBackup 409
express setup, Stacker 432
extended
DOS partition 81, 82, 88
memory (XMS) 220, 289
memory specified in the PC DOS
Shell 361
memory with SMARTDRV 236
memory with Stacker 462
extensions
BAT (batch files) 99, 338
text files 20
extra length tapes in Backup 417
F
F1 for online help 48
F5 during startup 55, 283, 285, 315
F8 during startup 55, 283
FAT
See File Allocation Table
FAT system (OS/2) 534
fax/modem I/O cards 524
FC command 29
576
PC DOS User's Guide
FDISK command 83, 282
FDISK program
running during installation 83
running other than installation 84
viewing main options menu 84
FDISK.COM file 78, 315
features of
, E Editor 131
PC DOS 7 xxi
RAMBoost, advanced 214
Setup program 3
Stacker compression 429
file
attributes described 30
attributes, changing 31
AUTOEXEC.BAT 54
automatic selection, CPBackup 394
batch program 97
bundled 554
compressed drive (STACVOL) 456
conditions for undeleting 245
CONFIG.SYS 54
created by low-speed backups 412, 424
defragmented 233
deletion 292
description of 19
extensions 20
name and extension 19
name extension, batch programs 99
name restrictions 20
names of 20
not matching, CPBackup 408
overwritten 245,250, 267
remain uncompressed 536
selection indicator 399
setup for CPBackup 403, 405
specification (path and file name) 22
types of 19
File Allocation Table (FAT) 75
file system for OS/2 534
Undelete 258, 267
File List area, PC POS Shell 322
File Manager, Stacker drives 474
file server, backing up 413
File Update
installing at base location 190
installing if InterLnk-connected 200
installing on a PC (remote) 196
synchronizing files 189
transferring files to remote 196
troubleshooting 313
using menu choices 194
using with LAN-connected system 202
. files
appending information into 52
backing up 282
backing up by date 397
batch 338
comparing using the FC command 29
copying 24
copying from Setup diskettes 546
copying information into 52
copying to a directory 38
copying topics into 51
creating using text editors 132
deleting 27
excluding by attribute in CPBackup 397
finding if deleted 254, 258
finding in a deleted directory 252
finding using DIR /S 24
moving and renaming 29
naming 20
network, undeleting 252
printing using E Editor 134, 141
recovering from Setup diskette 546
recovering if deleted 26, 28, 241, 252
redirecting input from 110
redirecting output to 109
renaming 26, 250
saving QCONFIG output to 213
selecting automatically in CPBackup 395
selecting manually in CPBackup 398,399
storing data in 19
transferring to remote location 196
undeleting 241
viewing attributes of 30
viewing in CPBackup 402
FILES command 59,311
FILES.TXT file 546
fill marked area (ALT +F) using E Editor 155
filter command
FIND command 112
MORE command 111
SORT command 112
FIND command 112
finding
deleted files 254
files in deleted directory 252
files using DIR /S 24
,
files using the PC DOS Shell 339
index topiCS, PC DOS Viewer 50
searching, PC DOS Shell 339
text and replacing 160
text using E Editor 157
text within a file 31
viruses 363
first time configuration in CPBackup 385
fixed disk
See disks
Fixed Disk Setup Program
See FDISK program
Flash File System, PCMCIA 508
Flash Memory Card, PCMCIA 527
flashing message, Stacker 472
floppy
See diskette
FORMAT command 76,79,551
format, special for documents 56, 66
formatting
creating a system diskette 79
disk capacity, specifying 76
disks 76
disks using FDISK 75
hard disk after using FDISK 94
non-XDF formatted diskettes 551
paragraphs with E Editor 155
preparing for DOS files 76, 77
quick format 76
restore disk after 78
safe format 76
system diskette 78
Index'
577
formatting (continued)
time table in CPBackup 418
unconditional format 76
XDF-formatted diskettes 553
Forward push button 44
fragmentation 449
fragmentation gauge, Stacker 470
f(ee space 441
compressing diskette/removable 442
compressing on hard drive 440
defining 432
Full optimization with Stacker 449
Full Update, Stacker optimization 433
Full-MaxSpace for Stacker 449, 451
full-screen backup tool 383
function
buttons for PenDOS 487, 488
keys for E Editor 133
keys for Undelete 245
G
gauges, Stacker
Backup Status 471
Compression Ratio 470
Disk Space 470
Fragmentation 470
Preferences, Windows 473
gestures, PenDOS
definition of 490
types of and functions 490
Get command in E Editor 165
getting help
E Editor 134, 136
for PC DOS Shell 334
for PC DOS Shell procedure 336
online other than PC DOS Viewer 45
Stacker compression 430,464
Stacker Setup 432
Stacker Windows Toolbox areas 469
using the /? switch 47
using the PC DOS Viewer 48
getting ready for Stacker 431
good Undelete file condition 245
578
PC DOS User's Guide
GOTO command 106, 107
graphic characters using E Editor 170
graphical user interface
See GUI
graphics mode, PC DOS Shell 323, 344, 361
greater-than sign for redirection 109
group of files, deleting 27
group properties, PC DOS Shell 362
GUI (graphical user interface) 320
H
hard disk
compressing, Stacker 440
formatting after FDISK 94
having multiple 94
installing on 14
partitioning 81
performing safe format on 76
repartitioning 282
restoring after formatting 78
space requirements 281
hard disks
See disks
hardware device, adding 54 /
header, saved for Stacker 299
hearing impairment 557
help
creating online 349
F1 key 48
for E Editor 136
for Stacker compression 430
for the PC DOS Shell 336,337
from within the PC DOS Viewer 48
Help menu option 48
menu option, PC DOS Viewer 45
messages, PC DOS Shell 349
on Stacker Setup 432
online 336, 337
online about PC DOS Viewer 43
online for PC DOS Shell 360
online other than PC DOS Viewer 45
online, PC DOS Shell 334
PC DOS Shell procedures online 336
push button, PC DOS Shell 330,335
help (continued)
push button, PC DOS Viewer 45
HELP command 45, 46
Help menu option 48
help menu, PC DOS Shell 337
Hercules display 295
hidden file attribute 30
hidden files in CPBackup 397
hidden files with Stacker 459
high memory area (HMA) 219, 287
high-speed test, CPBackup 387
HIMEM.SYS and Stacker 464
HIMEM.SYS device driver 288
history files, printing directory 411
HMA
See high memory area
host drive, definition of 435
hot key letter, defined 51
hypertext links 45
IBM AccessDOS 557
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 11, 363
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 11, 365
IBM Boot Manager 364
IBM Independence Series 557
IBM Screen Reader 558
IBM Thinkpad 531
IBMAVD command 298,365
IBMAVSP.EXE 379
IBMDOS.COM file 78
identifying drive letters, Stacker 459
IF command 64, 106, 107
INCLUDE command 63
include subdirectories, CPBackup 395
include/exclude files, CPBackup 394
incompatible compression programs . 537
incorrect version of INTERLNK 286
increasing system speed 235
Independence Series 557
index
push button in PC DOS Viewer 44
topics in PC DOS Viewer 50
INF file extension, online books 41
Information Center for disabilities 557
information selection, PCMCIA 515
INI file
DOSSHELL.INI 295
E.INI 141, 144
PCM.INI 518
RAMBOOST.INI 223
RAMSETUP.INI 209,212
STACKER.INI 305
SYSTEM.INI (Windows) 286
initialized tapes in CPBackup 417
input, redirecting 109
insert mode 143
insert space gesture for PenDOS 490
installation device driver 57
installation of
bundle files 554
Central Point Backup for DOS 383
Central Point Backup for Windows 385
Central Point Undelete for Windows 241
country codes 9
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 363
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 363
ISO fonts 5
keyboard layouts 5, 9
mouse drivers 41 0
optional tools 545
PC DOS 3
PC DOS from a LAN server 540
PC DOS from a LAN workstation 540
PC DOS Shell 319
PenDOS 481
Phoenix PCMCIA Support 502
Phoenix PCMCIA Support for
Windows 502
Stacker compression 427
Windows tools 9
installing
answering problems 281
backing up files 282
booting from diskette 14
copying Setup files 546
File Update at remote location 198
Index
579
, installing (continued)
from a CD-ROM drive 544
from within your DOS system 14
if a LAN administrator 540
if after the LAN Administrator installs 543
if from a remote workstation to a
server 542
if installing to a server 541
if OS/2 is installed 534
if OS/2 is installed as FAT 534
if rerunning Setup (/E) 544
if using a mouse 5
if using Boot Manager 534
if using diskettes 14
if using Dual Boot 534
if using OS/2 Boot Manager 534
if using OS/2 Stacker 534
if wanting optional tools 545
if you have a PS/1 536
if you have OS/2 Stacker compression 536
if your drives are compressed 537
if your system already has Dual Boot
capability 535
on a LAN-connected system 202
on a remote PC 196
on an InterLnk-connected system 200
on drive other than C 533
on hard disk 14
partitioning disks, 282
removing comment lines 7
using XDF-formatted diskettes 550
INTERLNK command 176, 180, 286
INTERLNK device driver 286
InterLnk program '175
using with File Update 200
INTERSVR command 179,181
InterSvr program
describing use of 179
using with File Update 200
IRQ, PCMCIA 507
ISO font selection 5
580
PC DOS User's Guide
J
joining a text
lin~
in E Editor
143
K
KEEPINFO option, RAMBoost 219
key stroke, E ,Editor 147
sequence play (CTRL+T) 147
sequence record (CTRL+R) 147
KEYB command 68
keyboard
choosing files in CPBackup 398
displaying 485
editing characters on 487, 488
keyboard selections 9
keyboard shortcut keys 327
KeyGuard 559
keys
cursor movement, E Editor 142
DOS editing 127
for E Editor functions 133
help in PC DOS Viewer 45
stopping a batch program 100'
keys for marking (E Editor)
adding numbers in (ADD) 167
append text 166
block mark (ALT +B) 151
copying text, insertion (ALT +C) 155
copying text, overlay (ALT +0) 155
deleting text (ALT +0) 155
fill marked area (ALT+F) 155
get text 165
line mark (ALT+L) 151
move cursor to beginning of (ALT +Y) 155
move cursor to end of (ALT +E) 155
moving text 155
moving text, space filling (ALT +A) 155
paragr~phing text (ALT+P) 154, 155
put text from file 165
reflowing text (ALT +R) 154, 155
remove mark (ALT +U) 151
search restriction 160
shift left (ALT +F7) 155
shift right (ALT +F8) 155
keys for marking (E Editor) (continued)
table of 156
text mark (ALT +Z) 151
word (ALT+W) 150, 151
keyword for PC DOS Viewer 49
kilobytes defined 73
L
LABEL command 80
labels
for batch programs 106
for disks. See Volume label 79
LAN administrator
installing PC DOS on a server 540
installing PC DOS on a workstation 540
using SETUP /A 540
LAN Administrator directory
for DOS files and tools 542
for LAN installation 540
laptop computer 175
larger, making Stacker drive 456
less-than sign, redirection 109
letters of Stacker drives 459
LIM 3.2/4.0 220
line mark (E Editor) '148, 149
lines, drawing 134
linking to online topics 49
list of DOS Key commands 118
LOAD FIX command 289
loading
See also installation
Central Point Backup 391
Central Point Scheduler 275
Central Point Undelete 243
CPBackup setup file 405
DOS Key program into memory 115'
E Editor 133
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 365
PC DOS Shell 320
RAMBoost .224
Stacker in upper memory 462
XDF 551,553
Local Area Network (LAN)
installing PC DOS on 540
Local Area Network (LAN) (continued)
using with File Update 202
LOCAL.MSG 379
locating files using DIR /S 24
locating text using E Editor 157
logical drives 83, 89
lost file Undelete file condition 246
M
macro, DOS Key
creating 121
defining 120
deleting 124
editing 123
running 122
saving 123
using replaceable parameters 125
macros
PenDOS for gestures 491
saving keystrokes in, E Editor 147
making a backup 391
margins
paragraph adjustment to 154
setting 146, 154
marking
as deleted file 28
line (mouse) 148
text using a mouse 148
text using key combinations 149
marking text
See text marking
Math command in E Editor 167
mathematical expressions in E Editor 167
MaxSpace for Stacker 447
MaxSpeed for Stacker 447
MD (make directory) command 35
media errors while optimizing 308
megabytes defined 73
MEM command 206, 236
memory
analysis of your computer 221
conventional 461
expanded (EMS) 463
extended 462
Index
581
memory (continued)
extended memory (XMS) 289
loading DOS Key program in 115
problems with 287
ranges, RAM Boost 229
required for PC DOS Shell programs 360
run the optimizer 464
specifying in the PC DOS Shell for
programs 361
upper 462
Upper Memory Area 290
upper memory blocks 462
memory manager
compatibility with each other 225
DPMS access 462
EEMS/EMS 4.0 types 207
HIMEM.SYS 288
other types of and RAM Boost 206
PC DOS-provided 207, 462
used with PC DOS 290
memory types
conventional memory 219
expanded memory (EMS or EEMS) 221
extended memory (XMS) 220
high memory area (HMA) 219
upper memory block (UMB) 219
memory-resident program 68
defragment 233
RAMDrive 238
SMARTDRV 236
menu
block for multiple configurations 60
buttons for PenDOS 485
choices for File Update 194
E Editor 134
optimize option, DEFRAG 234
option for PC DOS Viewer help 48
selections for PC DOS Shell 328
selections for PenDOS 485
system startup choices 60
menu bar, PC DOS Shell 322
MENUCOLOR command 60
MENUDEFAULT command 60
582
PC DOS User's Guide
MENU ITEM command 60
messages
abnormal program termination 297
creating for PC DOS Shell help 360
EMS page address, EMM386 291
high memory area 288
incorrect DOS version 294
online book of errors 46
out of memory 293
packed file corrupt 289
ROM or RAM within page frame 291
Stacker Setup 302
startup 283
while installing 287
with batch programs 101 '
methods and backup strategies 423
mnemonic selection 326, 366
mobility impairment 557
MODE command 67
modem/FAX cards, PCMCIA 509
modifier keys for PenDOS 489
modifying E Editor file 137
monitor, video 295
monochrome screen
file selection indication in CPBackup 399
required file 295
Stacker /m switch 431
MORE command 111, 550
mounting
diskette drives (AutoMount) 464
drives to make data available 445
permanent Stacker drives 465
removable Stacker drives 442, 461
removable Stacler drives 464
software-drive removable drives 465
Stacker Anywhere drives 444
Stacker Windows drives 445
temporary drives 444
mouse
drivers with CPBackup 410
pointer for PC DOS Shell 324
scrolling with 333
selection for PC DOS Shell 324
using as a pen 484
mouse (continued)
using during install 5
MOUSE command 68
MOVE command 28
movement
of cursor 141
of cursor to beginning of marked area
(ALT+Y) 155
of cursor to end of marked area
(ALT+E) 155
moving
around in E Editor 142
around in the PC DOS Viewer 44
blocks of text, E Editor 153
marked text using E Editor 155
text, E Editor (ALT +M) 153
MS-FLASH.SYS file 508
MSCDEX command 57,66,466,544
Mult command (E Editor) 167
multi-tasking using PC DOS Shell 296
multiple
.INI-files 207
commands, typing on one line 116
configurations at startup 54
configurations with PCMCIA 503, 517
configurations with RAM Boost 207
configurations, common block 62
configurations, menu block 60
dri~e backups 401
drive selection in CPBackup 400
editing, E Editor 140
files, deleting 27
files, editing (E ~ditor) 140
hard drives 94
menu block 60
partitions 81
selections using PC DOS Shell 328
system configurations 60
text mark 150
multiplyi~g numbers (E Editor) 167
N
naming
a file
naming (continued)
a file in E Editor 134
batch program 99
unnamed E Editor file 138
Netroom 225
network volumes, restoring 410
networks 252
New command (PC DOS Shell) 348, 350
new features of Stacker 429
next DOSKey command 117
NOEMS and Stacker 464
noems switch 58
non-DOS partitions 82
non-Express window in CPBackup 399
non-SCSI tapes supported 417
normal use of AntiVirus 365
Novell network 412, 413
Novell network drive display 401
NLlm Lock (NL), PenDOS modifier key 489
numeric keypad 488
o
online book·
copying topics 51
exiting from 45
getting help for 45
linking to more topics 49
names of 41
printing topics 51
starting the PC DOS Viewer 41
table of contents 45
viewing the screen 43
online help
creating for PC DOS Shell 349
creating Help messages 360
E Editor 136
E Editor F1 key 134
for PC DOS Shell 334, 335
for PC DOS Shell procedures 336
for the PC DOS Shell 336, 337
getting for the PC DOS Viewer 45
PC DOS Viewer 45
opening files using E Editor 134
20
Index
583
optir:nization
Stacker drives 449
types of 450
versus recompressing 449
optimize and defragment 234
optimizing
by increasing system speed 232, 233
by reducing file search time 233
optimizing your system 235
option methods (RAM Boost)
optional tools
adding after initial DOS install 364
adding after initial DOS installation 503
Central Point Backup for DOS 10, 383
Central Point Backup for Windows 10
Central Point Undelete for Windows 10
IBM AntiVirus/DOS '10, 363
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 10
PC DOS Shell 10
PCMCIA Support 10
PenDOS 10
rerunning Setup to' install 545
REXX Language Support 10
Stacker Compression for DOS and
Windows 10
options editor, RAM Boost 216
order of devices in path 239
ordering products, disabilities 557
OS/2
starting the PC DOS Viewer from 42
using dual boot for switching 535
using the AntiVirus program 365
output, redirection commands 109
overlay text using E Editor 155
overwrite warning during restore 410
overwritten files 245, 250, 267, 270
p
packed file corrupt 289
packed format 555
page frame 291
paragraph
adjusting to new margins using
E Editor 154
584
PC DOS User's Guide
paragraph (continued)
formatting (ALT +P) using E Editor 155
parameters
for CPBDIR 425
for SETUP 8
in startup commands for program
items 355
replaceable for DOSKey 124
parent directory 21
partition
data, viewing 85
deletion of 92
extended 81
hard disks 81
non-DOS partitions 82
primary 81
primary DOS 282
partitioning and formatting 87
Pascal syntax 164
password
changing 454
protecting a backup 392
removing 455
setting 454
Password tool, Stacker 439
passwords
for Central Point Backup 392
for CPBackup user levels 389
for program groups 349
for program items 351
paste gesture for PenDOS 491
PATH command 67,233,284
path order for devices 239
PAUSE command 102
PC DOS Shell
adding program groups 348, 349
attaching programs to 338
changing group contents 350
changing program item properties 357,
360
changing the window 344
creating help messages 349
default view 345
deleting a program group 349
PC DOS Shell (continued)
described 319
Directory Tree area 322
disk utilities 326
display monitors supported 295
displays 324
displays supported 295
finding files 339
getting help 360
graphics mode 323
installing 319
leaving temporarily 342
online help 349
quitting 343
quitting active tasks 342
requesting Help 334
starting from DOS prompt 321
starting programs from 338
Task Swapper 341
troubleshooting 295
using the Help menu 336, 337
viewing Help procedures 336 '
PC DOS Shell window
changing for the PC DOS Shell 344
rearranging items in program groups 352
PC DOS Shell, customizing
adding passwords for program items 359
adding program groups 348, 349
adding program items to groups 350, 351
copying program items among groups 351
creating startup commands 354
defining application shortcut keys 358
deleting a program group 349
deleting program items from groups 352
pausing after quitting a program 359
preventing program switching 362
rearranging items in program groups 352
reserving PC DOS Shell shortcut keys 362
running batch programs in a startup
command 354
setting video mode for programs 361
specifying memory for programs 360, 361
using a startup directory for programs 358
PC DOS Viewer
appending information to a file' 52
copying information to a file 52
copying topic information 51
copying topics 51
definition of 41
exiting from 45
finding index topics 50
getting help for 45
getting help while using 48
getting other types of online help 45
linking to more topics 49
linking to topics 49
moving around in 44
moving around in the PC DOS Viewer 44
printing 51
printing from the PC DOS Viewer 51
starting from a DOS Command Prompt 41
starting from OS/2 42
starting from PC DOS Shell 42
starting from Windows 43
starting the online viewer 41
using the HELP command 45
using the viewer 41
viewing the initial PC DOS Viewer
screen 43
PC Tools DiskFix 309
PCM Card List, PCMCIA 515
PCM command 512
PCM Configure selection, PCMCIA 513
PCM Information selection, PCMCIA 515
PCM Option selection, PCMCIA 515
PCM utility for DOS 512
PCM utility for Windows (PCMWIN) 516
PCM.INI file 501, 518
PCMATASYS file 511
PCMCIA
advanced configuration considerations 517
ATA card settings 509'
configuring with RAM Boost 528
considerations before using 503
designating a card 510
dynamic configuration 512
Flash File System 508
Index
585
PCMCIA (continued)
installed driver list 511
latest enhancements 501
modem/FAX card settings 509
multiple configurations 503, 517
PCM for Windows (PCMWIN) 516
PCM utility for DOS 512
PCMFDISK 518
PCMRMAN 518
UMB memory 503
using PCM command 512
using PCMDINST command 505
using PCMFDISK command 518
using PCMRMAN command 521
using PCMSETUP command 505
PCMCIA Support 11
PCMCS.EXE file 511
PCMDINST command 505
PCMDINST, removing EMM386 before
running 504
PCMFDISK command 518
PCMFFCS.EXE file 511
PCMRMAN 521
PCMRMAN command 511, 521
PCMSCD.EXE file 511
PCMSETUP command 505
PCMSS.EXE file 511
PCMWIN
running and configuring cards 516
using only 386 enhanced mode 516
pen, using with PenDOS 484
PenDOS
aligning tablet 497
buttons on menus 485
copy block of text gesture 491
ENTER button 485
entering characters 486
ESC button 485
installing 481
K button 485
keyboard 487
menu and buttons 485
modifier keys 489
paste gesture 491
586
PC DOS User's Guide
PenDOS (continued)
starting 483
starting applications 493
tap gesture 491
undo gesture 491
using with EMM386 481
Writing Window 485
PENDOS command 483
PenDOS optional tool 11
perfect Undelete file condition 245
performance improvements 239, 447
permanent swap file, Stacker Windows 476
Phoenix PCMCIA Support 11, 501 , 502
phrase mark (E Editor) 150
pipe
for getting command input 111
with the MORE command 111
with the SORT command 113
poor Undelete file condition 245
precompressed data, Stacker 474
preconfigured setup files in CPBackup 403,
405
preferences gauges 472,473
preinstall considerations (INTERLNK) 176
Prevent Program Switch (PC DOS Shell) 362
preview for File Update 197
previous DOSKey command 117
Previous push button 44
primary DOS partition 86, 282
creating 86
defining 81
PRINT command 550
Print command, E Editor 141
Print History command in CPBackup 411
Print push button 44
printer
redirecting output to 109
printer control characters using E Editor 170
printing
a CPBackup directory 411
compare report in CPBackup 407
E Editor file 134, 141
README.TXT file 550
topics in the PC DOS Viewer 51
problem determination 281
backing up system 314
DOS commands 292
File Update utility 313
memory problems 287
PC DOS Shell 295
Stacker Compression 299
task swapping, PC DOS Shell 296
problem resolutions 281
procedures, online for PC DOS Shell 336
procedures, troubleshooting 299
products, disabilities
IBM AccessDOS 557
IBM Screen Reader 558
KeyGuard 559
Screen Reader 558
products, individuals with disabilities 557
program file, definition of 19
program flow, batch program 106
program groups
adding 348, 349
adding passwords for 349
adding program items to 350, 351
copying program items 351
creating Help messages for 349
deleting 349
deleting program items from 352
rearranging program items 352
program item properties, PC DOS Shell 353,
360
program items
adding passwords for 351,359
adding to program groups 350,351
changing 351
changing properties of 353
copying among program groups 351
creating Help messages for 360
creating startup commands for 350, 354,
355, 356, 357
defining shortcut keys for 351, 358
deleting from program groups 352
group contents, PC DOS Shell 351
preventing switching 362
rearranging 352
program items (continued)
reserving shortcut keys for 362
setting video mode for 361
specifying memory requirements for 360,
361
using a startup directory for 351, 358
Program List 322
area of PC DOS Shell 322
display view, PC DOS Shell 347
programs
attaching to PC DOS Shell 339
Program List view 347
returning to PC DOS Shell from 339
running from PC DOS Shell 338
starting from PC DOS Shell 338
PROMPT command 67
Properties command, PC DOS Shell 353, 362
properties in the PC DOS Shell 353, 362
advanced 360
application shortcut keys 358
CALL command in startup commands 354
Help messages for program items 360
memory requirements for programs 360,
361
password for program items 359
pause after program exit 359
program switching 362
reserved shortcut keys 362
startup commands 354
startup directory for program items 358
video mode 361
protection
against file deletions 247, 267
AutoProtect for Stacker 299, 452
AutoRecover for Stacker 302
checking compressed disks 453
features of Stacker 451
from computer viruses 367
from viruses, Automated check 363
from viruses, Shield DOS 363
password for Stacker 454
PS/1 systems, installing on 536
purged Undelete file condition 246
Index
587
purging delete protected files 266
push button, PC DOS Viewer
Contents 44
Forward 44
Help 45
Index 44
Previous 44
Print 44
Search 44
Put command (E Editor) 165
Q
QCONFIG command 206, 221
QEMM Stealth and Stacker 464
QEMM386 226
QIC format for tapes 418
QIC tape drives supported 415
quick format 76
Quick optimization for Stacker 449
quitting
an E Editor file 137
PC DOS Shell 343
QView 402
R
RAM and Stacker 464
ram switch with EMM386 59
RAM within page frame 291
RAMBoost
advanced features 214
changing memory usage of a block 215
comparing memory types 219
configuration file 217
configuring 208
configuring with PCMCIA 528
considerations before configuring 208
expanded memory (EMS or EEMS) 221
extended memory (XMS) 220
extended memory specification 221
freeing conventional DOS memory 219
options editor 216
overview 206
RAMSETUP command 208
588
PC DOS User's Guide
RAM Boost (continued)
requirements for 207
reserved memory area 219
system requirements 207
upper memory blocks 219
upper memory editor function keys 215
upper memory usage editor 214
using with EMM386 options 216
XMS 221
RAMBOOST.INI file 217, 223
RAMDrive device driver 238
RAMDRIVE.SYS 238
RAMSETUP.INI file 209,212
RD (remove directory) command 36
read errors while optimizing 308
read-only file attribute 30
read-only password, Stacker 454
read/write password, Stacker 454
README.TXT file 281,550
README.XDF file 554
rebooting
CTRL+ALT+DEL 66
without system file commands 54
rebuilding configuration, Stacker 303, 305
recognition tips for PenDOS 498
recompressing a disk, Stacker 449, 451, 457
recovered Undelete file condition 246
recovering
allocation units 232
deleted data 241
deleted files 26, 28, 245
redirected drives 178
redirecting
command input or output 109
drives, InterLnk 182
input and output 109
input and output of commands 126
redirection character
combining commands with 113
defined 109
for input or output 109
output to file or printer 109
redirecting command input 110
redirection characters 113
reference chart of user levels
(CPBackup) 390
reflowing
any position (ALT +P) using E Editor 156
marked area (ALT +R) using E Editor 154,
155
marked block of text (ALT +R) 154
paragraph (ALT +P) 154
text in box 164
reformatting a hard disk 315
REM command 7, 103, 210
remapping
drives for File Update 200
remarks in batch programs 103
remote location, File Update 198
removable Stacker drives
mounted not swapped l (NS) 461
mounted replaced (RP) 461
mounting 442
removing
attributes 300
incorrect version of INTERLNK 286
passwords 455
Setup comment lines 7
Stacker drives 446
viruses when detected 376
write protection 299, 301
write-protection 452
. RENAME command 26
renaming
a directory 40
a disk 79
a file 26
Reorder command (PC DOS Shell) 352
repair utilities, disk
running with Stacker 301
repairing
CHECK errors 453
Stacker drives 301
uncompressed drive 309
repartitioning hard disk 282
replace mode 143
replaceable
drives, defining for Stacker 461
parameters 105
parameters in macros 124, 125
parameters, PC DOS Shell 355, 357
replacing text using E Editor 160
Report tool, Stacker 439
requirement, hard disk space 281
rerunning Setup 544
reserve shortcut keys (PC DOS Shell) 362
reserved memory area 219
resetting tape drive defaults 420
restarting
CTRL+ALT +DEL 66
without system file commands 54
restarting problem 283
restore a file 292
RESTORE command 293
restoring
an E Editor line 134, 145
data in CPBackup 409, 410
deleted files 28
disks 78
DOS system files 304
. previous version of DOS 547
Stacker header 299
viewing overwrite warning 410
reviewing virus information logs 371
REXX commands 46
REXX Language Support for DOS 11
ROM within page frame 291
root directory 32, 53
running 54
CHKDSK on Stacker drive 299
programs from PC DOS Shell 338
system without system commands 54
S
safe format 75
Save command (E Editor) 139
Save Setup, CPBackup 404
SAVEHDR* files, Stacker 299
saving
DOS Key macro 123
Index
589
saving (continued)
E Editor file and quitting (F4) 134, 137,
139
edited E Editor files (F2) 134, 139
scanning disk for available clusters 258
Schedule Backups command 406
Scheduler, Central Point 275
scheduling an unattended backup 406, 407
screen
attributes and colors, changing 68
colors for the PC DOS Shell 344
initial, PC DOS Viewer 43
modes for PC DOS Shell 344
scroll bars, PC DOS Shell 332
Scroll Lock (SL), PenDOS modifier key 489
SCSI
See Small Computer System Interface
SCSI drives supported 416
SCSI tape directory 393
SDEFRAG command 306
Search command, PC DOS Shell 339
Search push button 44
searching
for all text 159
for files in reduced search time 233
for files using PC DOS Shell 339
for text to replace 160
for text using E Editor 157, 160
for the PC DOS Viewer index topics 50
for the PC DOS Viewer topics 49
section, definition of 73
sectors defined
security software 382
selected files, monitoring compression 475
selecting
displays 324
E Editor text 148
files manually in CPBackup 399
PC DOS Shell 320
Scheduler options 280
Undelete files 249
using a mouse 5, 325
with a mouse 324
with keyboard 326.
590
PC DOS User's Guide
send output (» 109
sentence mark (E Editor) 150
server volume display 401
server, definition of 177
servo-written tapes 417
SET command 67,239,286
setting
compression level, Stacker 448, 449
margins using E Editor 146
passwords for Stacker 454
Stacker up 431
system time and date 5
TEMP before using a pipe 111
setting active partition 91
setting up PCMGIA 505
SETUP
See a/so Installation
IA switch 540
IE switch 295, 545
IU switch 9
command syntax for 8
new features of 5
reasons for not running 281
rerunning 544
switches for installation 7
SETUP command (Stacker) 442
. Setup diskettes
backing up 552
using DOS commands 551
viewing contents of 554
setup files in CPBackup 403
contents of 404
description 405
loading 405
preconfigured 405
preconfigured in CPBackup 403
saving 405
setup files, CPBackup 404
setup for Stacker
express or custom 432
getting help on 432
recovering from interrupted 302
running 431
troubleshooting 302
SETVER command 294,314
Shell
See PC DOS Shell
SHELL command 290
Shield DOS 363
shift marked text
to the left (ALT+F7) 155
to the right (ALT+F8) 155
SHIFT, PenDOS modifier key 489
shortcut keys 327
for starting program items 351, 358
reserving for program items 362
size of environment 290
SL (Scroll Lock), PenDOS modifier key 489
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) 237
smaller, making Stacker drive 456
SMARTDRV
CD-ROM caching 237
controlling size of memory cache 236
double-buffering 237
SMARTDRV command 68,236
SMARTDRV.EXE device driver 237
software for security 382
SORT command 112
sorting
data 112
Undelete file list 248
sound for Stacker 472, 473
source file 25
space character, inserting 487
special commands for batch programs 98
special document format 56, 66
specifying disk capacity 76
speech recognition program 559
speeding up your system 231, 232, 233
splitting a text line in E Editor 143
SRAM Memory Card, PCMCIA 528
SSETUP command (Stacker) 431
STAC command (Stacker) 437
Stacker
assigning for CD-ROM drive 466
creating a bootable diskette 310
installing with PC DOS 427
running disk-repair utilities 301
Stacker (continued)
startup diskette 309, 310
troubleshooting 299
unmounting a drive, DOS 301
using with EMM386 464
Stacker Anywhere
explanation of 443
in memory 445
running 445
using on non-Stacker systems 443
Windows icon 445
STACKER command 300, 442
Stacker command summary 467
Stacker compression
DOS Toolbox 438
DPMS 462
installation of 12
introduction to 427
menu, File Manager 474
OS/2 & DOS version 534
STACVOL files 459
Stacker DOS Toolbox
changing expected compression ratio 458
changing Stacker drive size 456
compressing removable 442
defragmenting a disk 450
defragmenting data 450
optimizing 450, 451
optimizing data 450
recompressing a disk 451
recompressing data 450
tuning 448, 449
uncompressing a disk 447
using the password tool 454
Stacker drive
changing size of 456
creating 441
determining letters of 459, 460
storing 459
unmounting for Windows 445
Stacker Drive Size tool 439
Stacker Optimizer tool 439, 449, 450, 451
Stacker startup diskette 299, 309
for Stacker drives 309
Index
591
Stacker Tuner tool 439
Stacker Windows Toolbox
changing Stacker drive size 457
Check tool 453
compress tool 440
compressing removable 443
Configure tool 457, 476
defragmenting a disk 450
gauges 469,472
minimizing 473
opening 469
optimizing 451
Optimizing tool 450
overview 469
Password tool 455
recompressing data 450,451
tuning 449
Uncompress tool 446
warnings 473
STACKER:EXE 445
STACKER.INI 461
/AUTO switch 466
/BD=drive 467
/0 switch 461
commands in 460
editing using /1 switch 460, 461
syntax for 461
STACKER.INI file 460
STACVOL
do not delete or format file 459
restoring file headers 299
Stacker file 459
stand-alone AntiVirus 365
stand-alone program, virus checking 379
Start Restore command, CPBackup 410
starting
See a/so installation
applications using PenDOS 493
batch programs 99
Central Point Backup 391
Central Point Backup for Windows 385
Central Point Undelete for Windows 242
compare in CPBackup 407
computer if troubleshooting 283
592
PC DOS User's Guide
starting (continued)
DOS by bypassing startup commands 54
DOSKey macro 122
E Editor 137
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 365
IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows 365
IBM Boot Manager 364
PC DOS Shell 321
PCMCIA 503
PenDOS 483
programs from PC DOS Shell 338
Stacker compression 431
system (booting) 364
the E Editor 133
the online documentation viewer 41
Undelete 243
Windows AntiVirus 367
starting the PC DOS Viewer
from OS/2 42
from PC DOS Shell 42
from the DOS Command Prompt 41
from Windows 43
startup commands for program items
creating 354
running batch programs in 354
startup commands, AUTOEXEC. BAT 66
startup commands, bypassing 54
startup directory for program items 351, 358
startup diskette 555
See a/so system diskette
for PC DOS 78
for Stacker 310
startup menu 60
startup problems, Stacker 303
status gauge, backup (Stacker) 471
status line, PC DOS Shell 323
status of file's clusters 245
status, mounting
RP 461
SW 461
stopping
batch program 102
batch program permanently 100
stored DOSKey commands 117
strategies for backing up 421
subdirectories, copying 39
SUBMENU command 60
SUBST command 284
summary of
DOSKey character redirection 126
DOS Key editing keys 116
DOSKey movement keys 119
.Super VGA color display 295
Super VGA monochrome display 295
surface scan, Stacker 308
switch
/-DPMS for Stacker 463
/? for command syntax 47
/A for Setup 540, 542
/B for COPY 312
/C for Setup 7
/E for Setup 295,545
/EMS for Stacker 463
/F for CHKDSK 232
/F for Stacker CHECK 453
/1 for E Editor 460
/int15 for HIMEM.SYS 289
/P for DIR 34
/Ofor Setup 9
/R for Stacker 309
IT for Setup 9, 541
/U for FORMAT 553
/U for XDF 551
/UMB for Stacker 463
/W for Setup 9
U 9
switches for Setup program 8
switching, text/graphics modes 344
symbols used in compare in CPBackup
syntax
Assembler 164
C language 164
Pascal 164
syntax directed E Editor features 171
SYS command 79, 304, 538, 539
system
booting using Boot Manager 364
system (continued)
booting using dual boot 365
requirements for RAM Boost 207
setting system time and date 5
speeding up using BUFFERS 235
using data compression 381
using security software 382
system diskette
creating 78
making backup of ·303
using in an emergency 555
using Setup Diskette for 54
system file
attributes of 30
bypassing 54
configuration 53
modifications by Setup 6
system files
backing up 397
checking for viruses 374
restoring for DOS 304
viewing during installation 548
when formatting a disk 78
SYSTEM.INI file (Windows) 286
T
409
table of contents 45
tablet, aligning 497
taking input «) 109
tap gesture for PenDOS 491
tape
making a backup 393
using password-protection, CPBackup
tape (CPBackup)
address table 420
certified 417
controller cards supported 419
extra length tapes in Backup 417
formats, OIC vs CPS 418
initialized 417
resetting defaults 420
servo-written 417
volume tape catalog 421
Index
393
593
tape backup with Stacker 431
tape controller cards address table 420
tape information (CPBackup) 415
tapes supported, CPBackup
non-SCSI . 417
QIC drives 415
SCSI 416
target file 25
task swapping, PC DOS Shell 296, 341
TEMP environment variable 111, 239
template, definition of 127
terminate-and-stay resident (TSR) program
defragmenter 233
RAM Drive 238
SMARTDRV 236
testing
batch programs 101
testing backup speed 387
text
box in PC DOS Shell 330
color, changing 68
copying, E Editor (ALT +C) 152
deletions, E Editor (ALT +0) 151
file extensions 20
file, creating 137
format, changing 68
marking in E Editor 150
modes for entering 143
text editor
comparison to word processor 172
DOS 5.0 Editor 132
E Editor 131,132
Edlin Editor 132
special document format 56, 66
text mode
appearance of cursor 324
text mode, PC DOS Shell
changing screen modes in the PC DOS
Shell 344
setting for program items 361
text, selecting for PenDOS 494
time table, formatting tapes in Backup 418
tips, troubleshooting , 299
594
PC DOS User's Guide
Token Ring speed, PCMCIA 507
Toolbox, Stacker DOS
changing expected compression ratio 458
changing Stacker drive size 456
compressing removable 442
defragmenting a disk 450
defragmenting data 450
Optimize tool 450
optimizing 451
optimizing data 450
Password tool 454
recompressing a disk 450, '451
recompressing data 450
tuning 448, 449
uncompressing a disk 447
Toolbox, Stacker Windows
changing Stacker drive size 457
Check tool 453
compress tool 440
compressing removable 443
Configure tool 457, 476
defragmenting a disk 450
gauges 469, 472, 473
minimizing 473
opening 469
Optimize tool 450
optimizing 451
overview 469
Password tool 455
recompressing data 450, 451
tuning 449
Uncompress tool 446
warnings 473
tools
See optional tools
tools, Stacker
change expected compression ratio 458
check 453
compress 440
configure Stacker drive size 456
configure swap file settings 476
optimize 449
password 454
report 475
tools, Stacker (continued)
tuning 447
uncompress 446
topics in the PC DOS Viewer 44
linking to 49
printing 51
searching for 49
tracks defined 73
transferring
updated files to diskette 196
updated files to other location 199
updated files to remote location 196
TREE command 189
tree, directory 32
troubleshooting 314
cannot access compressed data 304
computer won't startup 303
CPBackup confidence test 386
DOS commands 292
drive light on, CPBackup 393, 411
File Update utility 313
interrupted Stacker Setup 302
memory problems 287
Optimizer errors 308
PC DOS 281
PC DOS Shell 295
reboot during SDEFRAG 306
Stacker Compression 299
startup problems 303
unable to repair FATs 307
write-protected Stacker drive 305
TSR programs 68
tuning compression, Stacker 447
turning off
flash, Stacker 473
sound, Stacker 473
turning on
flash, Stacker 472
sound for Stacker 472,473
typing
control impairment 559
multiple commands on one line 116
U
UMB
See upper memory blocks
UMB, Stacker 462
unattended backups 407
Uncompress tool 439, 446
uncompressing a disk, Stacker 446
unconditional format 76
Undelete 241
adding clusters, available (free) 265
adding search groups 257
advanced methods 261
appending deleted data to existing file 262
appending to an existing file 262
automatic file recovery 249
clusters, available (free) 258, 264
creating file from available clusters 262
Delete Sentry method 247
Delete Tracker method 247
deleting search groups 258
DelWatch method 247
directories 252
directory tree and file list 244, 260
File Allocation Table (FAT) 258
file conditions 245
file information 248
files in deleted directories 252
finding deleted files 254
finding files in a deleted directory 252
free clusters, scanning 258
function keys 245
manual file recovery 261
NetWare Salvage method 247
network files 252
overwritten files 245,250, 267, 270
protection methods 247
purging files 266
renaming existing files 250
scanning a disk for deleted dElta 258
scanning for data type 259.
selecting files 249
setting scan range 260
showing existing files 260
sorting the file list 248
Index
595
Undelete (continued)
starting 243
starting cluster number 263
undeleting a file 252
undeleting a file automatically 250
undeleting a file' manually 261
undeleting a file to another drive 250
using search groups 257
viewing available clusters 262
without (DOS delete) protection 247
UNDELETE command 26, 28, 243, 292
Undelete for DOS 241
Undelete for Windows 242
Undelete for Windows, Central Point 11
undeleting
files automatically 250
files manually 261
files to another drive 250
restore a DOS file 292
Undo command (E Editor) 145
Undo gesture for PenDOS 491
UNFORMAT command 78
unfragmented files 233
uninstalling 547
universal gestures, defined 490
unloading
Central Point Scheduler 280
unmarking text, E Editor (ALT +U) 150
unmounting Stacker drives
disk-repair utilities 301
DOS 301
Windows 445
unnamed file in E Editor 138
UNPACK2 command 555
unpacking a Setup file 555
updating Stacker drives 433
upgrading across a LAN 543
upgrading Stacker 433
getting the best compression 433
upper memory
loading Stacker high 462
Upper Memory Area 290
upper memory blocks (UMB) 219, 291, 462
596
PC DOS User's Guide
upper memory usage editor
RAM Boost 214
User Level command in CPBackup
user level, CPBackup
changing 389
passwords 389
reference chart 390
using PC DOS's version
389
V
values for PCMCIA Advanced Setup 506
values, ASCII (PenDOS) 489
variable,environment 111
variations of characters for PenDOS , 499
version of DOS 294
version table for SETVER 294
VERV.VDB 379
VGA color display 295
VGA files 296
VGA monochrome display 295
video display 295
video mode options (PC DOS Shell) 361
VIEW command 41
viewing
client infomation, PCMCIA 515
disk partition' data 85
disk volume label and serial number 80
file attributes 30
files in CPBackup 402
list of stored DOS Key commands 117
other DOSKey commands in the list 118
PC DOS Viewer screen, initial 43
PCM Card List, PCMCIA 515
previous or next command 117
README.TXT file 550
README.XDF file 554
system files during install 16
system files during installation 548
the first or last DOSKey command 118
using MORE command 111
views (screen) of PC DOS Shell 320
VIRSIG.LST 379
Virtual Control Program Interface (VCPI) 462
virus characteristics 368
virus protection methods
Automated check 363
Shield DOS 363
viruses
protection against 367
what to do if detected 363
visual impairment 557,558.
VOL command 80
volume label 80
creating 79, 80
defined 79
specifying when 'formatting a disk 76
volume serial number 80
assigned when formatting a disk 77
defined 79
volume tape catalog explained 421
VTC file (CPBackup) 421
W
warning flash, Stacker 472
warnings, CPBackup 386,392,393
warnings, Stacker 473
WAV files for stacker 473
wildcard 22, 35
WIN.lNI file 286
Windows
building permanent swap file 476
Central Point Backup 12
Central Point Undelete 241, 243
Central Point Undelete for Windows 242
enhanced mode 237
File Manager Stacker Menu 474
help for Stacker 430
IBM AntiVirus/DOS 11,367
PC DOS optional tools 9
preferences gauges 473
starting the PC DOS Viewer from 43
SYSTEM.INI file 286 .
using with File Update 190
WIN.INI file 286
with Central Point Backup 385
with PC DOS Stacker 427
with Stacker compression 385
Windows permanent swap file 476
word mark (E Editor) 150
word wrap 143
WPSF
See Windows permanent swap file
write errors while optimizing 308
write protection, Stacker 299, 301
write-protected Stacker drive 305
write-protection, Stacker 452
writing area 486
Writing Window
button for 485
cancelling, not secding characters 487
clearing characters 487
closing Writing Window 487
displaying 485, 486, 489
editing characters in 490
x
XCOPY command 38
XDF command 551,553,554
XDF-format
backing up diskettes 552
copying diskettes 552
formatting again 553
installing 550
XDF-formatted diskettes 554
XDFCOPY command 551, 552
XGA color display 295
XGA monochrome display 295
XMS extended memory 289
XMS Memory options (PC DOS Shell)
Index
361
597
® IBM is a registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation
---- -- -----
--
.:...::.: == ';' == Cl!>
S83G-9260-00
© IBM Corp. 1995
International Business
Machines Corporation
All Rights Reserved
*
83G9260
Printed on Recycled Paper
1111I11111 H
P83G9260
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:05:28 09:08:44-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:05:28 09:12:11-07:00 Metadata Date : 2013:05:28 09:12:11-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:3e924b11-e072-984a-aa95-ae5af6697b7f Instance ID : uuid:64419773-9f9c-a242-a4e9-ee8f63f2b472 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 625EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools